Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Command Reference
2004
February 2003
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND
MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the
time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D
Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University
(logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD
Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet,
EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG,
ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The
AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads,
Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk
Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner
Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit,
DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax
ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint,
Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents
Introduction .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
2
2
5
6
7
16
18
19
20
26
27
27
29
30
31
32
35
35
36
36
37
39
40
iii
3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . .
DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . .
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
ADCNAVIGATE
. . . . . . . . . .
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . .
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . . .
Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
ARC. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAY Command Line . . . . . . . . .
ARX. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Assistance Settings Dialog Box . . . .
ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTDEF. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . .
ATTDEF Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
ATTEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . . . . .
ATTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BACKGROUND
. . . . . . . . . .
Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
. 45
. 49
. 52
. 53
. 55
. 56
. 57
. 58
. 60
. 61
. 64
. 66
. 67
. 72
. 75
. 76
. 78
. 79
. 80
. 80
. 82
. 84
. 85
. 86
. 86
. 91
. 91
. 93
. 94
. 95
. 95
. 97
. 97
. 100
.101
BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box . . . . . .
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . . . . . . .
BHATCH Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
BLIPMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY Command Line . . . . . . . . .
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Syntax of Expressions . . . . . .
Formatting Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Angles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoCAD System Variables . . . . . . .
Converting Units of Measurement . . . . . . .
Using Standard Numeric Functions. . . . . . .
Calculating a Vector from Two Points . . . . . .
Calculating the Length of a Vector . . . . . . .
Obtaining a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . .
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions
Converting Points between UCS and WCS . . . .
Calculating a Point on a Line . . . . . . . .
Rotating a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . .
Obtaining an Intersection Point . . . . . . . .
Calculating a Distance . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining an Angle. . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . .
Using Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . .
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 102
102
103
105
. 106
107
116
117
. 121
. 122
122
124
. 126
. 127
. 127
127
128
. 129
. 131
. 133
. 135
135
136
137
137
139
139
140
140
141
143
143
143
144
145
146
146
147
147
149
149
150
152
. 153
. 154
Contents
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . .
Check Standards Dialog Box . . . .
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . .
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . .
COLOR Command Line. . . . . .
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . .
CONE . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . .
COPY . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . .
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . .
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . .
COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . .
Customize Dialog Box . . . . . .
New Toolbar Dialog Box . . . . .
Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . .
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . .
DBCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . .
DBCONNECT . . . . . . . . .
dbConnect Manager . . . . . . .
Data View Window . . . . . . .
Query Editor . . . . . . . . .
Column Values Dialog Box. . . . .
Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . .
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box . .
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . .
Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . .
Export Template Set Dialog Box . . .
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Format Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Import Query Set Dialog Box . . . .
Import Template Set Dialog Box . . .
Label Template Dialog Box . . . . .
Label Template Properties Dialog Box .
Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . .
vi
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.158
.163
. 163
.164
.166
.168
.169
.169
. 169
. 173
.175
.175
.178
.179
.180
.182
.183
.183
.184
.185
.185
. 185
. 193
. 193
.195
.196
.201
.201
. 202
. 207
. 215
. 222
. 222
. 225
. 225
. 227
. 228
. 229
. 229
. 230
. 230
. 231
. 231
. 233
. 234
Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Link Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . .
New Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New Query Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Database Object Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Select a Data Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . .
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDVPOINT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIM and DIM1
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMANGULAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMOVERRIDE
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREASSOCIATE
. . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREGEN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Style Manager. . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . .
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . .
DIMSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
237
238
239
240
240
241
241
242
243
243
244
. 246
. 246
. 247
248
248
. 249
249
. 250
250
. 252
. 252
. 253
. 255
. 258
. 261
. 263
. 264
. 266
. 268
. 269
. 271
. 276
. 278
. 279
. 282
. 284
. 285
285
288
288
308
309
. 312
. 314
vii
DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . .
DONUT. . . . . . . . . .
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . .
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . .
DSETTINGS. . . . . . . . .
Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . .
DSVIEWER . . . . . . . . .
Aerial View Window . . . . . .
DVIEW . . . . . . . . . .
DWGPROPS
. . . . . . . .
Drawing Properties Dialog Box . .
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . .
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . .
EATTEXT . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Extraction Wizard . . .
EDGE . . . . . . . . . .
EDGESURF . . . . . . . . .
ELEV . . . . . . . . . .
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . .
Arc . . . . . . . . . . .
ERASE . . . . . . . . . .
ETRANSMIT
. . . . . . . .
Create Transmittal Dialog Box. . .
Password Dialog Box . . . . . .
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . .
EXPORT
. . . . . . . . .
EXTEND . . . . . . . . .
EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . .
FILL . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLET . . . . . . . . . .
FILTER . . . . . . . . . .
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box .
FIND . . . . . . . . . .
Find and Replace Dialog Box . . .
Find and Replace Options Dialog Box
FOG. . . . . . . . . . .
Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box . . . .
GOTOURL . . . . . . . . .
GRAPHSCR . . . . . . . . .
GRID . . . . . . . . . .
GROUP . . . . . . . . . .
Object Grouping Dialog Box . . .
Order Group Dialog Box . . . .
GROUP Command Line. . . . .
viii
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.314
.316
.316
.317
.318
. 318
.328
. 328
.331
.342
. 342
.347
.349
. 349
.351
. 351
.355
.357
.358
.359
. 360
.362
.363
. 363
. 368
.368
.370
.371
.374
.377
.377
.382
. 383
.386
. 386
. 389
.389
. 390
.393
.393
.393
.394
. 395
. 398
. 399
HATCH
. . . . . . . . .
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . .
Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . .
HATCHEDIT Command Line . .
HELP . . . . . . . . . .
HIDE . . . . . . . . . .
HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . .
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box .
HYPERLINK . . . . . . . .
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . .
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . .
Select Place in Document Dialog Box
HYPERLINK Command Line . . .
HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . .
ID . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . .
Image Manager . . . . . . .
IMAGE Command Line . . . .
IMAGEADJUST
. . . . . . .
Image Adjust Dialog Box . . . .
IMAGEADJUST Command Line . .
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . .
Image Dialog Box . . . . . .
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . .
IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . .
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . .
IMPORT . . . . . . . . .
INSERT . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Dialog Box . . . . . .
INSERT Command Line . . . .
INSERTOBJ. . . . . . . . .
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . .
INTERFERE. . . . . . . . .
INTERSECT
. . . . . . . .
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . .
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . .
JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . .
LAYER . . . . . . . . . .
Layer Properties Manager . . . .
Named Layer Filters Dialog Box . .
Save Layer States Dialog Box . . .
Layer States Manager . . . . .
Select Linetype Dialog Box . . .
Lineweight Dialog Box. . . . .
LAYER Command Line . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
. 403
. 408
408
410
. 411
. 412
. 413
414
. 416
416
419
419
420
. 421
. 423
. 423
424
427
. 430
431
432
. 433
434
. 436
. 438
. 439
. 440
. 440
441
442
. 448
448
. 450
. 451
. 453
. 455
. 455
. 457
457
464
466
467
468
468
469
ix
LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . .
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . .
LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . .
Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . .
LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . .
Layer Translator . . . . . . . .
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . .
LEADER. . . . . . . . . . .
LENGTHEN. . . . . . . . . .
LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box .
New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box. .
North Location Dialog Box. . . . .
Shadow Options Dialog Box . . . .
Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box . . .
Geographic Location Dialog Box . . .
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE
. . . . . . . . . . .
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . .
Linetype Manager . . . . . . .
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box .
LINETYPE Command Line . . . . .
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . .
LSEDIT . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape Edit Dialog Box . . . . .
LSLIB . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape Library Dialog Box . . . .
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box . .
LSNEW . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape New Dialog Box. . . . .
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . .
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . .
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . .
LWEIGHT Command Line . . . . .
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . .
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . .
Property Settings Dialog Box . . . .
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.475
.475
.475
.477
. 478
.478
. 478
. 480
. 481
.482
.486
.489
. 489
. 492
. 494
. 496
. 498
. 499
. 500
. 501
.502
.504
.506
. 506
. 509
. 510
.513
.514
.514
.515
.515
. 516
.517
. 517
. 518
.520
. 520
.522
.523
. 523
. 525
.527
.531
. 531
MATLIB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Materials Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box. . . . . . 535
Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box . . . . . . 536
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
MENULOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 540
MENULOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MENUUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
MIRROR3D
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 556
MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 569
Element Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Multiline Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 570
MODEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MREDO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
MSLIDE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Multiline Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Indents and Tabs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
. . . . . . . . . . . . Stack Properties Dialog Box582
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 584
MTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special Characters . . . 589
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
MVIEW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Create New Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 605
Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
NEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Contents
xi
OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
OLE Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . 621
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 628
Partial Open Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
OPEN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Color Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 667
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 667
Add Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Change Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
PAGESETUP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 682
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) . 682
PAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
PAN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Partial Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
PARTIALOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
PARTIALOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTEORIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
xii
Contents
PLOT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot)
Plot Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . .
PLOT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTAMP Command Line. . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTYLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . .
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . .
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Properties of Objects. . . . . . . . . .
Properties Palette with No Objects Selected . . . . .
3D Orbit View Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Face Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Solid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arc Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Definition Properties . . . . . . . . .
Block Reference Properties . . . . . . . . . .
Body Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circle Properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ellipse Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Reference Properties . . . . . . . . .
Hatch Properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leader Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiline Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
. 719
719
728
728
729
731
. 735
736
738
739
742
. 744
745
746
747
. 747
747
748
761
761
762
. 763
. 763
. 765
. 766
. 767
769
770
771
773
774
774
775
776
777
778
778
779
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
xiii
xiv
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
785
786
787
787
788
789
790
790
791
791
792
792
793
794
795
796
797
.798
.798
. 798
. 799
.799
.800
. 801
. 805
. 806
. 807
.808
. 808
.809
. 809
. 811
.813
.814
. 816
.819
.820
.820
. 821
.824
.824
.825
.825
RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . .
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Edit Dialog Box. . . . . . . .
REFEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . .
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . .
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . .
REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . .
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
RENAME Command Line . . . . . . . .
RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . .
Render Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Render Window . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Render Options Dialog Box . . . .
RENDSCR . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLAY
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Specifications Dialog Box. . . . . .
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . .
REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box .
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box .
New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box . .
New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box . .
New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box . .
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index Dialog Box . .
Attach by Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . .
RMLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map Markup Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
RMLIN Command Line . . . . . . . .
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE3D. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
. 826
. 828
. 828
. 829
. 830
. 830
. 832
832
835
. 837
. 838
. 839
. 840
. 841
. 842
842
. 843
843
844
. 844
845
847
849
. 851
. 852
852
. 854
. 854
. 856
. 858
. 860
860
862
865
868
869
871
873
874
. 875
875
876
. 877
. 878
xv
RPREF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rendering Preferences Dialog Box . . .
Render Options Dialog Box . . . . .
Photo Real Render Options Dialog Box . .
Photo Raytrace Render Options Dialog Box
File Output Configuration Dialog Box . .
RSCRIPT
. . . . . . . . . . .
RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save to Earlier Versions . . . . . . .
Template Description Dialog Box . . . .
Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
SAVEAS Command Line . . . . . .
SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Image Dialog Box . . . . . . .
TGA Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
TIFF Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCALETEXT
. . . . . . . . . .
SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scenes Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
New Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Modify Scene Dialog Box . . . . . .
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .
SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . .
Security Options Dialog Box . . . . .
Confirm Password Dialog Box . . . . .
Advanced Options Dialog Box. . . . .
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETIDROPHANDLER . . . . . . . .
SETUV . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box . .
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box.
Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box .
Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box . .
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . .
SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHOWMAT . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.882
882
885
886
888
891
.893
.893
.897
.897
. 898
. 899
. 899
. 901
.902
. 902
. 904
. 904
.905
.906
.908
. 908
. 909
. 910
.911
.911
.914
. 914
. 916
. 916
.917
.920
.920
. 920
. 922
. 924
. 926
. 927
. 928
.931
.931
.933
.934
.934
.
.
.
.
.
SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . .
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . .
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box. .
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . .
SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLIDEDIT
. . . . . . . . . .
SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . .
SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . .
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . .
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box. . . .
SPHERE
. . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Standards Dialog Box. . . .
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box. . .
STATS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . .
STATUS
. . . . . . . . . . .
STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . .
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . .
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . .
STYLE Command Line . . . . . . .
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . .
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . .
Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . .
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . .
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSWINDOWS. . . . . . . . . .
TABLET
. . . . . . . . . . .
TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Unicode Characters . . . . .
Control Codes and Special Characters . .
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable
TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . .
TIFOUT
. . . . . . . . . . .
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 935
935
936
. 937
. 939
. 943
. 946
. 947
. 948
. 964
. 966
. 974
. 975
975
977
. 978
. 979
. 981
. 988
988
990
. 991
992
. 993
. 995
. 996
. 997
998
1001
1003
1004
1004
1011
1012
1013
1015
1020
1021
1027
1027
1028
1028
1029
1029
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
xvii
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . .
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . .
Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Material Condition Dialog Box . . . .
TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLBAR Command Line . . . . . .
TOOLPALETTES
. . . . . . . . .
View Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . .
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE. . . . . . . .
TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . .
TRAYSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . .
Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . .
TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . .
U . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS Icon Dialog Box. . . . . . . .
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . .
UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . .
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNION . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . .
Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . .
UNITS Command Line . . . . . . .
VBAIDE . . . . . . . . . . . .
VBALOAD . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box
VBAMAN . . . . . . . . . . .
VBA Manager . . . . . . . . . .
VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . .
Macros Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . .
VBA Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
VBARUN Command Line . . . . . .
VBASTMT . . . . . . . . . . .
VBAUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1030
.1031
.1033
.1035
1035
.1036
1038
.1039
.1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
.1045
1046
1047
1051
1051
1060
.1062
1064
.1064
.1069
1070
1071
1074
1075
.1075
.1077
.1078
1081
1081
.1082
1083
.1083
1085
.1086
.1088
.1088
.1089
1090
1090
VIEW . . . . . . . .
View Dialog Box. . . . .
New View Dialog Box . . .
View Details Dialog Box . .
VIEW Command Line . . .
VIEWRES . . . . . . .
VLISP . . . . . . . .
VPCLIP. . . . . . . .
VPLAYER . . . . . . .
VPOINT . . . . . . .
VPORTS . . . . . . .
Viewports Dialog Box . . .
VPORTS Command Line . .
VSLIDE. . . . . . . .
WBLOCK . . . . . . .
Write Block Dialog Box . .
WBLOCK Command Line. .
WEDGE
. . . . . . .
WHOHAS . . . . . . .
WIPEOUT . . . . . . .
WMFIN
. . . . . . .
WMFOPTS . . . . . . .
WMF In Options Dialog Box .
WMFOUT . . . . . . .
XATTACH . . . . . . .
External Reference Dialog Box
XBIND . . . . . . . .
Xbind Dialog Box . . . .
XBIND Command Line . .
XCLIP . . . . . . . .
XLINE . . . . . . . .
XOPEN. . . . . . . .
XPLODE . . . . . . .
XREF . . . . . . . .
Xref Manager. . . . . .
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . .
XREF Command Line . . .
ZOOM . . . . . . . .
Zoom Shortcut Menu . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
1090
1091
1093
1094
1095
1098
1099
1099
1100
1102
1104
1104
1108
1112
1113
1113
1115
1116
1118
1119
1120
1125
1125
1125
1127
1127
1130
1131
1131
1132
1135
1137
1138
1140
1141
1143
1145
1149
1153
xix
1155
1161
1235
Appendix D Utilities
Appendix E
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Standard Libraries.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix G Unicode
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1245
.
.
.
.1246
.1246
.1247
. 1247
. .1248
. 1252
. 1252
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1255
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.1256
.1257
.1258
.1264
.1265
.1265
.1267
.1268
.1269
1271
1277
xx
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Standard Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . .
Complex Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . .
PostScript Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts . . . . . . .
List of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts. . .
Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts .
TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometric Characteristic Symbols . . . . . .
Appendix F
.
.
.
.
.1236
.1239
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.1278
.1278
.1280
.1281
Index .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1283
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1284
1284
1285
1285
1286
1286
1287
Contents
xxi
xxii
Introduction
In this chapter
Using AutoCAD
Documentation
alphabetical order.
In addition to the command listings, the Command
Note For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the
Readme file.
Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using
one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN, no further
action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing
additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area
either acts as ENTER or displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behavior in the Options dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:
Select the command from a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command, see appendix A,
Command Aliases.
Introduction
Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, AutoCAD either displays a
dialog box or displays prompts on the command line requesting more
information. Command line prompts are structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] <default option or value>:
The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command or for system variables related to the command. The succeeding
prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and,
when applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a default
option or value in angle brackets. In some cases, AutoCAD determines
default options and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or based on the settings of certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take.
Most command line prompts begin with the word enter, select, or specify.
These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt.
Terminology in command line prompts
If the prompt starts with...
You can...
Select
Enter
Specify
Introduction
You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by rightclicking in the drawing area while the command is active. The options available on the command line appear in the shortcut menu. For information
about how to enable or disable this shortcut menu, see Shortcut Menus in
the Users Guide.
Entering Data on the Command Line
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to)
choosing an option. To do so, enter the text on the command line and press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . However, be aware that when the command line prompt
requests an object name, SPACEBAR inserts a space on the command line
rather than acting as ENTER . This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include
default values, enclosed in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For
example, the POLYGON command displays the following prompt, suggesting
4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:
To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to
specify names. See the table in Filter and Sort the List of Layers in the Users
Guide.
Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing
ENTER or SPACEBAR or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the
Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu.
Typographical Conventions
To orient you to AutoCAD features as they appear on the screen, specific
terms are set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text. Throughout AutoCAD documentation, the following conventions are used.
Typographical conventions
Text element
Example
AutoCAD commands
DASHDOT, STANDARD
Prompts
CTRL + C
command ads_command( )
Introduction
***POP1
For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command, see Command
Aliases.
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that
command.
3D
Creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects
3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects in common geometric
Box
Creates a 3D box polygon mesh.
length
width
Width
Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to
the corner point of the box.
height
angle
3D
Rotation Angle
Reference
Cube
Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
or enter r
Rotation Angle
3D
Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you
enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X
and Y axes.
Reference
Cone
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.
Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
1
3D
top radius
height
base
radius
top diameter = 0
top diameter
height
base diameter
10
3D
Dish
Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Diameter
diameter
Dome
Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
3D
11
Diameter
radius
diameter
Mesh
3
4
N=8
Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines
drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar
to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.
Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4)
Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
1
M=6
2
Pyramid
Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.
Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point
(4) or enter t
apex point
The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramids
apex, top, or ridge line.
12
3D
ridge
points
Apex Point
Ridge
Tetrahedron
Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t
Apex Point
Top
3D
13
top
points
Sphere
3
2
radius
Diameter
diameter
Torus
Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS.
Radius
torus radius
tube
radius
The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.
14
3D
Radius
Diameter
Diameter
torus diameter
tube
diameter
Diameter
3D
15
Wedge
Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face
tapering along the X axis.
Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1)
Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle
height
1
length
The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter
0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane.
width
See Also
See Create 3D Objects in the Users Guide.
DVIEW establishes a viewpoint from anywhere in space.
HIDE temporarily removes lines that would be hidden
by other objects. PLAN provides a convenient means of
viewing the drawing from plan view. RENDER creates a
Commands
3DARRAY
Creates a three-dimensional array
Modify menu: 3D Operation 3D Array
object
selected
columns
rows
16
3DARRAY
3DARRAY
17
Enter y or n, or
objects rotated
See Also
See Create an Array of Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
3DCLIP
Starts the interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Adjust Clipping Planes.
Command line: 3dclip
AutoCAD displays the Adjust Clipping Planes window.
18
3DCLIP
Adjusts only the front clipping plane. The line near the
bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane.
If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On,
you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you
move the line up or down.
Adjust Back
Clipping
Adjusts only the back clipping plane. The line near the
top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane. If a
check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On, you
can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move
the line up or down.
Create Slice
3DCLIP
19
Front Clipping
On
Back Clipping On
Close the Adjust Clipping Planes window by clicking the Close button in the
upper-right corner of the window. Closing the Adjust Clipping Planes window does not turn the clipping planes off. You can rotate the view in 3DORBIT
and still see the effect of the clipping planes. As you rotate the view, different
portions of the objects are clipped as they pass in and out of the clipping
planes.
To turn clipping planes off, right-click in the drawing area and choose More
from the shortcut menu. A check mark in front of Front Clipping On or Back
Clipping On indicates that the clipping plane is on. Choose the option that
you want to turn off. Or, choose More Adjust Clipping Planes from the
shortcut menu. Right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window, and ensure
that the Front Clipping On and Back Clipping On options arent checked.
See Also
See Adjust Clipping Planes (3D Orbit) in the Users Guide.
3DCONFIG
Provides a command-line interface to the 3D graphics systems configuration settings
If you enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt, the following prompt is displayed on the command line:
Enter option: [Adaptive degradation/Dynamic tessellation/Render options/
Geometry/acceLeration/eXit] <Adaptive degradation>: Enter the configuration
you want to change or press ENTER to change adaptive degradation settings.
You will stay in the 3DCONFIG command until you enter eXit or press ESC.
20
3DCONFIG
Adaptive Degradation
Specifies the display options to which the view can degrade to maintain the
speed of the view manipulation. For example, if a large drawing is currently
Gouraud shaded, you can select Wireframe to allow the drawing to degrade
to a wireframe representation of the view.
You can turn on one or more than one of the available options. If more than
one option is turned on, the display changes to the most detailed option first
and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option.
Configure: Adaptive Degradation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want adaptive degradation
turned on or off
If Adaptive Degradation is turned on, you can specify the type. If no type is
specified, then no degradation will occur.
Current display options: Wireframe Bounding Box
Enter option [Flat shaded/Wireframe/Bounding box/Maintain speed fps/eXit]
<Flat shaded>: Specify the type of adaptive degradation you want to use
Configure: Flat shaded
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want flat-shaded display
turned on or off
Configure: Wireframe
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want wireframe display
turned on or off
Configure: Bounding box
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want bounding box display
turned on or off
Configure: Maintain speed fps
Enter speed <5>: Enter a value between 1 and 60 to adjust the frame rate
Flat Shaded
Wireframe
Bounding Box
Maintain Speed
FPS
3DCONFIG
21
Dynamic Tesselation
Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing.
AutoCAD draws objects using many short lines (or triangles when drawing
spheres). These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing
appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines.
Configure: Dynamic tessellation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want dynamic tessellation
turned on or off
If Dynamic Tessellation is turned on, you can specify the number of surface
tessellations, curve tessellations, or tessellations to cache.
Configure: Dynamic tessellation
Enter option [Surface tessellation/Curve tessellation/Tessellations to cache/eXit]
<Surface tessellations>: Specify the type of dynamic tessellation you want to use
Configure: Surface tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Curve tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Tessellations to cache
Enter number of tessellations to cache <3>: Enter a value between 1 and 10
Surface
Tessellation
Curve
Tessellation
Number of
Tessellations to
Cache
22
3DCONFIG
Render Options
Makes settings available for enhancing the display of lights, materials, textures, and transparency in 3D views. This includes objects in the 3D Orbit
view and objects shaded using the SHADEMODE command.
Configure: Render options
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want to turn on render options
Configure: Render options
Enter option [Lights/Materials/eXit] <Lights>: Specify whether you want to
configure lights or materials
Configure: Lights
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want lights turned on or off
Configure: Materials
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want materials turned on or
off
If Render Options is turned on, you can specify if you want lights and materials turned on or off.
Lights
Enable Materials
Configure: Textures
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want textures turned on or off
Configure: Transparency
Enter mode [Low/Medium/High] <Low>: Select a transparency level
If Materials is turned on, you can also configure textures and transparency.
3DCONFIG
23
Enable Textures
Transparency
Geometry
Determines how to display isolines in 3D and whether to display back faces
in 3D.
Configure: Geometry
Enter option [Isolines on top/Discard backfaces] <Isolines on top>: Specify an
option to configure
Configure: Isolines on top
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want isolines on top
Configure: Discard backfaces
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want back faces to be
discarded
24
Isolines on Top
Discard Back
Faces
3DCONFIG
Acceleration
Specifies whether you want to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D.
Configure: Acceleration
Enter option [Hardware/Software/eXit] <Hardware>: Specify whether you want
to configure hardware or software
Configure: Hardware
Enter option [Driver name/Geometry acceleration/Antialias lines/eXit] <Driver
name>: Specify an option to configure
Available drivers: wopengl8.hdi
Enter driver name <wopengl8.hdi>: Enter a driver name
Configure: Geometry acceleration
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want geometry acceleration
turned on or off
Configure: Antialias lines
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want anti-alias lines turned
on or off
If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration
and anti-alias lines are turned on or off.
Hardware
Software
Geometry
Acceleration
3DCONFIG
25
Exit
Exits the 3DCONFIG command.
3DCORBIT
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to set the objects in the 3D view into
continuous motion
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Continuous Orbit.
Command line: 3dcorbit
3DCORBIT changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines encir-
cling it. Click in the drawing area and drag the pointing device in any
direction to start the objects moving in the direction that youre dragging.
Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their
orbit in the direction that you specified. The speed of the cursor movement
determines the speed at which the objects spin.
You can change the direction of the continuous orbit by clicking and
dragging again. You can also change the display of the continuous orbit by
right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing an option from the shortcut
menu. For example, you can choose Visual Aids Grid to add a grid to the
view without exiting Continuous Orbit.
See Also
See Use 3D Orbit Commands in the Users Guide.
26
3DCORBIT
3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
3DDISTANCE simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the objects
or farther away. Unlike 3DZOOM, 3DDISTANCE does not exaggerate the per-
spective with which you view the objects or make them appear distorted.
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Adjust Distance.
Command line: 3ddistance
3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one
pointing down. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of
the screen moves the camera closer to the objects, making them appear
larger. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the
screen moves the camera away from the objects, making them appear
smaller.
See Also
See Specify 3D Views Interactively (3D Orbit) in the Users Guide.
3DFACE
Creates a three-dimensional face
3DFACE creates a three- or four-sided surface anywhere in 3D space. You can
specify different Z coordinate values for each corner point of a 3D face, but
if you do, the 3D face cannot be extruded. 3DFACE differs from SOLID, which
creates a three- or four-sided surface that is parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and cannot use different Z coordinate values for each
corner point. Also, 3DFACE creates a surface that is not filled in; SOLID creates
a filled-in surface.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces 3D Face
Command line: 3dface
3DDISTANCE
27
Invisible
visible edges
invisible edges
5
6
4
ENTER
Specify fourth point or [Invisible] <create three-sided face>: Specify a point (4),
enter i, or press ENTER
3
1
2
AutoCAD repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts until you press
ENTER . Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish
entering points, press ENTER .
See Also
Commands
28
3DFACE
System Variables
faces.
3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces 3D mesh
Command line: 3dmesh
Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Enter size of mesh in N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Note 3DMESH is designed primarily for programmers. Other users should use
M
the 3D command.
AutoCAD defines a polygon mesh by a matrix, the size of which is determined by M and N size values. M N equals the number of vertices that you
must specify.
Specify location for vertex (0, 0): Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate
AutoCAD defines the location of each vertex in the mesh by m and n, the row
and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0).
You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before
specifying vertices in row m + 1.
Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a
mesh depends on the position of its vertices.
open mesh
3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You
can close a mesh with PEDIT.
See Also
See Construct Meshes for Smooth Shading in the Users Guide.
closed mesh
3DMESH
29
Commands
3DORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
3DORBIT enables you to manipulate the view of 3D objects by clicking and
do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, choose
Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the System tab. On the System
tab under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.
View menu: 3D Orbit
Command line: 3dorbit, 3do
3DORBIT activates a 3D view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate
system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS
appears in the 3D Orbit view.
The 3D Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four
quadrants by smaller circles. When 3DORBIT is active, the target of the view
stays stationary and the camera location, or point of view, moves around the
target. The center of the arcball, not the center of the objects youre
viewing, is the target point.
Note You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active.
30
3DORBIT
Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor
icon, indicating the direction in which the view rotates.
While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options
from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing
buttons on the 3D Orbit toolbar. See 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu on page 32.
Cursor Icons
View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor
as follows:
Sphere Encircled
by Two Lines
Circular Arrow
Horizontal Ellipse
When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a
horizontal ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of
these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y
axis through the middle of the arcball.
Vertical Ellipse
When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical
ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these
points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis
through the middle of the arcball.
3DORBIT
31
Pan
Moves objects in the view horizontally and vertically. See 3DPAN.
Zoom
Simulates the effect of a cameras zoom lens. See 3DZOOM.
Orbit
Returns the view to Orbit mode after use of the other menu commands, such
as Zoom, Pan, or Continuous Orbit.
More
Accesses one of the following view options:
32
Adjust Distance
Swivel Camera
Continuous Orbit
Zoom Window
Zoom Extents
Orbit Maintains Z
3DORBIT
Orbit Uses
AutoTarget
Adjust Clipping
Planes
Front Clipping
On
Back Clipping On
Projection
Provides the projection options. A check mark displayed in front of an option
indicates that the option is selected.
Parallel
Perspective
Shading Modes
Provides methods for shading objects.
Wireframe
Hidden
Flat Shaded
3DORBIT
33
Gouraud Shaded
Flat Shaded,
Edges On
Gouraud Shaded,
Edges On
Visual Aids
Provides aids to visualizing the objects.
Compass
Grid
UCS Icon
Reset View
Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started
3DORBIT.
Preset Views
Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric.
Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.
See Also
See Overview of 3D Orbit in the Users Guide.
34
3DORBIT
3DORBITCTR
Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view
3DORBITCTR starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device.
If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation.
3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget feature of the 3DORBIT command.
3DPAN
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command line: 3dpan
3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. When you click and drag the
cursor, the view moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view
vertically, horizontally, or diagonally.
You can view your entire drawing, or select one or more objects before
entering 3DPAN. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade video performance.
See Also
See Use 3D Orbit Commands in the Users Guide.
3DORBITCTR
35
3DPOLY
Creates a polyline of line segments in 3D space
new point
previous
point
closing
segment
Endpoint of Line
Undo
Close
See Also
Commands
3DSIN
Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file
3DSIN reads 3D Studio geometry and rendering data (3DS files), including
meshes, materials, mapping, lights, and cameras. 3DSIN cannot import 3D
36
3DPOLY
Available Objects
Displays the names of all objects in the 3D Studio file. You can select up to
70 objects.
Object Name and
Type
Add All
Add
Selected Objects
Displays the selected 3D Studio objects to import.
Object Name
and Type
3DSIN
37
Remove
Remove All
Save to Layers
Controls how 3D Studio objects are assigned to layers in the AutoCAD
drawing.
By Object
By Material
By Object Color
Single Layer
38
3DSIN
Assign First
Material
Assigns the first material assigned to each multiplematerial object to the entire object. See the 3D Studio
documentation for an explanation of how the firstassigned material is determined.
Select a Material
Split by Material
Splits all objects with multiple materials into multiple objects, one for each
material. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D
Studio file. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry.
Assign First Material
Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the
entire object. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how
the first-assigned material is determined.
Dont Assign a Material
Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This option loses all
material assignment information but preserves the 3D Studio geometry. The
object reverts to the AutoCAD default material.
See Also
See Work with Data in Other Formatsin the Users Guide.
3DSOUT
Exports to a 3D Studio (3DS) file
You can use AutoCAD geometry and rendering data with 3D Studio by converting a drawing to the 3DS file format with 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT exports only those AutoCAD objects with surface characteristics. A
line or an arc must have a nonzero thickness. A trace or a polyline must have
a nonzero width or thickness. Circles, polygon meshes, and polyface meshes
are always exported. Solids and 3D faces must have at least three unique
vertices. Geometry is tessellated on export, as necessary. AME (Advanced
Modeling Extension ) and AutoSurf objects must be converted to meshes
before you use 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT converts AutoCAD named views to 3D Studio cameras and Photo
Real or Photo Raytrace lights to the nearest 3D Studio equivalent. Point lights
become omni lights. Spotlights and distant lights become 3D Studio
spotlights.
3DSOUT
39
If the name of any AutoCAD object conflicts with a name already in the 3D
Studio drawing, the AutoCAD name is assigned a sequence number to resolve
the conflict. The name may have to be truncated to accommodate the
sequence number.
Command line: 3dsout
Select objects:
AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio Output File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). After you enter a name for the new file, AutoCAD displays
the 3D Studio File Export Options dialog box.
Note 3DSOUT cannot convert a selection set containing more than 65,535
vertices. If necessary, simplify the geometry using the Auto-Welding option (see
Welding on page 41).
40
3DSOUT
AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI)
AutoCAD Object
Type
AutoCAD Blocks
Splits a block into its components and converts them to 3D Studio objects
according to the mode set under Derive 3D Studio Objects From.
Override (Each
Block Is One
Object)
Smoothing
Assigns 3D Studio smoothing groups based on the controls set in this area.
Auto-Smoothing
Degrees
Welding
Simplifies the geometry and improves rendering time by welding congruent
or nearby vertices into a single vertex.
Auto-Welding
Threshold
See Also
See Work with Data in Other Formats, especially 3D Studio Files, in the
Users Guide.
Commands
3DSOUT
41
3DSWIVEL
Starts the interactive 3D view and simulates the effect of turning the camera
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More Swivel Camera.
Command line: 3dswivel
3DSWIVEL changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of
turning a camera on a tripod. This command changes the target of the view.
For example, if you were pointing a camera at an object and then turned the
camera to the right, the object would move to the left in your viewing area.
Or, if you pointed the camera up, the objects would move down in your
viewing area. Swivel simulates this motion by using the cursor as the
cameras viewfinder.
3DZOOM
Starts the interactive 3D view so you can zoom in and out on the view
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Zoom.
Command line: 3dzoom
3DZOOM simulates the effect of a cameras zoom lens. It makes objects appear
closer and farther away but does not change the position of the camera.
Zooming in magnifies the image. This also exaggerates the perspective with
which you view the objects if youre using perspective projection. It may
slightly distort the shape of some objects.
Zoom changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus ()
signs. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen
zooms in on the image, making the objects appear larger or closer. Clicking
and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen zooms out
and makes the object appear smaller or farther away.
42
3DSWIVEL
ABOUT
Displays information about AutoCAD
Help menu: About
Command line: about (or 'about for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays copyright information and product information.
Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial
number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file.
ACISIN
Imports an ACIS file
ACIS (a solid modeler produced by Spatial Technology, Inc.) provides a solid
modeling file format that AutoCAD can use. AutoCAD reads the model
stored in the ACIS file format and creates a body object, solid, or region in
the AutoCAD drawing.
Insert menu: ACIS File
Command line: acisin
AutoCAD displays the Select ACIS File dialog box. Select the file to import
in the File Name list. AutoCAD imports the SAT (ASCII) ACIS file into your
AutoCAD drawing.
See Also
See Overview of Object Linking and Embedding in the Users Guide.
Commands
ABOUT
43
ACISOUT
Exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file
ACIS provides a solid modeling file format that AutoCAD can use to store
solid objects. An AutoCAD solid, a body, or a region can be stored as an SAT
(ASCII) file.
Note When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to
set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For
example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14 set ACISOUTVER to 16.
Command line: acisout
Select objects:
AutoCAD ignores selected objects that are not solids or regions and displays
the Create ACIS File dialog box. Enter the name of the file you want to create.
AutoCAD exports the selected objects to an ASCII file.
See Also
See ACIS Files in the Users Guide.
Commands
ADCCLOSE
Closes DesignCenter
Command line: adcclose
Closes the DesignCenter window.
See Also
Commands
44
ACISOUT
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: DesignCenter
Command line: adcenter
DesignCenter is displayed.
DesignCenter Window
Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes
blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs).
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and
access options.
When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab, the following two
panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content:
content area
tree view
content preview
content description
ADCENTER
45
From the content area, you can insert blocks, hatch patterns, or attach
external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by rightclicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag or
right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension styles,
and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool
palettes.
Note You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area.
Load
Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Use Load
to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web, and then to
select content to load in the content area.
Back
Returns to the most recent location in the history list.
Forward
Returns to the next later location in the history list.
Up
Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container.
Stop (DC Online tab)
Stops the current transfer.
Reload (DC Online tab)
Reloads the current page.
46
ADCENTER
Search
Displays the Search dialog box (see page 49), where you can specify search
criteria to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within
drawings.
Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop.
Favorites
Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The Favorites
folder contains shortcuts to items you access often. You can add items to
Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item in
the tree view, and then clicking Add to Favorites. To delete an item from
Favorites, use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then
use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu.
ADCENTER
47
Views
Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the content area. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button
repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. The default view varies for
the type of content currently loaded in the content area.
Large Icon
Small Icon
List View
Detail View
Note The sample\designcenter folder contains drawings containing disciplinespecific blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol
library drawings.
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view
options.
Folders
Open Drawings
48
ADCENTER
History
DC Online
Look For
In
ADCENTER
49
Browse
Search Subfolders
Search Now
Stop
New Search
Clears the Search For the Name box and places the
cursor in the box.
Search Results
Panel
50
ADCENTER
During the
Previous
Month(s)
During the
Previous Day(s)
Containing Text
Size Is
ADCENTER
51
See Also
See DesignCenter in the Users Guide.
Commands
ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path
Command line: adcnavigate
Enter pathname <current>:
The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the
DesignCenter Folders tab.
At the prompt, you can enter a path in any of the following formats:
See Also
Commands
DesignCenter.
52
ADCNAVIGATE
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
Use ALIGN to move, rotate, or scale objects into alignment with other objects.
Add source points to the objects you want to align, and add destination points
to the objects to which you want the source objects to align. You can add up
to three pairs of source and destination points to align an object.
Modify menu: 3D Operation Align
Command line: align
Select objects:
1
2
two points specified
result
ALIGN
53
3
2
4
objects selected
result
When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate,
and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with
other objects.
The first set of source and destination points defines the
base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of
points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).
After you enter the second set of points, AutoCAD
prompts you to scale the object. AutoCAD uses the
distance between the first and second destination
points (2, 4) as the reference length to which the object
is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning
objects using two point pairs.
Note If you use two source and destination points to
perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working
planes, you get unpredictable results.
ALIGN Using
Three Pairs of
Points
54
ALIGN
3
5
1
2
4
objects selected
result
When you select three point pairs, you can move and
rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other
objects.
The selected objects move from the source point (1) to
the destination point (2).
The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns
with the destination object (2 and 4).
The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so
that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).
See Also
Commands
MOVE displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction. ROTATE moves objects about a base
point.
System Variables
AMECONVERT
Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects
Command line: ameconvert
Select objects:
The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release
2 or 2.1 regions or solids. AutoCAD ignores all other objects.
Because of increased accuracy in the new AutoCAD solid modeler, AME
models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is noticeable where the previous version of the AutoCAD solid modeler identified the
surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same
AMECONVERT
55
plane. The new AutoCAD solid modelers finer tolerance may interpret these
surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with
aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes.
Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer
approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being
slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid
material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and
that of the new modeler.
Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly
below the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original
shape unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original
surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or
chamfer.
APERTURE
Controls the size of the object snap target box
Command line: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)
Object snap target height (150 pixels) <current>: Enter a value (150) or press
ENTER
Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target
box. The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box
is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size
of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You
can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.
target
box
target
box
APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at
the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the
PICKBOX system variable.
See Also
Commands
56
APERTURE
APPLOAD
Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup
If you need to use applications that are not automatically loaded when you
start AutoCAD, you can use APPLOAD to load applications, unload applications, store a history list of applications youve loaded, and create a start-up
list of applications to be loaded each time you start AutoCAD.
You can load applications of the following file types:
AutoLISP (.lsp)
ObjectARX (.arx)
VBA (.dvb)
ObjectDBX (.dbx)
Fast Load AutoLISP (.fas)
Visual LISP executables (.vlx)
APPLOAD
57
The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file
selection dialog box (see page 621). Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box:
Load
58
APPLOAD
Loaded
Applications
History List
Add to History
Unload
APPLOAD
59
Remove
Startup Suite
Status Line
List of
Applications
60
APPLOAD
Add
Remove
See Also
See Use AutoLISP Applications in the Customization Guide.
Commands
ObjectARX applications.
ARC
Creates an arc
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Arc
Command line: arc
Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Specify a point, enter ce, or press ENTER to
start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline
Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc.
Note If you press ENTER without specifying a point, AutoCAD uses the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the
endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc,
or polyline.
Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]:
Second Point
2
3
1
Draws an arc using three specified points on the arcs circumference. The first
point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second
point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)
You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.
ARC
61
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point
3
included
angle
Angle
1
2
Chord Length
length of
chord
Specify a length
End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:
imaginary
ray
Center Point
Angle
2
1
3
center point
62
ARC
Direction
2
angle
2
1
1
direction
Radius
1
radius
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point
Angle
1
included angle
1 2
Chord Length
1
length
of chord
ARC
63
See Also
See Draw Arcs in the Users Guide.
Commands
AREA
Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas
Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system
variables.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Area
Command line: area
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter
an option
3
4
2
defining an area
and perimeter
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points
must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate
system (UCS).
Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total: Specify a point (2)
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to
complete the definition of the perimeter.
If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, AutoCAD adds in that line length.
area defined
Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.
Note 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area
reported.
64
AREA
Select objects:
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, however, AutoCAD ignores that line.
open polyline
selected
area defined
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or
length) calculations.
Add
wide ployline
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and
perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined
areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas
from the total area.
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]:
option
First Corner Point
2
1
defined area to
be added
new area
AREA
65
Object
Subtract
selected area to
be subtracted
Subtract
Similar to the Add option, but subtracts areas and perimeters.
remaining area
See Also
See Obtain Area Information in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
AREA stores the sum of areas collected. PERIMETER displays the perimeter of the object last found by AREA.
ARRAY
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern
Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select multiple objects from which to construct the array, AutoCAD counts the objects
as one item to be copied and arrayed.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Array
Command line: array
66
ARRAY
The Array dialog box is displayed. You can create rectangular or polar arrays
by choosing the appropriate option.
If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the
command line (see page 72).
Rectangular Array
Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the
selected object.
distance
between rows
object selected
ARRAY
67
Rows
Specifies the number of rows in the array.
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a
while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by
the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns in the array.
If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a
while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by
the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Offset Distance and Direction
Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the arrays
offset.
68
Row Offset
Column Offset
Angle of Array
ARRAY
Pick Column
Offset
Pick Angle of
Array
Polar Array
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
1
1
2
Center Point
Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and
Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the
location.
Pick Center Point
Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing
device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
ARRAY
69
Total Number of
Items
Angle to Fill
Angle Between
Items
Pick Angle
Between Items
70
ARRAY
Center point
Polygon, rectangle
First corner
Starting point
Insertion point
Construction lines
Midpoint
Region
Grip point
Set to Objects
Default
Base Point
Select Objects
Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before
or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array
dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily
closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER . The Array dialog box
is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select
Objects button.
ARRAY
71
Note If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is
used to construct the array.
Preview Area
Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the
dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to
another field after changing a setting.
Preview
Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing.
Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes.
Rectangular
Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the
selected objects.
distance
between rows
object selected
Enter the number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice
versa.
AutoCAD assumes the selected object, or cornerstone element, to be in the
lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
72
ARRAY
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between
rows. AutoCAD skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle.
Specify the distance between columns (|||):
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between
columns. AutoCAD constructs rectangular arrays along a baseline defined by
the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns
are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option
of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The
SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD
might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of
array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit
is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000,
for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Polar
Creates an array defined by specifying a center point or base point about
which AutoCAD replicates the selected objects.
1
1
2
Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new
base point
Center Point
ARRAY
73
Base
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER
If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the
angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the number of items), you must specify both.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
AutoCAD sees 0 as no response. You can enter 0 for angle to fill only if you
specify the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if
you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press
ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for the angle between items:
Angle between items: Specify an angle
If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or
pressed ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate
the direction of the array:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
AutoCAD determines the distance from the arrays center point to a reference
point on the last object selected. AutoCAD uses the center point of a circle or
arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and
one endpoint of a line or trace.
Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
In a polar array, AutoCAD uses the reference point of the last object in the
selection set for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window
or crossing selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing
an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be
the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and
replicate it.
See Also
See Create an Array of Objects in the Users Guide.
74
ARRAY
Commands
locks points entered by a pointing device into alignment with an imaginary rectangular grid, the rotation
and X and Y spacing of which can be changed.
System Variables
ARX
Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications
ObjectARX applications can be third-party programs or internal applications
such as Render or the Multiline Text Editor.
Command line: arx
Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]:
?List Applications
Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications.
Load
Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.
Unload
Unloads the specified ObjectARX application.
Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:
Commands
Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are
described in the ObjectARX Developers Guide).
Options
Presents developer-related ObjectARX application options. These options are
explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developers Guide.
Enter an option [Group/CLasses/Services]: Enter an option or press ENTER
ARX
75
Group
Classes
Services
ASSIST
Opens the Active Assistance window, which provides either automatic or on-demand
context-sensitive information
Help menu: Active Assistance
Command line: assist (or 'assist for transparent use)
When you open the Active Assistance window, the Active Assistance icon is
added to your Windows system tray at the lower edge of your screen.
Active Assistance continually monitors your actions in AutoCAD and displays information directly related to the active command or dialog box in the
Active Assistance window. You can manually hide and show the Active Assistance window at any time. You can also control how and when the window
is automatically opened. For example, you may prefer to open the Active
Assistance window only while you work in a dialog box.
Active Assistance options are available through the Active Assistance icon
shortcut menu and the Active Assistance window shortcut menu.
76
ASSIST
Show Active
Assistance
Settings
Exit
Back
Forward
Settings
ASSIST
77
Show On Start
Starts Active Assistance when AutoCAD starts. If you clear this option and
close all AutoCAD sessions, use the ASSIST command to restart Active
Assistance.
Activation
Specifies the conditions in which the Active Assistance window is automatically displayed.
All Commands
New and
Enhanced
Commands
Dialogs Only
On Demand
See Also
Commands
78
ASSIST
ATTACHURL
Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing
Command line: attachurl
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>:
Area
Creates the URLLAYER layer, draws a polyline on that layer, and attaches a
URL to the polyline.
First corner: Click in the drawing to indicate the lower-left corner of the area
Other corner: Click to indicate the upper-right corner of the area
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL
The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URLLAYER. The default color is red. When you move the cursor over the area in
the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL
is attached to the area.
Object
Attaches a URL to the selected object.
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL
When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing, the cursor
changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.
See Also
See Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing in the Users Guide.
Commands
DETACHURL removes hyperlinks from drawings. HYPERLINK displays a dialog box to attach URLs to objects and
ATTACHURL
79
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute definition is a template for creating an attribute; it specifies the properties of an
attribute and the prompts displayed when the block is inserted.
When you finish defining the attribute, the attribute tag that you specified
is displayed in the drawing.
When you later include the attribute tag in a block definition using the
BLOCK command, AutoCAD erases the attribute tag from the drawing if you
have selected the Delete option in the Block Definition dialog box. When
you insert the block, AutoCAD displays the attribute value at the same location in the block, with the same text style and alignment.
Draw menu: Block Define Attributes
Command line: attdef
The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on
the command line (see page 82).
80
ATTDEF
Mode
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the
block in a drawing.
The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable. Changing the
AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and
does not affect existing attribute definitions.
Invisible
Constant
Verify
Preset
Attribute
Sets attribute data. You can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading
blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash
(\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two
backslashes.
Tag
Prompt
Value
Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or choose Pick
Point and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute
in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.
Text Options
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
ATTDEF
81
Justification
Text Style
Height
Rotation
82
ATTDEF
Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode
(either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, or p toggles the modes on or off.
Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. The
AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to
set the default modes.
Invisible
Constant
Verify
Preset
Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing
this attribute definition. If you press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the attribute tag
as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt does not display.
Attribute Value
Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if
you turn on Constant mode.
ATTDEF
83
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
associated attributes.
System Variables
tion of blocks.
ATTDISP
Globally controls attribute visibility
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. ATTDISP controls
whether the attributes in your drawing are visible.
attribute
ATTDISP off
84
AutoCAD regenerates the drawing after you change the visibility unless
REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. AutoCAD stores
the current visibility of attributes in the ATTMODE system variable.
Normal
On
Off
ATTDISP
See Also
Commands
System Variables
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. In the Edit
Attributes dialog box, you can edit individual, nonconstant attribute values
associated with a specific block. To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT and edit attribute values and properties
individually or globally, independent of the block.
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values for a specific block:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Single
Command line: attedit
Select block reference: Select a block with attributes
The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Global
Command line: -attedit
AutoCAD displays prompts on the command line (see page 82).
ATTEDIT
85
86
ATTEDIT
Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be
visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a block name or a
partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to
specific blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a tag or a partial tag
with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER , or specify a value or a value
name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute
values
Attribute values are case sensitive.
Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS
AutoCAD marks the first attribute in the selection set with an X. You can
change any properties of the attribute you select.
attributes selected
X on first attribute
Value
Changes or replaces an attribute value.
Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press ENTER
Change
X on next attribute
ENTER
ATTEDIT
87
Replace
Position
Changes the text insertion point.
Specify new text insertion point: Specify a point or press ENTER
position changed
If the attribute is aligned, AutoCAD prompts for both ends of a new text
baseline.
Height
Changes the text height.
Specify new height <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press ENTER
height changed
When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Angle
Changes the rotation angle.
Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press
ENTER
angle changed
If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Style
Changes the style setting.
Enter new text style: Enter a style name or press ENTER
style changed
Layer
Changes the layer.
Enter new layer name <current>: Enter a layer name or press ENTER
Color
Changes the color.
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
Enter new color name or value [Truecolor/Colorbook]<BYLAYER>:
enter t, enter c, or press ENTER
88
ATTEDIT
Enter a color,
You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer
or byblock.
True Color
Color Book
Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more
attributes, ATTEDIT ends.
No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible
and invisible attributes.
Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with
another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or
all of the attributes.
Performing global editing of attribute values.
Edit only attributes visible on screen? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to
edit only visible attributes, or enter n to edit all attributes
Yes
ATTEDIT
89
90
ATTEDIT
See Also
See Modify Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
ATTEXT
Extracts attribute data
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. Use ATTEXT to
extract the data stored in the attribute into a file.
Command line: attext
The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on
the command line (see page 93).
ATTEXT
91
File Format
Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Comma
Delimited File
(CDF)
Space Delimited
File (SDF)
DXF Format
Extract File (DXX)
Select Objects
Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with
attributes. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found
shows the number of objects you selected.
Template File
Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file
name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files
using a standard file selection dialog box. The default file extension is .txt. If
you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available.
92
ATTEXT
For information about creating a template file, see Attach Data to Blocks
(Block Attributes) in the Users Guide.
Output File
Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the
path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to
search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box.
AutoCAD appends the .txt file name extension for CDF or SDF files and the
.dxx file name extension for DXF files.
ATTEXT
93
DXF: Drawing
Interchange File
Objects
Enter
See Also
For information about working with attributes, see Attach Data to Blocks
(Block Attributes) in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
ATTREDEF
Redefines a block and updates associated attributes
Command line: attredef
Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine:
Select objects for new block:
Select objects:
Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point
94
ATTREDEF
New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values.
Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. AutoCAD
deletes any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
ATTSYNC
Updates all instances of a specified block with the current attributes defined for the block
Modify II toolbar:
Command line: attsync
Enter an option [?/Name/Select] <Select>:
You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the
current attributes defined for the blocks. ATTSYNC does not change any
values assigned to attributes in existing blocks.
Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the
name of the block you want to update.
Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block
whose attributes you want to update.
If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error
message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block.
AUDIT
Evaluates the integrity of a drawing
AUDIT is a diagnostic tool for examining the current drawing and correcting
errors. For every error detected, AutoCAD provides a description of the error
and recommends corrective action.
ATTSYNC
95
System Variables
OPTIONS reconfigures AutoCAD. RECOVER fixes a damaged drawing. OPEN alerts you if a drawing is damaged
and optionally uses RECOVER to attempt to fix it.
AUDITCTL controls whether AUDIT generates a report
file.
96
AUDIT
BACKGROUND
Sets up the background for your scene
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Background
Command line: background
AutoCAD displays the Background dialog box.
Solid
Selects a one-color background. Use the color controls to specify the color.
Gradient
Specifies a two- or three-color gradient background. Use the color controls
and Horizon, Height, and Rotation to define the gradient.
A three-color gradient is the default. To create a two-color gradient, set
Height to 0 so that Render uses only the Top and Bottom colors.
BACKGROUND
97
Image
Uses a bitmap file for the background.
Merge
Uses the current AutoCAD image as the background. This option is available only when Viewport is selected as Destination in the Render dialog box.
See RENDER.
Colors
Sets color for a solid or gradient background.
Top/Middle/
Bottom
Color Controls
Select Custom
Color
AutoCAD
Background
Preview
Displays a preview of the current Background settings.
Image
Specifies the image file name. You can use the following file types for background images: BMP, JPG, PCX, TGA, and TIFF.
Name
98
BACKGROUND
Specifies the name of the image file to use. You can also
use Find File to select a file.
Find File
Adjust Bitmap
Environment
Defines an environment in which you can create additional reflection and
refraction effects on objects with reflective, raytraced materials. With the
Photo Real renderer, the result is a mirrored effect; with the Photo Raytrace
renderer, the result is a raytraced environment.
Name
Use Background
Find File
Horizon
Represents the percentage of unrotated height. Use the box or scroll bar to
set the value. Only available for gradient backgrounds.
Height
Represents a percentage of the second color in a three-color gradient. Use the
box or scroll bar to set the value. The start point of the second color is determined by the Horizon setting. If the value is 0, the result is a two-color
gradient that uses the Top and Bottom colors.
Rotation
Sets an angle at which you can rotate a gradient background. Rotation is not
available with a solid or image background. Use the box or scroll bar to set
the value.
BACKGROUND
99
Fit to Screen
Fits the image to your screen. If you select Use Image Aspect Ratio, the program fits the larger dimension to the screen while maintaining the images
aspect ratio.
Tiling
Controls how the bitmap is tiled with two radio buttons.
Tile
Crop
If you select Tile and you change the offset so the bitmap rectangle appears
outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is not centered within the drawing area when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if you select Crop, the bitmap is rendered
only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram (enclosed by the inner
100
BACKGROUND
box labeled Scale) in the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box. If
the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap
does not appear in a rendering.
Center
Sets the Offset coordinates to 0 (centers the image).
See Also
See Use Materials in Rendering in the Users Guide.
Commands
BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing
Use BASE if you plan to insert the current drawing into, or externally reference the drawing from, other drawings and you need a base point other than
0,0,0. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other
drawings, ACAD uses this base point as the insertion base point.
Note The BASE command and the INSBASE system variable report values in the
current UCS units.
Draw menu: Block Base
Command line: base (or 'base for transparent use)
Enter base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
See Also
Commands
BASE
101
BATTMAN
Edits attribute properties of a block definition
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Block Attribute Manager
Command line: battman
The Block Attribute Manager is displayed.
If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message
is displayed.
102
Block
Sync
BATTMAN
Move Up
Move Down
Edit
Remove
Settings
Apply
Attribute
Text Options
Properties
BATTMAN
103
Constant
Verify
Preset
Data
Data options set the attribute text that is displayed.
Tag
Prompt
Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you
insert the block.
Default
104
BATTMAN
Justification
Height
Rotation
Backwards
Upside Down
Width Factor
Oblique Angle
Linetype
Color
Plot Style
Lineweight
Select All
BATTMAN
105
Clear All
Emphasize
Duplicate Tags
Apply Changes to
Existing
References
BHATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill
BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch or fill,
either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point
within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then
fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern, a solid color, or a gradient. BHATCH
creates an associative hatch or fill, which is updated when its boundaries are
modified, or a nonassociative hatch or fill, which is independent of its
boundaries. You can preview any hatch or fill and adjust the definition.
Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch or
fill, editing hatched or gradient-filled geometry can produce unexpected
results. In this event, delete the object containing the hatch or fill and redo
the hatch or fill.
Note By default, AutoCAD wont create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Hatch
106
BHATCH
Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. The
objects must form an enclosed area. How AutoCAD detects objects using this
option depends on which island detection method is selected on the
Advanced tab. For example, if the island detection method is Flood,
AutoCAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and
includes them in the boundary definition. The island detection style (which
you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected
islands.
When you select Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and
AutoCAD displays a prompt.
Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled
Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last selection,
or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.
hatch boundary
result
BHATCH
107
Select Objects
Specifies objects for hatching or filling. The dialog box closes temporarily,
and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.
object selected
hatch boundary
result
When you use the Select Objects option, AutoCAD does not detect interior
objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current Island Detection
Style (which you set on the Advanced tab).
object selected
text selected
result
Each time you choose Select Objects, AutoCAD clears the previous selection
set.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.
Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that AutoCAD
detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. You cannot remove
the outer boundary.
108
BHATCH
object removed
result
View Selections
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. This option
is unavailable when no boundary has been defined.
Inherit Properties
Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of one
object. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose properties
you want the hatch or fill to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area
and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick
Points options to create boundaries.
See Pick Points on page 107 and Select Objects on page 108.
Double
For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees
to the original lines, creating a crosshatch. AutoCAD stores this information
in the HPDOUBLE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type
to User Defined on the Hatch tab.
This option is not available for gradient fills.
Composition
Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or nonassociative.
Associative
Nonassociative
Preview
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is not available
when you have not yet specified points or selected objects to define your
boundaries.
BHATCH
109
Type
Sets the pattern type.
Predefined
110
User Defined
Custom
BHATCH
Pattern
Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined
patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in
the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116),
in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to
help you make a selection.
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display
the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116). When the SOLID pattern
is selected, you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select
Color dialog box (see page 169).
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the
HPNAME system variable. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you
set Type to Custom.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116),
in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help
you make a selection.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. AutoCAD stores the angle in the HPANG system variable.
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. AutoCAD stores the
scale in the HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined or Custom.
Relative to Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you
can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout.
This option is available only from a layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. AutoCAD stores the
spacing in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you
set Type to User Defined.
BHATCH
111
112
BHATCH
.
.
Normal
Outer
Ignore
Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select
objects to define your boundaries.
Object Type
Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type that
AutoCAD applies to those objects.
BHATCH
113
Retain
Boundaries
Object Type
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from
a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select
Objects to define a boundary.
By default, when you use Pick Points to define a boundary, AutoCAD
analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without
having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the
boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because AutoCAD
examines fewer objects.
Current Viewport
Existing Set
New
114
BHATCH
Flood
Ray Casting
One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and
lighter tints of one color. When One Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a
color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider. (GFCLRSTATE
system variable)
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. When Two
Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a color swatch with a Browse button for
color 1 and for color 2. (GFCLRSTATE system variable)
Color Swatch
Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color,
true color, or color book color. The default color displayed is the current color
in the drawing.
BHATCH
115
ANSI
116
BHATCH
ISO
Other Predefined
Custom
Specify
Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen that form
an enclosed area. If you turn on Island Detection, ACAD detects objects
within the outermost boundary as islands. Hatching applied is associative
and in the current style.
Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or
custom pattern name, enter s, enter u, enter ?, or press ENTER
Pattern Name
Predefined or
Custom
?List Pattern
Names
BHATCH
117
Solid
User Defined
Select
Selects objects for hatching.
Select objects:
Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary set objects defined as islands by the Internal
Point option.
Select island to remove: Select an island
Advanced
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the hatch boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Retain boundary/Island detection/Style/
Associativity]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects that AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary
from a specified internal point.
Specify candidate set for boundary [New/Everything] <current>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
118
BHATCH
New
Everything
Retain Boundary
Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing
after hatching is completed.
Retain derived boundaries? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary
objects.
Do you want island detection? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method.
Enter type of ray casting [Nearest/+X/-X/+Y/-Y/Angle] <current>: Enter an
option or press ENTER
Nearest
+X
-X
+Y
-Y
ray casting
direction (+X)
ray casting
direction (-X)
ray casting
direction (+Y)
BHATCH
119
Angle
ray casting
direction (-Y)
Style
Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch
boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, its often best to use
the Normal style.
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>:
ENTER
Ignore
Outer
Normal
Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. Hatching created with BHATCH is, by default, associative.
Do you want associativity? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
See Also
See Standard Libraries and Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts in the Users
Guide. For information about the acad.pat file and creating your own hatch
patterns, see Custom Hatch Patterns in the Customization Guide.
120
BHATCH
Commands
System Variables
BLIPMODE
Controls the display of marker blips
Command line: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+)
appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.
BLIPMODE
121
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from objects you select
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Block Make
Command line: block
The Block Definition dialog box is displayed.
If you enter block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the
command line (see page 124).
Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes, if the system
variable EXTNAMES is set to 1.
122
BLOCK
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.
Note You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and
OVERHEAD as valid block names.
Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X
Pick Insertion
Base Point
Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or
delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you
create the block.
Select Objects
Quick Select
Retain
Convert to Block
Delete
Objects Selected
Preview Icon
Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and
specifies the source of the icon.
Do Not Include
an Icon
BLOCK
123
Preview Image
Description
Specifies the text description associated with the block.
Hyperlink
Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box (see page 416), which you can use to
associate a hyperlink with the block definition.
Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes if the system variable
EXTNAMES is set to 1.
If you enter the name of an existing block, AutoCAD prompts you as follows:
Block "NAME" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press
ENTER
AutoCAD uses the point specified as the base point for subsequent insertions
of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left
corner. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block
124
BLOCK
AutoCAD defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point,
and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the drawing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command
immediately after BLOCK.
objects selected
as a block
The insertion base point becomes the origin of the blocks coordinate system,
which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block.
When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned
parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation
in space by setting the UCS first.
See Also
See Overview of Blocks in the Users Guide.
BLOCK
125
Commands
System Variables
BLOCKICON
Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter
File menu: Drawing Utilities Update Block Icons
Command line: blockicon
Enter block names <*>: Specify block names, or press ENTER to update all blocks
Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release
of AutoCAD. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wildcard characters. For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all
two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated.
After you enter the block names, AutoCAD displays a message describing the
process as it proceeds. Press ESC at any time to stop.
See Also
See Overview of Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
select.
126
BLOCKICON
BMPOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format
Command line: bmpout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER
AutoCAD creates a bitmap file that contains the objects you select. The file
reflects what is displayed on the screen.
Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area
Draw menu: Boundary
Command line: boundary
The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays
prompts on the command line (see page 128).
BMPOUT
127
For information about all options in this dialog box, see Boundary Hatch and
Fill Dialog Box.
For information about all options in this dialog box, see Boundary Hatch
and Fill Dialog Box on page 107.
Once you set the available options, choose Pick Points to specify points in
your drawing to create the boundaries.
Internal Point
Creates a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify
a point inside the area.
Advanced Options
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]:
press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
128
BOUNDARY
Enter an option or
Boundary Set
Island Detection
Object Type
See Also
Commands
BOX
Creates a three-dimensional solid box
Once you create a box, you cannot stretch it or change its size. However, you
can extrude the faces of a box with SOLIDEDIT.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Box
Command line: box
Specify corner of box or [CEnter]<0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER for
corner of box, or enter c for center
BOX
129
Corner of Box
Defines the first corner of the box.
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]:
1
Corner
height
Cube
length
Length
height
length
width
Center
Creates the box by using a specified center point.
1
130
BOX
Corner
Cube
length
Length
height
length
width
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
Commands
BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Break
Command line: break
Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1)
on an object
BREAK
131
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If
you select the object by using your pointing device, AutoCAD both selects
the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next
prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the
first point.
before break
Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or
enter f
after break
Second Break
Point
First Point
AutoCAD erases the portion of the object between the two points that you
specify. If the second point is not on the object, AutoCAD selects the nearest
point on the object; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline,
specify the second point beyond the end to be removed.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for
both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the
second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other
object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed.
AutoCAD converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting
counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
2
1
1
See Also
See Create Breaks in the Users Guide.
132
BREAK
BROWSER
Launches the default web browser defined in your systems registry
Web toolbar:
Command line: browser
Enter Web location (URL) <current>: Press ENTER or enter a new location; you
dont need to enter http:// before the location
Pressing ENTER displays your web browser, which automatically connects to
the location you specify. Because BROWSER does not append http:// to web
locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.
Note BROWSER requires that you have Netscape Navigator 3.0 (or later) or
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 (or later) installed.
See Also
To specify the default Internet location launched by your browser, see
Menu, Help, and Miscellaneous File Names on page 635.
System Variables
BROWSER
133
134
CAL
Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions
Command line: cal (or 'cal for transparent use)
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or
integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the
object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can insert AutoLISP
variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable. You can use these arithmetic and vector
expressions in any AutoCAD command that expects points, vectors, or
numbers.
Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with
the operators in the following table.
Numeric operators
Operator
Operation
()
Groups expressions
Indicates exponentiation
*,/
Multiplies, divides
+,
Adds, subtracts
CAL
135
Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions
combined with operators in the following table.
Vector operators
Operator
Operation
()
Groups expressions
&
*, /
+,
136
CAL
Formatting Angles
The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the
following format:
degdmin'sec"
You must enter 0 and d (0d) when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree
(minutes and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are
zero.
Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number followed by g to enter angles in grads.
The following examples show ways of entering angles:
124.6r
14g
5d10'20"
0d10'20"
AutoCAD converts angles entered in any format to decimal degrees.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.
CAL
137
Point formats
Coordinate system
Point format
Polar
[dist<angle]
Cylindrical
[dist<angle,z]
Spherical
[dist<angle1<angle2]
Relative
138
CAL
'cal
CAL
139
The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of
the view in the current viewport.
(setq c (getvar "viewctr"))
Numeric functions
140
CAL
Function
Description
sin(angle)
cos(angle)
tang(angle)
asin(real)
acos(real)
atan(real)
ln(real)
log(real)
exp(real)
exp10(real)
sqr(real)
sqrt(real)
Description
abs(real)
round(real)
trunc(real)
r2d(angle)
d2r(angle)
pi
The constant pi
vec1(p1,p2)
The following example uses CAL to move selected objects three units in the
direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another
selected circle:
Command: move
Select objects
Specify base point or displacement: 'cal
>> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen)
Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
CAL
141
Meaning
vec(a,b)
vec1(a,b)
L*vec1(a,b)
a+v
a+[5<20]
vec(a,b)
vec1(a,b)
L*vec1(a,b)
b
a
a+v
142
CAL
b
a
a+[5<20]
CAL
143
Snap mode
END
ENDPOINT
INS
INSERT
INT
INTERSECTION
MID
MIDPOINT
CEN
CENTER
NEA
NEAREST
NOD
NODE
QUA
QUADRANT
PER
PERPENDICULAR
TAN
TANGENT
The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL
expression:
(cen+end)/2
CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected
object.
144
CAL
Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for
an object and returns a point one unit in the Y direction from the midpoint
of the selected object:
mid+[,1]
The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid of a triangle defined by three endpoints:
(end+end+end)/3
u2w(p1)
You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS:
w2u([0,0,0])
Description
xyof(p1)
xzof(p1)
yzof(p1)
xof(p1)
yof(p1)
zof(p1)
rxof(p1)
X component of a point
CAL
145
Description
ryof(p1)
Y component of a point
rzof(p1)
Z component of a point
plt(p1,p2,t)
146
CAL
ang
origin
p
rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,
ang)
AxP2
ang
p
AxP1
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,
p5)
Calculating a Distance
dist(p1,p2)
dpl(p,p1,p2)
CAL
147
p1
p2
shortest distance
90
dpp(p,p1,p2,p3)
dist(p1,p2)
90
p3
p1
148
CAL
Obtaining a Radius
The rad function determines the radius of a selected object.
rad
Obtaining an Angle
The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are
measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the twodimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
ang(v)
ang(p1,p2)
ang(apex,p1,p2)
CAL
149
ang(apex,p1,p2,
p)
v
p1
0,0
ang(p1, p2)
p
p2
0,0
ang(v)
p2
apex
apex
p1
0,0
X
ang(p1,p2)
ang (apex,p1,p2,p)
p1
You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang
function, as shown in the following example:
Command: cal
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end)
Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.
150
CAL
nor
nor(v)
nor(p1,p2)
nor(p1,p2,p3)
nor
nor(v)
p3
p2
p2
p1
p1
nor (p1,p2)
nor (p1,p2,p3)
CAL
151
Shortcut for
Description
dee
dist(end,end)
ille
ill(end,end,end,end)
mee
(end+end)/2
nee
nor(end,end)
vee
vec(end,end)
vee1
vec1(end,end)
See Also
See Use the Geometry Calculator in the Users Guide.
152
CAL
CAMERA
Sets a different camera and target location
Setting the camera and target locations gives you a different view of objects
in your drawing.
camera at A, target at B
camera at B, target at A
View toolbar:
Command line: camera
Current camera position is: current
Current camera target is: current
Specify new camera position <current>: Enter a value or specify a point
Sets the point from which you view the objects in your model.
Specify new camera target <current>: Enter a value or specify a point
Sets the point in your model that you are viewing.
To set the camera and target locations for a 3D Orbit view, enter the CAMERA
command before starting 3DORBIT.
CAMERA
153
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects
If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates
the chamfer on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the chamfer line on
the current layer. This is also true for color, linetype, and lineweight.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Chamfer
Command line: chamfer
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current
Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]:
result
Note Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line
segments removes hatch associativity. If you defined the boundary from a
polyline, associativity is maintained.
First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer,
or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer.
Select second line:
If the two lines you select are polyline segments, they must be adjacent to
each other or separated by no more than one segment. If theyre separated
by one line or arc segment, AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it with
a chamfer line.
154
CHAMFER
If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two
surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface.
Base surface selection...
Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] <OK>: Enter n or o, or press
ENTER
Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface.
Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge.
Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>:
Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>:
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges
of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the
edges at once.
Select an edge or [Loop]:
Edge
Selects an individual edge to chamfer.
select edge
edge selected
chamfered edge
Loop
Switches to Edge Loop mode.
Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER
Edge Loop
CHAMFER
155
Edge
edge selected
chamfered
edge loop
Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
Select 2D polyline:
AutoCAD chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the
polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the
chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.
selected polyline
result
Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Specify first chamfer distance <current>:
Specify second chamfer distance <current>:
equal distances
unequal distances
If you set both distances to zero, AutoCAD extends or trims the two lines so
they end at the same point.
156
CHAMFER
Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an
angle for the second line.
Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>:
Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>:
chamfer distance
first
selected
second
selected
angle
Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>:
Note Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to
0.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting
lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to
0, AutoCAD creates the chamfer without trimming the selected lines.
Method
Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to
create the chamfer.
Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>:
Multiple
Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main
prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.
CHAMFER
157
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the chamfers you created with the Multiple option are removed if you
click Undo.
See Also
See Create Chamfers in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects
Command line: change
Select objects:
Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the
current user coordinate system (UCS).
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you
get varying results depending upon the object selection sequence. The easiest
way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only
objects other than lines in a selection set.
Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point, or press ENTER to enter
new values
158
CHANGE
1
Ortho off
Circles
Ortho on
Text
CHANGE
159
Attribute
Definitions
Blocks
Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects.
Enter property to change [Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:
Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.
160
CHANGE
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change
prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a
number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press
ENTER
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
True Color
Color Book
Elev
Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.
Specify new elevation <current>:
You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same
Z value.
CHANGE
161
Layer
Ltype
x
x
Elev = 0
Elev = 2
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport
object has no effect.
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style
162
CHANGE
CHPROP and PROPERTIES perform the property functions of CHANGE without requiring the selected objects
CHECKSTANDARDS
Checks the current drawing for standards violations
CAD Standards toolbar:
Tools menu: CAD Standards Check
Command line: checkstandards
The Check Standards dialog box is displayed.
Replace With
Preview of
Changes
Fix
Next Problem
CHECKSTANDARDS
163
Mark This
Problem as
Ignored
Settings
Close
CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness, and plot style
of an object
Command line: chprop
Select objects:
Enter property to change [Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:
Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a
number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press
ENTER
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
164
CHPROP
True Color
Color Book
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Enter new linetype name <current>:
If the new linetype is not loaded, AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
CHPROP
165
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport
object has no effect.
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table. This option is displayed
only when you are using named plot styles.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style
See Also
Commands
CIRCLE
Creates a circle
You can create a circle by beginning with the center point or one of three
points on the circumference, or you can select objects to which the circle is
tangent.
166
CIRCLE
Note To draw an isometric circle, use the Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE command. The Isocircle option is available for ELLIPSE only when the Style option of
Snap mode is set to Isometric (see DSETTINGS).
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Circle
Command line: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P (Three Points)/2P (Two Points)/Ttr (tan tan
radius)]: Specify a point or enter an option
Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Specify a point, enter a value, enter d, or
press ENTER
Radius
radius
Diameter
1
2
diameter
3P (Three Points)
3P
CIRCLE
167
2P (Two Points)
1
2P
See Also
See Draw Circles in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
CLOSE
Closes the current drawing
File menu: Close
Command line: close
AutoCAD closes the current drawing. If you modified the drawing since it
was last saved, AutoCAD prompts you to save or discard the changes.
168
CLOSE
You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have
made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to
a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.
CLOSEALL
Closes all currently open drawings
Window menu: Close All
Command line: closeall
Closes all open drawings. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.
See Also
Commands
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects
Format menu: Color
Command line: color (or 'color for transparent use)
The Select Color dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the
command line (see page 173).
CLOSEALL
169
color numbers
10249
color numbers 19
color numbers
250255
color BYBLOCK or
BYLAYER
color name
or number
current color
preview tile
170
COLOR
Note The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command.
Color
Specifies a color name, the BYLAYER and BYBLOCK colors, or an ACI number
of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the object's current color.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.
Saturation
COLOR
171
Luminance
Green
Blue
Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made
to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000,000,000.
True Color Stored as RGB
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.
172
COLOR
COLOR
173
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the
names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red
by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red.
You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, AutoCAD draws
all new objects in the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block
in a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR.
Warning! If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that
make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex
results.
If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on
which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about
assigning a color to a layer.
True Color
Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas
to specify a true color
Color Book
Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed
such as Pantone
If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color
name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book
such as Pantone 573
See Also
See Set the Current Color in the Users Guide. Also, see Control the Properties of Objects in the Users Guide.
174
Commands
System Variables
COLOR
COMPILE
Compiles shape files and PostScript font files
Before you can use AutoCAD shape files as fonts or shapes in a drawing, you
must compile or convert them into SHX files. You can then use LOAD to
insert the SHX files into a drawing. Compiling PostScript font PFB files
improves the loading speed of drawings that use them.
Command line: compile
AutoCAD displays the Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box.
AutoCAD compiles it into a file with this name, and automatically adds the
file name extension .shx.
See Also
For information about compiling PostScript font (PFB) files, see Assign Text
Fonts in the Users Guide. Also see Shapes and Shape Fonts in the Customization Guide.
Commands
shape file.
CONE
Creates a three-dimensional solid cone
A cone is a solid primitive with a circular or elliptical base tapering symmetrically to a point perpendicular to its base.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Cone
Command line: cone
COMPILE
175
Height
Apex
height
radius
Diameter
2
Apex
diameter
176
CONE
Elliptical
Creates a cone with an elliptical base.
1
Axis Endpoint
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its axes. Specify a second point
to define the diameter of one axis and a third point to specify the radius of
the other axis.
height
Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a
Height
Apex
Center
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its center point and the radius of
each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cone <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a
Height
Apex
height
CONE
177
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
Commands
CONVERT
Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier
Since Release 14, AutoCAD creates 2D polylines and associative hatches
using an optimized format that saves memory and disk space. Use CONVERT
to update hatches or polylines created in releases earlier than AutoCAD R14
or AutoCAD LT 97.
Command line: convert
Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] <All>: Enter h for hatches,
p for polylines, or a for both
Hatch
Polyline
All
178
CONVERT
hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS
since creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recommended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default,
the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old
format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older
drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.
Note Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old
format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices.
AutoCAD editing commands make no distinction between the two formats.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
CONVERTCTB
Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB)
Command line: convertctb
Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to
convert. The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new
location or name for the converted plot style table file.
CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named
plot style table, which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot
styles. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by
CONVERTCTB. The default location for the new named plot style table file is
in the AutoCAD Plot Styles folder. The default name for the new named plot
style table file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name.
CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique plot
properties, one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned the
same plot properties, and a default named plot style called NORMAL.
CONVERTCTB
179
For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the
same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the
named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which
assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the colordependent plot style table. However, suppose all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two colors, BLUE
and GREEN. If these colors each have unique plot properties, CONVERTCTB
creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL, the
default plot style; STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties of GREEN; STYLE
2, which assumes the plot properties of BLUE; and STYLE 3, which assumes the
plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors.
CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic
names such as STYLE 1, STYLE 2. You can modify these generic plot style
names in the the Plot Style Table Editor. Click the Edit button on the Plot
Device tab in the Page Setup dialog box. If you want to rename the plot
styles, you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts.
CONVERTPSTYLES
Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles
A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both.
CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent
plot styles to named plot styles, or from named plot styles to color-dependent plot styles, depending on which plot style method the drawing is
currently using.
For example, a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot properties to objects and layers by color. In other words, all objects with the same
color have the same plot properties. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing
to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent
of color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have
different plot properties.
When you convert a drawing, CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system
variable to the appropriate setting (1 = named, 0 = color-dependent).
Command line: convertpstyles
180
CONVERTPSTYLES
should select the named plot style table that was converted from the colordependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space
and to all layouts. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from
the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their
color-dependent plot style had. Drawing objects that had the same colordependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style
BYLAYER. Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was
different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same
properties that their color-dependent plot style had.
After a drawing is converted to named plot styles, you can change the named
plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model
space or layouts. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects.
CONVERTPSTYLES
181
COPY
Duplicates objects
Modify toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy Selection.
Command line: copy
Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER
Specify base point or displacement, or [Multiple]: Specify a point for a single
copy or enter m for multiple copies
Base Point or
Displacement
object selected
2
single copy
182
COPY
multiple copies
System Variables
COPYBASE
Copies objects with a specified base point
Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. The base point
enables you to position the copied objects precisely when pasting them
within the same drawing or into another drawing.
Edit menu: Copy with Base Point
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy with Base Point.
Command line: copybase
Specify base point:
Select objects:
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. Use PASTECLIP to move the
copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to
another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE,
AutoCAD places it relative to the specified base point.
COPYCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard
Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an AutoCAD drawing to another Windows application.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Copy
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy.
COPYBASE
183
Note You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing
area, AutoCAD copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on
the command line or in the text window, AutoCAD copies the selected text to
the Clipboard.
See Also
See Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Users Guide. Also see Link
and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
Windows metafile format of objects placed on the Clipboard and pasted into other applications is transparent.
COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard
The command line history is above the command line. Use scroll bars or
open the text window to see the whole history. You can use the Display tab
in the Options dialog box to change the number of lines that are displayed
in the command line window, or you can drag the top edge of the window
to change its size.
Command line: copyhist
AutoCAD copies the text to the Clipboard.
See Also
See Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window in the Users Guide.
Commands
tings.
184
COPYHIST
COPYLINK
Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications
Edit menu: Copy Link
Command line: copylink
COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object.
See Also
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
Commands
COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from
the drawing. OLELINKS edits links, updates objects, and
changes source files. PASTESPEC inserts data from the
Clipboard and controls the format of the data.
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes toolbars, buttons, and shortcut keys
Tools menu: Customize
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: customize
The Customize dialog box is displayed.
Note You can use -TOOLBAR to display, close, or position a toolbar from the
command line.
COPYLINK
185
Categories
Commands
186
CUSTOMIZE
Toolbars
Menu Group
New
Rename
Delete
Large Buttons
Show Tooltips on
Toolbars
Show Shortcut
Keys in Tooltip
CUSTOMIZE
187
188
Name
Description
Button Image
Edit
Macro Associated
with This Button
CUSTOMIZE
List of Button
Images
Apply
Reset
Toolbar
Associated with
This Flyout
Toolbar Preview
CUSTOMIZE
189
Apply
Reset
190
Categories
Commands
Menu Group
CUSTOMIZE
Press New
Shortcut Key
Assign
Remove
Show All
CUSTOMIZE
191
192
Tool Palettes
Up
Down
New
Rename
Delete
Import
Export
CUSTOMIZE
Toolbar Name
Specifies a name for the new toolbar.
Button Image
Displays the button at its actual size.
CUSTOMIZE
193
Editing Tools
Provides tools for editing the button image.
Pencil
Line
Circle
Erase
Color Palette
Sets the current color used by the editing tools.
More
Opens the True Color tab in the Select Color dialog box. If you select a true
color, it is displayed in the color swatch above the button.
Editing Area
Provides a close-up view of the button image for editing.
Grid
Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.
Clear
Clears the editing area.
Open
Opens an existing button image for editing. Button images are stored as
bitmap (BMP) files.
Undo
Undoes the last action.
Save
Saves the customized button image.
194
CUSTOMIZE
Save As
Saves the customized button image using a different name or a different
location.
Reset
Resets the button image to its default appearance.
See Also
See Toolbars or Tool Palettesin the Users Guide.
Commands
palettes.
System Variables
CUTCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard and removes the objects from the drawing
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Cut
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Cut.
Command line: cutclip
Select objects:
CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from
the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or
drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP
does not create OLE link information.
See Also
See Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Users Guide. Also see Link
and Embed Data (OLE)in the Users Guide.
Commands
CUTCLIP
195
CYLINDER
Creates a three-dimensional solid cylinder
A cylinder is a solid primitive similar to an extruded circle or ellipse but without a taper.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Cylinder
Command line: cylinder
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Specify center point for base of cylinder or [Elliptical] <0,0,0>: Specify a center
point (1), enter e, or press ENTER
Center Point
1
Radius
Defines the radius of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c
Height
Center of Other
End
196
CYLINDER
2
height
radius
Diameter
Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify diameter for base of cylinder:
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c
Height
Center of Other
End
2
height
diameter
Elliptical
Creates a cylinder with an elliptical base.
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder or [Center]: Specify a point
(1) or enter c
CYLINDER
197
Axis Endpoint
Defines the axes of the elliptical base of the cylinder.
Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)
The second point defines the diameter of one axis. A third point defines the
radius of the other axis.
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c
Height
Center of Other
End
Specify a distance
4
height
Center
Defines the elliptical base of the cylinder by its center point and the radius
of each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cylinder <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance (4) or
enter c
1
3
198
CYLINDER
Height
Center of Other
End
See Also
See Create 3D Solids and Create Surfaces in the Users Guide.
Commands
CYLINDER
199
200
DBCCLOSE
Closes the dbConnect Manager
Tools menu: Choose dbConnect when the dbConnect Manager is open.
Command line: dbcclose
DBCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager and removes the dbConnect menu
DBCONNECT
Provides an AutoCAD interface to external database tables
DBCONNECT starts the dbConnect Manager, from which you can view and
edit database tables, execute Structured Query Language (SQL) queries, and
link table records to graphical objects.
DBCONNECT replaces the ASE commands that were available in previous
releases of AutoCAD.
Tools menu: dbConnect
Command line: dbconnect
AutoCAD displays the dbConnect Manager and adds the dbConnect menu
to the menu bar.
The four primary interfaces (the dbConnect Manager, the Data View window,
the Query Editor, and the Link Select dialog box) are described first, followed
by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order.
The Column Values dialog box, a sub-dialog box of the Query Editor, is
described in the Query Editor section. The section describing each dialog box
contains a list of methods that you can use to access it.
DBCCLOSE
201
dbConnect Manager
Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature. By default, the
dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the AutoCAD
drawing area.
drawing node
link template
label template
query
data sources
node
table
data source
When you open the dbConnect Manager, a small red X is displayed in the
lower right corner of each database and data object. The X indicates that
these objects are currently unconnected. To connect to a database or data
object, double-click it in the dbConnect Manager.
202
DBCONNECT
New Label
Template
Execute Query
New Link
Template
New Query
View Table
Edit Table
Execute Query
New Query
Displays the New Query dialog box (see page 241). This
button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or query is selected. If a query is selected, you
can use this button to display the Query Editor (see
page 215), in which you can edit the query.
New Link
Template
New Label
Template
DBCONNECT
203
Import Template
Set
Opens the Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228),
in which you can save all queries stored in the drawing
to an external file. The exported query set is saved with
the file extension .dbq.
Opens the Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230),
in which you can import a set of queries stored in an
external file with the file extension .dbq.
Show Labels
Hide Labels
Reload Labels
204
View Table
Edit Table
DBCONNECT
Edit
Delete
Duplicate
Rename
New Query
Link Select
New Label
Template
Show Labels
Hide Labels
Delete Links
Delete Labels
Synchronize
DBCONNECT
205
Reload
Execute
Delete Links
206
Connect
Disconnect
Synchronize
Configure
View Table
Edit Table
New Link
Template
DBCONNECT
New Label
Template
New Query
Edit Table
DBCONNECT
207
208
Link
Create
Freestanding
Label
Create Attached
Label
DBCONNECT
DBCONNECT
209
column headers
grid cells
grid headers
record headers
210
Sort
Opens the Sort dialog box (see page 243), in which you
can select a combination of up to five columns to use in
specifying a sort order for the Data View.
Hide
Unhide All
DBCONNECT
Freeze
Unfreeze All
Align
Find
Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. Find is limited to
the values stored in the currently selected column.
Replace
Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace is limited
to the values stored in the currently selected column.
Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Link
Find
Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. The Find shortcut
menu option limits its search to records contained in
the same column as the currently selected cell.
DBCONNECT
211
Replace
Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace limits its
search to records contained in the same column as the
currently selected cell. Available only for tables that are
opened in Edit mode.
Edit
Cut
Copy
Paste
Clear
212
View Linked
Objects
Link
Copy
Delete Record
DBCONNECT
Restore
Unhide All
Columns
Unfreeze All
Columns
Print Preview
Format
Navigation Controls
Cycle quickly through the records in the Data View window. The following
controls are available:
First Button
Previous Button
Next Button
Last Button
DBCONNECT
213
First button
Last button
Previous button
Next button
record
number
214
Next Page
Prev Page
Two Page
Zoom In
DBCONNECT
Zoom Out
Close
Query Editor
Consists of a series of four tabs that you can use to build and execute queries.
If you are creating a new query, the New Query dialog box (see page 241) is
displayed first. You can open the Query Editor using the following methods:
dbConnect buttons: Select a table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
Data View buttons: Choose the Query or Return to Query button in the Data
View window.
dbConnect menu: Queries New Query on an External Table, New Query
on a Link Template, or Edit Query. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which
you can select a database object to query.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a table or link template in the dbConnect
Manager and choose New Query, or right-click a query and choose Edit.
Field
Lists the fields from the current table, from which you
can select one to apply to the query.
DBCONNECT
215
Operator
Value
Look Up Values
Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.
Indicate Records
in Data View
Indicate Objects
in Drawing
Execute
Close
Store
Options
216
DBCONNECT
Field
Lists the fields from the current table, from which you
can select one to apply to the query.
From
Look Up Values
(From, Through)
Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.
Through
Indicate Records
in Data View
Indicate Objects
in Drawing
Execute
Close
Store
Options
DBCONNECT
217
218
Parenthetical
Grouping
Field
Operator
DBCONNECT
Value
Logical
Fields in Table
Displays a list of available fields from the current table, from which you can
specify the fields to display in the Data View window when the query is executed. If you dont specify any fields to display, the query displays all fields
from the table. Double-clicking in a field in this list or selecting a field and
choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of those that are displayed in the Data View window by the returned query. You can also drag
fields to add them to the Show Fields and Sort By areas.
Show Fields
Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View window when the
query is executed. To remove a field from this list, drag it from the list to any
area on the Query Builder tab.
Add (Show Fields)
Adds a field to include in the Data View window display of the returned query.
To add a field, select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add.
Sort By
Specifies a sort order for the returned query. The first field added to the Sort
By list is the primary sort. To change the sort order for a field, drag the field
to a new location in the Sort By list. By default, fields are added to the Sort
By list in an ascending sort order. To apply a descending sort, select a field and
choose the Ascending/Descending Sort button, or double-click in the field.
To remove a field, drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab
or select the field and press DELETE .
Add (Sort By)
Adds a field to the Sort By list. To add a sort field, select it in the Fields in
Table list window and then choose Add. Repeat for additional fields that you
want to apply to the sort.
DBCONNECT
219
Ascending/Descending Sort
Reverses the sort order for the currently selected field. If an ascending sort
order is currently applied, choosing this button reverses the sort to descending order, and vice versa.
Indicate Records in Data View
Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window.
Indicate Objects in Drawing
Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current
AutoCAD drawing.
Execute
Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store
Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options
Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225).
220
DBCONNECT
Table
Add (Table)
Fields
Add (Fields)
Operator
Add (Operator)
Values
Add (Values)
[...] Button
Indicate Records
in Data View
Indicate Objects
in Drawing
Execute
Close
Store
Check
DBCONNECT
221
Options
222
DBCONNECT
The Link Select dialog box contains the Quick Query, Range Query, and
Query Builder tabs from the Query Editor (see page 215), and the following
additional controls.
Do
Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. The
following operators are available:
Select
Union
Intersect
Subtract A - B
DBCONNECT
223
Subtract B - A
Using
Lists available link templates that you can apply to the current selection set.
Use Query
Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns
a selection set to the Link Select operation.
Select in Drawing
Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that
you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link
Select operation.
Execute/Select
Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link
Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the AutoCAD drawing. If the Use Query option is selected, the Execute button is displayed. If
the Select in Drawing option is selected, the Select button is displayed. After
choosing the Execute or Select button, you can apply more queries or select
additional graphical objects to further refine your selection set.
Venn Diagram
Displays a diagram of the currently selected Do operation.
Reset
Clears the Link Select dialog box and discards all previous actions so that you
can begin a new Link Select operation.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box and discards all actions.
Finish
Completes the Link Select operation and closes the dialog box. Returns either
a selection set of AutoCAD graphical objects, a subset of Data View records,
or both, depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation.
Status Bar
Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select
operation. The current drawing and table are displayed, as well as the
number of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link
Select parameters.
224
DBCONNECT
Data Source
Name
Data Sources
OK
DBCONNECT
225
Automatically
Zoom Drawing
Zoom Factor
226
Show Only
Indicated Records
DBCONNECT
Mark Indicated
Records
Marking Color
Query Options
Specifies options for SQL query processing.
Send as Native
SQL
Automatically
Store
Accumulate Options
Controls the accumulation of selection and record sets.
Accumulate
Selection Set in
Drawing
Accumulate
Record Set in
Data View
DBCONNECT
227
Include Fields
Specifies the table fields to export. The key fields for the
selected link template are included automatically.
AutoCAD also exports the handle of the object that
each link is associated with.
File Name
Save as Type
Specifies the file format for the exported links. You can
save the file in the native database format of the current
table or as a comma-delimited or space-delimited text
file.
Link Template
Name
228
File Name
Save as Type
Specifies the file format for the query set. Query sets are
always saved with the .dbq file extension.
DBCONNECT
Save as Type
Match Case
Find Next
Direction
DBCONNECT
229
Outline
Size
Effects
Textcolor
Preview
230
DBCONNECT
File Name
Files of Type
File Name
Files of Type
DBCONNECT
231
Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template
list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create
Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the
selected table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box (see
page 240) is displayed.
dbConnect menu: Templates New Label Template. Select a link template
in the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose
Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template.
Pointing device: Double-click a label template in the dbConnect Manager.
This method opens the Label Template dialog box directly without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box.
Field
Add
Table
232
DBCONNECT
Start
Specifies the start point for the leader object. The point
is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical
object that the label is attached to. The Start option has
no effect on freestanding labels, as they have no
associated leader object.
Leader Offset
Tip Offset
DBCONNECT
233
You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Templates Label Template Properties
Template Name
Data Source
Catalog
Schema
Table
Fields
234
DBCONNECT
Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from
AutoCAD 2000 and later, the link conversion process requires that you specify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension (ASE) link values to the
new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later. For example, you must identify
the environment used by a particular link in Release 14 and specify the corresponding data source that you want substituted for this environment in
AutoCAD 2000 and later. Similar mappings must be established between all
old ASE link values and the new values that you want substituted for them.
Link Format
Specifies the format of the link that you are converting. Different fields are
displayed depending on whether you select R12 or R13/R14.
DBCONNECT
235
Database
Table
Catalog
Schema
Table
236
Data Source
Lists available data sources that you can select for the
converted link.
Catalog
Schema
Table
Link Template
Lists available link templates that you can select for the
converted link.
DBCONNECT
OK
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the
dialog box.
Apply
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file but keeps the
dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without converting any links.
Link Manager
Edits the values of the key fields for a selected linked object. You can open
the Link Manager using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links Link Manager. Select a linked graphical object.
Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object, and
then choose Link Link Manager.
Link Templates
Key
DBCONNECT
237
Value
Displays all key values that are defined for the selected
link. To display a list of values for a specific field, click
a Value cell and choose [...].
Delete
238
DBCONNECT
Template Name
Table
Key Fields
Data Source
Catalog
Schema
Table
Keys
DBCONNECT
239
Start with
Template
240
DBCONNECT
After you enter a name for the link template and choose Continue, the Link
Template dialog box (see page 238) opens, in which you specify the key fields
that the link uses.
New Link
Template Name
Start with
Template
Existing Query
Names
DBCONNECT
241
Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View
window and choose Replace.
Find What
Replace With
Match Case
Find Next
Replace
Replace All
242
Database Object
List
OK/Continue
DBCONNECT
Tree View
Window
OK/Continue
DBCONNECT
243
Ascending
Descending
Then By
Reset
Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort
order so that you can specify a new sort order.
244
DBCONNECT
Errors
Description
Fix
Delete
Close
Indicate Drawing
Objects
See Also
Commands
DBCONNECT
245
DBLCLKEDIT
Controls double-click behavior
Command line: dblclkedit
Enter double-click editing mode [ON/OFF] <ON>:
If double-click editing is turned on, one of several dialog boxes may be displayed, depending on the object type that is double clicked.
When you double-click most objects, the Properties palette is displayed.
Double-clicking some types of objects displays specialized editors that are
more powerful, convenient, or frequently used. Objects that display
specialized editors when double-clicked include
DBLIST
Lists database information for each object in the drawing dblist
The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. AutoCAD pauses when the window fills with information. Press ENTER
to resume output, or press ESC to cancel.
246
DBLCLKEDIT
DDEDIT
Edits text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute
definition is a template for creating an attribute. A feature control frame is a
container for the tolerance information for a single dimension.
Text toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Mtext Edit or Text Edit.
Command line: ddedit
Select an annotation object or [Undo]:
Object Selection
DDEDIT
247
Undo
248
Tag
Prompt
Default
DDEDIT
See Also
See Change Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects
Format menu: Point Style
Command line: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use)
The Point Style dialog box is displayed.
DDPTYPE
249
Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen
or in absolute units. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the PDSIZE
system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Set Size Relative
to Screen
Set Size in
Absolute Units
Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify
under Point Size. AutoCAD displays points larger or
smaller when you zoom in or out.
See Also
See Draw Reference Points in the Users Guide.
Commands
POINT creates point objects. DIVIDE uses points as markers in an object divided into equal parts. MEASURE
places markers on an object at specified intervals.
System Variables
DDVPOINT
Sets the three-dimensional viewing direction
View menu: 3D Views Viewpoint Presets
Command line: ddvpoint
The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed.
250
DDVPOINT
Relative to UCS
From
Specifies viewing angles.
X Axis
XY Plane
You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm
indicates the new angle. The red arm indicates the current angle. Specify an
angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the
bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that
region.
DDVPOINT
251
See Also
See View a Parallel Projection in 3D in the Users Guide.
Commands
DELAY
Provides a timed pause within a script
Command line: delay (or 'delay for transparent use)
Enter delay time (in milliseconds):
milliseconds
Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays
the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.
See Also
See Create Command Scripts in the Customization Guide.
DETACHURL
Removes hyperlinks in a drawing
Command line: detachurl
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection
Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the
polyline is deleted. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer.
See Also
See Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing in the Users Guide.
Commands
252
DELAY
Description
EXIT
REDRAW
STYLE
UNDO or U
Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any
new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning
mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.
253
The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the
rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these
Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents
254
Dimensioning mode
command
Equivalent
command
ALIGNED
DIMALIGNED
ANGULAR
DIMANGULAR
BASELINE
DIMBASELINE
CENTER
DIMCENTER
CONTINUE
DIMCONTINUE
DIAMETER
DIMDIAMETER
HOMETEXT
DIMEDIT Home
HORIZONTAL
DIMLINEAR Horizontal
LEADER
LEADER
NEWTEXT
DIMEDIT New
OBLIQUE
DIMEDIT Oblique
ORDINATE
DIMORDINATE
OVERRIDE
DIMOVERRIDE
RADIUS
DIMRADIUS
RESTORE
-DIMSTYLE Restore
ROTATED
DIMLINEAR Rotated
SAVE
-DIMSTYLE Save
STATUS
-DIMSTYLE Status
TEDIT
DIMTEDIT
TROTATE
DIMEDIT Rotate
Equivalent
command
UPDATE
-DIMSTYLE Apply
VARIABLES
-DIMSTYLE Variables
VERTICAL
DIMLINEAR Vertical
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Aligned
Command line: dimaligned
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point for manual
extension lines, or press ENTER for automatic extension lines
After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following
prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
DIMALIGNED
255
2
point specification
dimension line
location designated
Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc
segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly
scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance
specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New,
Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE).
AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
offset from origin
(stored in DIMEXO)
object selected
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of
the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the
first extension line.
256
DIMALIGNED
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control
codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1027.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Dimensions and Tolerances, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
DIMALIGNED
257
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
Location prompt.
before Angle
See Also
See Create Aligned Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
origin points.
after Angle
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Angular
Command line: dimangular
Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or press
ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points
After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Arc Selection
Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints
become the origin points of the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the
intersection of the dimension line.
angle vertex
258
DIMANGULAR
Circle Selection
Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center
of the circle is the angle vertex.
The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and
does not have to lie on the circle.
Line Selection
Defines the angle using two lines.
Select second line:
angle displayed
depends on
cursor position
AutoCAD determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle
and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line
spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, AutoCAD adds extension lines as needed
to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees.
Three-Point Specification
Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
2
3
DIMANGULAR
259
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1027.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Dimensions and Tolerances, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
See Also
See Create Angular Dimensions in the Users Guide.
260
DIMANGULAR
Commands
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous
dimension or a selected dimension
DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same
baseline. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimension line and to avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. The baseline
increment value is specified in Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab
of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see page
290). AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline
dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Baseline
Command line: dimbaseline
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to
select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension.
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that
was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or
angular, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
DIMBASELINE
261
Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the
Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To select
another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press ENTER .
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
Undo
Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.
262
DIMBASELINE
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
base for the baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt.
See Also
See Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimension format. MTEXT controls how paragraph text is
displayed.
System Variables
baseline dimension.
DIMCENTER
Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Center Mark
Command line: dimcenter
center mark
centerlines
See Also
See Create Radial Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
centerlines.
DIMCENTER
263
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the
previous dimension or a selected dimension
DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter
dimensions that add up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning
is also known as chain dimensioning.
When you create linear continued dimensions, the first extension line is
suppressed and the placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader
line. These appear as overrides for the continued dimension (the DIMSE1
system variable is on, and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1).
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Continue
Command line: dimcontinue
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to
select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the
continued dimension.
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that
was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or
angular, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
264
DIMCONTINUE
Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the continued dimension and redisplays
the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To
select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for
the continued dimension, press ENTER .
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
Undo
Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC .
See Also
See Create Baseline and Continued Dimensionsin the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMCONTINUE
265
DIMDIAMETER
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs
DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on
the size of the circle or arc, the options set for the dimension style (see
DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. The dimension style controls
center marks and centerlines. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark or a
centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. AutoCAD
stores the setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system
variable.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the diameter line is greater than
15 degrees from horizontal and is outside the circle or arc, AutoCAD draws a
hook line one arrowhead long next to the dimension text, as shown in the
first two illustrations.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Diameter
Command line: dimdiameter
Select arc or circle:
AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter
symbol () in front of it. The position of the cursor determines the location
of the dimension line. As you move the cursor, the dimension moves around
or inside the circle or arc.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
266
DIMDIAMETER
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1027.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
Dimensions and Tolerances, in the Users Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension
text.
Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
Location prompt.
DIMDIAMETER
267
See Also
See Create Radial Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
DIMDISASSOCIATE
Removes associativity from selected dimensions
DIMDISASSOCIATE converts selected dimensions that are associated with
geometric objects into non-associative dimensions.
ENTER
DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than
the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimensions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these
dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and
the number that are disassociated.
See Also
See Associative Dimensions in the Users Guide.
268
Commands
System Variables
DIMDISASSOCIATE
DIMEDIT
Edits dimensions
DIMEDIT affects dimension text and extension lines on one or more dimension objects. The Home, New, and Rotate options affect dimension text. The
Oblique option controls the angle of extension lines.
Dimension toolbar:
Command line: dimedit
Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>: Enter
an option or press ENTER
Home
before Home
after Home
before New
after New
DIMEDIT
269
rotated text
270
DIMEDIT
Enter an
See Also
See Modify Dimension Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMLINEAR
Creates linear dimensions
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Linear
Command line: dimlinear
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press
ENTER to select an object to dimension
After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension,
the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/
Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option
DIMLINEAR
271
2
point specification
dimension line
location designated
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1027.
272
DIMLINEAR
Text
Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 90 degrees, enter 90.
before Angle
after Angle
DIMLINEAR
273
Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
Dimension Line
Location
Mtext, Text,
Angle
Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
Dimension Line
Location
Mtext, Text,
Angle
Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Specify angle of dimension line <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
274
DIMLINEAR
Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, AutoCAD dimensions only the
individual line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, AutoCAD uses the line or arc endpoints as the
origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and
Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
See DIMSTYLE. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
offset from origin
(DIMEXO system
variable)
object selected
If you select a circle, AutoCAD uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of
the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the
north or south quadrant point, AutoCAD draws a horizontal dimension.
When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant
point, AutoCAD draws a vertical dimension.
See Also
See Create Linear Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimension format and behavior. MTEXT controls how
AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs.
System Variables
DIMLINEAR
275
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate point dimensions
Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a
simple leader line. These dimensions are also known as datum dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the current user coordinate system (UCS) to determine the
measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a direction orthogonal
to the axes of the current UCS. The absolute value of the coordinate is used
according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Ordinate
Command line: dimordinate
Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point
or enter an option
Leader Endpoint
Specification
Xdatum
Ydatum
Xdatum
Ydatum
276
DIMORDINATE
Mtext
Text
DIMORDINATE
277
Angle
See Also
See Create Ordinate Dimensions in the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimension format and behavior. MTEXT controls how
AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs. ORTHO
constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical directions or aligns movement with the current grid
rotation angle.
DIMOVERRIDE
Overrides dimensioning system variables
DIMOVERRIDE overrides dimensioning system variable settings that are asso-
ciated with a dimension object but doesn't affect the current dimension style.
You can also use the command to clear overrides from dimensions.
Dimension menu: Override
Command line: dimoverride
Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name
of a dimension variable, or enter c
Dimension
Variable Name
to Override
278
DIMOVERRIDE
See Also
See Override a Dimension Style in the Users Guide.
Commands
DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimension format and behavior.
System Variables
For a list of dimension system variables, see Dimension Variables Quick Reference.
DIMRADIUS
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs
A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at
the arc or circle end. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system
variable is not set to 0.
DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size
of the circle or arc, the options in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. AutoCAD
stores the values of the options in the DIMUPT, DIMTOFL, DIMATFIT, DIMTIH,
DIMTOH, DIMJUST, and DIMTAD system variables.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is
greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, AutoCAD draws a hook line, also
called a dogleg or landing, one arrowhead long, next to the dimension text.
DIMRADIUS
279
AutoCAD measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front
of it.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Radius
Command line: dimradius
Select arc or circle:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
280
Dimension Line
Location
Mtext
DIMRADIUS
Angle
DIMRADIUS
281
DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimension format and behavior.
System Variables
centerlines.
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects
With DIMREASSOCIATE, a nonassociative dimension can be associated to geometric objects, or the existing associations in an associative dimension can
be changed.
Dimension menu: Reassociate Dimensions
Command line: dimreassociate
Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association
points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is
displayed for each association point prompt. If the definition point of the
current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears
as an X; but if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X
inside a box.
Note The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.
Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were
already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed
dimensions.
The prompts for the different types of dimensions are
282
DIMREASSOCIATE
Linear
Aligned
Angular (Three
Point)
Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] <next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a
circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify first angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object
snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify second angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object
snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any
Angular (Two
Line)
Diameter
Leader
Ordinate
Radius
DIMREASSOCIATE
283
System Variables
DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions
Command line: dimregen
The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are
updated.
Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in
three cases:
See Also
See Associative Dimensions in the Users Guide.
284
Commands
System Variables
DIMREGEN
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles
A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the
appearance of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all
relevant dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appearance of any dimension.
Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings.
For example, within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for
radius dimensions and another secondary style for angular dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the type of dimension you
create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the
primary dimension-style settings are used.
Styles toolbar:
Format menu: Dimension Style
Dimension menu: Style
Command line: dimstyle
The Dimension Style Manager is displayed.
If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, AutoCAD presents options
on the command line (see page 309).
DIMSTYLE
285
Current Dimstyle
Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD assigns styles to all dimensions. If you do not change the current style, AutoCAD assigns the default
STANDARD style to dimensions.
Styles
Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted.
The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. To make a
style current, select it and choose Set Current.
Unless you select Dont List Styles in Xrefs, AutoCAD displays dimension
styles in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally
referenced named objects. (See Overview of External References in the
Users Guide.) While you cannot change, rename, or make current externally
referenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them.
Right-click in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to
set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a
style that is current or in use in the current drawing.
286
DIMSTYLE
List
Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed.
All Styles
Styles in Use
Set Current
Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
New
Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you can
define new dimension styles. See New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes on page 288.
Modify
Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify
dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New
Dimension Style dialog box. See New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes on page 288.
Override
Displays the Override Current Style dialog box, in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those
in the New Dimension Style dialog box. See New, Modify, and Override
Dimension Style Dialog Boxes on page 288. AutoCAD displays overrides as
unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles list.
Compare
Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box (see page 308), which
compares the properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of
one style.
DIMSTYLE
287
Start With
Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new
style, you change only the properties that differ from
the properties you start with.
Use For
Continue
288
DIMSTYLE
Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog
box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension
Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing
dimension style rather than creating a new one.
The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option.
Dimension Lines
Sets the dimension line properties.
Color
Sets the color for the dimension line. You can select
colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors,
True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 169). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRD system variable)
DIMSTYLE
289
Lineweight
Extend Beyond
Ticks
Baseline Spacing
Suppress
spacing
Extension Lines
Controls the appearance of the extension lines.
290
Color
Sets the color for the extension line. You can select
colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors,
True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 169). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRE system variable.)
Lineweight
Extend Beyond
Dim Lines
DIMSTYLE
extension
Offset From
Origin
offset
Suppress
Arrowheads
Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads.
1st
2nd
DIMSTYLE
291
Leader
Arrow Size
Size
292
DIMSTYLE
Text Appearance
Controls the dimension text format and size.
Text Style
Text Color
Sets the color for the dimension text. You can select
colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors,
True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 169). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRT system variable)
DIMSTYLE
293
Text Height
Fraction Height
Scale
Draw Frame
Around Text
Text Placement
Controls the placement of dimension text.
Vertical Position
294
DIMSTYLE
Centered
Horizontal
Position
Above
Outside
JIS
centered
1
2
first extension
line
1
2
second extension
line
DIMSTYLE
295
1
2
text over first extension line
1
2
text over second extension line
DIMGAP = 0
DIMGAP = 0.1
Text Alignment
Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether
it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables)
Horizontal
Aligned With
Dimension Line
ISO Standard
296
DIMSTYLE
Fit Options
Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available
between the extension lines.
When space is available, AutoCAD places text and arrowheads between the
extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the
Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables)
Either the Text
or the Arrows,
Whichever Fits
Best
DIMSTYLE
297
Arrows
Text
Suppress Arrows
If They Dont Fit
Inside Extension
Lines
Text Placement
Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system
variable)
298
Beside the
Dimension Line
Over the
Dimension Line,
with a Leader
DIMSTYLE
Over the
Dimension Line,
Without a Leader
Scale Dimension
to Layout (Paper
Space)
Fine Tuning
Sets additional fit options.
Place Text
Manually When
Dimensioning
DIMSTYLE
299
Linear Dimensions
Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Unit Format
Precision
Fraction Format
Decimal
Separator
Round Off
300
DIMSTYLE
Suffix
Measurement
Scale
DIMSTYLE
301
Zero Suppression
Angular Dimensions
Sets the current angle format for angular dimensions.
Units Format
Precision
Zero Suppression
302
DIMSTYLE
Precision
Multiplier for
Alternate Units
DIMSTYLE
303
Prefix
Suffix
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. This value is stored in the DIMALTZ system variable.
304
Leading
Trailing
DIMSTYLE
0 Feet
0 Inches
Placement
Controls the placement of alternate units. These values are stored in the
DIMAPOST system variable.
After Primary
Units
Below Primary
Units
DIMSTYLE
305
Tolerance Format
Controls the tolerance format.
Method
306
Precision
Upper Value
Lower Value
DIMSTYLE
Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio
of the tolerance height to the main dimension text
height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system
variable.
Vertical Position
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string
conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. This
value is stored in the DIMTZIN system variable.
Leading
Trailing
Feet
Inches
DIMSTYLE
307
Zero Suppression
Print to Clipboard
button
Compare
308
DIMSTYLE
With
Print to Clipboard
button
Save
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension
style.
Enter name for new dimension style or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimension style using the name you enter. The new dimension style becomes the
current one.
If you enter the name of an existing dimension style, AutoCAD prompts:
That name is already in use, redefine it? <N>:
DIMSTYLE
309
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
save and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the
Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting
of the compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card
characters, or press ENTER to list all dimension styles
After listing the named dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous
prompt.
Restore
Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimension style.
Enter dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?, or
press ENTER to select a dimension
Name
Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style.
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
restore and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at
the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings
that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the
compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style.
Select dimension:
310
DIMSTYLE
Status
Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. After listing the
variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
Variables
Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected
dimensions without modifying the current settings.
Enter a dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?,
or press ENTER to select dimensions
Name
Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name
you enter. After listing the variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the
current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ, with the
current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in
the second column. After displaying the differences, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
?List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension
object you select.
Select dimension:
Apply
Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimension objects, permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied
to these objects.
Select objects:
AutoCAD does not update the dimension line spacing between existing baseline dimensions (see the DIMDLI system variable), nor do dimension text
variable settings update existing leader text.
DIMSTYLE
311
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Align Text
Command line: dimtedit
Select dimension: Select a dimension object
AutoCAD prompts you for the new location of the dimension text.
Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Location for
Dimension Text
312
DIMTEDIT
dimension text
positioned by cursor
dimension text
positioned by angle
Left
before Left
Right
after Left
before Right
after Right
Center
Home
before Home
Angle
after Home
before Angle
after Angle 90
The center point of the text does not change. If the text
moves or the dimension is regenerated, AutoCAD keeps
the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle
of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.
See Also
See Modify Dimension Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
dragging.
DIMTEDIT
313
DIST
Measures the distance and angle between two points
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Distance
Command line: dist (or 'dist for transparent use)
Specify first point: Specify a point
Specify second point: Specify a point
Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle,
Angle from XY plane = angle
Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z
AutoCAD reports the true 3D distance between points. The angle in the XY
plane is relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative
to the current XY plane. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or
second point if you omit the Z coordinate value.
AutoCAD displays the distance using the current units format.
angle from
XY plane
delta Z
angle in
XY plane
delta X
delta Y
See Also
See Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
DIVIDE
Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object
DIVIDE marks off a specified number of equal lengths on a selected object by
placing point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of the object.
Objects that you can divide include arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs,
polylines, and splines.
314
DIST
Number of Segments
Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects.
The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Point Display mode
(PDMODE) has been set such that the points can be seen.
select polyline
Block
Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object.
Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the
drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
Yes
No
block aligned
DIVIDE
315
See Also
See Divide an Object into Equal Segments in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
point objects.
DONUT
Draws filled circles and rings
inside
diameter
outside
diameter
polylines.
System Variables
DRAGMODE
Controls the way AutoCAD displays dragged objects
You can draw new objects dynamically and drag them into position on the
screen. You can also drag existing objects with many editing commands.
With some computer configurations, dragging can be time consuming. Use
DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.
316
DONUT
On
Off
Auto
DRAGMODE on
DRAGMODE off
See Also
System Variables
DRAWORDER
Changes the display order of images and other objects
DRAWORDER changes the drawing and plotting order of any object in the
Under Object
DRAWORDER
317
Front
Back
When you select multiple objects for reordering, AutoCAD maintains the
relative display order of the objects selected. The selection method has no
impact on drawing order.
The command terminates once you reorder an object. The command does
not continue to prompt for additional objects to reorder.
System Variables
DSETTINGS
Specifies settings for Snap mode, grid, and polar and object snap tracking
DSETTINGS specifies the settings for a number of drafting aids to help you
draw more quickly and precisely. Settings include Snap mode, the grid, object
snaps, and polar and object snap tracking.
318
DSETTINGS
Snap On
Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking
Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9 , or by using the SNAPMODE system
variable.
Snap
Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified
intervals.
Snap X Spacing
Snap Y Spacing
Angle
X Base
DSETTINGS
319
Y Base
Polar Spacing
Controls the PolarSnap increment distance.
Polar Distance
Grid On
Turns the grid dots on or off. You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by
clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7 , or by using the GRIDMODE
system variable.
Grid
Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances.
Note The limits of the dot grid are controlled by the LIMITS command.
Grid X Spacing
Grid Y Spacing
320
DSETTINGS
PolarSnap
Polar Tracking On
Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by
pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Polar Angle Settings
Sets the angles used with polar tracking.
Increment Angle
DSETTINGS
321
Additional Angles
New
Note Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and
object snap tracking on and off.
Polar Angle Measurement
Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured.
322
Absolute
Relative to Last
Segment
DSETTINGS
Object Snap On
Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under
Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system
variable)
Object Snap Tracking On
Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor
can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn
on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable)
Object Snap Modes
Specifies the running object snap modes. Select one or more options.
Endpoint
DSETTINGS
323
selection point
snap point
Midpoint
selection point
snap point
Center
selection point
snap point
Node
Quadrant
snap point
selection point
Intersection
324
DSETTINGS
Note You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time.
Extension
Insertion
snap point
Perpendicular
selection point
DSETTINGS
325
Tangent
selection point
Apparent
Intersection
326
DSETTINGS
Select All
Clear All
Options
Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633). You
cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box
if you are running DSETTINGS transparently.
See Also
For more information, see Restrict Cursor Movement and Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps) in the Users Guide.
Commands
DSETTINGS
327
DSVIEWER
Opens the Aerial View window
The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. It displays a view of the entire
drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly locate and move to a
specific area. With the Aerial View window open, you can zoom and pan
without choosing a menu option or entering a command.
In paper space, the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects,
including viewport borders. Real-time updating of the AutoCAD window
from the Aerial View window is not available in paper space.
View menu: Aerial View
Command line: dsviewer
The Aerial View window is displayed.
Global
Zoom In
Zoom Out
View box
328
DSVIEWER
When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window, the Zoom
Out menu option and button are unavailable. When the current view nearly
fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu option and button are
unavailable. If both of these conditions exist at the same time, such as after
using ZOOM Extents, both options are unavailable. All of the menu options
are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in
the Aerial View window.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Global
DSVIEWER
329
Dynamic Update
Realtime Zoom
See Also
See Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window in the Users Guide.
330
DSVIEWER
DVIEW
Defines parallel projection or perspective views
To help you view a model from any point in space, DVIEW uses a camera-target metaphor. The line of sight, or viewing direction, is the line between the
camera and the target.
DVIEW uses objects you select or a special block named DVIEWBLOCK to display a preview image. The preview image shows the changes you make in the
view. When you end the command, AutoCAD regenerates the drawing based
on the view you set.
Transparent ZOOM, DSVIEWER, PAN, and scroll bars are not available in
DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM
and PAN, DSVIEWER, and scroll bars are not available while that view is
current.
target
camera
plan view
3D perspective view
Object Selection
Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. Selecting
too many objects slows image dragging and updating.
DVIEW
331
DVIEWBLOCK
If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt, AutoCAD uses DVIEWBLOCK
for the preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a
111-unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view
(moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view).
graphics cursor
Point Specification
Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing
device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction
changes about the target point as you move the pointing device.
Enter direction and magnitude angles: Enter angles between 0 degrees and 360
degrees, or specify a point with your pointing device
Enter both angles, separated by a comma. The angles must be positive. The
direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the magnitude angle
determines how far the view rolls.
332
DVIEW
Camera
Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target
point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
angle, or press ENTER
Camera Location
Enter Angle in XY
Plane from X Axis
DVIEW
333
camera at A
plan view
camera rotated to B
Target
Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. The
effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one
vantage point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
angle, or press ENTER
334
DVIEW
Enter Angle in XY
Plane from X Axis
target at A
camera
plan view
target at B
DVIEW
335
Toggle (Angle
From)
Distance
Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This
option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the
camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. AutoCAD prompts for the new
camera-to-target distance.
Specify new camera-target distance <current>: Enter a distance or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x,
with 1x representing the current distance. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the distance between camera and target. Moving it to the left
decreases that distance. To turn off perspective viewing, choose the Off
option from the main DVIEW prompt.
If the target and camera points are close together, or if you specify a longfocal-length lens, you might see very little of your drawing when you specify
a new distance. If you see little or none of your drawing, try the maximum
scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. To magnify the drawing without
turning perspective viewing on, use the Zoom option of DVIEW (see page
338).
336
DVIEW
camera at A
plan view
camera at B
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight
relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant.
Points
Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use
XYZ point filters. You must specify these points in a nonperspective view. If
perspective viewing is on, AutoCAD turns it off while you specify new
camera and target locations, and then redisplays the preview image in
perspective view.
Specify target point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
To help you define a new line of sight, AutoCAD draws a rubber-band line
from the current camera position to the crosshairs. AutoCAD prompts you
for a new camera location.
Specify camera point <current>: Specify a point, enter direction and magnitude
angles, or press ENTER
DVIEW
337
A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you
place the camera relative to the target. The illustration shows the change in
view as you swap the camera and target points. Lens and distance settings are
the same in each case.
camera at A, target at B
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point
Specification on page 332.
Pan
Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification.
Specify displacement base point: Specify a point
Specify second point: Specify a point
Zoom
If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent
size of objects in the current viewport.
Specify zoom scale factor <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases
the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
338
DVIEW
If perspective viewing is on, Zoom adjusts the camera lens length, which
changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible
at a given camera and target distance. The default lens length is 50mm, simulating what youd see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Increasing the
lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. Decreasing the lens
length widens the field of view, as with a wide-angle lens.
Specify lens length <50.000mm>: Specify a value or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current lens length. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the lens length. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length.
plan view
Twist
Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. AutoCAD measures the twist
angle counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right.
Specify view twist angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
DVIEW
339
Clip
Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front
of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible
walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the
camera and target.
Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] <Off>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Back
Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an
option, or press ENTER
Distance from
Target
On
Off
Front
Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [set to Eye (camera)/ON/OFF] <current>: Specify
a distance, enter e, or press ENTER
340
Distance from
Target
Eye
On
Off
DVIEW
back clip
front clip
camera
position of clipping planes
Off
Turns off front and back clipping. If perspective viewing is on, front clipping
remains on at the camera position.
Hide
Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization.
AutoCAD considers circles, solids, traces, regions, wide polyline segments,
3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero
thickness to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppression is quicker than that performed by HIDE, but it can't be plotted.
Off
Turns off perspective viewing. The Distance option turns on perspective
viewing.
Undo
Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. You can undo multiple DVIEW
operations.
See Also
See Overview of Specifying a 3D View in the Users Guide.
DVIEW
341
Commands
DWGPROPS
Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing
File menu: Drawing Properties
Command line: dwgprops
The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed.
342
DWGPROPS
File Name
Shows the file icon and the file name.
File Type, Location, Size
Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file.
MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified, Accessed
Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was
last modified and last accessed.
Attributes
Shows system-level file attributes. These values can be modified in Windows
Explorer.
Read-Only
Archive
DWGPROPS
343
Hidden
System
344
Title
Subject
Author
DWGPROPS
Keywords
Comments
Hyperlink Base
Note If AutoCAD detects that the drawing was last saved using an application
other than Autodesk software, a warning message is displayed. This value is
stored in the DWGCHECK system variable.
Created
DWGPROPS
345
Modified
Last Saved By
Revision Number
Total Editing
Time
346
DWGPROPS
Custom
Properties
Lists names and values for custom fields for the current
drawing. Enter text in the Name column. To enter a value
for a custom field, enter text in the Value column.
See Also
See Add Identifying Information to Drawings in the Users Guide.
Commands
DXBIN
Imports specially coded binary files
Insert menu: Drawing Exchange Binary
Command line: dxbin
The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
DXBIN
347
348
EATTEDIT
Edits attributes in a block reference
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Attribute Single
Command line: eattedit
Select a block:
You are prompted to select a block in the drawing area. After you select a
block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed.
If the block you select does not contain attributes, or you select something
that is not a block, an error message is displayed, and you are prompted to
select another block.
Apply
Attribute
Text Options
Properties
EATTEDIT
349
Value
Justification
Height
Rotation
Backwards
Upside down
Width Factor
Oblique Angle
Linetype
Color
Plot Style
Lineweight
350
EATTEDIT
EATTEXT
Exports block attribute information to an external file
Modify II toolbar:
Tools menu: Attribute Extraction
Command line: eattext
The Attribute Extraction wizard is displayed.
Select Drawing
Settings
Use Template
Select Attributes
View Output
Save Template
Export
Select Objects
Button
Current Drawing
Select Drawings
[...] Button
Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
and select drawing files from which to extract block
attribute information.
EATTEXT
351
Drawing Files
Next
Settings Page
Allows you to specify whether to extract block attribute information from
external reference files and nested blocks.
Include Xrefs
Include Nested
Blocks
Next
Use Template
Use Template
Button
Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
and select a block attribute template file to use.
Next
352
Blocks
Attributes for
Block
EATTEXT
Check All
Uncheck All
Next
Attributes for each block by block name. The Block Name column displays
the names of blocks selected for attribute extraction. The Attribute
column displays the name of the attribute. The Value column displays the
value of the attribute. The Count column displays the number of
attributes in the drawing with the same name and value.
Values for each block attribute by block name. The Block Name column
displays the names of the blocks selected for attribute extraction; other
columns display names of attributes associated with each block. The rows
display the values for each attribute.
Copy to
Clipboard
Next
EATTEXT
353
Next
Export Page
Allows you to specify the attribute extraction file name and format and
export the attribute information to the specified file.
In attribute names that will be field names in files exported to Microsoft
Access file format, Enhanced Attribute Extract substitutes an underscore
character (_) for the characters shown in the following table.
Restricted characters in Microsoft Access fields
Character
Character name
Period
Exclamation mark
For example, attribute tag names that appear as column headings will be field
names in Microsoft Access, and any instance of the restricted characters will
be replaced by an underscore.
354
File Name
[...] Button
EATTEXT
File Type
Finish
EDGE
Changes the visibility of three-dimensional face edges
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Edge
Command line: edge
Specify edge of 3dface to toggle visibility or [Display]: Select an edge or enter d
Edge
Controls the visibility of the edges you select.
Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or [Display]:
AutoCAD repeats the prompt until you press ENTER .
If the edges of one or more 3D faces are colinear, AutoCAD alters the visibility
of each colinear edge.
EDGE
355
Display
Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them.
Enter selection method for display of hidden edges [Select/All] <All>:
option or press ENTER
All
Enter an
Select
356
See Also
Commands
System Variables
EDGE
EDGESURF
Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh
EDGESURF constructs a three-dimensional (3D) polygon mesh approximating
a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. A Coons surface
patch mesh is a bicubic surface interpolated between four adjoining edges
(which can be general space curves). The Coons surface patch mesh not only
meets the corners of the defining edges, but also touches each edge, providing control over the boundaries of the generated surface patch.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Edge Surface
Command line: edgesurf
Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current
Select object 1 for surface edge:
Select object 2 for surface edge:
Select object 3 for surface edge:
Select object 4 for surface edge:
3
2
You must select the four adjoining edges that define the surface patch. The
edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open 2D or 3D polylines. The edges must
touch at their endpoints to form a topologically rectangular closed path.
You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1)
determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the
endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that
touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.
See Also
See Overview of 3D Objects, in the Users Guide.
System Variables
EDGESURF
357
ELEV
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects
The current elevation is the Z value that AutoCAD uses whenever it expects
a 3D point but receives only X and Y values. AutoCAD maintains separate
current elevations in model space and paper space. Specifying an elevation
setting in one viewport makes that elevation current in all viewports regardless of whether viewports are set up to retain their own user coordinate
systems (UCSs). AutoCAD resets the elevation to 0.0 whenever you change
the coordinate system.
Command line: elev (or 'elev for transparent use)
Specify new default elevation <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify new default thickness <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The thickness sets the distance to which AutoCAD extrudes a 2D object
above or below its elevation. A positive value extrudes along the positive Z
axis; a negative value extrudes along the negative Z axis.
z
y
y
x
with elevation
x
with thickness
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects.
See Also
Commands
UCS and UCSMAN control construction plane orientation, elevation, and extrusion direction. VPORTS creates
358
ELEV
ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Ellipse
Command line: ellipse
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP
to Isometric.
Axis Endpoint
3
2
1
ellipse by axis
endpoint
Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the
minor axis of the ellipse.
Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other
Axis
Rotation
ELLIPSE
359
Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the
elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of
the elliptical arc.
ellipse by rotation
Axis Endpoint
Defines the start point of the first axis.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
The descriptions of the Distance to Other Axis and Rotation options match
those of the corresponding options under Center.
Center
Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify.
Specify center of elliptical arc:
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
Distance to Other Axis
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc,
or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify.
1
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter p
The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the
corresponding options under Rotation.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about
the first axis. The higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater
the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle
360
ELLIPSE
Parameter
Center
Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify.
3
1
ELLIPSE
361
Rotation
Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.
Note The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of
SNAP to Isometric.
Diameter
Specify a distance
See Also
See Draw Ellipses in the Users Guide.
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Erase
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Erase.
362
ERASE
object selected
object erased
See Also
See Remove Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
ETRANSMIT
Creates a transmittal set of a drawing and related files
File Menu: eTransmit
Command line: etransmit
AutoCAD displays the Create Transmittal Dialog Box.
ETRANSMIT
363
Notes
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal set. The
notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template of
default notes to be included with all your transmittal sets by creating an
ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files Tab (Options Dialog
Box) on page 634. See the Report tab.
Type
Specifies the type of transmittal set created.
364
Folder
Self-extracting
Executable
Creates a transmittal set of files as a compressed, selfextracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting
EXE file decompresses the transmittal set and restores
the files.
ETRANSMIT
Zip
Password
Opens the Password dialog box (see page 368), where you can specify a password for your transmittal set.
Location
Specifies the location in which the transmittal set is created. Location lists
the last ten locations in which transmittal sets were created. To specify a new
location, choose Browse and navigate to the location you want.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location where you create the transmittal set.
Convert Drawings To
Specifies the file format of all drawings included in a transmittal set. When
this option is selected, you can select an AutoCAD drawing format from the
drop-down list.
Preserve Directory Structure
Preserves the directory structure of all files in the transmittal set, facilitating
ease of installation on another system. If this option is cleared, all files are
installed to the target directory when the transmittal set is installed. This
option is not available if youre saving a transmittal set to an Internet
location.
Remove Paths from Xrefs and Images
Removes paths from any cross-referenced drawings or images in the transmittal set.
Send E-mail with Transmittal
Launches the default system email application when the transmittal set is
created so that you can send an email notifying others of the new transmittal
set.
Make Web Page Files
Generates a web page that includes a link to the transmittal set.
ETRANSMIT
365
List of Files
Displays the names of all files to be included in the transmittal set. Choose
the List View and Tree View buttons to switch back and forth between these
views.
List View
Tree View
Add File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the transmittal set.
366
ETRANSMIT
Include Fonts
Includes the current drawings associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the
transmittal set. Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included
with the transmittal set. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the
computer to which the transmittal set is copied, the font specified by the
FONTALT system variable is substituted.
ETRANSMIT
367
Save As
Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in which
to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included with all
transmittal sets that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can save an
additional copy of a report file for archival purposes.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Explode
Command line: explode
Select objects:
368
EXPLODE
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change.
Other results differ depending on the type of compound object youre
exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the
results for each.
Note If youre using a script or an ObjectARX function, you can explode only
one object at a time.
before EXPLODE
2D and
Lightweight
Polyline
3D Polyline
3D Solid
Arc
Block
after EXPLODE
EXPLODE
369
Body
Circle
Leaders
Multiline text
Multiline
Polyface Mesh
Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Twovertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes
explode into 3D faces.
Region
See Also
See Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) in the Users Guide.
Commands
BLOCK creates blocks from a group of objects. LIST displays the properties of objects. XPLODE explodes objects
and controls the color, layer, linetype, and lineweight
of the component objects.
EXPORT
Saves objects to other file formats
File menu: Export
Command line: export
The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to export objects to. In File Name,
enter the name of the file to create. AutoCAD exports the objects to the
specified file format using the specified file name.
The following output types are available:
370
EXPORT
EXTEND
Extends an object to meet another object
Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and
3D polylines, and rays.
boundary selected
result
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Extend
Command line: extend
Select boundary edges...
Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER or press ENTER to select
all objects (implied selection)
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an
object to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option
EXTEND
371
selected boundary
polylines to extend
result
Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the
polyline.
Object to Extend
Specifies the object to extend. AutoCAD repeats the main prompt so you can
extend multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object trims it to
the nearest boundary rather than extending it. Pressing ENTER ends the
command.
Project
Specifies the projection method AutoCAD uses when extending objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
selected
boundary
372
EXTEND
objects to
extend
None
UCS
View
left viewport
right viewport
Edge
Extends the object to another objects implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.
EXTEND
373
selected object to
extend
Extend
No Extend
Undo
extended
not extended
See Also
See Trim or Extend Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
EXTRUDE
Creates unique solid primitives by extruding existing two-dimensional objects
With EXTRUDE, you can create solids by extruding (adding thickness to)
selected objects. You can extrude an object along a path, or you can specify
a height value and a tapered angle.
Use EXTRUDE to create a solid from a common profile of an object, such as a
gear or sprocket. EXTRUDE is particularly useful for objects that contain
fillets, chamfers, and other details that might otherwise be difficult to reproduce except in a profile. If you create a profile using lines or arcs, use the Join
option of PEDIT to convert them to a single polyline object or make them into
a region before you use EXTRUDE.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Extrude
Command line: extrude
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Select objects:
Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: Specify a distance or enter p
374
EXTRUDE
Object Selection
select object
Specifies the objects to extrude. You can extrude planar 3D faces, closed
polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines, donuts, and regions. You
cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have crossing or self-intersecting segments.
A polyline must contain at least 3 but not more than 500 vertices. If a
selected polyline has width, AutoCAD ignores the width and extrudes from
the center of the polyline path. If a selected object has thickness, AutoCAD
ignores the thickness.
Height of Extrusion
Extrudes the objects along the positive Z axis of the objects coordinate
system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, AutoCAD
extrudes the objects along the negative Z axis.
height
Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The
default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. AutoCAD
tapers all objects and loops in the selection set to the same value. Tapered
extrusions are possible only with loops that are continuous at the vertices.
taper
angle
Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.
AutoCAD always extrudes individual loops of the region to the same height.
path
profile
When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes. On a straight extrusion, each arc
results in a single cylindrical face. Whenever possible, EXTRUDE uses the
taper angle as the angle by which it slants faces from the Z axis.
Path
Selects the extrusion path based on a specified object. AutoCAD extrudes the
profiles of the selected object along the chosen path to create solids.
Select extrusion path:
Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the profile, nor should it have
areas of high curvature.
EXTRUDE
375
The extruded solid starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane
perpendicular to the path at the paths endpoint. One of the endpoints of the
path should be on the plane of the profile; otherwise, AutoCAD moves the
path to the center of the profiles.
If the path is a spline, it should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile
at one of the endpoints of the path. Otherwise, AutoCAD rotates the profile
to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline
is on the plane of the profile, AutoCAD rotates the profile about the point;
otherwise, AutoCAD moves the spline path to the center of the profile and
rotates the profiles about its center.
If the path contains segments that are not tangent, AutoCAD extrudes the
object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the profile should
lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to
match up. If the profile is not on the miter plane, AutoCAD rotates it until it
is on the miter plane.
AutoCAD extrudes profiles with multiple loops so that all the loops appear
on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.
See Also
See Extrude Faces on 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
376
EXTRUDE
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines
Some displays and plotters take a long time to fill the interior of objects; turn
off Fill mode to improve performance. Objects affected by FILL include
hatches, two-dimensional solids, wide polylines, AutoCADmultilines and
traces.
Command line: fill (or 'fill for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
Fill mode on
On
Off
See Also
See Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects
FILLET rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines,
rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the
edges of 3D solids.
before FILLET
after FILLET
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, FILLET trims the intersecting lines
to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not intersect,
AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do.
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates the
fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on the
current layer. The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype.
FILL
377
You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent,
intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are nonadjacent, the
polyline segments are extended to accommodate the fillet. If they are intersecting, the polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the fillet. To
create a fillet, the polyline segments must converge within the drawing limits
when limits checking is on.
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment. All
the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and linetype, are
inherited from the first polyline selected.
Note Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the boundary was defined from a polyline,
associativity is maintained.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Fillet
Command line: fillet
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: Use an object selection
method or enter an option
First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a
3D solid to fillet.
Select second object:
378
FILLET
result
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, AutoCAD extends them until they intersect or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different
extrusion directions only if the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are
equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS).
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the fillet.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. AutoCAD chooses the
fillet with endpoints closest to the points you select.
selection points
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.
FILLET
379
selection points
If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the
edges individually.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r
Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press
ENTER .
selecting edges
If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner
of a box, AutoCAD computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the
three incident fillets have the same radii.
380
FILLET
Chain
Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent
edges.
Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>: Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r
Edge Chain
Edge
Radius
chain fillets
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the previous prompt:
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges or enter c or r
Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments
meet.
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they
approach the arc segment, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces
it with a fillet arc.
before
after
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Specify fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
FILLET
381
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET
commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.
Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Trim
No Trim
Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the
main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the fillets you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click
Undo.
See Also
See Create Fillets, Chamfers, or Breaks in Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
FILTER
Creates reusable filters for object selection
FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included
in a selection set.
382
FILTER
Use FILTER to
FILTER finds objects by property only when you have assigned those proper-
ties to the object directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on
which they reside, FILTER does not find them. You can, however, use FILTER
to find objects with properties set by layer or by block.
Command line: filter (or 'filter for transparent use)
The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed.
Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter.
FILTER
383
Logical operators
Starting operator
Encloses
Ending operator
Begin AND
End AND
Begin OR
End OR
Begin XOR
Two operands
End XOR
Begin NOT
One operand
End NOT
384
FILTER
Select
Add to List
Substitute
Add Selected
Object
Edit Item
Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To
edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property
and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property.
Delete
Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.
Clear List
Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.
Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filters.
Current
Save As
Delete Current
Filter List
FILTER
385
Apply
Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create
a selection set. AutoCAD uses the current filter on the objects you select.
See Also
See Filter Selection Setsin the Users Guide.
Commands
selection set.
FIND
Finds, replaces, selects, or zooms to specified text
You can find, replace, select, or zoom to text contained in any loaded object
in model space and in any layout defined in the current drawing.
If you partially opened the current drawing, FIND does not consider objects
that you did not load.
Edit menu: Find
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Find.
Command line: find
The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
386
FIND
Replace With
Search In
Select Objects
FIND
387
388
FIND
Options
Find/Find Next
Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String. If you
have not entered text in Find Text String, this option is
not available. AutoCAD displays found text in the
Context area. Once you find the first instance of the
text, the Find option becomes Find Next, which you
can use to find the next instance.
Replace
Replace All
Select All
Zoom To
Context
Status
Include
Match Case
Find Whole
Words Only
See Also
See Change Multiline Text in the Users Guide.
FOG
Provides visual cues for the apparent distance of objects
Fog and depth cueing are actually two extremes of the same effect: a white
color is fog, and a black color is traditional depth cueing. You can use any
color in between.
Render Toolbar:
View menu: Render Fog
Command line: fog
AutoCAD displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box.
FOG
389
Enable Fog
Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box.
Fog Background
Applies fog to the background as well as to the geometry.
Color System
Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red, green, blue (RGB) color system or
the hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color system.
Red, Green, Blue
390
FOG
way to the left produces black; moving them all the way
to the right produces white. Moving red and green to
the right and blue to the left produces yellow.
Hue, Lightness,
Saturation
Select Custom
Color
Near/Far Distance
Define where the fog starts and ends. The values are percentages of the distance from the camera to the back clipping plane.
FOG
391
392
GOTOURL
Opens the file or Web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object
Command line: gotourl
Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or Web page (URL)
that is associated with the hyperlink opens.
See Also
Commands
GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area
Command line: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use)
GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the
text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.
See Also
Commands
window.
GRID
Displays a dot grid in the current viewport
The grid is for visual reference only. It is not plotted, and it is not part of the
drawing. You can turn the grid display on and off with the Grid button on
the status bar.
Command line: grid (or 'grid for transparent use)
Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: Specify a value or
enter an option
Grid Spacing (X)
GOTOURL
393
GRID turned on
On
Off
Snap
Aspect
Commands
System Variables
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups
Command line: group
AutoCAD displays the Object Grouping dialog box.
If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on
the command line (see page 399).
394
GROUP
Group Name
Displays the names of existing groups.
Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no
groups are selectable.
Group Identification
Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group
Name list.
Group Name
GROUP
395
Description
Find Name
Include
Unnamed
Create Group
Specifies properties of new groups.
New
Selectable
Unnamed
Change Group
Modifies existing groups.
Remove
396
GROUP
telephone selected
telephone removed
from group
chair selected
Re-Order
GROUP
397
Explode
Selectable
398
Group Name
Description
Remove from
Position (0n)
Replace at
Position (0n)
GROUP
Number of
Objects (1n)
Re-Order
Highlight
Reverse Order
?List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.
Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups
Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the order in which
AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups
Enter position number of the object to reorder (0 - n) or [Reverse order]: Enter
a position number or enter r
Position Number
Reverse Order
GROUP
399
Add
Adds objects to a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Select objects to add to group...
Select objects:
Remove
Removes objects from a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Select objects to remove from group...
Remove objects:
If you remove all the groups objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.
Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component
objects.
Enter a group name or [?]:
Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.
Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to
list all groups
Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups
Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
This group is current, do you want to change it [Yes/No]? <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Create
Creates a group.
Enter a group name or [?]:
400
GROUP
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but
not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters.
Enter a group description:
Select objects:
See Also
See Group Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
FILTER creates lists used to select objects based on properties. With SELECT you can select groups by name at
GROUP
401
402
HATCH
Fills an area with a nonassociative hatch pattern
A nonassociative hatch is not updated when its boundaries are modified. A
hatch boundary consists of an object or objects that completely enclose an
area. If the boundary is made up of multiple objects, their endpoints must
coincide for the hatch to be created properly. You can also fill an area that
does not have a closed boundary, by defining a polyline hatch boundary
with the Direct Hatch option.
Unless you specify otherwise, HATCH combines the lines that make up the
hatch into a block.
Hatches are stored as single hatch objects, which can reduce the amount of
disk space a drawing occupies and can also reduce regeneration time.
Note By default, AutoCAD wont create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.
Command line: hatch
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or
custom pattern name, enter an option, or press ENTER
Use BHATCH to create hatches and fills in a dialog box and to create associative hatches.
scale=.5
angle=0
scale=1
If the drawing is in model space and you enter a scale factor followed by xp,
AutoCAD calculates a scale factor relative to paper space.
angle=30
HATCH
403
Select Objects
Direct Hatch
define boundary
retain boundary
discard boundary
404
HATCH
Solid
Specifies a solid fill.
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
Select Objects
Direct Hatch
HATCH
405
User-Defined Pattern
Specifies a pattern of lines using the current linetype. Enter u, followed
optionally by a hatch style code (see Hatch Style Codes on page 407). Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of
a hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between the
lines or press ENTER
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to
be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
Select Objects
Direct Hatch
406
HATCH
o (Outer)
i (Ignore)
? (List Styles)
See Also
See Standard Libraries and Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts in the Users
Guide. For information about the acad.pat file and creating your own hatch
patterns, see Custom Hatch Patterns in the Customization Guide.
HATCH
407
Commands
dimensional polylines.
System Variables
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or gradient fill
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Hatch
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Hatch Edit.
Command line: hatchedit
Select associative hatch object: Use an object selection method
The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays
prompts on the command line (see page 410).
408
HATCHEDIT
Hatch Tab
Advanced Tab
Gradient Tab
Inherit Properties
Double
Composition
Preview
HATCHEDIT
409
Note You may have difficulty when trying to select a solid-fill hatch pattern
because there are no visible grips or lines to click. For best results, either click the
outer edges of the hatch pattern or use a crossing window selection.
Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch.
Style
Changes the hatch style type. AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>:
Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.
Ignore
Outer
Normal
410
HATCHEDIT
Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of
setting pattern properties on the command line, see BHATCH.
See Also
See Modify Hatches and Solid-Filled Areas in the Users Guide.
Commands
AutoCAD wont create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10,000 segments.
The limit is set by the MAXHATCH setting in the registry. The limit can be
reset to any value between 100 and 10,000,000. For example, to reset the
limit to 8,000, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "8000") at the Command prompt.
HELP
Displays Help
Standard toolbar:
Help menu: Help
Command line: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use)
To display Help for a menu, open the menu, and then press F1 .
Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays Help for that
command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that
dialog box.
HELP
411
See Also
Commands
HIDE
Regenerates a three-dimensional model with hidden lines suppressed
When you use VPOINT, DVIEW, or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing,
AutoCAD produces a wireframe display in the current viewport. All lines are
present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden
lines from the screen.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Hide
Command line: hide
HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles,
solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon
meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness.
If they are extruded, AutoCAD treats circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline
segments as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on
objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects
whose layers have been turned off.
In order to hide text created with DTEXT, MTEXT, or TEXT, the HIDETEXT
system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness
value.
When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable
is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines.
before HIDE
after HIDE
412
HIDE
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to off
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to on
If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with
silhouette edges only. It wont show the internal edges produced by objects
that have facets.
If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether
they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are
unaffected.
See Also
See Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
HLSETTINGS
Changes the display properties of hidden lines
Command line: hlsettings
The Hidden Line Settings dialog box is displayed. The settings in this dialog
box affect the display properties of hidden lines.
HLSETTINGS
413
Obscured Lines
Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hidden line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype.
Linetype
Color
414
HLSETTINGS
Face Intersections
Specifies the display and color of intersection polylines. An intersection
polyline displays at the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to off
Display
Intersections
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to on
Color
Hide Precision
Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be set to either low (single) precision or high (double) precision. You can also change this setting by
using the HIDEPRECISION system variable.
Low (single)
HLSETTINGS
415
High (double)
HYPERLINK
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink
Insert menu: Hyperlink
Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink Edit Hyperlink.
Command line: hyperlink
Select objects:
AutoCAD displays one of the following dialog boxes depending on the object
you selected:
Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already contain hyperlinks)
Edit Hyperlink dialog box (see page 419) (for graphical objects that already
contain hyperlinks)
After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move
the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the
selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be
set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, HYPERLINK displays options
on the command line, including an option to define an area to associate with
a hyperlink (see page 420).
Text to Display
416
HYPERLINK
Recent Files
Browsed Pages
Inserted Links
File
Web Page
Target
HYPERLINK
417
Path
Select a View of
This
418
HYPERLINK
E-mail Address
Subject
Recently Used
E-mail Addresses
HYPERLINK
419
Remove
Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not
exist, AutoCAD prompts you to create one.
Select objects:
If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, AutoCAD presents a
numbered list on the command line of all the hyperlinks that were found.
Enter number, hyperlink, or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink,
or enter * to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set
AutoCAD displays the number of removed hyperlinks on the command line.
Insert
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Select a method for
attaching a hyperlink
Area
420
HYPERLINK
HYPERLINKOPTIONS
Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor and tooltips
Command line: hyperlinkoptions
Display hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] <Yes>: If you enter y to
display the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu, AutoCAD displays an additional
prompt.
Display hyperlink tooltip? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y to display hyperlink tooltips
HYPERLINKOPTIONS
421
422
ID
Displays the coordinate of a location
Tools menu: Inquiry ID Point
Command line: id (or 'id for transparent use)
Point:
of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by
entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as
that of the selected feature of the object.
See Also
See Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations in the Users Guide.
System Variables
IMAGE
Manages images
In the Image Manager, you can attach or detach a raster or bit-mapped
bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image file to a drawing. You can
reload and unload images, as well as specify a new path for the images. You
can view image details such as pixel width, color depth, and resolution of the
selected image. IMAGE can combine images in a variety of formats (including
BMP, TIFF, RLE, JPG, PCX, and TGA) with AutoCAD drawings. You can display more than one image in any viewport. AutoCAD does not limit the
number and size of images.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Image Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Image Image Manager.
Command line: image
The Image Manager is displayed.
ID
423
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the
command line (see page 427).
Image Manager
Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing. You can view the
parameters and details for selected images. You can attach new image files
and detach, locate, reload, and unload attached images.
List of Images
Displays the names of all image files attached to the drawing. You can use F3
and F4 to toggle between list view and tree view.
List View
424
IMAGE
Tree View
Attach
Displays the Select Image File dialog box. See IMAGEATTACH. When you
unload and then reload an image, AutoCAD draws that image on top. For
more information about how to control where and how AutoCAD places the
image, see SORTENTS and DRAWORDER. Images remain loaded or unloaded
from one drawing session to the next.
Detach
Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases
all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display.
IMAGE
425
Reload
Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was
previously unloaded. Reloading does not control whether the image is
displayed, but it ensures display of the most current image.
Unload
Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image
objects from the drawing. It is recommended that you unload images no
longer needed for editing to improve performance. An unloaded image
cannot be displayed or plotted.
You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of
images associated with the drawing file.
Details
Opens the Image File Details dialog box, which displays the image name,
saved path, active path, file creation date and time, file size and type, color
system, color depth, width and height in pixels, resolution, default size in
units, and a preview image.
Image Found At
Shows the path of the selected image. If you select multiple images, this field
remains blank. The path shown is the actual path where the image resides. If
AutoCAD does not find the file at the path in the Saved Path column,
AutoCAD first searches the standard AutoCAD search path for the images
saved path. (See Specify Search Paths, File Names, and File Locations in the
Users Guide.) If AutoCAD cannot locate the drawing (for example, if you have
moved the file to a different directory than the one that was saved with the
image), it removes relative or absolute path information from the name (for
example, \images\tree.tga or c:\my project\images\tree.tga become tree.tga)
and searches the paths defined in the Project Files Search Path in the Options
426
IMAGE
dialog box. If the drawing does not reside in the paths specified in the Project
Files search paths, AutoCAD attempts the first search path again. See Project
Files Search Path on page 635.
Browse
Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
The path you select appears under Image Found At. See IMAGEATTACH.
Save Path
Stores the new path information. Press ESC while editing the path to restore
the old path. If AutoCAD cannot find the referenced image in the new path,
the images status changes to Not Found. If you do not choose Save Path after
editing the path, AutoCAD uses the original image path the next time you
load the drawing.
?List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is
attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. AutoCAD
lists images in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT
system variable.
Images to list <*>: Enter * to list all images, or enter an image name
Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and
erases all occurrences of the image.
Enter list of images to detach: Enter an image name, or enter * to detach all
images
IMAGE
427
Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular
image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file,
rename the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you
can update image01.pcx and save it as image02.pcx.
Enter list of images for path modification: Enter an image name, or enter * to list
all images
If you enter an asterisk (*), AutoCAD lists the current path name for each
image and prompts for the new path.
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image
Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image
Reload
Reloads the selected images. AutoCAD reads image data into memory, making that information available for display and plotting.
Enter list of images to reload: Enter an image name, or enter * to reload all images
Reloading...
Reload image <image name>: <hard-coded path name>
<image name> loaded and relinked.
Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the
image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached
image remains visible.
Enter list of images to unload: Enter a loaded image name, or enter * to unload
all images
Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
428
IMAGE
AutoCAD assigns the file name without the extension as the image name.
Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits,
spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or
AutoCAD. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the
Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. AutoCAD automatically generates a valid image name from the file name and appends an underscore and
number to the name, changing the number as necessary to avoid duplicate
image names.
Image file name_1 created from file file name.bmp
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, AutoCAD
displays the following prompts and inserts the image as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt instead of the dialog box:
Enter image file name to attach <last>: Enter an image name
The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the
default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended
that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows:
imagename=path name\long file name.bmp
or
imagename="path name\long file name.bmp"
If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, AutoCAD searches
for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing,
and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. AutoCAD
searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found,
AutoCAD displays the message Image Not Found and repeats the prompt.
IMAGE
429
To specify a long file name that does not conform to AutoCAD naming rules,
enter the name as follows:
"imagename=filename"
You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the
imagename=filename convention on the command line. Enter a tilde (~) at the
Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press ESC after the dialog box
opens, AutoCAD redisplays the Enter Image Name prompt.
See Also
Commands
IMAGEADJUST
Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Adjust
Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Image Adjust.
Command line: imageadjust
Select image(s): Select one or more images
AutoCAD displays the Image Adjust dialog box.
If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays
prompts on the command line (see page 432).
430
IMAGEADJUST
Brightness
Contrast
Fade
IMAGEADJUST
431
Image Preview
Reset
Fade
432
IMAGEADJUST
Brightness
See Also
Commands
IMAGEATTACH
Attaches a new image to the current drawing
IMAGEATTACH opens the Select Image File dialog box without displaying the
Image Manager first. You can view and attach raster or bitmapped bitonal,
8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image files to a drawing. Attaching an
image creates an image definition, loads the image into memory, and
displays the image.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Raster Image
Command line: imageattach
AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Once you select an image file, AutoCAD displays the Image
dialog box.
IMAGEATTACH
433
Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image
File dialog box (an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached
images. To add another instance of an image file that is already attached,
select the image name from the list and choose OK.
Browse
Retain Path
434
IMAGEATTACH
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the
default. The default insertion point is 0,0.
Specify
On-Screen
Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs
input to the command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is
cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1.
If INSUNITS is set to unitless or if the image does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If
INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the
image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true
width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is
selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with
your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line. If
Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box.
The default rotation angle is 0.
Details
Displays the Image Information section. You can view width and height in
pixels, the resolution, and the size in units (such as millimeters, centimeters,
meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards, miles, unitless, and many others). The
default value for unitless images is unitless. The image size is automatically
converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height.
Image information consists of the following:
IMAGEATTACH
435
See Also
Commands
System Variables
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
With IMAGECLIP, you can define a subregion of an image for display and
plotting.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Clip Image
Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Image Clip.
Command line: imageclip
Select image to clip: Select an edge of an image
Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.
On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined
boundary.
Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, AutoCAD automatically
turns clipping back on. AutoCAD prompts you to delete the old boundary
even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
436
IMAGECLIP
Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original
image.
New Boundary
Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or
polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a
clipping boundary, specify vertices within the image boundary.
Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you
use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt,
AutoCAD interprets the point as the first corner of a rectangle.
Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Enter p or press
ENTER
Polygonal
Enter n or press
ENTER
IMAGECLIP
437
See Also
Commands
image frame.
IMAGEFRAME
Controls whether image frames are displayed or hidden from view
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Frame
Command line: imageframe
Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Raster images can be displayed with or without a frame. Because you select
an image by clicking its frame, setting IMAGEFRAME to Off prevents you from
accidentally selecting an image.
On
Off
See Also
Commands
image frame.
438
IMAGEFRAME
IMAGEQUALITY
Controls the display quality of images
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take
longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately
without causing a regeneration of the drawing. AutoCAD always plots images
using a high-quality display.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Quality
Command line: imagequality
Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
High
Draft
See Also
Commands
IMAGEQUALITY
439
IMPORT
Imports files in various formats into AutoCAD
Insert toolbar:
Command line: import
The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to import. In File Name, select the file
to import. AutoCAD imports the file into the AutoCAD drawing. The following input types are available:
For the WMF file type, choosing Options from the Tools menu in this dialog
box displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1125). You can display
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS.
If FILEDIA = 0, AutoCAD displays the following prompt on the command line:
Enter import file name: Enter path and file name
See Also
Commands
INSERT
Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing
Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: Block
Command line: insert
The Insert dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the
command line (see page 442).
440
IMPORT
The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the
default block for subsequent uses of INSERT. The position of the inserted block
depends on the orientation of the UCS.
Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a
block.
Browse
Path
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify
On-Screen
Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X,
Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
INSERT
441
Specify
On-Screen
Uniform Scale
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Specify
On-Screen
Angle
Explode
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When
Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects
having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the
CONTINUOUS linetype.
Block Name
If you have inserted a block in the current drawing during the current editing
session, the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in
the prompt.
Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You
can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Grouping dialog box (see page 395).
442
INSERT
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block
Name prompt by following the listed examples.
Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk
(*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block
definition is not added to the drawing.
Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name,
AutoCAD first searches the current drawing data for an existing block
definition by that name. If no such block definition exists in the current
drawing, AutoCAD searches the library path for a file of the same name. If
AutoCAD finds such a file, it uses the file name for the block name upon
insertion of the block definition. AutoCAD uses the same block definition
for subsequent insertions of that block. You can replace an existing block
definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter
Block Name prompt:
block name=file name
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
INSERT
443
X Scale Factor
Enter a value or
XYZ
444
INSERT
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under
Rotation match the descriptions of the corresponding options under
Insertion Point (see page 443).
INSERT
445
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PScale
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 443).
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PX
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 443).
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PY
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 443).
446
INSERT
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PZ
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 443).
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under
PRotate match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion
Point (see page 443).
See Also
See Insert Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
INSERT
447
INSERTOBJ
Inserts a linked or embedded object
When you insert an object into an AutoCAD drawing from an application
that supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection with its source file.
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
A linked object remains associated with its source file. When you edit a
linked object in AutoCAD, the source file changes. When you edit the object
in the source file, the linked object in AutoCAD changes.
An embedded object is not associated with its source file. You edit the embedded data in the AutoCAD drawing using the source application; the source
file does not change.
Linked or embedded objects are displayed in AutoCAD and can be printed or
plotted using Windows system drivers.
Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: OLE Object
Command line: insertobj
The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.
Create New
Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you
can create a new object to insert. When you return from that application to
your AutoCAD drawing, the OLE Properties dialog box is displayed.
448
INSERTOBJ
Object Type
Display as Icon
INSERTOBJ
449
File
Browse
Link
Display as Icon
See Also
See Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings in the Users Guide.
Commands
INTERFERE
Creates a composite 3D solid from the common volume of two or more solids
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Interference
Command line: interfere
Select the first set of solids: Use an object selection method
first solid selected
450
INTERFERE
Entering y creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are
the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids.
If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which
pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D solids are highlighted at once.
Highlight pairs of interfering solids? [Yes/No] <N>:
interference solid
created
If there is more than one interfering pair, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter an option [Next pair/eXit] <Next>: Enter x or n, or press ENTER
Entering n or pressing ENTER cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D
solids. Entering x ends the command.
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
Commands
SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by subtracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimensional objects from another set and subtracting the volume of one set of solids from another set. UNION creates
a composite solid or region and combines the total area
of two or more existing regions or the total volume of
two or more existing solids. INTERSECT creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or
more solids or regions and removes the areas outside of
the intersection.
INTERSECT
Creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or more solids or regions
and removes the areas outside of the intersection
Solids Editing toolbar:
Modify menu: Solids Editing Intersect
Command line: intersect
Select objects:
INTERSECT
451
You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT.
INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions
and the common volume of two or more existing solids.
The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of
arbitrary planes. AutoCAD divides the selection set into subsets and tests for
intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids in the
selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains the next region that is
not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions, and
so on until all regions belong to a subset.
See Also
See Create and Combine Areas (Regions) in the Users Guide.
Commands
452
INTERSECT
SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by subtracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimensional objects from another set and subtracting the volume of one set of solids from another set. UNION creates
a composite solid or region and combines the total area
of two or more existing regions or the total volume of
two or more existing solids. INTERFERE finds the interference (or overlap) of two or more 3D solids and
creates a composite 3D solid from their common
volume.
ISOPLANE
Specifies the current isometric plane
Command line: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use)
Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>:
ENTER
The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode
is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho
mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by
ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL + E or
F5 .
Left
Top
Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane,
defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair.
Right
See Also
Commands
System Variables
ISOPLANE
453
454
JPGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format
Command line: jpgout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER
AutoCAD creates a JPEG file that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot
options are preserved in the file when you use this command.
Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.
JUSTIFYTEXT
Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations
Text toolbar:
Modify menu: Justify Text
Modify menu: Object Text Justify
Command line: justifytext
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text
objects, and attribute objects.
Enter a justification option [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/
ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as the new
justification point
JPGOUT
455
The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT
command. The justification point options for single line text are similar to
those for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are
equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
See Also
See Change Text Scale and Justification in the Users Guide.
Commands
456
JUSTIFYTEXT
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties
Layers toolbar:
Format menu: Layer
Command line: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)
The Layer Properties Manager is displayed.
annotations
dimensions
objects
sample layers
If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the
command line (see page 469).
LAYER
457
458
[...] Button
Invert Filter
Apply to Layers
Toolbar
LAYER
New
Creates a new layer. After you choose New, the list displays a layer named
LAYER1. You can edit this layer immediately. To create multiple layers more
quickly, you can select a layer name for editing and enter multiple layer
names separated by commas.
If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the properties of the currently
selected layer in the layer list (Color, On/Off state, and so on). To create layers
with default settings, make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or
that you select a layer with default settings before beginning layer creation.
Current
Sets the selected layer as the current layer. The CLAYER system variable stores
the layer name.
Delete
Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can delete only
unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers
containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer,
and xref-dependent layers. Layers that dont contain objects (including
objects in block definitions), are not current, and are not xref-dependent can
be deleted by using the PURGE command.
Show/Hide Details
Controls whether the Details section (see page 461) is displayed in the Layer
Properties Manager.
Save State
Displays the Save Layer States dialog box (see page 466), in which you save
layer state and layer properties settings of all layers in a drawing. You can
choose which layer states and properties that you want to preserve. You save
a layer state by assigning it a name.
If one or more of these settings are cleared, the Layer Properties Manager does
not restore those settings.
Any layer states saved in a drawing that is inserted in your current drawing
as a block are also added to the current drawing.
The saved layer states of referenced drawings (xrefs) are not accessible from
the current drawing.
LAYER
459
If you use WBLOCK to create a new drawing from the current drawing, saved
layer states are preserved only if you specify Entire Drawing as the source in
the Write Block dialog box (equivalent to -wblock /* on the command line).
These saved layer states will refer only to layers that contain objects.
State Manager
Displays the Layer States Manager (see page 467), in which you can manage
named layer states.
List of Layers
Displays layers and their properties. To modify a property, click its icon. To
quickly select all layers, right-click and use the shortcut menu.
Names
On/Off
Freeze/Thaw in
All Viewports
460
Lock/Unlock
Color
Linetype
LAYER
Lineweight
Plot Style
Plot/Dont Plot
Current VP Freeze
(available only
from a layout tab)
New VP Freeze
(available only
from a layout tab)
Details
Displays an extension of the Layer Properties Manager with alternative access
to properties and additional options.
LAYER
461
462
Name
Color
Lineweight
Linetype
LAYER
Plot Style
Do Not Plot
Freeze in All
Viewports
LAYER
463
Freeze in New
Viewports
464
LAYER
Filter Name
Layer Name
On/Off
Freeze/Thaw
Current Viewport
New Viewport
Lock/Unlock
Plot
LAYER
465
Color
Lineweight
Linetype
Plot Style
Add
Delete
Reset
466
Layer States
Layer Properties
LAYER
Restore
Edit
Rename
Delete
Import
Export
LAYER
467
Loaded Linetypes
Load
468
LAYER
Lineweights
Original
New
Note The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
?List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states,
color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally
dependent layers.
Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list, or press ENTER to list all layers
Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current
layer.
Enter name for new layer (becomes the current layer) <current>: Enter a name
or press ENTER
LAYER
469
If no layer exists for the name you enter, AutoCAD creates a new layer with
that name. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by
default: color number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of
DEFAULT.
If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on.
Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not
already exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on and
makes it current. A frozen layer cannot be made current.
Enter a layer name to make current or <select object>: Enter a name or press
ENTER and select an object
New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated
by commas.
Enter name list for new layer(s):
On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn On:
Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn Off or <select objects>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER and select objects
Color
Changes the color associated with a layer.
Enter color name or number (1-255)[Truecolor/Colorbook]:
or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, or enter c
True Color
470
LAYER
Color Book
AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer names to which the color should be
applied.
Enter name list of layer(s) for color current <current>: Enter a name or a list of
names separated by commas, or press ENTER
The layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the
color with a minus sign ().
Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.
Enter a loaded linetype name or [?] <CONTINUOUS>: Enter a currently loaded
linetype name, enter ?, or press ENTER
If you enter a linetype or press ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer
names to which the linetype should be applied.
Enter name list of layer(s) for linetype "current" <current>: Enter a wild-card
pattern, a name, or a list of names separated by commas, or press ENTER
If you enter ? at the Enter a Loaded Linetype Name prompt, AutoCAD
prompts for the linetypes to list.
Enter linetype name(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern, or press ENTER to
list all names in the drawing
Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
Enter lineweight (0.0mm - 2.11mm):
LAYER
471
If you enter a valid lineweight, AutoCAD sets the current lineweight to the
new value. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, AutoCAD sets the
current lineweight to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to
plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight
values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the
lineweight should be applied.
Enter name list of layers(s) for lineweight current <current>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER
Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is
currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.
Enter a plotting preference [Plot/No plot] <Plot>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the plotting
preference should be applied.
Enter layer name(s) for this plot preference <current>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER
Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are
using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY
system variable is set to 1). See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects
in the Users Guide.
Enter plot style or [?] <Normal>: Enter a name, enter ? to list existing plot styles,
or press ENTER
If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the
layers to use this plot style, or press ENTER to apply the style to the current layer only
Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration
and plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to freeze or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects
472
LAYER
Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and
plotting.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to thaw:
Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to lock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects
Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to unlock or <select objects>:
press ENTER and select objects
State
Saves and restores the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing.
Enter an option [?/Save/Restore/Edit/Name/Delete/Import/EXport]:
Save
LAYER
473
Edit
Name
Delete
Import
Export
See Also
See Work with Layers in the Users Guide.
Commands
474
LAYER
LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings
Layers toolbar:
Command line: layerp
Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If
settings are restored, AutoCAD displays the message Restored previous layer
states.
LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes:
Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer
Previous restores the original properties but not the original name.
Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not
restore it.
Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does
not remove it.
LAYERPMODE
Turns the tracking of changes made to layer settings on and off
Command line: layerpmode
Enter LAYERP mode <ON>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When
Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
LAYOUT
Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs
A layout is used to compose or lay out your drawing for plotting. A layout
may consist of a title block, one or more viewports, and annotations.
Note Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name.
Layouts toolbar:
Insert Menu: Layout
LAYERP
475
Delete
New
Template
476
LAYOUT
Rename
Saveas
Set
?List Layouts
LAYOUTWIZARD
Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings
Insert menu: Layout Layout Wizard
Tools menu: Wizards Create Layout
Command line: layoutwizard
The Layout wizard is displayed.
LAYOUTWIZARD
477
Layout Wizard
The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from
scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout.
Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select
a paper size from those available. You can select a predefined title block to
apply to your new layout. The Preview area displays a preview image of the
title block you select.
When youve finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you
can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within
the new layout.
See Also
See Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Layout Settings in the Users Guide.
LAYTRANS
Changes a drawing's layers to layer standards you specify
CAD Standards toolbar:
Tools menu: CAD Standards Layer Translator
Command line: laytrans
The Layer Translator is displayed.
Layer Translator
In the Layer Translator, you specify the layers in the current drawing that you
want to translate, and the layers to translate them to.
Translate From
Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can specify
layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection
filter.
478
LAYTRANS
The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the
layer is referenced in the drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is referenced; a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced. Unreferenced layers
can be deleted from the drawing by right-clicking in the Translate From list
and choosing Purge Layers.
Selection Filter
Select
Map
Maps the layers selected in Translate From to the layer selected in Translate
To.
Map Same
Maps all layers that have the same name in both lists.
Translate To
Lists the layers you can translate the current drawings layers to.
Load
New
LAYTRANS
479
Opens the Edit Layer dialog box, where you can edit the
selected translation mapping. You can change the
layers linetype, color, and lineweight. If all drawings
involved in translation use plot styles, you can also
change the plot style for the mapping.
Remove
Save
Settings
Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can customize the process of layer
translation.
Translate
Starts layer translation of the layers you have mapped.
If you have not saved the current layer translation mappings, you are
prompted to save the mappings before translation begins.
480
LAYTRANS
Force Object
Linetype to
BYLAYER
Translate Objects
in Blocks
Write Transaction
Log
Show Layer
Contents When
Selected
Linetype
Color
Lineweight
Plot Style
Specifies the layer plot style. You can only modify the
plot style if all drawings referenced by the Layer
Translator use named plot styles.
LAYTRANS
481
LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature
A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to
splines or straight line segments. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called
a hook line, dogleg, or landing, connects text and feature control frames to
the leader line. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the
leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object
is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line
stretches, but the text or feature control frame remains in place.
You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line,
such as placing the text above the hook line with DIMTAD.
LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two
line segments. DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader
lines with two line segments for circles and arcs.
Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
you for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point,
enter an option, or press ENTER
482
LEADER
Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be
single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric
tolerances, or a block.
Enter first line of annotation text or <options>:
If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, AutoCAD places the text at the
end of the leader line. AutoCAD prompts you for additional lines of text until
you end the command by pressing ENTER twice.
If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Tolerance
Copy
LEADER
483
Block
None
Mtext
Format
Controls the way AutoCAD draws the leader and whether it has an
arrowhead.
Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>: Enter an
option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
After each option, AutoCAD returns you to the Specify Next Point prompt.
484
LEADER
sample arrowheads
no arrowhead
Spline
Straight
Arrow
None
Exit
Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. AutoCAD then redisplays the
previous prompt.
See Also
See Create Text with Leaders in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
LEADER
485
LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs
LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the
selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user
coordinate system (UCS).
Modify menu: Lengthen
Command line: lengthen
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]:
option
Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
Current length: <current>, included angle: <current>
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object, enter an
option, or press ENTER to end the command
Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle
of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value
trims it.
Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press
ENTER
Delta Length
Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
delta length
object selected
486
LENGTHEN
Angle
Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.
Enter delta angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
delta angle
object selected
Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Percent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total
included angle of the arc.
Enter percentage length <current>: Enter a positive nonzero value or press
ENTER
Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length
from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc
by a specified total angle.
Specify total length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a positive
nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER
total length
object selected
LENGTHEN
487
Total Length
Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Angle
Sets the included angle of the selected arc.
Specify total angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
total angle
object selected
Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected
object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
See Also
See Resize or Reshape Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
488
LENGTHEN
LIGHT
Manages lights and lighting effects
You can use light in model space only. You can display ambient, point, distant, and spot lights in SHADEMODE and 3DORBIT. To display these lights, you
must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On,
or Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE
options do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, select
Options. In the Options dialog box, select the System tab. On the System tab
under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Light
Command line: light
The Lights dialog box is displayed.
Note In the 3DCONFIG command, under Render Options, the Lights option
must be set to ON for lights to appear in your drawing.
LIGHT
489
Lights
Lists all lights in the current drawing.
Modify
Modifies the selected light.
AutoCAD displays the Modify Point Light dialog box (see page 492), Modify
Distant Light dialog box (see page 494), or Modify Spotlight dialog box (see
page 496), depending on the type of light you select.
Delete
Deletes the selected light from the drawing.
Select
Selects a light using the pointing device. AutoCAD temporarily closes the dialog box while you select a light. The Lights dialog box is redisplayed with the
name of the light selected in the Lights list.
New
Creates a new light in the current drawing. AutoCAD displays the New Point
Light dialog box (see page 492), New Distant Light dialog box (see page 494),
or New Spotlight dialog box (see page 496), depending on the type of light
you select.
Point Light
Distant Light
Spotlight
When you create a light, AutoCAD inserts a light block in the drawing to
show the lights type and position.
490
LIGHT
spotlight block
North Location
Displays the North Location dialog box (see page 498), in which you can set
the north direction.
Ambient Light
Controls background light that provides constant illumination of all the surfaces in your model. Keep ambient light low to avoid saturating or dulling
your image.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of ambient light from no ambient light (0) to full
brightness (1).
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of ambient light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
Select Custom
Color
LIGHT
491
Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. Entering 0 turns off a light.
The maximum point light intensity depends on the attenuation setting and
the extents of the drawing. If attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
If attenuation is inverse linear, maximum intensity is the value of twice the
extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to
the maximum upper-right coordinate. The default value for inverse linear is
half the maximum intensity.
If attenuation is inverse square, maximum intensity is twice the square of the
extents distance.
492
LIGHT
Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.
Modify
Show
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the point light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
Select Custom
Color
Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a point light, the darker the object appears.
None
Inverse Linear
Inverse Square
LIGHT
493
Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On
Shadow Options
Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The intensity value can range
from 0 (off) to 1 (full intensity).
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the distant light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
494
LIGHT
Select Custom
Color
Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On
Shadow Options
Azimuth
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Azimuth scroll bar ranges from 180 to 180. Values you enter are converted
to this range. For example, if you enter 315, the scroll bar correctly displays
this as equivalent to 45.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and altitude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of azimuth and altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.
Altitude
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Altitude scroll bar ranges from 0 to 90. You can enter values between 0 and
90.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and altitude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of Azimuth or Altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.
LIGHT
495
Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The maximum spotlight intensity depends on the attenuation setting and the extents of the drawing. If
attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
496
LIGHT
Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.
Modify
Show
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the spotlight. The color swatch shows
the current color.
Select Custom
Color
Hotspot
Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known
to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160
degrees. The default is 44 degrees.
Falloff
Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as
the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 45
degrees.
LIGHT
497
Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a spotlight, the darker the object appears.
None
Inverse Linear
Inverse Square
Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On
Shadow Options
498
LIGHT
Shadow
Volumes/Ray
Traced Shadows
Shadow Softness
Shadow
Bounding
Objects
LIGHT
499
The right side of the dialog box shows the azimuth, altitude, and solar time
resulting from the local time you select. (You cannot alter the azimuth and
altitude directly as you can in the New Distant Light or Modify Distant Light
dialog box.) You specify time on the left side of the dialog box.
500
Date
Specifies the date. You can enter a date or use the scroll
bar. The date can range from January 1 (1/1) to
December 31 (12/31).
Clock Time
Time Zone
Daylight Savings
Latitude
Longitude
LIGHT
Northern or
Southern
Hemisphere
Western or
Eastern
Hemisphere
Geographic
Location
LIGHT
501
City
Latitude and
Longitude
Current Map
Finds the city nearest the map position that you click
and makes that city current.
See Also
For more information about adding, modifying, and deleting lights, see
Render 3D Objects for Realism in the Users Guide.
Commands
istic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry,
lighting, and materials information. SCENE creates new
scenes and modifies or deletes existing scenes in model
space only.
System Variables
LIMITS
Sets and controls the limits of the drawing boundaries and grid display in the current
Model or layout tab
The drawing limits are two-dimensional points in the world coordinate
system that represent the lower-left and upper-right boundaries. You cannot
impose limits on the Z direction.
502
LIMITS
upper right
Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a point, enter on or off,
or press ENTER
Lower-Left
Corner
On
Off
lower left
See Also
See Adjust Grid and Grid Snap in the Users Guide.
System Variables
LIMITS
503
LINE
Creates straight line segments
You can specify the endpoints of lines using two-dimensional (2D) or threedimensional (3D) coordinates.
AutoCAD draws a line segment and continues to prompt for points. You can
draw a continuing series of line segments, but each line segment is a separate
object. Press ENTER to end the command.
For example, the following command sequence draws a single line segment.
Command: line
Specify first point: Specify a point (1)
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point (2)
Specify next point or [Undo]: Press ENTER
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Line
Command line: line
Specify first point: Specify a point or press ENTER to continue from the last drawn
line or arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
Continue
504
LINE
Close
before entering c
Undo
after entering c
before entering u
after entering u
LINE
505
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes
Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes, dots, and spaces. You
can use LINETYPE to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN)
file, make a linetype current, or modify linetype scales.
continuous
hidden
center
dash-dot
sample complex
linetype
Linetype Manager
Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
506
LINETYPE
Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are
referenced by objects.
Invert Filter
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 509), in which
you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and
add them to the linetype list.
Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned
to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object
assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever
the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE
system variable stores the linetype name.
Delete
Deletes selected linetypes from the list. You can only delete unreferenced
linetypes. Default referenced linetypes include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and
CONTINUOUS.
LINETYPE
507
List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype
Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype
list to display the shortcut menu.
Linetype
Appearance
Description
Details
Displays an extension of the dialog box with alternative access to properties
and additional settings.
508
LINETYPE
Name
Description
Global Scale
Factor
Current Object
Scale
LINETYPE
509
File
Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter
the name of another LIN file or choose File to select a
different file from the Select Linetype File dialog box.
Available
Linetypes
Create
510
LINETYPE
-.5
.5
-.5
LINETYPE
511
Set
See Also
See Work with Linetypes in the Users Guide.
512
LINETYPE
Commands
System Variables
tor. This sets the linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE setting. A line created with CELTSCALE=2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.5 would
appear the same as a line created with CELTSCALE=1 in
a drawing with LTSCALE=1. LTSCALE stores the global
linetype scale factor. PSLTSCALE controls paper space
linetype scaling.
LIST
Displays database information for selected objects
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry List
Command line: list
Select objects:
AutoCAD lists the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the
current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model
space or paper space.
LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not
set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coordinate information defines the elevation. If the extrusion direction of the
entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also reports the
extrusion direction in UCS coordinates.
LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.
See Also
Commands
LIST
513
LOAD
Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command
You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; AutoCAD loads it
thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.
Command line: load
AutoCAD displays the Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.
See Also
Commands
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON
Command line: logfileoff
AutoCAD stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
514
LOAD
LOGFILEON
Writes the text window contents to a file
Command line: logfileon
AutoCAD records the text window contents in the log file until you exit
AutoCAD or use the LOGFILEOFF command.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
LSEDIT
Edits a landscape object
A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped
onto it. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in
the Landscape New dialog box. The geometry of the object depends on
whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned.
You make these choices according to your rendering requirements.
Each landscape object has grips at the base, top, and each corner. Use the base
grip to move the object, the top grips to adjust its height, and the bottom
corner grips to scale it and, if its not view aligned, rotate it. You can use all
standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching, scaling, and rotating
landscape objects.
LOGFILEON
515
With two related commands, LSNEW and LSLIB, you can create landscape
objects and maintain landscape object libraries.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape Edit
Command line: lsedit
Select a landscape object: Use an object selection method
When you select a landscape object, AutoCAD displays the Landscape Edit
dialog box.
The object type is selected in the library list; if the list is unavailable, you
cannot change the object type. For a description of the available options, see
LSNEW.
516
LSEDIT
See Also
See Render a Model in the Users Guide.
Commands
LSLIB
Maintains libraries of landscape objects
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape Library
Command line: lslib
AutoCAD displays the Landscape Library dialog box.
Library Contents
LSLIB
517
Modify
New
Delete
Open
Save
518
LSLIB
Default Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the object. The geometry of an
object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face viewaligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips to
rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can rotate
with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or backward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs. A
crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
cant change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/
Crossing Faces
View Aligned
Name
Shows the current name of the object. To change the name, edit the entry.
Image File
Specifies a file name. You can choose Find File to display a standard file
selection dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.
LSLIB
519
See Also
See Use Materials in Rendering in the Users Guide.
Commands
LSNEW
Adds realistic landscape items, such as trees and bushes, to your drawings
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Landscape New
Command line: lsnew
AutoCAD displays the Landscape New dialog box.
520
LSNEW
Landscape Objects
Lists landscape objects available in the current landscape library. Select the
one you want to insert in the drawing.
Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the landscape object. The geometry
of an object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face
view-aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips
to rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can
rotate with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or
backward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs.
A crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
cant change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/
Crossing Faces
View Aligned
LSNEW
521
Height
Specifies the height of the landscape object in current drawing units. The
default is 20, and the height is always in the positive Z direction of the
current user coordinate system (UCS). Use the scroll bar or enter a value.
Position
Uses the pointing device to specify a location in the drawing. The default
position is at the origin of the UCS.
See Also
See Use Materials in Rendering in the Users Guide.
Commands
LTSCALE
Sets the global linetype scale factor
Command line: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use)
LTSCALE = 1
Enter new linetype scale factor <current>: Enter a positive real value or press
ENTER
LTSCALE = .5
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to regenerate.
LTSCALE = .25
See Also
System Variables
LTSCALE stores the current scale factor. You must use the
SETVAR command to access the LTSCALE system
variable. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype
scaling.
522
LTSCALE
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units
Use lineweights to add width to your objects. Lineweights are useful for the
graphical representation of different objects and information, but they
should not be used to represent specific object widths.
Lineweight can be applied to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts,
raster images (except the image border), points, and solid fills (2D solids).
These exceptions plot with a default lineweight of 0 (the thinnest possible
line that the printer or plotter can plot). The default lineweight value for
objects is BYLAYER; the default lineweight value for layers is set by the Default
option in the Lineweights Settings dialog box. You can also customize lineweights to plot at whatever width you want by using the Plot Style Table
Editor of the PLOT command. See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype
in the Users Guide.
Wide polylines in a plan view are displayed at their width setting rather than
their lineweight setting.
Note Objects with lineweights of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. To optimize AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab,
set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value, or turn off Display Lineweight altogether.
Format menu: Lineweight
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Lwt button on the status bar and choose
Settings.
Command line: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use)
The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on
the command line (see page 525).
LWEIGHT
523
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value
is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01
inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight
value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting
device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.
Current Lineweight
Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a
lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK.
524
Millimeters (mm)
Inches (in.)
LWEIGHT
Display Lineweight
Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If
selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. You can
also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable.
AutoCAD regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented
by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if AutoCAD performance
slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This
option does not affect how objects are plotted.
Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is
0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. You can also set the DEFAULT lineweight by using
the LWDEFAULT system variable.
LWEIGHT
525
Default
Lineweight
?List
Lineweights
Note If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format,
the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the
earlier format does not display lineweights.
See Also
See Work with Linetypes in the Users Guide.
526
Commands
System Variables
LWEIGHT
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or solids
MASSPROP calculates properties of two-dimensional (2D) and threedimensional (3D) objects that are essential in analyzing the characteristics
of the drawn objects.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry Region/Mass Properties
Command line: massprop
Select objects:
If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first
selected region are accepted.
MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if
you want to write the mass properties to a text file.
Regions
The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for all regions.
Mass properties for all regions
Mass property
Description
Area
Perimeter
The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. AutoCAD
does not calculate the perimeter of solids.
MASSPROP
527
Description
Bounding box
The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are
coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system
(UCS), the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners
of a rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not
coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is
defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses
the region.
Centroid
If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, AutoCAD
displays the additional properties shown in the table.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions
Mass property
Description
Moments of
inertia
Products of
inertia
Radii of
gyration
528
MASSPROP
Description
Principal
moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid
Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the
same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain
axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest
through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes
through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere
between the high and low values.
Solids
The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for solids.
Mass properties for solids
Mass property
Description
Mass
Volume
Bounding box
Centroid
Moments of
inertia
The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force
required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating
about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is
mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2
Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the
distance squared.
Products of
inertia
MASSPROP
529
Description
Radii of
gyration
Principal
moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid
Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the
same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain
axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest
through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes
through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere
between the high and low values.
Used to calculate
DENSITY
Mass of solids
LENGTH
Volume of solids
LENGTH*LENGTH
LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH
DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH
See Also
Commands
530
MASSPROP
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects
Standard toolbar:
Modify menu: Match Properties
Command line: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)
Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy
Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to
copy properties to
Destination
Object(s)
Settings
Layer
Linetype
MATCHPROP
531
532
Linetype Scale
Lineweight
Thickness
Plot Style
Dimension
Polyline
Text
Viewport
MATCHPROP
Hatch
MATLIB
Imports and exports materials to and from a library of materials
You can import a predefined material from a materials library file (MLI). You
can use a material as is or modify it.
A new drawing contains only the GLOBAL material. The GLOBAL material is a
set of default material values.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Materials Library
Command line: matlib
The Materials Library dialog box is displayed.
MATLIB
533
Current Drawing
Displays the materials currently in the drawing. A material can be in the
drawing but not assigned to any object. Such a material is called unattached
or unassigned.
In the Current Drawing list, you can save or purge materials. Selecting materials in the Current Library list removes selection from all items selected in
the Current Drawing list and vice versa.
Purge
Save As
Current Library
Displays the materials in the currently selected library file. The default library
is render.mli.
Open
Save
Save As
Preview
Displays a sample of the material selected in the Current Library list or
Current Drawing list. Use the list to specify whether the sample is applied to
a sphere or a cube. You can preview only one material at a time.
Import
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Library list to the Current
Drawing list. If you try to import a material already in the Current Drawing
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog box
(see page 535).
534
MATLIB
Export
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Drawing list to the Current Library list. If you try to export a material already in the Current Library
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog box
(see page 536).
Delete
Deletes materials selected in the Current Drawing list or the Current Library
list.
Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects that are currently attached to that material.
Overwrite
Existing Material
Transfer
Attachments
MATLIB
535
Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being imported.
Old Material in
List
New Material
from Library
OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.
OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.
Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects selected.
Overwrite
Existing Material
536
MATLIB
Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being exported.
Old Material in
Library
New Material
from List
OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.
OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.
See Also
See Use Materials Libraries in the Users Guide.
Commands
MEASURE
Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object
Draw menu: Point Measure
Command line: measure
Select object to measure:
Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b
The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection
set, so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects
prompt. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to
the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering erase
previous.
AutoCAD places the markers in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the
object being measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). Markers
are always placed on the object, regardless of the elevation settings.
MEASURE
537
If you use point objects for the markers, you can make the points easier to see
by changing their appearance with the PDMODE system variable.
Length of
Segment
selected object
select polyline
Block
538
MEASURE
System Variables
MENU
Loads a menu file
A menu file is a text file containing the AutoCAD command strings and
menu syntax that define the menu labels and menu macros. A menu file can
contain a section for each of these menu areas: drop-down menus, toolbars,
shortcut menus, image tile menus, screen menus, pointing device button
menus, accelerator keys, and digitizer tablet menus.
You can create a customized menu file and use MENU to load the file for use
in AutoCAD.
Command line: menu
The Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter or select a menu file name. When you press ENTER or choose
Open, the named file is loaded into AutoCAD.
See Also
For information about AutoCAD menus, see The Command Window in
the Users Guide.
MENU
539
For information about creating and modifying menu files, see The Menu
File in the Customization Guide.
Commands
System Variables
MENULOAD
Loads partial menu files
MENULOAD adds partial menu files to an existing base menu file, such as
acad.mnu. Each menu file (base and partial) has an associated menu group
name. From each menu group, you can access each drop-down menu that
resides in its associated menu file.
After you load the partial menus, you can customize the AutoCAD menu bar
by adding or deleting drop-down menus.
Tools menu: Customize Menus
Command line: menuload
The Menu Customization dialog box is displayed (see page 540).
When FILEDIA is set to 0, MENULOAD displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 543).
540
MENULOAD
Menu Groups
File Name
Replace All
Unload
Load
Browse
MENULOAD
541
542
Menu Group
Menus
Menu Bar
Insert
Remove
Remove All
MENULOAD
MENUUNLOAD
Unloads partial menu files
Command line: menuunload
The Menu Customization dialog box (see page 540) is displayed, which has
the same options as MENULOAD. The only difference between the two commands is in the command line prompts.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), MENUUNLOAD displays the following prompt
on the command line.
Enter the name of the MENUGROUP to unload: Enter a name
See Also
See The Menu File in the Customization Guide.
Commands
MENUUNLOAD
543
MINSERT
Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array
Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
Command line: minsert
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined blocks
in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box
Note You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the
blocks objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT.
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before
you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale
factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options,
respond to the AutoCAD prompts by specifying a distance for the scale
options or an angle for rotation.
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
X Scale Factor
Enter a value or
544
MINSERT
MINSERT
545
XYZ
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
546
MINSERT
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
MINSERT
547
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
548
MINSERT
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option or press ENTER
X Scale Factor
MINSERT
549
Corner
Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block
insertion point.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays
the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value or specify a distance
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance
XYZ
550
MINSERT
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
MINSERT
551
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
See Also
See Insert Blocks, in the Users Guide.
Commands
552
MINSERT
MIRROR
Creates a mirror image copy of objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Mirror
Command line: mirror
objects selected
2
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point (2)
The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the
selected objects are reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing
the mirror line.
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
original objects
deleted
original objects
retained
Yes
No
To manage the reflection properties of text objects, use the MIRRTEXT system
variable. The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 (on), which causes a text object
to be mirrored just like any other object. When MIRRTEXT is off (0), text is not
mirrored.
before mirroring
after mirroring
(MIRRTEXT=1)
after mirroring
(MIRRTEXT=0)
See Also
See Mirror Objects in the Users Guide.
System Variables
MIRROR
553
MIRROR3D
Creates a mirror image of objects about a plane
Modify menu: 3D Operation Mirror 3D
Command line: mirror3d
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/
ZX/3points] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER
Object
select object as
mirroring plane
Last
Z Axis
554
MIRROR3D
View
XY/YZ/ZX
1
XY
1
YZ
ZX
MIRROR3D
555
See Also
See Mirror Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
ROTATE3D rotates an object about an arbitrary 3D axis.
MIRROR creates a mirror image of objects about a mir-
MLEDIT
Edits multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. MLEDIT controls intersections
between multilines.
Modify menu: Object Multiline
Command line: mledit
AutoCAD displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box.
556
MLEDIT
You can click any of the image samples to display a brief description in the
lower-left corner of the dialog box.
Closed Cross
Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. After you select
the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the foreground multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the closed-cross intersection and displays the following
prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Undo
result
Open Cross
Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD breaks
all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second
multiline. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the open-cross intersection and displays the following
prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
MLEDIT
557
Undo
result
Merged Cross
Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in
which you select the multilines is not important. After you select the sample
image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the merged-cross intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]:
First Mline
Undo
result
Closed Tee
Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
558
MLEDIT
Undo
result
Open Tee
Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the open-tee intersection and displays the following
prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
result
MLEDIT
559
Undo
Merged Tee
Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the multiline to its intersection with the other multiline. After you
select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the merged-tee intersection and displays the following
prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Undo
result
Corner Joint
Creates a corner joint between multilines. AutoCAD trims or extends the
multilines to their intersection. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD
displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select second mline: Select the second half of the corner
AutoCAD completes the corner joint and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
560
MLEDIT
Undo
result
Add Vertex
Adds a vertex to a multiline. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD
displays the following prompt:
Select mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD adds the vertex at the selected point and displays the following
prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
mline selected
Undo
result
Delete Vertex
Deletes a vertex from a multiline. After you select the sample image,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select mline: Select a multiline
MLEDIT
561
AutoCAD deletes the vertex nearest to the selected point and displays the
following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
mline selected
Undo
result
Cut Single
Cuts a selected element of a multiline. After you select the sample image,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD uses the selection point on the multiline as the first cut point and
displays the following prompt:
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline
AutoCAD cuts the element and displays the following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
mline selected
Undo
562
MLEDIT
result
Cut All
Cuts a multiline in two. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays
the following prompt:
Select mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the first cut point and
displays the following prompt:
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline
AutoCAD cuts all elements of the multiline and displays the following
prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
mline selected
Undo
result
Weld All
Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. After you select the sample
image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the start of the weld and
displays the following prompt:
Select second point: Specify the end of the weld on the multiline
MLEDIT
563
mline selected
Undo
result
See Also
See Modify Multilines in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multiline. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline.
CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline
style.
MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines.
Draw menu: Multiline
Command line: mline
Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current
Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option
564
MLINE
Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.
Specify next point:
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, AutoCAD displays a
prompt that includes the Close option.
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
Next Point
Undo
Close
Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
top
Top
Zero
Bottom
zero
Scale
bottom
Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale.
Enter mline scale <current>: Enter a scale or press ENTER
MLINE
565
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style
definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style
definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset linethe
smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative
scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0
collapses the multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline
style definition, see MLSTYLE.
scale at 1
scale at 2
Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline. See Draw Multiple-Line Objects in
the Users Guide, and see MLSTYLE.
Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Style Name
?List Styles
See Also
See Draw Multiple-Line Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multiline. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline.
CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline
style.
MLSTYLE
Defines a style for multiple parallel lines
Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE
also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline.
Format menu: Multiline Style
Command line: mlstyle
AutoCAD displays the Multiline Styles dialog box.
566
MLSTYLE
Current
MLSTYLE
567
Name
Description
Load
Save
Add
Rename
Element
Properties
Multiline
Properties
568
MLSTYLE
List
Elements
Add
Delete
Offset
MLSTYLE
569
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.45
a four-element multiline, each element offset from 0.0
Color
Linetype
570
MLSTYLE
Display Joints
Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment.
A joint is also known as a miter.
Display Joints on
Caps
Controls the start and end caps of the multiline.
Line
without Line
Outer Arc
with Line
MLSTYLE
571
Inner Arcs
Angle
without Angle
with Angle
Fill
Controls the background fill of the multiline.
On
Color
See Also
See Modify Multilines in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
multiline style.
572
MLSTYLE
MODEL
Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab
Command line: model
On the Model tab, you can create drawings in model space. The Model tab
automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1, and you can create
model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once youve completed your drawing, you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout
environment from which to plot.
For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or
between the Model tab and a layout tab, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system
variable to control how the display list is updated.
Note The Model tab replaces the TILE button that appeared on the status bar
in earlier releases of AutoCAD.
See Also
See Work in Paper Space and Model Space in the Users Guide.
System Variables
MOVE
Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Move
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Move.
Command line: move
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point (1)
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point (2) or press ENTER
MODEL
573
1
2
object selected
object moved
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how
far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press
ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for
the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units
in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.
See Also
See Move Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
MREDO
Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands
Reverses the action of multiple UNDO commands. To redo more than one
action at a time, click the arrow next to the Redo button on the Standard
toolbar, and then select the last in the sequence of actions you want to redo.
Standard toolbar:
Command line: mredo
Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Specify an option, enter a positive number,
or press ENTER
574
Number of
Actions
All
Last
MREDO
MSLIDE
Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout
Command line: mslide
The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide
file is a raster image of a viewport.
In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. In
paper space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display, including
all viewports and their contents.
Off-screen portions of the drawing, or layers that are off or frozen, are not
included in the slide.
Use the VSLIDE command to view slides, or the SLIDELIB utility to create a
slide library.
When you view slides of images shaded with the -SHADE command in a larger
window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating slides.
See Also
See Prepare Slides for Image Tile Menus in the Customization Guide.
Commands
Utilities
MSPACE
Switches from paper space to a model space viewport
AutoCAD operates in either model space or paper space. You use model space
(the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a layout
tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.
MSLIDE
575
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace on the command line to
make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space
in that viewport within the layout. You can switch to model space by doubleclicking a viewport, and you can switch to paper space by double-clicking an
area of paper space.
Command line: mspace
See Also
See Work in Paper Space and Model Space in the Users Guide.
Commands
specifies the maximum number of viewports to regenerate. DIMLFAC controls scaling for linear dimensioning
measurements.
MTEXT
Creates multiline text
MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a boundary that defines the width
of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. Each multiline text (mtext)
object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains. The text
boundary, although not plotted, printed, or displayed, remains part of the
objects framework.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Text Multiline Text
Command line: mtext
Current text style: current Text height: current
Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
After you specify the point for the opposite corner, the Multiline Text Editor
is displayed.
576
MTEXT
If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays
additional prompts on the command line (see page 585).
stack/unstack
text
text height
text color
ruler
default tab stops
paragraph indent marker
first line indent marker
The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut
menu.
MTEXT
577
Font
Text Height
Bold
Italic
Underline
Undo
Redo
Stack
578
MTEXT
characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottomright aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar
are top-left aligned.
Text Color
Close
Justification
MTEXT
579
Select All
Change Case
AutoCAPS
Remove
Formatting
Combine
Paragraphs
Stack/Unstack
Properties
Symbol
Import Text
580
MTEXT
Paragraph
MTEXT
581
Replace With
Find Button
Replace Button
Replace All
Match Whole
Word Only
Match Case
582
MTEXT
Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction.
Upper
Lower
Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.
Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text.
Tolerance
Fraction
(Horizontal)
Fraction
(Diagonal)
Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All
stacked text in an object uses the same alignment.
Top
Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text
line.
Center
Bottom
MTEXT
583
Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current
text style (from 25 to 125 percent). Default text size is 70 percent.
Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to
the current stacked text.
AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric
characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound characters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the
text and choose the Stack button.
584
Enable
AutoStacking
Remove Leading
Blank
Convert It to a
Diagonal Fraction
MTEXT
Convert It to a
Horizontal
Fraction
Note To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have suppressed automatic display, select stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on
the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack.
Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows
within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.
Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.
Specify height <current>:
The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise,
it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Character height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in
TEXTSIZE.
MTEXT
585
Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in
relation to the text boundary. The current justification (Top Left, by default)
is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle
based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the
rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify
the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left
and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as
part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text flow controls
whether text is aligned from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>:
Justify options
Option
Meaning
TL
Top Left
TC
Top Center
TR
Top Right
ML
Middle Left
MC
Middle Center
MR
Middle Right
BL
Bottom Left
BC
Bottom Center
BR
Bottom Right
586
MTEXT
top left:
left-justified,
spills down
top center:
center-justified,
spills down
top right:
right-justified,
spills down
middle left:
left-justified,
spills up and down
middle center:
center-justified,
spills up and down
middle right:
right-justified,
spills up and down
bottom left:
left-justified,
spills up
bottom center:
center-justified,
spills up
bottom right:
right-justified,
spills up
Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom
of the next line of text.
Note Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table.
Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does
not overlap.
Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>:
MTEXT
587
At Least
Exactly
Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text
in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text
height of the object or text style.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify a point or enter a value
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.
588
MTEXT
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite
corner of the text boundary.
Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text.
Enter style name or [?] <current>:
Style Name
?List Styles
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite
corner of the text boundary.
Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary.
Specify width:
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as
the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within
each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the
multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line
of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER . To end the
command, press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt.
Unicode Strings
Result
%%d
\U+00B0
Degree symbol ()
%%p
\U+00B1
Tolerance symbol ()
%%c
\U+2205
Diameter symbol ()
MTEXT
589
Note that the circle diameter dimensioning symbol appears as %%c in the
Multiline Text Editor but converts to the special character in your drawing.
See Unicode.
See Also
See Overview of Multiline Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled
Command line: multiple
Enter command name to repeat:
AutoCADrepeats the command you enter until you press ESC . Because
MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be
specified each time.
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes.
590
MULTIPLE
MVIEW
Creates and controls layout viewports
When working in a layout tab, MVIEW controls the creation and display of
layout viewports. When working in the Model tab, you can use VPORTS to
create model viewports.
View menu: Viewports 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, 4 Viewports
Command line: mview
Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/
Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>: Enter an option or specify a point
In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64
viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space
are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank.
Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.
Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.
Specify opposite corner:
MVIEW
591
On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in
model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number
of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more
viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to
make another one active.
Select objects:
Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed
in an inactive viewport.
Select objects:
Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the paper margins.
When the paper background and margins are turned off, the viewport fills
the display.
Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.
fit
Wireframe
Hidden
Rendered
Select objects:
592
MVIEW
Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed
when working in model space.
Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]: Enter on or off
Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a
viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line
segments.
Select object to clip viewport: Select an object
Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. The prompts
are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for
external references (xrefs), but you can specify arcs when you create a
polygonal viewport boundary.
Specify start point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an
option
Arc
Close
Length
MVIEW
593
Undo
Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.
Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>: Enter ?, enter a name, or
press ENTER
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner
Fit
2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of
equal size.
Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] <Vertical>: Enter h or press
ENTER
First Corner
Fit
3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
Enter viewport arrangement
[Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/<Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The
other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two
smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the
larger viewport is placed.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
594
MVIEW
3/right
First Corner
Fit
4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of
equal size.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
First Corner
Fit
See Also
For more information about using model space and paper space, see Create
Layout Viewports in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
MVSETUP
Sets up the specifications of a drawing
Command line: mvsetup
When you enter mvsetup at the command line, the prompts displayed
depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) or on a layout
tab (paper space).
MVSETUP
595
On the Model tab, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size
from the command line using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide,
AutoCAD draws a rectangular border at the drawing limits.
On a layout tab, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the
drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can
specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the
layout and the drawing on the Model tab. The Model tab is most useful for
plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border.
To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting, you can also use the Page Setup dialog box, which is automatically
displayed when you select a layout in a new drawing session.
596
MVSETUP
Align
Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another
viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to.
Enter an option [Angled/Horizontal/Vertical alignment/Rotate view/Undo]:
Enter an option
Angled
Specify a point in
Vertical
Alignment
Specify a point in
Specify a point in
MVSETUP
597
Rotate View
Undo
Create
Creates viewports.
Enter an option [Delete objects/Create viewports/Undo] <Create>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
Delete Objects
Deletes existing viewports.
Select the objects to delete...
Select objects: Select the viewports to delete and press ENTER
Create Viewports
Displays options for creating viewports.
Available layout options:
0:
1:
2:
3:
None
Single
Std. Engineering
Array of Viewports
598
MVSETUP
View
Upper-left
Upper-right
SE isometric view
Lower-left
Lower-right
MVSETUP
599
Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Scale Viewports
Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The
zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and
the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports.
Select the viewports to scale...
Select objects: Select the viewports to scale
If you select only one viewport, AutoCAD skips the next prompt.
Set zoom scale factors for viewports. Interactively/<Uniform>: Enter i or press
ENTER
Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
600
MVSETUP
Interactively
Uniform
Options
Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing.
Enter an option [Layer/LImits/Units/Xref] <exit>:
to return to the previous prompt
Layer
Limits
Units
Xref
MVSETUP
601
Title Block
Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a
drawing border and a title block.
Enter title block option [Delete objects/Origin/Undo/Insert] <Insert>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
Delete Objects
Deletes objects from paper space.
Select the objects to delete . . .
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Origin
Relocates the origin point for this sheet.
Specify new origin point for this sheet: Specify a point
Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Insert
Displays title block options.
Available title blocks:...
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
None
ISO A4 Size(mm)
ISO A3 Size(mm)
ISO A2 Size(mm)
ISO A1 Size(mm)
ISO A0 Size(mm)
ANSI-V Size(in)
ANSI-A Size(in)
ANSI-B Size(in)
ANSI-C Size(in)
ANSI-D Size(in)
ANSI-E Size(in)
Arch/Engineering (24 x 36in)
Generic D size Sheet (24 x 36in)
602
MVSETUP
Title Block to
Load
Add
The last field of the line specifies whether the title block
has been created in inches or in millimeters. The units
field allows title blocks created in either unit system to
be changed by setting the unit type using the Options
option.
You can also add title blocks that have variable
attributes.
Delete
Redisplay
MVSETUP
603
Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
See Also
See Edit in Layout Viewports in the Users Guide.
Commands
port behavior.
604
MVSETUP
NEW
Creates a new drawing
File menu: New
Command line: new
The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the Startup setting on
the System tab of the Options dialog box.
Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog
box.
Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Select Template
dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a prompt on the command line is displayed (see page 612). If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is
displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
NEW
605
Imperial
Metric
Use a Template
Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store
all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers,
dimension styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from
other drawing files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the
template directory.
Several template drawings are included with AutoCAD. You can make
additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file
names to .dwt. See Use a Template File to Start a Drawing in the Users
Guide.
606
NEW
Select a Template
Browse
Use a Wizard
Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two
wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.
NEW
607
Quick Setup
Advanced Setup
The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this
wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the
last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you
specified.
608
NEW
Units
Indicates the format in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays
coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available in AutoCAD.
Two of them, Engineering and Architectural, have a specific base unit
(inches) assigned to them. You can select from other measurement styles that
can represent any convenient unit of measurement.
Note You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all
measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command.
The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000).
Decimal
Engineering
Architectural
Fractional
Scientific
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and
off with the LIMITS command.
NEW
609
The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure,
Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next
to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard
and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using
the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.
Units
Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in
which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays coordinates and measurements. The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats.
See Units on page 609 for more information.
The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional
size for displaying linear measurements.
610
NEW
Angle
Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which AutoCAD
displays angles.
Decimal Degrees
Deg/Min/Sec
Grads
Radians
Surveyor
Angle Measure
Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter
an angle value in AutoCAD, AutoCAD measures the angle either counterclockwise or clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this
page. You control the counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle
Direction page.
East
North
West
South
Other
Angle Direction
Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which
AutoCAD displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and
off with the LIMITS command.
NEW
611
command.
612
NEW
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves
OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or
polyline
Offset Distance
polyline
with offset
offset distance
object
selected
side selected
object offset
OFFSET
613
Through
object
selected
through point
object offset
lines.
System Variables
OLELINKS
Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links
AutoCAD supports the Windows feature called object linking and embedding
(OLE). When you use PASTESPEC to insert a linked object into an AutoCAD
drawing from an application that supports OLE, the object maintains a connection with its source file.
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
You can set AutoCAD to update links automatically or manually when
information in the source document changes.
Edit menu: OLE Links
Command line: olelinks
The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the drawing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is
614
OLELINKS
Links
Source
Displays the path name of the source file and the type
of object.
Type
Update:
Automatic
Update: Manual
Update Now
Open Source
Change Source
OLELINKS
615
Break Link
Severs the link between the object and the original file.
AutoCAD changes the object in your AutoCAD drawing
into a Windows metafile, which is not affected by
future changes to the original file.
616
Current Type
Object Type
Convert To
Activate As
Display as Icon
Change Icon
Result
OLELINKS
Icon
Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object.
Current
Default
From File
Label
Specifies a caption for the icon. AutoCAD displays the file type unless you
specify otherwise.
Browse
Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in
which you can select an icon from a file.
See Also
See Link and Embed Data (OLE) in the Users Guide.
Commands
OLELINKS
617
OLESCALE
Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object
Shortcut menu: Right-click an OLE object and choose Properties.
Command line: olescale
The OLE Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command.
Note UNDO does not undo a change made in the OLE Properties dialog box.
To undo a change made in the OLE properties dialog box, right-click the OLE
object and choose Undo from the shortcut menu.
618
OLESCALE
Size
Specifies a size for the OLE object.
Height
Width
Reset
Resets the size of the OLE object to the size it was when
you first inserted it into the drawing.
Scale
Sets the scale for the OLE object.
Height
Width
OLESCALE
619
Text Size
Changes the size of text of a selected font and point size in an OLE object.
Other text of different fonts and point sizes also changes to adjust to the
change to the selected font. If there is no text in the OLE object, this option
is unavailable.
Font
Point Size
Displays a list of all the point sizes in the OLE object for
the selected font. Select the point size that you want to
change.
Text Height
OOPS
Restores erased objects
Command line: oops
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.
erased objects
620
OOPS
before OOPS
after OOPS
You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can
erase the selected objects after creating a block. You cannot use OOPS to
restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command.
See Also
Commands
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Open
Command line: open
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
You can open and load a portion of a drawing, including geometry on a specific view or layer. In the Select File dialog box, click the arrow next to Open
and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read-Only to display the Partial
Open dialog box.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 632).
Note If the drawing you open contains macros, AutoCAD displays the
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box (see page 1082).
OPEN
621
Places
list
Places List
Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Click the Look In arrow to
view the path for each icon. You can reorder the icons in the Places list by
dragging them to a new location. To add a new icon to the Places list, drag a
folder from the files list to the Places list, or right-click an existing icon and
choose Add or Add Current Folder from the shortcut menu. This shortcut
menu also provides options for removing and modifying icons, or restoring
default icons that have been removed. You cannot remove the Buzzsaw
icon. Changes to the Places list affect all standard file selection dialog boxes.
622
History
Personal/My
Documents
OPEN
Favorites
FTP
Desktop
Buzzsaw
Look In/Save In
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of
the folder path and to navigate up the path tree or to other drives, network
connections, FTP locations, or Web folders (either Web Folders or My Network
Places depending on the version of your operating system). You can create
Web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or
Windows Explorer Help for more information about Web folders.
To control whether the last used paths in each particular standard file
selection dialog box are stored across AutoCAD sessions, use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable.
Back
Returns to the previous file location.
Up One Level
Navigates one level up in the current path tree.
Search the Web
Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can access and
store AutoCAD files on the Internet.
OPEN
623
Delete
Deletes the selected file or folder.
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify.
Views
Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a
preview image.
List
Details
Preview
Tools
Provides the following tools:
624
Find
Locate
Add/Modify FTP
Locations
Add Current
Folder to Places
Add to Favorites
OPEN
Options
Security Options
Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type.
Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and
Details view.
Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views Preview in
the dialog box. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file. To save a
bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option
on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.
File Name
Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list. If you select multiple
files, File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. If you
enter a file name in the File Name box, AutoCAD clears any selection. You
must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You can use
wild-card characters to filter files displayed in the Files list.
Files of Type
Filters the list of files by file type. When you are saving files, Files of Type
specifies the format in which the file is saved.
Select Initial View
Displays the specified view when you open the drawing if the drawing
contains more than one named view.
Open/Save
Opens or saves the selected file, depending on the purpose of the specific file
selection dialog box. Certain file selection dialog boxes may also include the
following options, accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button:
Open Read-Only
Partial Open
Displays the Partial Open dialog box (see page 629). You
can open and load a portion of a drawing, including
geometry on a specific view or layer. You can only use
this option with drawings created in AutoCAD 2000 or
later.
Partial Open
Read-Only
OPEN
625
626
OPEN
Look In
Browse
Include
Subfolders
Find Now
Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs.
Stop
Ends the search.
New Search
Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options.
OK
When one or more files are selected in the search results, closes the Find
dialog box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection
dialog box.
OPEN
627
Search Results
Lists all files found by the search. To change the sort order of the files, click
a column heading. To pass a file to the standard file selection dialog box,
select a file and choose OK. When used with a standard file selection dialog
box that allows multiple file selection, you can pass multiple files from the
Search Results.
Log On As
Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific
user name.
Anonymous
628
OPEN
User
Password
Specifies the password to use to log on to the FTP site.
Add
Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard
file selection dialog box.
Modify
Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name, logon name, and
password.
Remove
Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the
standard file selection dialog box.
FTP Sites
Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file
selection dialog boxes.
URL
Displays the URL for the selected FTP site.
OPEN
629
View List
Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected view. All views are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the view
specified to load is displayed in the drawing.
630
OPEN
Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected layers. All layers are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the layers
specified to load appears in the drawing.
Layer Name
Load Geometry
Load All
Clear All
Index Status
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index.
INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the
drawing file.
OPEN
631
Spatial Index
Layer Index
Open
Opens the drawing file, loading only combined geometry from the selected
view and layers.
632
OPEN
Commands
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Tools menu: Options
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Options.
Command line: options
The Options dialog box is displayed.
OPTIONS
633
Current Profile
Current Drawing
To specify a location for a folder or file, double-click its name in the list.
Choose Browse and use the Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) to locate the folder or file you want to use.
634
OPTIONS
Help File
Default Internet
Location
Configuration
File
OPTIONS
635
Main Dictionary
Custom
Dictionary File
Alternate Font
File
Font Mapping
File
636
Print Spool
Executable
OPTIONS
Printer
Configuration
Search Path
Printer
Description File
Search Path
OPTIONS
637
638
OPTIONS
Window Elements
Controls display settings specific to the AutoCAD drawing environment.
Display Scroll
Bars in Drawing
Window
Display Screen
Menu
Text Lines in
Command Line
Window
Colors
OPTIONS
639
Fonts
Layout Elements
Controls options for existing and new layouts. A layout is a paper space
environment in which you can set up drawings for plotting.
Display Layout
and Model Tabs
Display Margins
Display Paper
Background
Displays the Page Setup dialog box (see page 678) the
first time you choose a layout tab. Use this dialog box
to set options related to paper and plot settings.
Create Viewport
in New Layouts
Crosshair Size
Controls the size of the crosshairs. The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent
of the total screen. At 100 percent, the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
When the size is decreased to 99 percent or below, the crosshairs have a finite
size, and the ends of the crosshairs are visible when situated at the edge of
the drawing area. The default size is 5 percent. (CURSORSIZE system variable)
Display Resolution
Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to
improve display quality, the impact on performance is significant.
Arc and Circle
Smoothness
640
OPTIONS
Rendered Object
Smoothness
Display Performance
Controls display settings that affect AutoCAD performance.
Pan and Zoom
with Raster Image
OPTIONS
641
Highlight Raster
Image Frame
Only
Show Text
Boundary Frame
Only
Show Silhouettes
in Wireframe
642
OPTIONS
File Save
Controls settings related to saving a file in AutoCAD.
Save As
Save a Thumbnail
Preview Image
OPTIONS
643
Incremental Save
Percentage
Create Backup
Copy with Each
Save
Full-Time CRC
Validation
644
OPTIONS
Maintain a Log
File
Security Options
Display Digital
Signature
Information
File Open
Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files.
Number of
Recently Used
Files to List
OPTIONS
645
Retain Changes
to Xref Layers
Saves changes to layer properties and states for xrefdependent layers. When the drawing is reloaded, the
properties currently assigned to xref-dependent layers
are retained. This setting is saved in the drawing.
(VISRETAIN system variable)
ObjectARX Applications
Controls settings that relate to AutoCAD Runtime Extension applications
and proxy graphics.
Demand Load
ObjectARX Apps
Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand-loads a thirdparty application if a drawing contains custom objects
created in that application. (DEMANDLOAD system
variable)
646
OPTIONS
Show Proxy
Information
Dialog Box
Sets the default output device for new drawings and for
drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that
have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later
format. The list displays any plotter configuration files
(PC3) found in the plotter configuration search path
and any system printers that are configured in the
system.
Use Last
Successful Plot
Settings
OPTIONS
647
Add or Configure
Plotters
System Printer
Spool Alert
648
OPTIONS
Use OLE
Application
When Plotting
OLE Objects
Hide System
Printer
OPTIONS
649
650
Sets the default plot style for Layer 0 for new drawings
or drawings created with earlier releases of AutoCAD
that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later
format. The list displays the default style, Normal, and
any plot styles defined in the currently loaded plot style
table. (DEFLPLSTYLE system variable)
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
651
Properties
Accept Input
From
652
Regen When
Switching
Layouts
For the Model tab and the last layout made current,
saves the display list to memory and suppresses
regenerations when you switch between the two tabs.
For all other layouts, regenerations still occur when you
switch to those tabs.
OPTIONS
dbConnect Options
Controls options that relate to database connectivity.
Store Links Index
in Drawing File
Open Tables in
Read-Only Mode
General Options
Controls general options that relate to system settings.
Single-Drawing
Compatibility
Mode
Display OLE
Properties Dialog
Beep on Error in
User Input
Load acad.lsp
with Every
Drawing
Allow Long
Symbol Names
OPTIONS
653
Startup
Maximum
Number of
Unsuccessful
Checks
For more information about object enablers, see Work with Custom and
Proxy Objects in the Users Guide.
654
OPTIONS
Shortcut Menus
in Drawing Area
Right-Click
Customization
Target Drawing
Units
OPTIONS
655
Hyperlink
Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks.
Display Hyperlink
Cursor and
Shortcut Menu
Display Hyperlink
Tooltip
Keyboard Entry
Keyboard Entry
Except Scripts
656
OPTIONS
Object Snap
Regens
Plotting
Associative Dimensioning
Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy-style, nonassociative dimension objects are created. Associative dimensions automatically
adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the
geometric objects associated with them are modified. (DIMASSOC system
variable)
Hidden Line Settings
Displays the Hidden Line Settings dialog box, where you can change the display properties of hidden lines.
Lineweight Settings
Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box (see page 523). Use this dialog
box to set lineweight options, such as display properties and defaults, and
also to set the current lineweight.
OPTIONS
657
AutoSnap Settings
Controls settings that relate to the visual aids, called AutoSnaps, that display
when you use object snaps. AutoSnap settings are saved in the registry.
When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press TAB to cycle
through all the snap points available for that object.
658
Marker
Magnet
Display AutoSnap
Tooltip
OPTIONS
Display AutoSnap
Aperture Box
AutoSnap Marker
Color
Display
Full-Screen
Tracking Vector
Display
AutoTrack Tooltip
Shift to Acquire
OPTIONS
659
Aperture Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap aperture. When Display AutoSnap
Aperture Box is selected (or when APBOX is set to 1), the aperture box is
displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. The
aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the
magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range from 1 to 50
pixels. (APERTURE system variable)
Pickbox Size
Controls the display size of the AutoCAD pickbox. The pickbox is the object
selection tool that appears in editing commands. (PICKBOX system variable)
Selection Modes
Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.
660
OPTIONS
Noun/Verb
Selection
ALIGN
DVIEW
ARRAY
ERASE
ROTATE
BLOCK
EXPLODE
SCALE
CHANGE
LIST
STRETCH
CHPROP
MIRROR
WBLOCK
COPY
MOVE
Implied
Windowing
Object Grouping
OPTIONS
661
Associative Hatch
Grip Size
Controls the display size of AutoCAD grips. (GRIPSIZE system variable)
grip sizes
unselected grips
Grips
Controls the settings that relate to grips. Grips are small squares displayed on
an object after it has been selected.
Unselected Grip
Color
Selected Grip
Color
Enable Grips
Enable Grips
within Blocks
selected grip
662
OPTIONS
Maximum
Number of
Selected Objects
That Display
Grips
Available Profiles
OPTIONS
663
Set Current
Add to List
Rename
Delete
Export
Import
Reset
AutoCAD cannot locate, a similar dialog box displays from which you specify
a font to use for each missing font.
664
OPTIONS
Font Name
Font Style
Model Tab
Displays the current settings for AutoCAD window elements in model space.
To change the color of a Model tab window element, click the specific element in the Model Tab area or select it from the Window Element list, and
then select a color from the Color list. The window title bar and menu bar
colors are controlled by the Windows system settings.
Layout Tabs
Displays the current settings for AutoCAD window elements in layouts. To
change the color of a layout tab window element, click the specific element
in the Layout Tabs area or select it from the Window Element list, and then
select a color from the Color list. The window title bar and menu bar colors
are controlled by the Windows system settings.
OPTIONS
665
Window Element
Lists the AutoCAD window elements.
Model Tab
Background
Model Tab
Pointer
Layout Tabs
Background
(Paper)
Layout Tabs
Pointer
AutoTracking
Vector Color
Command Line
Background
Command Line
Text
Color
Lists the available color settings to apply to the list of AutoCAD window
elements. You can choose one of the colors in the color list or choose Select
Color to open the Select Color dialog box. You can use the Select Color dialog
box to define the color of window elements by selecting from the AutoCAD
Color Index (ACI) colors, True Color colors, and Color Book colors.
If you select a new color for a window element, the new setting is displayed
in the Model Tab or Layout Tabs preview image.
666
OPTIONS
Default All
Sets all AutoCAD window elements back to the default color settings.
Font
Font Style
Size
OPTIONS
667
Default Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when no
objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last
Command
Disables the Default shortcut menu. As a result, rightclicking in the drawing area when no objects are
selected and no commands are in progress is the same
as pressing ENTER , which repeats the last issued
command.
Shortcut Menu
Edit Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when
one or more objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
668
OPTIONS
Repeat Last
Command
Disables the Edit shortcut menu. As a result, rightclicking in the drawing area when one or more objects
are selected and no commands are in progress is the
same as pressing ENTER , which repeats the last issued
command.
Shortcut Menu
Command Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when a
command is in progress.
ENTER
Shortcut Menu:
Always Enabled
Shortcut Menu:
Enabled When
Command
Options Are
Present
Profile Name
Description
OPTIONS
669
Profile Name
Description
See Also
See Customize the Drawing Environment in the Users Guide.
ORTHO
Constrains cursor movement
In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical
directions (relative to the UCS) and with the current grid rotation angle.
Status bar: Ortho
Command line: ortho (or 'ortho for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point
specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is
specified.
670
ORTHO
2
1
Ortho off
1
Ortho on
AutoCAD uses Ortho mode when you specify an angle or distance by means
of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is
constrained to the horizontal or vertical directions (relative to the UCS) and
with the current grid rotation angle. AutoCAD ignores Ortho mode in
perspective views.
AutoCAD defines horizontal as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and
vertical as being parallel to the Y axis. ORTHO adjusts to the current snap
rotation regardless of the UCS.
See Also
See Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
OSNAP
Sets running object snap modes
An object snap mode specifies a snap point at an exact location on an object.
OSNAP specifies running object snap modes, which remain active until you
OSNAP
671
Running object snap modes can be toggled on and off with the Osnap button
on the status bar. You can use the TAB key to cycle through available object
snaps. Running object snap settings are stored with the drawing.
Object Snap toolbar:
Tools Menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Press SHIFT while right-clicking in the drawing area and
choose Osnap Settings.
Command line: osnap (or 'osnap for transparent use)
The Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (see page 318) is
displayed.
If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, OSNAP presents options on the
command line.
Current osnap modes: current
Enter list of object snap modes: Enter names of object snap modes separated with
commas, or enter none or off
CENter
TANgent
MIDpoint
NODe
NEArest
INTersection
QUAdrant
PARallel
EXTension
INSertion
APParent Intersection
PERpendicular
For a description of each of these object snap modes, see the Object Snaps tab
of the Drafting Settings dialog box (see page 318).
The -OSNAP command also presents the following additional options:
672
QUIck
NONe
OSNAP
See Also
See Use Object Snaps in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
Note The index for the Command Reference is at the end of Volume II.
OSNAP
673
674
PAGESETUP
Specifies the plotting device, paper size, and settings for each new layout
File menu: Page Setup
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Page
Setup.
Command line: pagesetup
The Page Setup dialog box is displayed.
Page Setup
Name
Display When
Creating a New
Layout
Plot
PAGESETUP
675
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which its connected or its network location, and any additional user-defined comments
about the plotter. A list of the available system printers and PC3 file names is
displayed in the Name list. An icon in front of the device name identifies it
as a PC3 file or a system printer.
If a selected plotter doesnt support the layouts selected paper size, a warning
is displayed and the plotters default paper size is automatically selected. You
can set paper size on the Layout Settings tab.
676
PAGESETUP
Properties
Hints
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you can view
or modify plot styles for the currently assigned plot
style table.
New
Displays the Add Plot Style Table wizard, which you can
use to create a new plot style table. The wizard that is
displayed is determined by whether the current
drawing is in color-dependent or named mode.
Display Plot
Styles
Options
PAGESETUP
677
678
PAGESETUP
Portrait
Landscape
Plot UpsideDown
Extents
Display
View
Window
PAGESETUP
679
Plot Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Scaled to Fit when
plotting the Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed in Custom.
Note If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, AutoCAD plots the actual
size of the layout and ignores the setting specified in Scale.
Scale
Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most
recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of
the list.
Custom
Scale Lineweights
680
PAGESETUP
Quality
DPI
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper.
In a layout, the lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the
lower-left margin of the paper. You can offset the origin by entering a positive
or negative value. The plotter values are in inches or millimeters on the
paper.
Center the Plot
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, shaded plots, and the order in
which objects are plotted.
PAGESETUP
681
Plot Object
Lineweights
Plot Paperspace
Last
Hide Paperspace
Objects
Page Setups
Rename
Delete
Import
682
PAGESETUP
PAN
Moves the view in the current viewport
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and
choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays the following prompt; you can pan the drawing display in
real time.
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu.
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays alternative prompts
on the command line, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display.
hand cursor
The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on
the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the
viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor.
When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical
extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side).
top
extent
right
extent
bottom
extent
left
extent
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick
button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press
the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC .
PAN
683
You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another
ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress.
before PAN
after PAN
684
PAN
Exit
Pan
Switches to PAN.
Zoom
3D Orbit
Switches to 3DORBIT.
Zoom Window
Zoom Original
Zoom Extents
See Also
See Pan a View in the Users Guide.
Commands
mode and sets the resolution for circle, arc, and linetype
generation in the current viewport. VPOINT sets the
viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the current
drawing. ZOOM increases or decreases the apparent size
of objects in the current viewport.
PARTIALOAD
File Menu: Partial Load
Command line: partiaload
AutoCAD displays the Partial Load dialog box. PARTIALOAD can only be used
in a partially open drawing. To partially open a drawing, use OPEN and
choose Partial Open in the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Any information that is loaded into the file using PARTIALOAD
cannot be unloaded, not even with UNDO.
If you enter -partiaload at the Command prompt, PARTIALOAD displays
prompts on the command line (see page 687).
PARTIALOAD
685
686
View Name
View List
Pick Window
PARTIALOAD
Load Geometry
Load All
Selects Load Geometry for all layers. You can also rightclick and choose Load All from the shortcut menu to
load geometry from all layers.
Clear All
Index Status
Indicates whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index.
INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the
drawing file. A spatial index organizes objects based on their location in
space. A layer index is a list showing which objects are on which layers.
PARTIALOAD
687
First Corner
Specifies the first corner of a user-defined view.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
Geometry from the defined view is loaded into the partially open drawing.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from the selected layers into the current drawing, including
both model space and paper space geometry. To load geometry from multiple
layers into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
?List Layers
Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing. Enter one or
more layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
View
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the current drawing.
Enter view to load or [?] <*Extents*>: Enter a view name, enter ?, or press ENTER
to load the Extents view
View to Load
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the partially open drawing.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
688
PARTIALOAD
Layers to Load
?List Layers
?List Views
Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter
a view name.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Layers to Load
PARTIALOAD
689
?List Layers
See Also
See Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) in the Users Guide.
System Variables
PARTIALOPEN
When working with a large drawing file, you can choose to work with only
a portion of the drawing by loading geometry from a specific view or layer.
When a drawing is partially open, the specified geometry as well as the
named objects are loaded into the file. AutoCAD named objects include
blocks, dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views,
and viewport configurations.
It is recommended that you partially open a drawing by using OPEN and
choosing Partial Open in the Select File dialog box to display the Partial Open
dialog box (see page 629).
Command line: partialopen
When you are running a script and using PARTIALOPEN, FILEDIA can be set to
0 or 1. When FILEDIA is set to 0 and you enter partialopen or -partialopen at
the Command prompt, PARTIALOPEN displays prompts on the command
line.
Enter name of drawing to open: Enter a drawing name and press ENTER
690
PARTIALOPEN
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box (see page 621). In the Select File dialog box, select a file and choose
Partial Open to display the Partial Open dialog box (see page 629). If you
enter a file name at the prompt, AutoCAD displays prompts on the command
line.
Enter view to load or [?] <*Extents*>: Enter a view name, enter ?, or press ENTER
to load the Extents view
View to Load
Opens the drawing with the geometry from the selected view loaded.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load
geometry from multiple layers, use a comma between layer names. If no layer
geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
?List Layers
Displays a list of layers available in the selected drawing. Enter one or more
layer names. To enter multiple layers, separate the layer names with a
comma.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
PARTIALOPEN
691
?List Views
Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter
a view name.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load
geometry from multiple layers, use a comma between layer names. If no layer
geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
?List Layers
Displays a list of layers available in the selected drawing. Enter one or more
layer names. To enter multiple layers, separate the layer names with a
comma.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
See Also
See Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) in the Users Guide.
Commands
692
PARTIALOPEN
PASTEBLOCK
Pastes copied objects as a block
Edit menu: Paste as Block
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Paste as Block.
Command line: pasteblock
Specify insertion point: Specify a point
AutoCAD pastes the objects copied to the Clipboard into the drawing as a
block at the specified insertion point.
PASTECLIP
Inserts data from the Clipboard
You can paste AutoCAD objects, text, and files in various formats, such as
metafile, bitmap, and multimedia, into a drawing.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Paste
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Paste.
Command line: pasteclip
If the Clipboard contains a graphic object, AutoCAD prompts you to specify
an insertion point. If the Clipboard contains an OLE object, the OLE
Properties dialog box (see page 618) is displayed when the object is pasted.
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, AutoCAD inserts the text in the upperleft corner of the drawing area using the MTEXT defaults. ASCII text becomes
a multiline text (mtext) object.
All other objects, except AutoCAD objects, are inserted as embedded or
linked objects. You can edit these embedded or linked objects by doubleclicking them in the AutoCAD drawing to open the application in which
they were created.
Note You can also use CTRL + V to run PASTECLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing area, PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the cursor is on the command line,
text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt.
PASTEBLOCK
693
See Also
See Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
Windows metafile format of objects placed on the Clipboard and pasted into other applications is transparent.
PASTEORIG
Pastes a copied object in a new drawing using the coordinates from the original drawing
Edit menu: Paste to Original Coordinates
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Paste to Original Coordinates.
Command line: pasteorig
AutoCAD pastes the object copied to the Clipboard into the drawing at the
same coordinates used in the original drawing.
PASTEORIG functions only when the Clipboard contains AutoCAD data from
PASTESPEC
Inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data
AutoCAD supports the Windows object linking and embedding (OLE)
feature. When an object is inserted into an AutoCAD drawing from an
application that supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection to its
source file.
PASTESPEC inserts a linked or embedded object from the Clipboard into an
AutoCAD drawing.
Edit menu: Paste Special
Command line: pastespec
The Paste Special dialog box is displayed.
694
PASTEORIG
Source
Paste
Paste Link
As
Display as Icon
See Also
See Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Users Guide.
Commands
PASTESPEC
695
PCINWIZARD
Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into the Model tab
or current layout
Tools menu: Wizards Import Plot Settings
Command line: pcinwizard
PCINWIZARD displays the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard. Information that can be imported from PCP or PC2 files includes plot area, rotation,
plot offset, plot optimization, plot to file, paper size, plot scale, and pen
mapping.
The wizard prompts you for the name of the PCP or PC2 configuration file
from which you want to import settings. You can view and modify the plot
settings prior to importing them. The imported settings can be applied to the
current Model tab or layout tab.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Polyline
Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Polyline Edit.
Command line: pedit
Select polyline or [Multiple]: Use an object selection method or enter m
Multiple
696
PCINWIZARD
2D Polyline Selection
If you select a 2D polyline, AutoCAD prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/
Undo]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option
in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in
the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment
with the first. AutoCAD considers the polyline open unless you close it using
the Close option.
before Close
Open
after Close
Join
Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the
curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their
endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT
prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz
distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints.
Select objects:
Add
PEDIT
697
Both
Width
Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline.
Specify new width for all segments:
You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option (see page 701) to
change the starting and ending widths of a segment.
varying width
uniform width
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction. AutoCAD prompts:
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/Tangent/Width/eXit]
<current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
beginning vertex
next vertex
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap
around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
698
PEDIT
saved marked
vertex
Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
next marked
vertex
segment deleted
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one
truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline,
or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break.
Next
Previous
Go
Exit
Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.
Specify location for new vertex:
marked vertex
1
before Insert
after Insert
Move
Moves the marked vertex.
Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point (1)
marked vertex
1
before Move
after Move
PEDIT
699
Regen
Regenerates the polyline.
before Regen
after Regen
Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments
of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use
the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
before Straighten
after Straighten
Next
Previous
Go
Exit
Tangent
Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve
fitting. AutoCAD prompts:
Specify direction of vertex tangent:
700
PEDIT
Width
Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately
follows the marked vertex.
Specify starting width for next segment <current>: Specify a point, enter a value,
or press ENTER
Specify ending width for next segment <starting width>: Specify a point, enter a
value, or press ENTER
You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width.
marked vertex
Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.
Fit
Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each
pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses
any tangent direction you specify.
original
Fit curve
Spline
before Spline
after Spline
Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a
curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes
through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was
closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily
pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part
of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. AutoCAD can generate
quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines.
Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit
option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point.
Both of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the
SPLINE command.
PEDIT
701
If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when
the spline's frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline
tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last
vertex. All intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the
frame, if displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype.
Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on splinefitting.
When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve's frame is
stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a
spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve
option. This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on
splines.
Spline frames are not usually displayed on the screen. If you want to see
them, set the SPLFRAME system variable to 1. Next time the drawing is regenerated, AutoCAD draws both the frame and the spline curve.
SPLFRAME set to 0
SPLFRAME set to 1
Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or
fit curves.
MOVE, ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE,
The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is
complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline.
702
PEDIT
The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the
frame of the spline, whether visible or not.
The Break option discards the spline.
The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options automatically refit the
spline.
The Tangent option has no effect on splines.
Object snap uses only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to
snap to the frame control points, use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first.
The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated. Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting
SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B-spline.
quadratic B-Spline
cubic B-Spline
You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approximation with the SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP. The
default value is 8. If you set the value higher, a greater number of line
segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more
precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and
takes longer to generate.
If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, AutoCAD generates segments using
the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those
segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs
yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the
curve can take longer to generate.
SPLINESEGS set to 1
SPLINESEGS set to 10
PEDIT
703
Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit
polyline with commands such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve
option.
Ltype Gen
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the
polyline. When turned off, this option generates the linetype starting and
ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines
with tapered segments.
Enter polyline linetype generation option [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off,
or press ENTER
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
3D Polyline Selection
If you select a 3D polyline, AutoCAD prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Edit vertex/Spline curve/Decurve/Undo]: Enter an option
or press ENTER
If the polyline you select is closed, Open replaces the Close option in the
prompt.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment
with the first. AutoCAD considers the polyline open unless you close it with
Close.
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. AutoCAD considers the polyline closed unless you open it with Open.
704
PEDIT
Edit Vertex
Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments
that follow it.
Enter a vertex editing option
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/eXit <current>: Enter an
option or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap
around from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Next
Previous
Go
Exit
Specify a point
PEDIT
705
Move
Moves the marked vertex.
Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point
Regen
Regenerates the polyline.
Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Next
Previous
Go
Exit
Spline Curve
Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points. The SPLFRAME system variable
controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B-spline,
whose curves can be approximated only by line segments. AutoCAD ignores
negative values for spline segments.
706
PEDIT
original 3D polyline
Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the
polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a splinefit polyline with commands such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the
Decurve option.
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
Edit Vertex
Edits individual vertices of a polygon mesh that can be seen as a rectangular
M N array, where M and N are the dimensions specified in 3DMESH. The
SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables store M and N values for RULESURF,
TABSURF, REVSURF, and EDGESURF.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Left/Right/Up/Down/Move/REgen/eXit
<current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
PEDIT
707
vertex to edit
N = right/left
M = up/down
repositioned in 3D space
Next
Previous
Left
Right
Up
Down
Move
Regen
Exit
Specify a point
Smooth Surface
Fits a smooth surface. The SURFTYPE system variable controls the type of surface this option fits. The types of surfaces include quadratic B-spline, cubic
B-spline, and Bezier.
708
PEDIT
original polygon
quadratic B-spline
cubic B-spline
Bezier
Desmooth
Restores the original control-point polygon mesh.
Mclose
Closes the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M
direction.
Mopen
closed M direction
Nclose
Closes the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N
direction.
Nopen
closed N direction
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
See Also
See Modify or Join Polylines in the Users Guide.
Commands
PEDIT
709
System Variables
PFACE
Creates a three-dimensional polyface mesh vertex by vertex
A polyface mesh is similar to a 3D mesh. Each mesh is constructed vertex by
vertex, so you can create irregular surface shapes. You define a polyface mesh
by specifying each vertex and then associating those vertices with faces in
the mesh. You edit a polyface mesh as a unit.
PFACE is typically used by applications rather than by direct user input. To
create a single 3D face, use the 3DFACE command. To create a 3D mesh, use
3D, 3DMESH, REVSURF, RULESURF, EDGESURF, or TABSURF.
Vertex Location
You specify all vertices used in the mesh. The vertex numbers displayed in
the prompts are the numbers used to reference each vertex. AutoCAD repeats
the prompt until you press ENTER . Pressing ENTER on a blank line causes
AutoCAD to prompt for the vertices to be assigned to each face.
710
PFACE
Define Faces
Enter a vertex number or [Color/Layer]: Enter a vertex number or enter an option
1
face 1
Vertex Number
6
5
3
face 2
Color
PFACE
711
Layer
See Also
See Create Surfaces in the Users Guide.
Commands
creates a 3D polygon mesh approximating a Coons surface patch. REVSURF creates a surface of revolution by
rotating a path curve or profile around a selected axis.
RULESURF creates a polygon mesh representing the
ruled surface between two curves. TABSURF creates a
polygon mesh representing a general tabulated surface
defined by a path curve and direction vector.
System Variables
polyface meshes.
PLAN
Displays the plan view of a specified user coordinate system
PLAN provides a convenient means of viewing the drawing from the plan
view. You can select a plan view of the current user coordinate system, a
previously saved UCS, or the world coordinate system. PLAN affects the view
in the current viewport only. You cannot use PLAN in paper space.
PLAN changes the viewing direction and turns off perspective and clipping;
it does not change the current UCS. Any coordinates entered or displayed
subsequent to the PLAN command remain relative to the current UCS.
712
PLAN
ENTER
current display
Current UCS
UCS
current UCS
UCS
World
See Also
See Change to a View of the XY Plane in the Users Guide.
System Variables
World
PLINE
Creates two-dimensional polylines
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polyline
Command line: pline
Specify start point: Specify a point (1)
Current line-width is <current>
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]:
point (2) or enter an option
Specify a
PLINE
713
The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around
and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1
generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the
completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with
a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered
segments.
Next Point
PLINEGEN set to 0
Arc
PLINEGEN set to 1
Note For the Center option of the PLINE command, enter ce; for the Center
Endpoint of Arc
Draws an arc segment. The arc segment starts at the last point tangent to the
previous segment of the polyline. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt.
Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Specify included angle:
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering
a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.
angle
Center
714
PLINE
Radius
Center
3
2
Angle
Length
Close
Closes a polyline with an arc segment.
Direction
Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
2
Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3)
Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its
edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
PLINE
715
half-width
Line
Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts.
Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a
radius
Endpoint of Arc
Angle
Second Pt
2
Undo
Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
width
716
PLINE
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change
the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at
the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or
when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Close
Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the
polyline, creating a closed polyline.
Halfwidth
half-width
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of
its edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
PLINE
717
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line
segment tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance
Undo
Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next line segment.
Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
width
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change
the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at
the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
See Also
See Draw Polylines in the Users Guide.
718
Commands
System Variables
PLINE
PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Plot.
Command line: plot
The Plot dialog box is displayed. Choose OK to begin plotting with the
current settings and display the Plot Progress dialog box.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, PLOT displays prompts on the
command line (see page 731).
Layout Name
Displays the current layout name or displays Selected layouts if multiple
tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the
Layout Name shows Model.
Save Changes to
Layout
Full Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper. To exit the
print preview, right-click and choose Exit.
PLOT
719
Partial Preview
Printable Area
Effective Area
Warnings
720
PLOT
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which its connected or its network location, and any additional user-defined comments
about the plotter. A list of the available system printers and PC3 file names is
displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in front of the plotting device
name to identify it as a PC3 file name or a system printer.
If a selected plotter doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning
is displayed and the plotter's default paper size is automatically selected. You
can set the paper size on the Layout Settings tab.
Properties
Hints
PLOT
721
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you can edit
the selected plot style table.
New
Plot Stamp
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and/or logs it to a
file.
On
Settings
What to Plot
Defines what you want to plot.
722
PLOT
Current Tab
Selected Tabs
Number of
Copies
Plot to File
Plots output to a file rather than to the plotter.
Plot to File
Plots to a file.
Specifies the plot file name and path. The default plot
file name is the drawing name and the tab name (Model
or the layout tab name), separated by a hyphen, with a
.plt file extension.
[...]
PLOT
723
Paper Size
Printable Area
Displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the
plot based on the current paper size.
Inches
MM
Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to
achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot rotation by selecting Portrait, Landscape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the media orientation
of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page.
Portrait
Landscape
Plot UpsideDown
724
PLOT
Plot Area
Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout/Limits
Extents
Display
View
Window
Plot Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Scaled to Fit when
plotting a Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed
in Custom.
Note If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, AutoCAD plots the actual
size of the layout and ignores the option specified in Scale.
Scale
Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most
recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of
the list.
PLOT
725
Custom
Scale Lineweights
Quality
726
PLOT
DPI
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper.
In a layout, the lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the
lower-left margin of the paper. You can offset the origin by entering a positive
or negative value. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the
paper.
Center the Plot
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, shaded plots, and the order in
which objects are plotted.
Plot Object
Lineweights
Plot Paperspace
Last
Hide Paperspace
Objects
PLOT
727
Save Changes to
the Following File
728
PLOT
You might be using the wrong driver. In some cases you have a choice of
drivers and there can be a substantial performance difference. Try plotting
with a different driver and compare the output time.
If your drawing contains raster images or embedded OLE objects, you can
improve plot speed by reducing the quality of these objects. There are two
levels of control over OLE object plotting quality: an individual object
quality setting and an overall OLE object quality setting. The control for
individual object quality is available on the shortcut menu on the object.
Set the overall quality using the Plotter Configuration Editor to edit the
plotters PC3 file. Choose the Graphics node and select Raster Graphics.
Use the slider in the Raster Images area of the dialog box.
Make sure your computer has enough RAM. If the RAM is too low for the
drawing you are plotting, Windows begins swapping to disk, which
slows plot time dramatically.
If you are more concerned about returning to work in AutoCAD than about
plot duration, plot through the Windows system spooler. You can use the
spooler if you are using a nonsystem HDI driver and plotting to a locally connected plotter. Configure a Windows system printer for the same local port.
PLOT
729
Printer Name
Plot quality
Color depth
Resolution
Media source
Media destination
Media finishing options (such as folding or binding)
Any custom settings of the previous device or driver
730
PLOT
Status Area
No
Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot.
Enter a layout name or [?] <current>:
Enter a page setup name < >:
Enter an output device name or [?] <current>:
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>:
Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>:
Save changes to layout [Yes/No] <No>:
Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] <Y>:
For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes.
Yes
Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are
plotting.
Enter a layout name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the layout tab you want
to plot
Enter an output device name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the output
device to which you want to plot the Model tab or layout tab you selected
If you enter a new device name without an extension, AutoCAD assumes the
device is a PC3 file (Autodesk HDI plotter configuration file). If no PC3 file is
found, AutoCAD searches for a Windows system printer with that device
name.
Enter paper size or [?] <current>: Specify the paper size to use for the plot or enter
? to view the actual list of paper sizes defined for the plotter driver
PLOT
731
You must specify a paper size exactly as it is defined by the plotter driver.
Enter paper units [Inches/Millimeters] <current>:
The Enter Paper Units prompt is not displayed if you are plotting a raster
image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, because the size of the plot is assumed to
be in pixels.
Enter drawing orientation [Portrait/Landscape] <current>:
Portrait
Landscape
Extents
732
PLOT
Limits
Layout
View
Window
Enter plot scale (Plotted Inches = Drawing Units) or [Fit] <current>: Specify the
scale of the plot
Plotted Inches =
Drawing Units
Fit
The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you
modified and saved the setting. The default setting is Fit when plotting a
Model tab.
Enter plot offset (x, y) or [Center] <current>: Specify the plot offset in either the
X or Y direction, or enter c to center the plot on the paper
Plot with plot styles [Yes/No] <current>: Specify whether to plot using the plot
styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table
If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) <current>: Enter a plot style
table name, ? to view plot style tables, or . (period) for none
PLOT
733
All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the
current plot style table and can be attached to the geometry. This setting
replaces pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
Plot with lineweights [Yes/No] <current>:
Scale lineweights with plot scale [Yes/No] <current>:
Note The Scale Lineweights with Plot Scale prompt is displayed only when you
plot from a layout tab. Settings for the shaded plotting type are only available
when you plot from the Model tab. To control shaded plotting settings of viewports in a layout tab, use the Shadeplot option of the -vports command
when you create a viewport.
Enter shade plot setting [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As
displayed >: Enter a shade plot option
Specifies how model space views are plotted.
As Displayed
Wireframe
Hidden
Rendered
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y if you want to write the plotted
drawing to a file, or press ENTER to plot to an output device
If you specify Yes, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>: Enter a file name
Save changes to page setup? Or set shade plot quality? [Yes/No/Quality] <No>:
734
PLOT
If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If
you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given
the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the
page setup with the added quality settings.
Enter shade plot quality [Draft/Preview/Normal/pResentation/Maximum/
Custom] <Normal>: Enter c if you want to specify a dpi, or to use a preset dpi,
specify a different quality option
Enter custom dpi <150>:
Save changes to page setup [Yes/No]? <No>:
Plot paper space first [Yes/No] <current>:
Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. If you
enter n, the model space geometry is plotted first, and paper space geometry
is plotted last. This option is only available if you are plotting from a layout
tab.
Hide paperspace objects? [Yes/No] <No >:
Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the paper space
viewport. This option is only available from a layout tab.
Proceed with plot [Yes/No] <Y>:
PLOTSTAMP
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file
Adds the specified plot stamp informationincluding drawing name, layout
name, date and time, and so onto a drawing that is plotted to any device.
Once you turn plot stamping on in the Plot dialog box, it remains active with
whatever settings have been most recently entered until you specifically turn
it off. AutoCAD creates a plot stamp at the time the drawing is being plotted;
the plot stamp is not saved with the drawing. Before you plot the drawing,
you can preview the position of the plot stamp in the Plot Stamp dialog box
(not in the AutoCAD drawing area or in the plot preview). The plot stamp
you create is justified on one of the four drawing corners and can print up to
two lines. You can choose to record the plot stamp information to a log file
instead of plotting it, or in addition to plotting it.
PLOTSTAMP
735
Note Plot stamp will always be drawn with pen number 7 or the highest numbered available pen if the plotter doesnt hold 7 pens. You must install a suitable
pen in that position. If you are using a non-pen (raster) device, color 7 is always
used for plot stamping.
Command line: plotstamp
The Plot Stamp dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, PLOTSTAMP displays
prompts on the command line (see page 742).
736
Drawing Name
Layout Name
PLOTSTAMP
Login Name
Device Name
Paper Size
Plot Scale
Preview
Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and
rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box. You
cannot preview the plot stamp any other way. This is not a preview of the
plot stamp contents.
PLOTSTAMP
737
Load
Save As
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Options dialog box (see page 739), in which you can
set the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can also
create a log file, and set its location.
738
Add
Edit
Delete
PLOTSTAMP
Orientation
Stamp Upside
Down
PLOTSTAMP
739
X Offset
Y Offset
Offset Relative to
Printable Area
Offset Relative to
Paper Border
Text Properties
Determines the font, height, and number of lines you want to apply to the
plot stamp text.
740
Font
Height
PLOTSTAMP
Specifies the file name for the log file you are creating.
Enter a new file name if you do not want to use the
default file name, plot.log.
Browse
Lists the currently saved plot stamp log files. You can
choose to overwrite an existing plot stamp log file with
the currently specified plot stamp information, and
then to save this file.
PLOTSTAMP
741
OFF
Fields
User Fields
Log File
742
PLOTSTAMP
Location
PLOTSTAMP
743
Text Properties
Units
See Also
Commands
PLOTSTYLE
Sets the current plot style for new objects or assigns a plot style to selected objects
Command line: plotstyle
To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use
named plot styles.
If a drawing is in Color-Dependent mode and is an AutoCAD 2004 drawing or is a pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawing saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later,
you can convert it to use named plot styles using the CONVERTPSTYLES
command.
To configure a new drawing, or a pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawing that was
never saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later releases, to use named plot styles,
set PSTYLEPOLICY to 0 before creating the new drawing or opening the preAutoCAD 2000 drawing.
If no selection set exists, AutoCAD displays the Current Plot Style dialog box.
If a selection set exists, AutoCAD displays the Select Plot Style dialog box (see
page 746).
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, PLOTSTYLE displays a
prompt on the command line (see page 747).
744
PLOTSTYLE
Editor
Attached To
Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot
style table is attached to.
PLOTSTYLE
745
746
Plot Styles
Original
New
Editor
Attached To
Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot
style table is attached to.
PLOTSTYLE
Current
PLOTTERMANAGER
Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration
File menu: Plotter Manager
Command line: plottermanager
AutoCAD displays the Plotter Manager where you can perform the following
tasks:
Add-a-Plotter Wizard
Adds new plotters and printers. The wizard produces a PC3 file that you can
edit in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Your configurations are stored in the
AutoCAD 2004\plotters folder.
PLOTTERMANAGER
747
Double-click a PC3 file in Windows Explorer or right-click the PC3 file and
click Open. (By default, PC3 files are stored in the Plotters folder. To find
the location of your plotter files, on the Tools menu, click Options. In the
Options dialog box, Files tab, click the plus sign to the left of Printer Support File Path. Click the plus sign to the left of the Printer Configuration
Search Path file. Under Printer Configuration Search Path, click the path
name to view the location of your plotter files.)
Choose Edit Plotter Configuration from within the Add-a-Plotter wizard.
Choose Properties in the Page Setup dialog box.
Choose Properties in the Plot dialog box.
748
PLOTTERMANAGER
Plotter
Configuration
File Name
PLOTTERMANAGER
749
Description
Driver
Information
Ports Tab
Changes communication settings between the configured plotter and your
computer or network system. You can specify whether you want to plot
through a port, plot to a file, or use AutoSpool. See Use AutoSpool in the
Driver and Peripheral Guide.
If you plot through a parallel port, you can specify the timeout value. If you
plot through a serial port, you can change the baud rate, protocol, flow
control, and input and output timeout values.
750
PLOTTERMANAGER
Plot to the
Following Port
Plot to File
AutoSpool
Port List
Browse Network
Configure Port
PLOTTERMANAGER
751
Note Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the
tree view. In addition, you might not be able to edit some settings if the device
handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesnt support the capability.
Media Node
Specifies a paper source, size, type, and destination. Available settings depend
on the supported features of your configured plotter. For Windows system
printers, you must configure the media settings using the Custom Properties
node. See Custom Properties Node.
752
PLOTTERMANAGER
Source: Specifies the paper source, for example, sheetfed or roll-fed. If you specify a tray, you can select
the type of tray.
Width: Specifies the width of the paper roll for a rollfed source.
Automatic: Enables the printer to specify the
appropriate paper source.
Size: Displays a list of available paper sources and
both standard and custom paper sizes.
Printable Bounds: Displays the print boundaries.
Media Type
Duplex Printing
Media
Destination
Note AutoCAD cannot detect the physical pen information automatically; you
must provide this information for your pen plotter under Physical Pen
Characteristics.
PLOTTERMANAGER
753
Pen
Configuration
Physical Pen
Characteristics
754
PLOTTERMANAGER
PLOTTERMANAGER
755
Vector Graphics
Raster Graphics
(Non-Pen Plotters
Only)
756
PLOTTERMANAGER
TrueType Text
Merge Control
PLOTTERMANAGER
757
Post-Initialization
Termination
758
PLOTTERMANAGER
Custom Paper
Sizes (Nonsystem
Printers Only)
PLOTTERMANAGER
759
Plotter
Calibration
Check All: Hides all the paper sizes for the device.
Uncheck All: Displays all the paper sizes for the
device.
PMP File
Import
Imports file information from earlier versions of AutoCAD. If you have a PCP
or PC2 file from an earlier version of AutoCAD, you can import some of the
information in those files into a PC3 file. PC3 files store plotter name, port
information, pen optimization level, paper size, and resolution.
760
PLOTTERMANAGER
Save As
Saves a PC3 File to a new file name.
Defaults
Restores the settings on the Device and Document Settings tab back to the
default settings.
Timeout
Timeout specifies an amount of time to wait before retrying.
Transmission
Retry
Note The settings on your plotter must match the settings in AutoCAD or you
cannot plot.
Baud Rate
Protocol
PLOTTERMANAGER
761
Flow Control
Sets the flow control for your plotter. The default flow
control setting is XON/XOFF (software handshaking)
for compatibility with previous versions of AutoCAD. If
you select Hardware handshaking, you can specify
additional settings in the Advanced Settings for COM
Port dialog box. The following settings correspond to
different pins on the RS232 connector.
CTS
Enables Clear To Send handshaking. This monitors pin 5 of a 25-pin serial
port or pin 8 of a 9-pin serial port. CTS is an input bit, monitored for an output from the plotter or printer.
DSR
Enables Data Set Ready handshaking. This monitors pin 6 of a 25-pin serial
port, or pin 6 of a 9-pin serial port. DSR is an input bit, monitored for an output from the printer or plotter.
RLSD
Enables Received Line Signal Detector handshaking. This is sometimes called
DCD or Data Carrier Detect. It is an input pin that can be monitored for an
output from the plotter. It is on pin 8 of a 25-pin serial port and on pin 1 of
a 9-pin serial port.
RTS
Controls the Request To Send output bit. This sends a signal to the printer or
plotter on pin 4 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 7 of a 9-pin serial port.
762
Disabled
Enabled
Handshake
Toggle
PLOTTERMANAGER
DTR
Controls the Data Terminal Ready output pin. This sends a signal to the
printer or plotter on pin 20 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9-pin serial
port.
Disabled
Enabled
Handshake
See Also
For information about using the Add-a-Plotter wizard, see Use Plotters and
Printers in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
PNGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format
Command line: pngout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER
AutoCAD creates a Portable Network Graphics file that contains the objects
you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen.
Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.
POINT
Creates a point object
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Point
Command line: point
Specify a point:
PNGOUT
763
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full
three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if
you omit the Z coordinate value.
The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point
objects. PDMODE values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the
point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed.
Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point,
in addition to the figure drawn through it:
32
33
34
35
36
64
65
66
67
68
96
97
98
99
100
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and
System Variables
764
POINT
POLYGON
Creates an equilateral closed polyline
A polygon is a polyline object. AutoCAD draws polylines with zero width and
no tangent information. You can use the PEDIT command to change these
values.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polygon
polygons
Center of Polygon
Defines the center of the polygon.
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] <current>: Enter
i or c or press ENTER
Inscribed in Circle
1
radius
Circumscribed
about Circle
1
2
radius
Specify a distance
POLYGON
765
Edge
Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point (2)
See Also
Commands
1
edge
rotation angle.
2
System Variables
PREVIEW
Shows how the drawing will look when it is plotted
PREVIEW displays a full-page preview of the current drawing. The preview is
based on the current plot configuration, as defined by the PAGESETUP
command.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot Preview
Command line: preview
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click in the preview area to access the Plot
Preview shortcut menu, which offers additional preview options.
AutoCAD displays the preview, and the cursor changes to a magnifying glass
with plus (+) and minus () signs. Dragging the cursor towards the top of the
screen while holding down the pick button enlarges the preview image.
Dragging towards the bottom of the screen reduces the preview image.
766
Exit
Plot
PREVIEW
Pan
Zoom
Zoom Window
Zoom Original
pan cursor
zoom cursor
See Also
See Preview a Plot in the Users Guide.
Commands
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Properties
Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or
modify, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Properties. Alternatively,
you can double-click most objects to display the Properties palette.
Command line: properties
The Properties palette is displayed. The Properties palette lists properties of
the selected object or set of objects.
You can also view or modify properties of third-party application objects that
are based on AutoCAD Application Programming Interface (API) standards.
For more information about using the Properties palette, see Display and
Change the Properties of Objects in the Users Guide.
PROPERTIES
767
There are eight general properties common to all objects. (See General Properties of Objects on page 770.) All other object properties are specific to the
type of AutoCAD object, and are described in the following sections:
768
PROPERTIES
Properties Palette
list of selected objects
toggle value of PICKADD Sysvar button
Select Objects button
Quick Select button
list of object
properties
description of
selected property
Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects. You can specify
a new value to modify any property that can be changed.
When more than one object is selected, the Properties palette displays
only those properties common to all objects in the selection set.
When no objects are selected, the Properties palette displays only the general properties of the current layer, the name of the plot style table
attached to the layer, the view properties, and information about the UCS.
Object Type
Quick Select
Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see page 821). Use
Quick Select to create selection sets based on filtering
criteria.
Select Objects
PROPERTIES
769
Toggle Value of
PICKADD Sysvar
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the
title bar.
Move
Size
Close
Allow Docking
Auto-hide
Description
770
PROPERTIES
Layer
Linetype
Linetype Scale
Plot Style
Lineweight
Hyperlink
Thickness
linetype samples
thickness samples
Description
General
Color
Specifies the color of the object. Select Color in the color list
displays the Select Color dialog box (see COLOR).
Available colors include the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
colors, true colors, and color book colors.
PROPERTIES
771
Description
Layer
Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows all layers in
current drawing (see LAYER).
Linetype
Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list shows all
linetypes in the current drawing (see LINETYPE).
Linetype scale
Lineweight
Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available
lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT).
Thickness
Plot style
Plot style
View
Center X
Center Y
Center Z
Height
Width
Misc
772
UCS icon on
PROPERTIES
Description
Specifies the name of a UCS: Lists six orthographic UCSs and UCSs
named by the user.
Description
Camera
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Target X
Target Y
Target Z
Lens length
Roll angle
Clipping
Front plane
Back plane
Clipping
Shading
Shading mode
PROPERTIES
773
Description
Visual Aids
Compass
Grid
UCS icon
3D Face Properties
Displays the properties of the selected 3D face.
If the SPLFRAME system variable is set to 1 (on), all edges are visible regardless
of the visibility setting.
3D face properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Edge 1
Edge 2
Edge 3
Edge 4
3D Solid Properties
Displays only the eight general AutoCAD properties of the selected 3D solid
(such as box, cylinder, sphere, cone, torus, or wedge) because 3D solid
properties are not editable. See General Properties of Objects on page 770.
774
PROPERTIES
Arc Properties
Displays the properties of the selected arc.
Arc properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Start X
Start Y
Start Z
Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the start point of the arc;
you cannot change the start point of an arc
Center X
Center Y
Center Z
End X
End Y
End Z
Radius
Start angle
Specifies the start angle of the arc; valid values are positive or
negative, including zero
End angle
Specifies the end angle of the arc; valid values are positive or
negative, including zero
Total angle
Arc length
Area
Normal X
Normal Y
Normal Z
PROPERTIES
775
Description
Text
776
Tag
Prompt
Value
Style
Justify
Height
Rotation
Width factor
Obliquing
Specifies the slant of the attribute away from its vertical axis
Text alignment X
Text alignment Y
Text alignment Z
PROPERTIES
Description
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Upside down
Backward
Invisible
Constant
Verify
Preset
PROPERTIES
777
Description
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Scale X
Scale Y
Scale Z
Misc
Name
Reports the name of the block: the name or file name only, not
the path.
Rotation
Body Properties
Displays only the eight general AutoCAD properties of the selected body
because properties for body objects are not editable. See General Properties
of Objects on page 770.
Circle Properties
Displays the properties of the selected circle.
Circle properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
778
Center X
Center Y
Center Z
Radius
Diameter
PROPERTIES
Description
Circumference
Area
Normal X
Normal Y
Normal Z
Dimension Properties
Displays the properties of the selected dimension. Each dimension property
is associated with a specific dimension system variable. The dimension
system variable is shown in the description area below the properties list (see
Dimension Variable Settings for Common Dimensioning Standards on
page 1239).
Ellipse Properties
Displays the properties of the selected ellipse.
Ellipse properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Start X
Start Y
Start Z
Center X
Center Y
Center Z
End X
End Y
End Z
Major radius
Minor radius
PROPERTIES
779
Description
Radius ratio
Start angle
End angle
Area
Description
Geometry
Insertion point X
Insertion point Y
Insertion point Z
Scale X
Scale Y
Scale Z
Misc
780
Name
Path
Rotation
PROPERTIES
Hatch Properties
Displays the properties of the selected hatch pattern.
Hatch properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Pattern
Type
Pattern name
Angle
Scale
Spacing
Specifies the ISO pen width of an ISO hatch pattern; the first
ten values represent the pen width in hundredths of a
millimeter
Double
Misc
Elevation
Associative
PROPERTIES
781
Image Properties
Displays the properties of the selected image.
Image properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Image Adjust
Brightness
Contrast
Fade
Specifies the current fade value of the raster image; valid range
is 0 through 100. Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for fade.
IMAGEADJUST command.
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Rotation
Width
Height
Scale
Specifies the scale factor for the raster image; valid range is a
real number greater than 0.0. A scale factor greater than 1
enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the
object.
Misc
782
Name
Specifies the name of the image file: the file name only, not
the path.
Path
Show image
PROPERTIES
Description
Show clipped
Transparency
Leader Properties
Displays the properties of the selected leader. When you select leader text
(annotation), the Properties palette displays single-line text or multiline text
properties.
Leader properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Misc
Dim style
Type
Fit
Dim scale overall
Arrow size
PROPERTIES
783
Description
Dim line LW
Specifies the color of the leader line; available colors include the
255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color
book colors
Text
Text offset
Specifies the distance between the end of the leader line and
the beginning of the leader annotation
Line Properties
Displays the properties of the selected line.
Line properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
784
Start X
Start Y
Start Z
End X
End Y
End Z
Delta X
Delta Y
Delta Z
Length
Angle
PROPERTIES
Multiline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected multiline.
Multiline properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Misc
Mline style
Description
Text
Contents
Style
Justify
Direction
Width
Height
Rotation
Specifies the line spacing style of the multiline text object; this
property can be set to allow the spacing between different
lines of text to adjust automatically based on the height of the
largest character in a line of text
PROPERTIES
785
Description
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Description
Geometry
Insertion point X
Insertion point Y
Insertion point Z
Scale X
Scale Y
Scale Z
Misc
786
Name
Rotation
Columns
Column spacing
Rows
Row spacing
PROPERTIES
Point Properties
Displays the properties of the selected point object.
Point properties
Property name
(by category)
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Description
Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate
value of the point object;
changing this value moves the
selected point object
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Elevation
Global width
Area
Misc
Fit/Smooth
PROPERTIES
787
Description
Closed
Linetype generation
Description
Geometry
788
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Fit/Smooth
Closed
PROPERTIES
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Mesh
M closed
N closed
M density
N density
M vertex count
N vertex count
Misc
Fit/Smooth
PROPERTIES
789
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Mesh
Number of vertices
Number of faces
Ray Properties
Displays the properties of the selected ray.
Ray properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
790
Base point X
Base point Y
Base point Z
Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the base point of the ray: the
point through which the ray passes
Second point X
Second point Y
Second point Z
Direction vector X
Direction vector Y
Direction vector Z
PROPERTIES
Region Properties
Displays the properties of the selected region.
Region properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Area
Perimeter
Shape Properties
Displays the properties of the selected shape.
Shape properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Name
Size
Rotation
Width factor
Obliquing
PROPERTIES
791
Solid Properties
Displays the properties of the selected two-dimensional solid.
Solid properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Elevation
Spline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected spline.
Spline properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Data Points
792
Number of control
points
Control points
Control point X
Control point Y
Control point Z
Weight
Reports the number of fit points of the spline; fit points define
the path of the spline
Fit point X
Fit point Y
Fit point Z
PROPERTIES
Description
Misc
Degree
Closed
Reports whether the spline is closed; a closed spline is tangentcontinuous at both ends
Planar
Start tangent vector X Reports the directional vector representing the start tangent of
Start tangent vector Y the spline
Start tangent vector Z
End tangent vector X
End tangent vector Y
End tangent vector Z
Fit tolerance
Specifies the fit tolerance of the spline; if the fit tolerance is set
to zero, then the spline will pass through all the fit points
Area
Text Properties
Displays the properties of a single-line text object. Changes you make to text
height, rotation, width factor, and obliquing angle affect only the selected
text object and not the text styles of the object.
Text properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Text
Contents
Style
Justify
PROPERTIES
793
Description
Height
Rotation
Width factor
Specifies the width scale factor of the text; the width scale
factor is often referred to as the relative X scale factor
Obliquing
Text alignment X
Text alignment Y
Text alignment Z
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Upside down
Backward
Tolerance Properties
Displays the properties of the selected tolerance object.
Tolerance properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Position X
Position Y
Position Z
794
PROPERTIES
Description
Misc
Dim style
Fit
Dim scale overall
Text
Text color
Text height
Text offset
Specifies the distance between the end of the leader line and
the beginning of the leader annotation
Text style
Text override
Trace Properties
Displays the properties of the selected trace segment. Traces are planar
objects. When you change a vertex in a trace, the result might not be
apparent if the current UCS is not parallel to the UCS of the trace.
Trace properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Vertex
Vertex X
Vertex Y
Elevation
PROPERTIES
795
Viewport Properties
Displays the properties of the selected layout viewport.
Viewport properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Center X
Center Y
Center Z
Width
Height
Misc
796
On
Clipped
Display locked
Standard scale
Custom scale
Shade Plot
PROPERTIES
Xline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected xline (also called a construction line).
Xline properties
Property name
(by category)
Description
Geometry
Base point X
Base point Y
Base point Z
Second point X
Second point Y
Second point Z
Direction vector X
Direction vector Y
Direction vector Z
See Also
Commands
CHPROP changes an existing objects color, layer, linetype, and thickness. COLOR sets the color of new
objects. LAYER controls layer settings. LINETYPE loads,
sets, and creates linetypes. ELEV sets elevation and
extrusion thickness of new objects. STYLE creates text
PROPERTIES
797
PROPERTIESCLOSE
Closes the Properties palette
Command line: propertiesclose
AutoCAD closes the Properties palette.
See Also
Commands
PSETUPIN
Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout
Provides the ability to import a saved, named page setup from one drawing
into a new drawing. The settings that are saved in the named page setup can
be applied to layouts in the new drawing.
Command line: psetupin
AutoCAD displays the Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) in which you can select the drawing (.dwg) file whose
page setups you want to import.
If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt,
PSETUPIN displays prompts on the command line (see page 799).
After you select the drawing file you want to use, the Import User Defined
Page Setups dialog box is displayed.
798
PROPERTIESCLOSE
PSPACE
Switches from a model space viewport to paper space
Command line: pspace
AutoCAD switches from model space to paper space when you are working
on a layout tab.
paper space
model space
On the layout tab, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for
printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports,
which are windows containing different views of the model. By switching
from paper space to model space (see MSPACE), you can edit the model and
views within the current layout viewport.
PSPACE
799
You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it. You can switch
to paper space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not
within a viewport.
You can also switch between model space and paper space by choosing
Model or Paper on the status bar.
See Also
For more information about using paper space and model space, see Work
in Paper Space and Model Space in the Users Guide.
Commands
PUBLISH
Creates multi-sheet drawing sets for publishing to a single multi-sheet DWF (Design Web
Format) file, a plotting device, or a plot file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Publish
Command line: publish
The Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box is displayed. Click Publish to begin
publishing the current drawing sheets to either a DWF file or a plotting
device.
The Publishing Complete dialog box provides information about the published drawing set. It displays a message about the status of the publishing
process ("Publish completed successfully" or "Errors and Warnings found,
save and review log file for details"). The dialog box also allows you to save
the log file that was generated during the publishing process, and it allows
you to view the DWF file.
800
PUBLISH
PUBLISH
801
Drawing Name
Layout Name
Page Setup
Displays the named page setup for the layout. You can
change the page setup by clicking Change Page Setup
on the shortcut menu. Only Model tab page setups can
be applied to Model tab sheets, and only paper space
page setups can be applied to paper space layouts.
Status
Add Sheets
Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can add sheets to the
list of drawing sheets. The layout names from those files are extracted, and
one sheet is added to the list of drawing sheets for each layout.
The initial drawing sheet names are constructed from the base drawing name
and the layout name, separated by a dash (-).
For example, a drawing sheet constructed for the Plan of Ejector layout in the
Single cavity mold.dwg file would be named Single cavity mold-Plan of Ejector. If
you add a sheet with a name that already exists, you must enter a new drawing sheet name. New drawing sheets are always appended to the end of the
current list. You can drag selections into the list of drawing sheets.
Duplicate Sheet
Name
802
PUBLISH
Load List
Displays a standard file selection dialog box if the contents of the List of
Drawing Sheets is empty. You can select a DSD file or a BP3 (Batch Plot) file
to load. Displays the Replace or Append dialog box if a list of drawing sheets
is present in the Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box. You can either replace
the existing list of drawing sheets with the new sheets or append the new
sheets to the current list.
Save List
Displays the Save List dialog box, where you can save the current list of drawings as a DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) file. DSD files are used to describe
lists of drawing files and selected lists of layouts within those drawing files.
Remove
Deletes the currently selected drawing sheet from the list of sheets.
Remove All
If the current list of drawing sheets has already been saved, deletes all sheets.
If the current list of drawing sheets has not been saved, allows you to first
save the new list before all drawing sheets are removed.
Move Up
Moves the selected drawing sheet up one position in the list.
Move Down
Moves the selected drawing sheet down one position in the list.
Publish To
Defines how you want to publish the list of drawings. You can choose to publish to either a multi-sheet DWF file (an electronic drawing set) or paper plots
(a paper drawing set).
Multi-Sheet DWF File
Indicates that a single multi-sheet DWF file is generated and saved in the
selected file.
DWF File Name
Browse
Opens the Select DWF File dialog box, where you can
select a target folder for your DWF file.
Password or
Phrase Used to
Protect This DWF
File
Contains the password (if any) used for this DWF file.
DWF passwords are case sensitive. The password or
phrase can be made up of letters, numbers,
punctuation, or non-ASCII characters.
Note If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be
recovered. Keep a list of passwords and their
corresponding DWF file names in a safe place.
PUBLISH
803
Confirm
Password
Browse
Publish
Begins the publishing operation. Creates a single-sheet DWF file or a single
multi-sheet DWF file, or plots to a device or file depending on the radio button selected in the Publish To area.
If a drawing sheet fails to plot, Design Publisher continues plotting the
remaining sheets in the drawing set. A log file is created that contains
detailed information, including any errors or warnings encountered during
the publishing process.
You can stop publishing after a sheet has finished plotting. If you stop
publishing a multi-sheet DWF file before it is complete, no output file is generated. After publishing is complete, the Status field is updated to show the
results.
Publish Drawing Sheets Shortcut Menu
Controls the contents of the list under Drawing Sheets. To access this menu,
right-click while the mouse pointer is positioned over the list.
804
Rename Sheet
Change Page
Setup
Copy Selected
Sheets
PUBLISH
Display Drawing
File Path Names
Inclue Layouts
When Adding
Sheets
Include Model
When Adding
Sheets
Note Paper space geometry in a layout is fixed when the layout is created. It is
important that you change the page setup for each layout depending on your
desired output. Only Model tab page setups can be applied to Model tab sheets,
and only paper space page setups can be applied to paper space layouts.
PUBLISH
805
Another Drawing
or Template
Browse
Saves the log file that was created during the publishing
process.
Note The log file provides a record of what was actually
published and the sheets that may need to be corrected.
You lose these details if you close the Publishing Complete
dialog box without saving a log file.
Log files are saved as CSV (Comma Separated Values)
files that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program.They
provide descriptive information about the published
drawing set sheets. This information includes a
description of the sheet, a detailed status message, and
any warning message.
806
PUBLISH
Note The bracketed text <DSD file name> contains the name of the DSD file
used when this command was last run. The bracketed text area is blank if no
previous name exists. If you enter a tilde (~) for the file name, the standard file
selection dialog box is displayed regardless of the FILEDEA setting.
The file name is validated and the list of sheets is loaded.
Once a DWF file generation starts, each drawing sheet name is listed along
with an appropriate message. Drawing sheets not found or not initialized are
indicated with an error message. Sheets plotted or not plotted are also
marked with an appropriate message.
When the final DWF file has been created, the output DWF file name is displayed along with an indication of any errors encountered.
PUBLISH
807
A log file is written during DWF file generation. The log file contains the
drawing sheet name, layout name, full drawing name, path name, and status.
The log file name is derived from the name of the sheet list file with CSV
replacing the DSD file extension.
Note Any existing log file is overwritten by a new log file without any warning
message being displayed.
See Also
For more information about Design Publisher, see Publish Drawing Sets in
the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
PUBLISHTOWEB
Creates HTML pages that include images of selected drawings
File menu: Publish to Web
Command line: publishtoweb
The Publish to Web wizard is displayed.
808
PUBLISHTOWEB
PURGE
Removes unused named items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing
File menu: Drawing Utilities Purge
Command line: purge
The Purge dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, PURGE displays prompts on the
command line (see page 811).
PURGE
809
Lists the named objects that are not used in the current
drawing and that can be purged. You can list the items
for any object type by clicking the plus sign or by
double-clicking the object type. You purge items by
selecting the item to purge.
Purge Nested Items removes items only when you
choose
Confirm Each
Item to Be
Purged
Purge Nested
Items
810
PURGE
PURGE
811
812
QDIM
Quickly creates a dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Quick Dimension
Command line: qdim
Use QDIM to quickly create or edit a series of dimensions. The command is
particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions,
or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs.
Select geometry to dimension: Select the objects you want to dimension or the
dimensions you want to edit and press ENTER
Specify dimension line position, or [Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/
Radius/Diameter/datumPoint/Edit/seTtings] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Continuous
Staggered
Baseline
Ordinate
Radius
Diameter
Datum Point
Edit
QDIM
813
Settings
See Also
See Dimensions and Tolerances in the Users Guide.
QLEADER
Creates a leader and leader annotation
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Leader
Command line: qleader
Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader annotation. You can use the
Leader Settings dialog box (see page 816) to customize the command so that
it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type
suited to your drawing needs. You can use QLEADER to
814
QLEADER
The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader
Settings dialog box determines the number of leader points AutoCAD
prompts you to specify.
The prompt that is displayed next depends on settings selected on the
Annotation tab in the Leader Settings dialog box.
If Mtext and Prompt for Width are selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD
displays the following prompts:
Specify the width <current>: Specify the multiline text width by creating a text
boundary or entering a value
If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text is
unlimited.
Enter first line of annotation text: Enter the first line of text
Press ENTER once to enter another line of text, or press ENTER again to
complete the command.
If Copy an Object is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Select an object to copy: Select a text object, block reference, or tolerance object
(feature control frame)
AutoCAD attaches the object to the leader.
If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031). Use the dialog box to create the
tolerance feature control frame. When you choose OK, AutoCAD attaches
the feature control frame to the leader.
If Block Reference is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the
following prompts:
Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks
defined in the drawing
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/X/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify the block insertion point or enter an option
For a description of the insertion options, see -INSERT.
If None is selected on the Annotation tab, no annotation prompts are
displayed.
QLEADER
815
Settings
Displays the Leader Settings dialog box.
Annotation Type
Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER
leader annotation prompt.
MText
Copy an Object
Tolerance
Block Reference
None
MText Options
Sets multiline text options. The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is selected.
816
QLEADER
Frame Text
Annotation Reuse
Sets options for reusing leader annotation.
None
Reuse Next
Reuse Current
Leader Line
Sets the leader line format.
Straight
Spline
QLEADER
817
Arrowhead
Defines the leader arrowhead. Select an arrowhead from the Arrowhead list.
The arrowheads are the same ones that are available for dimension lines. See
DIMSTYLE. If you choose User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is
displayed. Select one of the blocks to use it as a leader arrowhead.
Number of Points
Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before
prompting for the leader annotation. For example, if you set the points to 3,
QLEADER automatically prompts you to specify the annotation after you
specify two leader points. Set the number to one more than the number of
leader segments you want to create. If you set the option to No Limit,
QLEADER prompts for leader points until you press ENTER .
Angle Constraints
Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines.
First Segment
Second Segment
818
QLEADER
Middle of Top
Line
Middle of
Multiline Text
Middle of Bottom
Line
Bottom of
Bottom Line
Underline
Bottom Line
QNEW
Starts a new drawing with the option of using a default drawing template file
Standard toolbar:
Command line: qnew
QNEW starts a new drawing from the current default drawing template file
and folder path specified in the Options dialog box on the Files tab. You can
set the default drawing template file to any drawing template file or to None.
When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW
displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box).
The behavior of the QNEW command is determined by the Startup setting on
the System tab of the Options dialog box.
Show the Startup Dialog Box: Displays the Create New Drawing dialog box.
Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: Displays the Select Template dialog box
(a standard file selection dialog box) or starts the new drawing using the
default drawing template file.
If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a prompt on the command line is displayed (see page 612). If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is
displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
QNEW
819
See Also
Commands
System Variables
QSAVE
Saves the current drawing using the file format specified in the Options dialog box
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Save
Command line: qsave
The QSAVE command is equivalent to clicking Save on the File menu.
If the drawing is named, AutoCAD saves the drawing using the file format
specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog box and does not
request a file name. If the drawing is unnamed, AutoCAD displays the Save
Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) and saves the drawing with the file name
and format you specify.
If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file
under a different name.
See Also
Commands
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria
QSELECT creates a selection set that either includes or excludes all objects
matching the filtering criteria you specify. QSELECT can apply to the entire
drawing or to an existing selection set. The selection set created by QSELECT
820
QSAVE
opened the current drawing, QSELECT does not consider objects that you
have not loaded. For more advanced filtering operations, see FILTER.
QSELECT
821
Apply To
Select Objects
Object Type
Properties
822
QSELECT
Operator
Value
How to Apply
Append to
Current Selection
Set
Note QSELECT supports custom objects (objects created by another application) and their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD
properties, the custom objects source application must be running in order for
the properties to be available to QSELECT.
See Also
See Customize Object Selection in the Users Guide.
Commands
QSELECT
823
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects
When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, AutoCAD displays each text and attribute
object as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on
reduces the time it takes AutoCAD to redraw and regenerate drawings that
contain many text objects.
QTEXT off
QTEXT on
Commands
QUIT
Exits AutoCAD
File menu: Exit
Command line: quit
Quits AutoCAD if there have been no changes since the drawing was last
saved. If the drawing has been modified, AutoCAD prompts you to save or
discard the changes before quitting.
You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made
no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications
to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under
another name.
See Also
See Start and Save a Drawing, in the Users Guide.
Commands
file name.
824
QTEXT
RAY
Creates a semi-infinite line
RAY creates semi-infinite lines commonly used as construction lines. A ray
ray
2
1
AutoCAD draws a ray and continues to prompt for through points so you
can create multiple rays. The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the
direction defined by the starting point and the through point. Press ENTER
to end the command.
See Also
See Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) in the Users Guide.
Commands
RECOVER
Repairs a damaged drawing
If AutoCAD determines that a drawing youre opening is damaged based on
the drawings header information, OPEN automatically repairs it.
File menu: Drawing Utilities Recover
Command line: recover
In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the
drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. AutoCAD begins
recovery and displays the results in the text window.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following prompt on
the command line.
Enter name of drawing file to recover:
RAY
825
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Recover
Drawing dialog box.
damage, if necessary.
RECTANG
Draws a rectangular polyline
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Rectangle
Command line: rectang or rectangle
Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Enter
an option or specify a point
First Corner
2
Other Corner
826
RECTANG
Dimensions
Chamfer
Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.
Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
The values become the current chamfer distances for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.
Specify the elevation for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current elevation for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.
Specify fillet radius for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current fillet radius for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
RECTANG
827
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.
Specify thickness for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current thickness for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
Width
Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.
Specify line width for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
REDEFINE
Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE
Command line: redefine
Enter command name: Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by
the UNDEFINE command
If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the
command name with a period.
See Also
See Redefining AutoCAD Commands in the Visual LISP Developers Guide.
REDO
Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U commands
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Redo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, rightclick in the drawing area and choose Redo.
Command line: redo
828
REDEFINE
See Also
Commands
REDRAW
Refreshes the display in the current viewport
Command line: redraw (or 'redraw for transparent use)
AutoCAD redraws the current viewport, removing marker blips and display
artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands.
before REDRAW
after REDRAW
See Also
See Remove Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
REDRAWALL refreshes multiple viewports. REGEN regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport.
REGENALL regenerates the drawing and refreshes all
viewports. REGENAUTO controls automatic
regeneration of a drawing.
System Variables
REDRAW
829
REDRAWALL
Refreshes the display in all viewports
View menu: Redraw
Command line: redrawall (or 'redrawall for transparent use)
AutoCAD redraws all viewports, removing marker blips and display artifacts
(stray pixels) left by editing commands.
before REDRAWALL
after REDRAWALL
See Also
See Remove Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
regeneration of a drawing.
REFCLOSE
Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference (an xref or a
block)
REFCLOSE prompts you to save back or discard changes made to objects in an
external reference or block reference from within the current drawing. When
you save back changes, changes made to the objects in the reference are
saved without actually opening the reference drawing or re-creating the
block. You can also save and discard edits by using the options on the Modify
menu or the Refedit toolbar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a reference
is selected for editing; the toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference
are saved or discarded.
830
REDRAWALL
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit Save Reference Edits, or
In-place Xref and Block Edit Discard Reference Edits
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected during in-place reference editing,
right-click in the drawing area and choose Close Refedit Session.
Command line: refclose
Enter option [Save/Discard reference changes] <Save>:
Save
Discard
Reference
Changes
If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO
command to return to the reference editing session. If you have made
unwanted changes to an xref and already saved back the changes, use UNDO
to undo the unwanted changes; then use REFCLOSE to save back changes and
restore the xref to its original state.
Note When you edit and save xrefs in place in a drawing, the preview image
for the original reference drawing is no longer available unless you open and
save the drawing again.
See Also
Commands
REFCLOSE
831
REFEDIT
Selects a reference for editing
REFEDIT prompts you to select an external reference or block reference to edit
from within the current drawing. You can make minor changes to xrefs and
blocks without having to open the reference drawing or explode and redefine
the block.
Refedit toolbar:
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit Edit Reference
Command line: refedit
Select reference: Select an xref or a block in the current drawing
AutoCAD displays the Reference Edit dialog box.
If you enter -refedit at the Command prompt, REFEDIT displays prompts on
the command line (see page 835).
832
REFEDIT
Reference Name
Preview
REFEDIT
833
Path
Automatically
Select All Nested
Objects
Prompt to Select
Nested Objects
Create Unique
Layer, Style, and
Block Names
Display Attribute
Definitions for
Editing
834
REFEDIT
REFEDIT
835
AutoCAD forms a working set with the objects you have selected for editing.
The working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or
block definition. When you save back changes, changes made to the objects
in the reference file are saved without actually opening the reference drawing
or recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of
the current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the
working set, appear faded. The XFADECTL system variable controls the fading
of objects while you edit a reference in place.
You can select objects in xrefs for editing even if they are on a locked layer in
the reference file. When a reference object is part of the working set, you can
unlock the objects layer and make changes to the object. Only the changes
made to the object are saved back to the reference file; the xref layer remains
locked in the reference file.
Note Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless SHADEMODE is set
to a value of 2D Wireframe during in-place reference editing.
See Also
See Edit Selected Objects in Xrefs and Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
836
REFEDIT
System Variables
REFSET
Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference (an xref
or a block)
REFSET prompts you to add or remove objects to and from a working set while
editing an xref or a block definition in place. The working set is a set of
objects extracted from a reference that can be modified and then saved back
to update the xref or block definition from within the current drawing.
Saving back changes saves changes made to the objects without actually
opening the reference drawing or re-creating the block. You can also add and
remove objects by using the options on the Modify menu or the Refedit toolbar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a reference is selected for editing;
the toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference are saved or discarded.
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit Add to Working Set, or In-place
Xref and Block Edit Remove from Working Set
Command line: refset
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing...
Enter an option [Add/Remove] <Add>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other
objects in the current drawing. All objects in the current drawing, except
objects in the working set, appear faded.
Add
REFSET
837
Remove
See Also
Commands
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport
View menu: Regen
Command line: regen
REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates
for all objects in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database
for optimum display and object selection performance.
before REGEN
838
REGEN
after REGEN
See Also
See Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
REGENALL
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports
View menu: Regen All
Command line: regenall
REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen
coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing
database for optimum display and object selection performance.
before REGENALL
after REGENALL
See Also
See Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text in the Users Guide.
Commands
regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport. REGENAUTO controls automatic regeneration of a
drawing. VIEWRES sets the resolution for object
generation in the current viewport.
REGENALL
839
REGENAUTO
Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing
AutoCAD drawings regenerate automatically when REGENAUTO, a toggle, is
set to On. If you are working on a large drawing, you may want to set
REGENAUTO to off to save time. The current setting is stored by the
REGENMODE system variable.
Regardless of the REGENAUTO setting, you cannot execute transparent
commands that require regeneration.
Command line: regenauto (or 'regenauto for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
On
Off
See Also
See Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text in the Users Guide.
840
REGENAUTO
Commands
regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport. REGENALL regenerates the drawing and refreshes
all viewports.
System Variables
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Region
Command line: region
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops.
Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include
circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines.
AutoCAD converts closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the
selection set to separate regions and then converts polylines, lines, and
curves to form closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region).
If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be
arbitrary.
The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each
point shares only two edges. AutoCAD rejects all intersections and selfintersecting curves.
If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit options
of PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the
smoothed polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object.
AutoCAD deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless
the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0. If the original objects were hatched,
hatch associativity is lost. To restore associativity, rehatch the region.
REGION
841
See Also
See Create and Combine Areas (Regions) in the Users Guide.
Commands
REINIT
Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer input/output port, and program parameters file
For AutoCAD to run properly, the input/output ports, digitizer, display, and
AutoCAD program parameters file (acad.pgp) must be initialized. If you
change the settings, you must use REINIT to reinitialize before resuming the
AutoCAD session.
The program parameters file is an ASCII text file that stores command
definitions and shortcuts. AutoCAD reloads acad.pgp each time a new or
existing drawing is opened. REINIT reloadsacad.pgp during an editing session.
Command line: reinit
The Re-initialization dialog box is displayed.
842
I/O Port
Initialization
Device File
Initialization
REINIT
See Also
System Variables
acad.pgp file.
RENAME
Changes the names of objects
Blocks, layers, linetypes, and other special objects are stored by name and are
called named objects. Use RENAME to change the names of these objects. You
can also use RENAME to view a list of all blocks and definition table entries in
the current drawing.
You can use the wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of objects. You
can't rename some standard objects, such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS
linetype.
Format menu: Rename
Command line: rename
The Rename dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on
the command line (see page 844).
RENAME
843
Named Objects
Items
Old Name
Rename To
RENDER
Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or
solid model
RENDER produces an image using information from a scene, the current
selection set, or the current view.
844
RENDER
AutoCAD displays the Render dialog box, and then opens and minimizes the
Render window (see page 847).
Rendering Type
Lists Render, Photo Real, Photo Raytrace.
Scene to Render
Lists scenes, including the current view, that you can select for rendering.
Rendering Procedure
Controls how RENDER behaves by default.
Query for
Selections
Crop Window
RENDER
845
Skip Render
Dialog
Smoothing Angle
Sets the angle at which AutoCAD interprets an edge. The default is 45
degrees. Angles greater than 45 degrees are considered edges. Angles less than
45 degrees are smoothed. To define an edge as less than 45 degrees, reduce
the smoothing angle.
Rendering Options
Controls rendering display.
846
Smooth Shade
Apply Materials
Shadows
Render Cache
RENDER
More Options
Destination
Controls the setting for image output that the display driver uses for the
rendering.
Viewport
Renders to a viewport.
Render Window
File
Sub Sampling
Reduces rendering time and image quality without dropping effects such as
shadows by rendering a fraction of all pixels. From the list, select one of the
ratios, from 1:1 (best quality) to 8:1 (fastest).
Background
Displays the Background dialog box (see BACKGROUND).
Fog/Depth Cue
Displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box (see FOG).
Render Window
Renders objects. Rendered images can be saved, printed, and copied. Using
the Windows Render Options, you can modify the bitmap information and
color screen resolution.
RENDER
847
File Menu
Opens, saves, and prints rendered images.
Open
Save
848
RENDER
Options
Edit Menu
Copies rendered images.
Copy
Window Menu
Provides the standard Windows application window menu. Tile, Cascade,
and Arrange are described in the Windows documentation. The Reuse
Window option is specific to the AutoCAD rendering feature.
Reuse Window
Other than Fit In Window, these options do not affect the image currently
displayed. They take effect the next time you render.
RENDER
849
Size in Pixels
Specifies the size of the image in pixels. There are three preset sizes from
which you can choose. You can also enter values to set the horizontal and
vertical resolution of the image in pixels.
640 480
1024 768
Viewport Size
User
Horizontal
Vertical
Color Depth
Renders to 8-bit or 24-bit image format.
8-bit
24-bit
If your system is capable of displaying only 8-bit color, you can still save an
image with 24-bit color information. If you then display the image on a
system capable of displaying 24-bit color, you get the full 24-bit color image.
Fit in Window
Scales the bitmap image to fit the size of the display window while maintaining the aspect ratio of the model. When this option is selected, the Size in
Pixels bitmap options are available.
Fit In Window resizes already-rendered images in all open Render display
windows. When you clear Fit In Window, images return to the size set by the
Size in Pixels bitmap options.
850
RENDER
See Also
See Render 3D Objects for Realism in the Users Guide.
Commands
RENDSCR
Redisplays the last rendering created with the RENDER command
Command line: rendscr
Use the RENDSCR command on systems with a nonwindowing single
monitor display that is configured for full-screen rendering.
The image fills the whole screen. To return to the drawing area or text
window, press F2 .
See Also
See Render a Model in the Users Guide.
Commands
RENDSCR
851
REPLAY
Displays a BMP, TGA, or TIFF image
Tools menu: Display Image View
Command line: replay
AutoCAD displays the Replay dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter a file name. Valid file names must have one of the following
extensions:
Choosing Open in the Replay dialog box opens the Image Specifications
dialog box.
Image
852
REPLAY
Image Offset
Image Size
Screen
Screen Offset
Screen Size
Reset
See Also
See Redisplay a Rendered Image in the Users Guide.
Commands
alistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry,
lighting, and materials information. RMAT creates,
edits, attaches, and detaches rendering materials. RPREF
controls the speed and quality of rendering, rendering
options, whether the whole scene or selected set is
rendered, the colors in the rendering, and information
about the current configuration. SAVEIMG creates a file
from a rendered image. SCENE creates, modifies, and
deletes scenes. STATS displays information about the
most recently rendered image.
REPLAY
853
RESUME
Continues an interrupted script
Command line: resume (or 'resume for transparent use)
You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing ESC or
BACKSPACE . Any error encountered while processing input from a script file
causes the script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while AutoCAD is
active, you can use RESUME to continue the script.
See Also
Commands
REVCLOUD
Creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud shape
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Revision Cloud
Command line: revcloud
Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000
Specify start point or [Arc length/Object] <Object>: Drag to draw the revision
cloud, enter an option, or press ENTER
Guide crosshairs along cloud path...
When the start and end lines meet, the following message is displayed on the
command line.
Revision cloud finished
The resulting object is a polyline.
854
RESUME
Note REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value
is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with
drawings that have different scale factors.
Arc Length
Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud.
Specify minimum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a minimum arc length
Specify maximum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a maximum arc length
Guide crosshairs along cloud path...
Revision cloud finished
The maximum arc length cannot be set to more than three times the
minimum arc length.
Object
Specifies a closed object to be converted to a revision cloud.
Select object: Select the closed object to convert to a revision cloud
Reverse direction [Yes/No]: Enter y to reverse the direction of the arcs in the
revision cloud, or press ENTER to leave the arcs as is
Revision cloud finished
REVCLOUD
855
REVOLVE
Creates solids by revolving two-dimensional objects about an axis
You can revolve closed polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines,
donuts, and regions. You cannot revolve objects contained within a block.
Polylines that have crossing or self-intersecting segments cannot be revolved.
You can revolve only one object at a time.
The right-hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation. See Use
World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D in the Users Guide.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Revolve
Command line: revolve
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Select objects: Use an object selection method
REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the
1
2
856
REVOLVE
full circle
specified angle
Object
selected axis
full circle
specified angle
X axis
full circle
Y axis
specified angle
full circle
Specify an angle or
specified angle
REVOLVE
857
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
REVSURF
Creates a revolved surface about a selected axis
REVSURF constructs a polygon mesh approximating a surface of revolution by
rotating a path curve or profile (lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs,
polylines, or splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, or donuts)
about a specified axis.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Revolved Surface
Command line: revsurf
Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current : SURFTAB2=current
Select object to revolve: Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline
Select object that defines axis of revolution: Select a line or open 2D or 3D
polyline
axis of revolution
The path curve is swept about the selected axis to define the surface. The path
curve defines the N direction of the surface mesh. Selecting a circle or a closed
polyline as the path curve closes the mesh in the N direction.
The vector from a polylines first vertex to its last vertex determines the
rotation axis. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution
determines the M direction of the mesh.
path curve
858
Start Angle
Included Angle
REVSURF
Specifying a start angle begins the surface of revolution at an offset from the
generating path curve. The included angle is the distance through which the
path curve is swept.
Entering an included angle that is less than a full circle prevents the circle
from closing.
selection point
selection point
direction of
generation
direction of
generation
The point you use to select the axis of revolution affects the direction of
revolution. Each of the surfaces in the examples below was created by
specifying a start angle of 0 degrees and an included angle of 90 degrees.
polyline path
curve
See Also
See Create Surfaces in the Users Guide.
System Variables
REVSURF
859
RMAT
Manages rendering materials
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Materials
Command line: rmat
AutoCAD displays the Materials dialog box.
860
Materials
Preview
Materials Library
Select
RMAT
Modify
Duplicate
New
Detach
By ACI
By Layer
RMAT
861
Material Name
Names or renames the material. The material name you enter must be unique
to the drawing.
Attributes
Specifies the material attribute to change. The Value and Color settings affect
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not
available while that attribute is selected.
862
Color/Pattern
Ambient
Reflection
RMAT
Roughness
Transparency
Refraction
Bump Map
Value
Changes the selected attribute. You can enter a value or use the scroll bar.
Color
Adjusts the materials three color attributesmain, ambient, and reflective.
The current color is shown in a color swatch at the bottom of the Color area,
as well as in the swatch next to the button that shows which color youre
adjusting.
By ACI
Lock
RMAT
863
Mirror
Hue, Lightness,
Saturation
Color System
Color Swatch
Bitmap Blend
Affects the degree to which a bitmap is used in rendering. A material can
have four different bitmaps specified for it: one each for the Color/Pattern,
Reflectivity, Transparency, and Bump Map rendering attributes.
For pattern and texture maps, the bitmap is blended with the materials main
(diffuse) and ambient colors. Blend affects the amount of reflection or transparency for those attributes and the degree of bumpiness for bump maps.
The Bitmap Blend value can range from 0 to 1.0. The default value is 0.0
when no bitmap is specified, 1.0 when a bitmap is specified.
If the bitmap is not tiled, fixed-scale materials lock all bitmap placement
settings together for Pattern, Transparency, and Bump Map. The bitmap
placement setting for Pattern takes precedence if it is available. If no pattern
map is present, the settings for Transparency are used. If neither Pattern nor
Transparency is present, the settings for Bump Map are used.
Note The blend of an opacity map takes precedence over the value chosen for
Transparency.
864
RMAT
File Name
Specifies a bitmap.
Preview
Displays the selected material as either a sphere or a cube.
Adjust Bitmap
Displays the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 865), in
which you can specify the bitmaps offset and scaling, or placement values.
Find File
Displays the Bitmap File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in
which you can select a bitmap file.
Note When a material includes one or more bitmaps, you should set the
mapping coordinates for objects to which the material is attached. See SETUV.
The Photo Real and Photo Raytrace renderers provide default mapping, but this
doesnt always give the results you want.
In the upper-left corner of the dialog box is a diagram that changes as you
change the bitmap placement values. The diagram shows a projection
RMAT
865
Note The bitmap adjustmentscaling and offset, and tiling switchcan differ
for each individual bitmap specified for a material. Also, the bitmap adjustments
that are specified for a material interact with the bitmap adjustment specified in
mapping.
Offset
Changes the origin of the bitmap relative to the origin of the UV projection
coordinates. Offset values can range from 1 to 1 in either dimension (U or
V). Adjust the offset by using the two scroll bars to the right and below the
diagram (enclosed by the outer box, labeled Offset) or by entering a value in
Offset U and Offset V. The bitmap rectangle moves to reflect the new offset.
If Tile is selected and you change the offset so that the bitmap rectangle
appears outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is still applied to the
object when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if Crop is selected, the bitmap is
rendered only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram; so if the
diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap does
not appear in a rendering.
Scale
Specifies the number of times the bitmap fits onto the object in the U or V
direction. Adjust the bitmap scaling by using the two scroll bars to the left
and above the diagram (enclosed by the inner box, labeled Scale), or by
entering a value in Scale U or Scale V. The dimensions of the bitmap rectangle
change to reflect the new scaling.
Object Size
Adjusts the size of the preview cube. You can use this option to preview the
number of times the pattern tiles across the render objects. The larger the
cube, the more material tiles are displayed.
866
RMAT
Tiling
Controls how the bitmap is tiled.
Tile
Crop
Does not tile the bitmap. Outside the bitmap area, the
object or objects are rendered with the material colors.
The upper-left corner pixel of a bitmap defines the bitmap key color. This
color behaves as if it were transparent when you render in cropped mode: all
pixels that have the same color as the upper-left pixel are rendered with the
underlying color of the object material.
If you want to render a cropped pattern that is completely opaque, edit the
bitmap so that the upper-left corner pixel has a color used nowhere else in
the bitmap. Or, if the odd corner-pixel color shows in rendering, surround
the bitmap with a border one pixel wide, using the unique color.
With cropping turned on, a pixel in a bitmap renders either as transparent or
in its original color. To get a soft matte or feathered effect at the edge of a
decal, you first need to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself (against
the key color) and then set the material main (diffuse) and ambient colors to
match the bitmap key color.
Map Style
Specifies a scale.
Fixed Scale
Fit to Object
RMAT
867
Auto axis does not use polygon normals when calculating material orientations. Instead, polygons facing in positive XYZ directions are considered
front faces, and polygons facing in negative XYZ directions are considered
back faces. Therefore, some materials might appear backward on some faces,
particularly materials that have an obvious front and back, such as those
containing text. To prevent this inverse mapping, duplicate the material
without using auto axis, assign this new material explicitly to the polygon,
and then apply an entity mapper correcting the projection. You must
explode complex surfaces before mapping a specific polygon.
Granite Attributes
Specifies the material attribute to change. The Value and Color settings affect
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not
available while that attribute is selected.
868
RMAT
First, Second,
Third, Fourth
Color
Reflection
Roughness
Sharpness
Scale
Bump Map
RMAT
869
Marble Attributes
Specifies the material attribute to change. The Value and Color settings affect
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not
available while that attribute is selected.
870
Reflection
Roughness
Turbulence
RMAT
Sharpness
Scale
Bump Map
Wood Attributes
Specifies the material attribute to change. The Value and Color settings affect
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not available while that attribute is selected.
Light Color,
Dark Color
RMAT
871
872
Reflection
Roughness
Light/Dark
Ring Density
Ring Width
Ring Shape
Scale
Bump Map
RMAT
Select a Material
Select ACI
Preview
Attach
Detach
RMAT
873
Select a Material
Select Layer
Preview
Attach
Detach
See Also
See Define and Modify Materials in the Users Guide.
Commands
realistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry,
lighting, and materials information. REPLAY displays
874
RMAT
RMLIN
Inserts markups from an RML file into a drawing
Insert menu: Markup
Command line: rmlin
The Insert Markup dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.
If you enter -rmlin at the Command prompt, RMLIN displays prompts on the
command line (see page 876).
You insert redline markup language (RML) in drawings to see comments, corrections, and other changes made by design team members. These markups
range from notes and hyperlinks to simple boxes and circles. They are created
and saved in RML files using a markup tool such as Volo View. Inserted
markups are added to a new layer, the _MARKUP_ layer, which is created automatically. You can insert markups from multiple RML files into a single drawing. After the first insertion, new markups are added to the existing
_MARKUP_ layer.
After you choose an RML file in the Insert Markup dialog box, the Map
Markup dialog box is displayed. With the Map Markup dialog box, you can
match markup layouts in the RML file to model space or to specific layouts
in your drawing.
See Also
See Overview of the Electronic Markup Feature in the Users Guide.
RMLIN
875
Remove
Removes a mapping of a markup layout to a drawing layout in the Markup
to Drawing Mappings list.
Remove All
Removes all the mappings of markup layouts to drawing layouts in the
Markup to Drawing Mappings list.
Markup Layouts
Lists unmapped markup layouts from the RML file that you can map to drawing layouts. To map one or more markup layouts to a drawing layout, select
the markup layouts, select a drawing layout, and then click Map. If there are
no layouts in the RML file, as in the case of markups made to a DWF file, the
layout name DEFAULT is substituted.
Drawing Layouts
Lists the layouts in the current drawing, including model space, to which you
can map markup layouts.
Map
Maps the layout or layouts selected in the Markup Layouts list to the layout
selected in the Drawing Layouts list. After you click Map, the mapping is
displayed in the Markup to Drawing Mappings list.
Single
Provides prompts for a single mapping of a markup layout to a drawing layout. You are prompted to enter the markup layout you want to map, and
then you are prompted to enter a drawing layout as the destination for the
markup from the markup layout. You can use the ? option to list the markup
layouts in the RML file.
876
RMLIN
Multiple
Provides prompts for multiple mappings of markup layouts to drawing layouts. You are prompted to enter the markup layout you want to map, and
then you are prompted to enter a drawing layout as the destination for the
markups from the markup layout. You can use the ? option to list the markup
layouts in the RML file.
Same
Maps layouts in the markup file to identically named layouts in the drawing
file.
ROTATE
Moves objects about a base point
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Rotate
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Rotate.
Command line: rotate
Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=current ANGBASE=current
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify base point: Specify a point (1)
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle, specify a point, or enter r
selected objects
Rotation Angle
rotation angle
rotated object
ROTATE
877
Reference
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain
parallel to the edges of the drawing area.
See Also
See Rotate Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
ROTATE3D
Moves objects about a three-dimensional axis
Modify menu: 3D Operation Rotate 3D
Command line: rotate3d
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify first point on axis or define axis by [Object/Last/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis/
2points]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Object
Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.
Select a line, circle, arc or 2D-polyline segment:
Line
Aligns the axis of rotation with the line selected.
Rotation Angle
Reference
878
ROTATE3D
Circle
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the
plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle).
Rotation Angle
Reference
object selected
Arc
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the
plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc).
Rotation Angle
Reference
2D Polyline Segment
Aligns the axis of rotation with a segment of the polyline. Treats a straight
segment as a line segment. Treats an arc segment as an arc.
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
Reference
ROTATE3D
879
Last
Uses the last axis of rotation.
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
Reference
View
Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport
that passes through the selected point.
Specify a point on the view direction axis <0,0,0>:
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
Reference
880
ROTATE3D
Reference
1
X axis
1
Y axis
Z axis
2 Points
2
Uses two points to define the axis of rotation. Pressing ENTER at the main
ROTATE3D prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the
main prompt skips the prompt for the first point.
Specify first point on axis: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point on axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
Reference
See Also
See Rotate Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
ROTATE3D
881
RPREF
Sets rendering preferences
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Preferences
Command line: rpref
AutoCAD displays the Rendering Preferences dialog box.
Rendering Type
Lists AutoCAD Render, Photo Real, Photo Raytrace.
Scene to Render
Lists scenes, including the current view, that you can select for rendering.
Rendering Procedure
Controls how RENDER behaves by default.
Query for
Selections
882
RPREF
Crop Window
Skip Render
Dialog
Smoothing Angle
Sets the angle at which AutoCAD interprets an edge. The default is 45
degrees. Angles greater than 45 degrees are considered edges.
smoothing
angle
Angles less than 45 degrees are smoothed. To define an edge as less than 45
degrees, reduce the smoothing angle.
Rendering Options
Controls rendering display.
Smooth Shade
RPREF
883
Smooth Shading on
Apply Materials
Shadows
Render Cache
More Options
Destination
Controls the setting for image output that the display driver uses for the
rendering.
884
Viewport
Renders to a viewport.
Render Window
File
Renders to a file.
More Options
RPREF
Sub Sampling
Reduces rendering time and image quality without dropping effects such as
shadows by rendering a fraction of all pixels. From the list, select one of the
ratios: from 1:1 (best quality) to 8:1 (fastest).
Background
Displays the Background dialog box (see BACKGROUND).
Fog/Depth Cue
Displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box (see FOG).
Render Quality
Controls the type of shading used when you select Smooth Shade in the
Rendering Preferences dialog box.
Gouraud
Phong
Face Controls
Controls how RENDER treats the faces of 3D solid objects.
Discard Back
Faces
RPREF
885
Anti-Aliasing
Controls the level of anti-aliasing used in rendering.
Minimal
886
RPREF
Low
Medium
High
Face Controls
Controls how RENDER treats the faces of 3D solid objects.
Discard Back
Faces
RPREF
887
Maximum Bias
Linear Sample
Anti-Aliasing
Controls the level of anti-aliasing used in rendering.
Minimal
888
RPREF
Low
Medium
High
Adaptive Sampling
Accelerates the anti-aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix
size. Given a contrast threshold that you supply, AutoCAD judges whether it
can process fewer samples than specified for the matrix and still get adequate
results.
Enable
Contrast
Threshold
RPREF
889
Cutoff Threshold
Face Controls
Controls how RENDER treats the faces of 3D solid objects.
Discard Back
Faces
890
Minimum Bias
Maximum Bias
RPREF
Linear Sample
File Type
Specifies the output file type and rendering resolution. AutoCAD supports
BMP, TGA, PCX, SUN, FITS, PostScript, TIFF, FAX G III, and IFF file formats.
Screen resolution is a function of the number of pixels displayed. The resolution is inversely related to the displayed pixel size; that is, the greater the
screen resolution, the smaller the pixels, given the same screen size. You can
select a resolution from the list or enter values in X and Y.
RPREF
891
Aspect Ratio
Colors
Sets colors in the output file.
TGA Options
Controls the file compression, scan line direction, and interlacing.
Compressed
Bottom Up
Interlace
PostScript Options
Controls options for PostScript files.
Landscape,
Portrait
Auto
Image Size
Custom
See Also
See Render 3D Objects for Realism in the Users Guide.
Commands
alistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry,
lighting, and materials information. REPLAY displays
saved render files. RMAT creates, edits, attaches, and
detaches rendering materials. SAVEIMG creates a file
from a rendered image. SCENE creates, modifies, and
deletes scenes. STATS displays information about the
most recently rendered image.
892
RPREF
RSCRIPT
Repeats a script file
RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script
that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom.
If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until
interrupted by ESC .
Note Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the
script over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up
increasing amounts of disk space.
See Also
Commands
RULESURF
Creates a ruled surface between two curves
RULESURF constructs a polygon mesh representing the ruled surface between
two curves.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Ruled Surface
Command line: rulesurf
Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current
Select first defining curve:
Select second defining curve:
The objects you select define the edges of the ruled surface. The objects can
be points, lines, splines, circles, arcs, or polylines. If one of the boundaries is
closed, then the other boundary must also be closed. You can use a point as
the other boundary for either an open or a closed curve, but only one of the
boundary curves can be a point. The 0,0 vertex is the endpoint of each curve
nearest the point you used to select that curve.
RSCRIPT
893
For closed curves, the selection does not matter. If the curve is a circle, the
ruled surface begins at the 0-degree quadrant point, as determined by the current X axis plus the current value of the SNAPANG system variable. For closed
polylines, the ruled surface starts at the last vertex and proceeds backward
along the segments of the polyline. Creating a ruled surface between a circle
and a closed polyline can be confusing. Substituting a closed semicircular
polyline for the circle might be preferable.
The ruled surface is constructed as a 2 N polygon mesh. RULESURF places
half the mesh vertices at equal intervals along one defining curve, and the
other half at equal intervals along the other curve. The number of intervals
is specified by the SURFTAB1 system variable. It is the same for each curve;
therefore, the distance between the vertices along the two curves differs if the
curves are of different lengths.
examples of
ruled surfaces
The N direction of the mesh is along the boundary curves. If both boundaries
are closed, or if one is closed and the other is a point, the resulting polygon
mesh is closed in the N direction and N equals SURFTAB1. If both boundaries
are open, N equals SURFTAB1 + 1, because division of a curve into n parts
requires n + 1 tabulations.
Selecting objects at the same ends creates a polygon mesh.
894
RULESURF
See Also
See Create Surfaces in the Users Guide.
Commands
RULESURF
895
896
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name
Command line: save
The Save Drawing As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Save the drawing under the current file name, or enter a different
file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name.
See Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes on page 621 for a description of
the options in this dialog box.
SAVE is available only from the command line. The Save option on the File
menu or on the Standard toolbar is QSAVE. If the drawing is named, QSAVE
saves the drawing without displaying the Save Drawing As dialog box. If the
drawing is unnamed, AutoCAD displays the Save Drawing As dialog box.
Enter a file name to both name and save the drawing.
See Also
Commands
SAVEAS
Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name
File menu: Save As
Command line: saveas
The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed (see page
621). Enter a file name and type. Saving an AutoCAD 2004 file to any DXF
format affects performance. Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004
Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
Note AutoCAD 2000 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD 2000,
AutoCAD 2000i, and AutoCAD 2002 releases.
SAVE
897
See Save to Earlier Versions on page 898 for a description of the limitations
that result from saving to an earlier version.
In the Save Drawing As dialog box, Tools Options displays the Saveas
Options dialog box (see page 899), which controls various DWG and DXF
settings.
AutoCAD saves the file under the specified file name. If the drawing is
already named, AutoCAD saves the drawing to the new file name. If you save
the file as a drawing template, AutoCAD displays the Template Description
dialog box (see page 899), where you can provide a description for the
template and set the units of measurement.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays prompts on the command
line (see page 901).
898
SAVEAS
Measurement
SAVEAS
899
Index Type
Determines whether AutoCAD creates layer or spatial indexes when you save
a drawing. AutoCAD uses the indexes to improve performance during
demand loading. Using indexes may slightly increase the time required to
save a drawing. If a partially open drawing does not already contain spatial
and layer indexes, this option is not available.
None
Layer
Spatial
900
SAVEAS
Format
Select Objects
Save Thumbnail
Preview Image
Decimal Places of
Accuracy
SAVEAS
901
See Also
See Save a Drawing in the Users Guide.
Commands
and prompts you to save changes to the current drawing. SAVE saves the drawing under the current file name
or a specified name.
System Variables
SAVEIMG
Saves a rendered image to a file
SAVEIMG is not available if the current rendering device does not support
scan-line images.
Tools menu: Display Image Save
Command line: saveimg
AutoCAD displays the Save Image dialog box.
902
SAVEIMG
Format
Specifies the file format of the rendered image.
BMP
TGA
TIFF
Options
Portion
Specifies the portion of the image to be rendered.
Specify lower-left and upper-right points to define the image selection area.
If you use the pointing device, the selection is reflected in X and Y under
Offset and Size.
default XY size
XY size measured (in pixels)
from the offset position
nonzero offset position
0,0 default offset position
SAVEIMG
903
If you specify size before offset, you can get results that you dont expect. The
most predictable way to define size and offset is to specify offset first.
Offset
Size
Reset
Resets the Offset and Size values to the full screen defaults. When configured
for rendering to a viewport, resets the Offset and Size values to the size that
corresponds to the option selected under Portion.
RLE
904
None
PACK
SAVEIMG
See Also
See Save a Rendered Image in the Users Guide.
ARX loads, unloads, and provides information about
ObjectARX applications. REPLAY displays a BMP,
TGA, or TIFF image. RPREF sets rendering preferences.
Commands
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X, Y, and Z directions
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Scale
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Scale.
Command line: scale
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify base point: Specify a point (1)
The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same
location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the
stationary base point). Drag the cursor to make the image larger or smaller.
1
object selected
scale factor = .5
scale factor = 2
SCALE
905
Reference
ENTER
1
reference length
new length
result
See Also
See Resize or Reshape Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
stretches an object.
SCALETEXT
Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations
Text toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Text Scale
Command line: scaletext
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER when you finish
Enter a base point option for scaling [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/
TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as a base
point for scaling
With the base point prompt, you choose one of several locations to serve as
base points for scaling, which is used individually for each selected text
object. The base point for scaling is established on one of several insertion
point locations for text options, but even though the options are the same as
when you choose an insertion point, the justification of the text objects is
not affected.
906
SCALETEXT
The base point options shown above are decribed in the TEXT command. The
base point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text
except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom
left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
Specify text height or [Match Object/Scale Factor]<0.5000>:
height or enter an option
Specify a text
Match Object
Scales the text objects that you originally selected to match the the size of a
selected text object.
Select a text object with the desired height:
Scale Factor
Scales the selected text objects based on a reference length and a specified
new length.
Specify scale factor or [Reference]:
Scale Factor
Reference
See Also
See Change Text Scale and Justification in the Users Guide.
Commands
SCALE enlarges or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X, Y, and Z directions. STYLE creates,
SCALETEXT
907
SCENE
Manages scenes in model space
A scene represents a particular view of all or any portion of the drawing, with
or without lights. A drawing can have an unlimited number of scenes.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Scene
Command line: scene
AutoCAD displays the Scenes dialog box.
Scenes
908
New
Modify
Delete
SCENE
Scene Name
Views
Lights
SCENE
909
Scene Name
Views
Lights
See Also
See Overview of Rendering in the Users Guide.
Commands
910
SCENE
SCRIPT
Executes a sequence of commands from a script file
Tools menu: Run Script
Command line: script (or 'script for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays the Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the file name of a script to run that script.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following prompt on the
command line.
Enter script file name <current>:
See Also
See Overview of Command Scripts in the Customization Guide.
Commands
a script nonstop.
SECTION
Uses the intersection of a plane and solids to create a region
AutoCAD creates regions on the current layer and inserts them at the
location of the cross section. Selecting several solids creates separate regions
for each solid.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Section
Command line: section
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Specify first point on Section plane by [Object/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX]
<3points>: Specify a point or enter an option
First Point,
3 Points
SCRIPT
911
3
2
Object
select
object
Z Axis
normal
cutting
plane
1
2
side view
View
912
SECTION
XY
YZ
ZX
Specify a point
SECTION
913
SECURITYOPTIONS
Controls security settings using the Security Options dialog box
Command line: securityoptions
The Security Options dialog box is displayed. You can add security settings
that are applied when you save the drawing.
Password or
Phrase to Open
This Drawing
914
SECURITYOPTIONS
Encrypt Drawing
Properties
Current
Encryption Type
Advanced
Options
Attach Digital
Signatures After
Saving Drawing
SECURITYOPTIONS
915
Select a Digital ID
(Certificate)
Signature
Information
Time Service
Status
Comment
Warning! If you lose the password, it is not recoverable. Before you add a
password, you should create a backup that is not protected with a password.
916
Choose an
Encryption
Provider
Choose a Key
Length
Sets a key length. The higher the key length, the higher
the level of protection for your drawing.
SECURITYOPTIONS
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set
Command line: select
Select objects:
object selection
target
A small box, called the object selection target, replaces the crosshairs on the
graphics cursor.
AutoCAD requires that objects be selected in order to be processed. The Select
Objects prompt occurs after many commands, including the SELECT
command itself.
You can select objects individually with the pointing device, by drawing a
selection window around them, by entering coordinates, or by using one of
the selection methods listed below. These methods can be used to select
objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects prompt.
To view all options, enter ? on the command line.
Expects a point or
Window/Last/Crossing/BOX/ALL/Fence/WPolygon/CPolygon/Group/Add/
Remove/Multiple/Previous/Undo/AUto/SIngle
Select objects: Specify a point or enter an option
2
Window
1
window selection
Last
SELECT
917
Crossing
1
2
crossing selection
Box
select all
All
Fence
fence selection
WPolygon selection
918
SELECT
CPolygon selection
Add
Remove
Multiple
Previous
selected object
to add
Auto
Single
SELECT
919
See Also
See Select Objects in the Users Guide.
System Variables
SETIDROPHANDLER
Specifies the default type of i-drop content for the current Autodesk application
Command line: setidrophandler
The SETIDROPHANDLER command displays the Set Default i-drop Content
Type dialog box, where you set the default type of i-drop content for the
Autodesk application you are currently working in. This setting determines
the type of content that is inserted into your drawing when you drag a representative i-drop content image from the Web into your drawing.
SETUV
Maps materials onto objects
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Mapping
Command line: setuv
Select objects: Select the objects to which you want to assign mapping coordinates
AutoCAD displays the Mapping dialog box.
920
SETIDROPHANDLER
The mapping coordinates that you assign in the Mapping dialog box apply
to the entire selection set and remain with it. When you move the geometry,
the mapping coordinates and other mapping attributes (such as bitmap
scaling) move with it.
SETUV
921
Adjust
Coordinates
Acquire From
Copy To
Preview
922
SETUV
Parallel Plane
Center Position
SETUV
923
Preview
Adjust Bitmap
Pick Points
Offsets and
Rotations
Parallel Axis
924
SETUV
Preview
Adjust Bitmap
Pick Points
Offsets and
Rotations
SETUV
925
Parallel Axis
Polar Axis
Position
926
SETUV
Adjust Bitmap
Pick Points
Offsets and
Rotations
Unlike the other Adjust Coordinates dialog boxes, this dialog box doesnt
show a map position. Choose Preview to see the effect of shifting a 3D
material.
SETUV
927
U, V, W Scales
Pick Points
Maintain Aspect
Ratio
Preview
928
SETUV
SETUV
929
Tiling
With the following options, you can control how the bitmap is tiled:
Default
Tile
Crop
Does not tile the bitmap. Outside the bitmap area, the
object or objects are rendered with the material colors.
The upper-left corner pixel of a bitmap defines the
bitmap key color. This color behaves as if it were
transparent when you render in cropped mode: all
pixels that have the same color as the upper-left pixel
are rendered with the underlying color of the object
material.
If you want to render a cropped pattern that is
completely opaque, edit the bitmap so that the upperleft corner pixel has a color used nowhere else in the
bitmapor, if the odd corner-pixel color shows in
rendering, surround the bitmap with a border one pixel
wide, using the unique color.
With cropping turned on, a pixel in a bitmap renders
either as transparent or in its original color. To get a soft
matte, or feathered, effect at the edge of a decal, you
first need to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself
(against the key color), and then set the material main
(diffuse) and ambient colors to match the bitmap key
color.
See Also
See Project a 2D Image onto a Rendered Solid in the Users Guide.
Commands
930
SETUV
SETVAR
Lists or changes the values of system variables
Tools menu: Inquiry Set Variable
Command line: setvar (or 'setvar for transparent use)
Enter variable name or [?] <current>: Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press
ENTER
Variable Name
?List Variables
SHADEMODE
Controls the display of solid object shading in the current viewport
SHADEMODE provides shading and wireframe options for the objects in the
current viewport. You can edit shaded objects without regenerating the
drawing.
You can display ambient, point, distant, and spot lights defined with the
LIGHT command in SHADEMODE. To display these lights, you must set
SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On, or
SETVAR
931
2D Wireframe
3D Wireframe
Hidden
Flat Shaded
Gouraud Shaded
Flat Shaded,
Edges On
Gouraud Shaded,
Edges On
See Also
See Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects in the Users Guide.
932
SHADEMODE
SHAPE
Inserts a shape
Before inserting a shape, you must load the file containing the shape you
want using the LOAD command.
Command line: shape
Enter shape name or [?]: Enter a name, or enter ?
Shape Name
drawing.
SHAPE
933
SHELL
Accesses operating system commands
Command line: shell
OS command: Enter an operating system command or press ENTER
With SHELL, you can execute operating system commands while remaining
in AutoCAD. When SHELL prompts you for an OS command, you can enter
most valid commands for your OS. When the command has been executed,
SHELL returns you to the AutoCAD prompt.
Pressing ENTER at the OS Command prompt displays the system prompt
with an extra close angle bracket (>). You can enter operating system commands as if you were at the normal system prompt. Enter exit to return to
AutoCAD.
Warning! Do not use the SHELL command to delete lock files (file name
extension .??k) or temporary files (file name extensions .ac$ or .$a). Do not use
SHELL to run chkdsk, reset the serial I/O ports, or run external programs that
require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored on a floppy disk. Load
Terminate-and-Stay-Resident programs into memory before starting AutoCAD.
SHOWMAT
Lists the material type and attachment method for a selected object
Command line: showmat
Select object: Use an object selection method to select a single object
Depending on the method used to attach a material to an object, SHOWMAT
reports with one of the following:
Material material name is explicitly attached to the object.
Material material name is attached by ACI to ACI color number.
Material material name is attached by layer to layer layer name.
Material *GLOBAL* is attached by default or by block.
Explicit attachment takes precedence over all other methods, and
attachment by ACI takes precedence over attachment by layer.
See Also
See Define and Modify Materials in the Users Guide.
934
SHELL
Commands
rendering materials.
SIGVALIDATE
Displays information about the digital signature attached to a file
Command line: sigvalidate
The Validate Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed. Review the information displayed in the dialog box, and click Close to view the signed file.
See Also
See Overview of Digital Signatures in the Users Guide.
Name
Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being
viewed.
Digital Signature Status
Displays the status of the digital signature.
File Status
Displays the status of the signed file.
SIGVALIDATE
935
936
SIGVALIDATE
Issuer
Valid From
Valid To
Serial Number
Values
Displays information about a digital signature based on the item you select
in the Other Fields list.
Comment
Displays any comments about the digital signature that is attached to the
current file.
Signature Date and Time
Displays the date and time that the digital signature was attached to the
current file. The date and time are based on the time service used when the
signature was attached.
Time Service Used
Displays the time service used to add the time stamp to the current file.
Skip Xref Warnings
Determines if the Digital Signature Contents dialog box is displayed for
signed xrefs. This check box appears only in the Digital Signature Contents
dialog box when a signed drawing is opened.
SKETCH
Creates a series of freehand line segments
Drawing with the SKETCH command controls a screen-based pen with a
pointing device. SKETCH is useful for entering map outlines, signatures, or
other freehand drawings. Sketched lines are not added to the drawing until
they are recorded. The standard digitizer tablet button menu is not available
while SKETCH is in progress. The following information is based on the
assumption that Tablet mode is on.
Command line: sketch
Record increment <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
SKETCH
937
The record increment value defines the length of the line segments. The
pointing device must be moved a distance greater than the increment value
to generate a line.
AutoCAD captures sketching as a series of independent lines. Setting the
SKPOLY system variable to a nonzero value produces a polyline for each
contiguous sequence of sketched lines rather than multiple line objects.
larger record
increment
Sketch. Pen eXit Quit Record Erase Connect. Enter an option or press a
pointer button
Pen (Pick Button)
ExitENTER
(button 3)
Quit (button 4)
Record (button 2)
smaller record
increment
Connect
(button 6)
. (Period)
(button 1)
See Also
See Draw Freehand Sketches in the Users Guide.
System Variables
938
SKETCH
SLICE
Slices a set of solids with a plane
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Slice
Command line: slice
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Object
Aligns the cutting plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D
spline, or 2D polyline segment.
Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline:
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
SLICE
939
Z Axis
Defines the cutting plane by specifying a point on the plane and another
point on the Z axis (normal) of the plane.
Specify a point on the section plane: Specify a point (1)
Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane: Specify a point (2)
normal
cutting
plane
1
2
side view
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
View
Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewports viewing plane.
Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the current view plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press
ENTER
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
940
SLICE
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
XY
Aligns the cutting plane with the XY plane of the current user coordinate
system (UCS). Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the XY-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
1
XY cutting plane
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
YZ
Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. Specifying a
point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the YZ-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
1
YZ cutting plane
sliced object
SLICE
941
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
ZX
Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a
point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the ZX-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point or enter b
If AutoCAD slices a single solid into more than two objects, one solid is
created from the objects on one side of the plane and another solid is created
from the objects on the other side.
1
ZX cutting plane
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
3 Points
Defines the cutting plane using three points.
Specify second point on plane: Specify a point (2)
Specify third point on plane: Specify a point (3)
942
SLICE
3
2
1
3-point cutting plane
sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
1
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
Point on the
Desired Side of
the Plane
See Also
See Section and Slice 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
Commands
SNAP
Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals
The points you enter with a pointing device can be locked into regular
intervals on an invisible rectangular snap grid. You can rotate the snap grid,
set differing X and Y spacing, or choose an isometric format for the snap grid.
You can toggle Snap mode on and off with the Snap button on the status bar.
A change in the snap grid affects the cursor location when you specify a point
location using the pointing device.
The snap grid is invisible. Use SNAP with GRID to display a separate visible
grid of dots. Set the spacing of the two grids to equal or related values.
AutoCAD ignores Snap mode in perspective views.
SNAP
943
Snap Spacing
Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.
On
Activates Snap mode using the current resolution, rotation, and style of the
snap grid.
Off
Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.
Aspect
Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions. This option is not
available if the current snap style is Isometric.
Specify horizontal spacing <current>: Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Specify vertical spacing <current>: Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Rotate
Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid. The rotation angle is measured
relative to the current UCS. You can specify a rotation angle between 90 and
90 degrees. A positive angle rotates the grid counterclockwise about its base
point. A negative angle rotates the grid clockwise.
Specify base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Style
Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.
Enter snap grid type [Standard/Isometric] <current>: Enter s, enter i, or press
ENTER
944
SNAP
Standard
Displays a rectangular grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
X and Y spacing may differ.
Specify snap spacing or [Aspect] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press
ENTER
Spacing
Aspect
Isometric
Sets an isometric grid, in which the grid points are initially at 30-degree and
150-degree angles. Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different
Aspect values.
Specify vertical spacing <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
left isoplane
top isoplane
right isoplane
ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane
(30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or
the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles).
SNAP
945
Type
Specifies the snap type.
Polar
Sets the snap to polar tracking angles that are set in the
POLARANG system variable.
Grid
See Also
See Adjust Grid and Grid Snap in the Users Guide.
Commands
angle.
SOLDRAW
Generates profiles and sections in viewports created with SOLVIEW
SOLDRAW can only be used in viewports that have been created with
SOLVIEW.
Visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the
viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the viewing direction. Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions
of solids behind the cutting plane. For sectional views, cross-hatching is
created using the current values of the HPNAME, HPSCALE, and HPANG system
variables.
Any existing profiles and sections in the selected viewport are deleted, and
new ones are generated. All layers, except those required to display the
profile or section, are frozen in each viewport.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Setup Drawing
Command line: soldraw
Select viewports to draw ...
Select objects: Select the viewports to be drawn
AutoCAD Release 12 drawings that contain views created with SOLVIEW can
be redrawn with SOLDRAW only after you use AMECONVERT to update the
solids in the views.
946
SOLDRAW
Warning! Do not place permanent drawing information on the view nameVIS, view name-HID, and view name-HAT layers. The information stored on these
layers is deleted and updated when SOLDRAW is run.
To undo a viewport drawn by SOLDRAW, you must use the Back option of
UNDO.
SOLID
Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces 2D Solid
Command line: solid
Specify first point: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point: Specify a point (2)
1
2
3
4
Specify third point: Specify a point (3) diagonally opposite the second
Specify fourth point or <exit>: Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying
a point (5) creates a quadrilateral area.
The last two points form the first edge of the next filled area. AutoCAD
repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts. Specifying successive
third and fourth points creates further connected triangles and four-sided
polygons in a single solid object. Pressing ENTER ends SOLID.
SOLID
947
2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on and the
viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid.
7
5
2 4
1
See Also
See Create Solid-Filled Areas in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects
With SOLIDEDIT, you can edit solid objects by extruding, moving, rotating,
offsetting, tapering, copying, coloring, separating, shelling, cleaning,
checking, or deleting faces and edges.
You select solid objects by using one of the following selection methods:
boundary sets (selecting an internal point on a face of a solid selects the face),
crossing polygons, crossing windows, fences, and individual selection of faces
or edges. See Select Objects in the Users Guide.
Modify menu: Solids Editing
Command line: solidedit
Solids editing automatic checking: SOLIDCHECK=current
Enter a solids editing option
[Face/Edge/Body/Undo/ExiteXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Face
Edits 3D solid faces by extruding, moving, rotating, offsetting, tapering,
deleting, copying, or changing the color of the selected faces.
Enter a face editing option [Extrude/Move/Rotate/Offset/Taper/Delete/Copy/
coLor/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Extrude
Extrudes selected planar faces of a 3D solid object to a specified height or
along a path. You can select multiple faces at one time.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
948
SOLIDEDIT
Undo
Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection
set. AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt. If all faces have been
removed, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Face selection has been completely undone
Remove
Removes previously selected faces from the selection set. AutoCAD then
displays the following prompt.
Remove faces or [Undo/Add/ALL]:
or press ENTER
Undo
face selected
Add
selection set
SOLIDEDIT
949
All
All
Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set.
After you select faces or choose an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
selection set
face selected
Height of
Extrusion
950
SOLIDEDIT
face extruded
face selected
positive angle
extruded face
negative angle
extruded face
face selected
path selected
face extruded
SOLIDEDIT
951
Move
Moves the selected face on a 3D solid object to a specified height or distance.
You can select multiple faces at one time.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
Specify a base point or displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER
952
SOLIDEDIT
face selected
face moved
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how
far AutoCAD moves the selected face and in what direction. AutoCAD uses
the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to the base
point. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then
press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the coordinate as the new location.
Rotate
Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a
specified axis.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces, enter an option, or
press ENTER
Specify an axis point or [Axis by object/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis] <2points>:
Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER
Axis Point, 2 Points
Use two points to define the axis of rotation. Pressing ENTER at the main
Rotate prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the
main prompt skips the prompt for the first point.
Specify the first point on the rotation axis: Specify a point (1)
Specify the second point on the rotation axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify a rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
SOLIDEDIT
953
1
2
face selected
Rotation Angle
Reference
Axis by Object
Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object. You can select the
following objects:
Select a curve to be used for the axis: Use an object selection method
Specify a rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
954
SOLIDEDIT
Reference
View
Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport
that passes through the selected point.
Specify the origin of the rotation <0, 0, 0>: Specify a point
Specify a rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Rotation Angle
Reference
Reference
SOLIDEDIT
955
Offset
Offsets faces equally by a specified distance or through a specified point. A
positive value increases the size or volume of the solid, a negative value
decreases the size or volume of the solid.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option (1)
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces, enter an option, or
press ENTER
Specify the offset distance: Specify a distance
1
face selected
face offset = 1
face offset = 1
Specify a positive value to increase the size of the solid or a negative value to
decrease the size of the solid.
Note Holes inside a solid object offset smaller as the volume of the solid gets
larger.
Taper
Tapers faces with an angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by
the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected
vector.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
956
SOLIDEDIT
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
Specify the base point: Specify a base point (2)
Specify another point along the axis of tapering: Specify a point (3)
Specify the taper angle: Specify an angle between 90 and +90 degrees
1
3
face selected
face tapered 10
Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a
negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face
perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered
to the same value.
Delete
Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
Solid validation started.
Solid validation completed.
SOLIDEDIT
957
face selected
face deleted
Copy
Copies faces as a region or a body. If you specify two points, AutoCAD uses
the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to the base
point. If you specify a single point (usually entered as a coordinate) and then
press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the coordinate as the new location.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
Specify a base point or displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3)
3
face selected
face copied
Color
Changes the color of faces.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces
958
SOLIDEDIT
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces, enter an option, or
press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169).
Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.
Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option
prompt.
Edge
Edits 3D solid objects by changing the color of or copying individual edges.
Enter an edge editing option [Copy/coLor/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
Copy
Copies 3D edges. All 3D solid edges are copied as a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or
spline.
Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges or enter an option
After you select edges or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges (1) or press ENTER
Specify a base point of displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3)
1
3
edge selected
edge copied
SOLIDEDIT
959
Undo
Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set.
AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt. If all edges have been removed,
AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Edge selection has been completely undone
Remove
Removes previously selected edges from the selection set. AutoCAD then
displays the previous prompt.
Remove edges or [Undo/Add]: Select one or more edges, enter an option, or press
ENTER
Undo
Add
Color
Changes the color of edges.
Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges or enter an option
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Copy (see page 959). After
you select edges or enter an option, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog
box (see page 169).
Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.
960
SOLIDEDIT
Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option
prompt.
Body
Edits the entire solid object by imprinting other geometry on the solid, separating the solid into individual solid objects, shelling, cleaning, or checking
the selected solid.
Enter a body editing option [Imprint/seParate solids/Shell/cLean/Check/Undo/
eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Imprint
Imprints an object on the selected solid. The object to be imprinted must
intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be
successful. Imprinting is limited to the following objects: arcs, circles, lines,
2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and 3D solids.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object (1)
Select an object to imprint: Select an object (2)
Delete the source object <N>: Enter y or press ENTER
Select an object to imprint: Select an object or press ENTER
1
2
solid selected
object selected
object imprinted
on solid
Separate Solids
Separates 3D solid objects with disjointed volumes into independent 3D
solid objects.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object
Note Separating solids does not separate Boolean objects that form a single
volume.
SOLIDEDIT
961
Shell
Shelling creates a hollow, thin wall with a specified thickness. You can specify
a constant wall thickness for all the faces. You can also exclude faces from the
shell by selecting them. A 3D solid can have only one shell. AutoCAD creates
new faces by offsetting existing ones outside their original positions.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object
Remove faces or [Undo/Add]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Remove faces or [Undo/Add/ALL]:
ENTER
face selected
shell offset=0.5
shell offset=0.5
Specifying a positive value creates a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid;
specifying a negative value creates a shell to the outside perimeter of the
solid.
Clean
Removes shared edges or vertices having the same surface or curve definition
on either side of the edge or vertex. Removes all redundant edges and
vertices, imprinted as well as unused geometry.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object (1)
962
SOLIDEDIT
solid selected
solid cleaned
Check
Validates the 3D solid object as a valid ShapeManager solid, independent of
the SOLIDCHECK setting.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object
This object is a valid ShapeManager solid.
Undo
Undoes the editing action.
Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option
prompt.
Undo
Undoes the editing action.
Exit
Exits the SOLIDEDIT command.
See Also
See Modify Faces of 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
System Variables
SOLIDEDIT
963
SOLPROF
Creates profile images of three-dimensional solids
A profile image displays only the edges and silhouettes of curved surfaces of
the solid for the current view.
SOLPROF can only be used while you are working in a layout tab. If your
drawing does not contain layout viewports, use VPORTS in the layout tab to
create one.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Setup Profile
Command line: solprof
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Display hidden profile lines on separate layer? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Yes
Generates only two blocks: one for the visible lines and
one for the hidden lines of the entire selection set.
When you generate hidden lines, solids can partially or
completely hide other solids. The visible profile block is
drawn in the BYLAYER linetype, and the hidden profile
block is drawn in the HIDDEN linetype (if loaded). The
visible and hidden profile blocks are placed on uniquely
named layers using the following naming conventions:
PV-viewport handle for the visible profile layer
PH-viewport handle for the hidden profile layer
For example, if you create a profile in a viewport whose
handle is 4B, the blocks containing the visible lines are
inserted on layer PV-4B, and the block containing the
hidden lines (if requested) is inserted on layer PH-4B. If
these layers do not exist, the command creates them. If
the layers do exist, the blocks are added to the
information already on the layers.
Note To determine the handle of a viewport, select the
viewport while in paper space and use the LIST command.
Choose a layout tab to move from model space to paper
space.
964
SOLPROF
view only the profile lines youve created, turn off the
layer containing the original solid (usually the current
layer).
No
Note Solids that overlap each other (share some common volume) produce
dangling edges if you request hidden-line removal. This happens because the
edges must be broken at the point where they enter another solid to separate
them into visible and hidden portions. You can eliminate dangling edges by
combining the overlapping solids (using UNION) before generating a profile.
The next prompt determines whether 2D or 3D objects are used to represent
the visible and hidden lines of the profile.
Project profile lines onto a plane? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
No
SOLPROF
965
See Also
The SOLPROF command is defined by the solids.arx application. For information about using this command from an application, see Externally Defined
Commands in the AutoLISP Reference.
Commands
SOLVIEW
Creates floating viewports using orthographic projection to lay out multi- and sectional
view drawings of 3D solid and body objects while in a layout
SOLVIEW calculates the projection as it guides you through the process of
966
SOLVIEW
SOLVIEW creates layers that SOLDRAW uses to place the visible lines and
hidden lines for each view. Additionally, SOLVIEW creates layers where you
can place dimensions that are visible in individual viewports. SOLVIEW places
the visible lines, hidden lines, dimensions, and section hatching for each
view on a separate layer using the following naming conventions (view name
is the name given to the view when you created it).
Layers created by SOLVIEW
Layer name
Object type
View name-VIS
Visible lines
View name-HID
Hidden lines
View name-DIM
Dimensions
View name-HAT
SOLVIEW
967
SOLVIEW must be run in a layout tab. If the Model tab is current, the last
UCS
Creates a profile view relative to a user coordinate system. If no viewports
exist in your drawing, the UCS option is a good way to create an initial viewport from which other views can be created. All other SOLVIEW options
require an existing viewport.
You have the option of using the current UCS or a previously saved one as
the profile plane. The viewport projection is created parallel to the XY plane
of the UCS with the X axis facing right and the Y axis upward.
Enter an option [Named/World/?/Current] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
clip first corner
view center
Named
968
SOLVIEW
Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the
scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to
zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper
space. The default value is 1:1.
Specify view center:
when done
SOLVIEW
969
?List Named
UCSs
970
SOLVIEW
Ortho
Creates a folded orthographic view from an existing view.
clip first corner
side to fold
view center
Once you select the side of the viewport you want to use for projecting the
new view, a rubber-band line perpendicular to the side of the viewport helps
you locate the center of the new view. You can try several points until you
are satisfied with the views location.
Specify side of viewport to project: Select the edge of a viewport
Specify view center: Specify a point and press ENTER
At the next prompt, specify the opposite corners of the viewport.
Specify first corner of viewport:
Specify opposite corner of viewport:
Enter view name: Enter a name for the view
Auxiliary
Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that
is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and
inclined in the adjacent view.
SOLVIEW
971
view center
side to view from
inclined planes 1st point
Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both
points must be located in the same viewport.
Specify first point of inclined plane:
Specify second point of inclined plane:
The next point determines the side from which you view the plane.
Specify side to view from: Specify a point
A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the
center of the new viewport. You can try several points until you are satisfied
with the views location.
Specify view center: Specify a point and press ENTER
At the next prompt, specify the opposite corners of the viewport.
Specify first corner of viewport:
Specify opposite corner of viewport:
Enter view name: Enter a name for the view
972
SOLVIEW
Section
Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching.
When you use SOLDRAW on a sectional view created with this option, it
creates a temporary copy of the solids and uses SLICE to perform the
operation at the cutting plane that you define. SOLDRAW then generates a
profile of the visible half of the solids and discards the original copy. Finally
SOLDRAW sections the solids. Solids not crossing the cutting plane are
generated as full profiles. Because drafting standards recommend not drawing hidden lines in sectional views, SOLVIEW freezes the View Name-HID layer.
clip first corner
side of cutting plane
to view from
cutting plane
1st point
view center
cutting plane 2nd point
clip
second
corner
In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane.
Specify first point of cutting plane:
Specify second point of cutting plane:
Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting
plane.
Specify side to view from: Specify a point
Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming
your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1
scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp.
Enter view scale <current>: Enter a positive number
SOLVIEW
973
At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport. If you accepted
the default scale (by pressing ENTER ), a rubber-band line perpendicular to the
sectioning plane helps you locate the center of the new view. Otherwise, you
can place the view anywhere. You can try several points until you are satisfied
with the views location.
Specify view center: Specify a point and press ENTER
At the next prompt, specify the opposite corners of the viewport.
Specify first corner of viewport:
Specify opposite corner of viewport:
Enter view name: Enter a name for the view
SPACETRANS
Converts length values between model space and paper space
Text toolbar:
Command line: spacetrans
In model space, the prompt is displayed as follows:
Specify paper space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in paper space to convert
to the equivalent length in model space
In a paper space layout, the prompt is displayed as follows:
Select a viewport: Pick a layout viewport object
Specify model space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in model space to convert
to the equivalent length in paper space
974
SPACETRANS
SPACETRANS converts lengths, typically text heights, from either model space
or paper space to its equivalent length in the other space. It is intended to be
invoked transparently at a prompt for text height or other length value.
When used at the Command prompt, SPACETRANS displays the computed
length equivalent in the Command window.
See Also
See Set Text Height in the Users Guide.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing
The SPELL command corrects the spelling of text objects created with the
LEADER, TEXT, MTEXT (multiline or paragraph text), and ATTDEF commands.
Tools menu: Spelling
Command line: spell (or 'spell for transparent use)
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
If you enter all at the Select Objects prompt, the spelling in all text objects in
the Model tab and all layout tabs is checked.
The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed if AutoCAD finds an unknown
word in the selected text.
SPELL
975
976
Current
Dictionary
Current Word
Suggestions
Ignore
Ignore All
Change
Change All
Add
Lookup
Change
Dictionaries
Context
SPELL
Main Dictionary
Displays a list of language-specific dictionaries from which you can choose a
different main dictionary. This dictionary is used in conjunction with the
custom dictionary.
Custom Dictionary
Displays the name of the current custom dictionary. To create a new custom
dictionary, enter a name and choose OK.
Browse
SPELL
977
Adds the word that you enter in the box to the current
custom dictionary. The maximum length is 63
characters.
Delete
Deletes the word you enter in the box or select from the
custom dictionary.
See Also
See Check Spelling in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
SPHERE
Creates a three-dimensional solid sphere
The sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the
current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY
plane.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Sphere
Command line: sphere
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Specify center of sphere <0,0,0>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Diameter
978
SPHERE
center
radius
diameter
See Also
See Create 3D Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
SPLINE
Creates a nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) curve
SPLINE fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a specified
First Point
Creates a spline using points you specify.
Specify next point:
Specify a point
Enter points until you have defined the spline curve. After you enter two
points, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
SPLINE
979
Specify next point or [Close/Fit Tolerance] <Start tangent>: Specify a point, enter
an option, or press ENTER
6
4
Next Point
Close
Specify tangent:
tangent
closed spline
Fit Tolerance
zero tolerance
positive tolerance
Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the
spline curve.
Specify start tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
980
SPLINE
Object
Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent
splines and (depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable) deletes
the polylines.
Select objects to convert to splines...
Select objects: Select 2D or 3D spline-fit polylines and press ENTER when you
finish
See Also
See Draw Splines in the Users Guide.
Commands
polylines.
System Variables
SPLINEDIT
Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Spline
Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Spline Edit.
Command line: splinedit
Select spline:
Enter an option [Fit data/Close/Move vertex/Refine/rEverse/Undo]:
When you select a spline object or spline-fit polyline, grips appear at the
control points.
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open. If the
selected spline has no fit data, the Fit Data option is not available. Fit data
consists of all fit points, the fit tolerance, and tangents associated with
splines created with the SPLINE command.
SPLINEDIT
981
Fit Data
Edits fit data using the following options:
Enter a fit data option
[Add/Close/Delete/Move/Purge/Tangents/toLerance/eXit] <eXit>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
Note If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with
the Open option.
Add
Adds fit points to a spline.
Specify control point <exit>: Specify a control point or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
When you select a point, AutoCAD highlights it and the next point and
interprets the new point to go between the highlighted points. Use the Undo
option to remove the last point added. Selecting the last point on an open
spline highlights only that point, and AutoCAD adds the new point after the
last. If you select the first point on an open spline, you have the option of
placing the new point before or after the first point.
Specify new point or [After/Before] <exit>: Specify a point, enter an option, or
press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
AutoCAD adds the point and refits the spline through the new set of points.
982
SPLINEDIT
new point
selected
point
result
Close/Open
If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with the
Open option.
Close
open spline
Open
closed spline
closed spline
open spline
SPLINEDIT
983
Delete
Removes fit points from a spline and refits the spline through the remaining
points.
Specify control point <exit>: Specify a control point or press ENTER
Move
Moves fit points to a new location.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>:
enter an option, or press ENTER
New Location
Specify a point,
new point
result
Next
Previous
Select Point
Exit
Purge
Removes a splines fit data from the drawing database. After purging the
splines fit data, AutoCAD redisplays the main SPLINEDIT prompt without the
Fit Data option.
Tangents
Edits the start and end tangents of a spline.
Specify start tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press
ENTER
Specify end tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press
ENTER
984
SPLINEDIT
Tolerance
Refits the spline to the existing points with new tolerance values.
Enter fit tolerance <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Exit
zero tolerance
Close/Open
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open.
Close
Open
positive tolerance
If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were
not the same) before you used the Close option to make
it tangent continuous where the start point and
endpoint meet, this option returns the spline to its
original open state and removes tangent continuity.
Move Vertex
Relocates a splines control vertices and purges the fit points.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>:
enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a point,
SPLINEDIT
985
New Location
Next
Previous
Select Point
Exit
Refine
Fine-tunes a spline definition.
Enter a refine option [Add control point/Elevate order/Weight/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
AutoCAD adds a new control point close to the point you select, between the
two control points affecting that portion of the spline.
selected
point
986
SPLINEDIT
new point
Elevate Order
Increases the number of control points on the spline.
Enter new order <current>: Enter an integer or press ENTER
Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of
control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control. The
maximum value for order is 26.
Weight
Changes the weight at various spline control points. A larger weight value
pulls the spline closer to the control point.
Enter new weight (current = current) or [Next/Previous/Select point/eXit] <N>:
Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER
New Weight
Next
Previous
Select Point
Exit
Exit
Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Reverse
Reverses the splines direction. This option is intended primarily for thirdparty applications.
SPLINEDIT
987
Undo
Cancels the last editing action.
See Also
See Modify Splines in the Users Guide.
Commands
STANDARDS
Manages the association of standards files with AutoCAD drawings.
CAD Standards toolbar:
Tools menu: CAD Standards Configure
Command line: standards
The Configure Standards dialog box is displayed.
Settings
Standards
Plug-ins
Standards Tab
Displays information about the standards files that are associated with the
current drawing.
988
STANDARDS
Remove
Standards File
Move Up
Move Down
Description
Plug-ins Tab
Lists and describes the standards plug-ins that are installed on the current
system. A standards plug-in is installed for each of the named objects for
which standards can be defined (layers, dimension styles, linetypes, and text
styles). In the future, it is expected that third-party applications will be able
to install additional plug-ins.
Plug-ins Used
When Checking
Standards
Description
STANDARDS
989
990
Notification
Settings
Disable
Standards
Notifications
Display Alert
upon Standards
Violation
Display Standards
Status Bar Icon
Check Standards
Settings
STANDARDS
Automatically Fix
Non-standard
Properties
Show Ignored
Problems
Preferred
Standards File to
Use for
Replacements
STATS
Displays rendering statistics
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render Statistics
Command line: stats
AutoCAD displays the Statistics dialog box.
STATS
991
992
Rendering Type
Scene Name
Total Time
Initialization Time
Traversal and
Render Time
Display Time
Cleanup Time
Rendering Time
Total Faces
Total Triangles
Save Statistics to
File
STATS
See Also
See Overview of Rendering in the Users Guide.
Commands
STATUS
Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents
Tools menu: Inquiry Status
Command line: status (or 'status for transparent use)
All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified
by UNITS.
STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing. This includes
graphical objects such as arcs and polylines, and nongraphical objects such
as layers and linetypes, and block definitions. When used at the DIM prompt,
STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system
variables.
In addition, STATUS displays the following information.
Model or Paper
Space Limits Are
Model or Paper
Space Uses
STATUS
993
Display Shows
Insertion Base Is
Snap Resolution
Is
Grid Spacing Is
Current Space
Current Layer
Current Color
Current Linetype
Current
Lineweight
Current Elevation
994
Thickness
Object Snap
Modes
STATUS
Free Physical
Memory
See Also
See Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
STLOUT
Stores a solid in an ASCII or binary file
Command line: stlout
Select a single solid for STL output...
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Create a binary STL file? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Enter y or press ENTER to create a binary file. Enter n to create an ASCII file.
AutoCAD displays the Create STL File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
STLOUT
995
AutoCAD creates the file and adds the .stl file name extension. The STL file
format is compatible with stereolithography apparatus (SLA). The solid data
is transferred to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets
consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approximate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation
produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part
to be built.
The FACETRES system variable determines how AutoCAD triangulates the
solid. Setting FACETRES to a higher value creates a finer mesh that more
accurately represents the model and also creates a much larger file. The
model must lie in the positive XYZ octant of the WCS.
See Also
See Stereolithograph Files in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
STRETCH
Moves or stretches objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Stretch
Command line: stretch
1
996
STRETCH
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles
AutoCAD provides one standard text style. If you want to create a new style
or modify an existing style, use STYLE. STYLE also sets the current style used
when you create text with TEXT and MTEXT.
If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text
objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated.
If REGENAUTO is on, the change causes an automatic regeneration.
You can use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style. If any
existing text object uses the old style name, the text object takes the new
name automatically.
Text toolbar:
Format menu: Text Style
STYLE
997
Style Name
Displays text style names, adds new styles, and renames and deletes existing
styles. The list contains defined style names and displays the current style by
default. To change the current style, select another style from the list, or
choose New to create a new style.
Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters,
numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and
hyphen (-).
New
998
STYLE
Rename
Delete
Font
Changes the styles font.
Font Name
Font Style
Height
Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you
enter 0.0, AutoCAD prompts for the text height each
time you enter text using this style. Entering a height
greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style.
TrueType fonts can be displayed at a smaller height
than SHX fonts with the same height setting.
Note The text height you specify may not be accurately
represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts
supplied with AutoCAD. See Work with Text Styles in the
Users Guide.
STYLE
999
Effects
Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and
obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or
vertically aligned.
Upside Down
Backwards
Vertical
Width Factor
Oblique Angle
Note TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear
bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts
are plotted as specified by applied character formatting.
Preview
Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and
modify the effects. To change the sample text, enter characters in the box
below the character preview image.
Preview Button
1000
STYLE
Apply
Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the text of the current style
in the drawing.
Close
Applies changes to the current style. Cancel changes to Close whenever a
change is made to any of the options under Style Name. Changing, renaming, or deleting the current style and creating a new style are actions that take
place immediately and cannot be canceled.
Cancel
Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options
under Style Name.
STYLE
1001
1002
STYLE
System Variables
TEXTFILL controls the filling of TrueType fonts. TEXTQLTY sets the resolution of TrueType fonts. TEXTSIZE
sets the default height for new text objects drawn with
the current text style. TEXTSTYLE stores the name of the
current text style.
STYLESMANAGER
Displays the Plot Style Manager
File menu: Plot Style Manager
Command line: stylesmanager
The Plot Style Manager is displayed.
In the Plot Style Manager, you can double-click the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table
wizard to add plot style tables. Double-click a plot style table (STB or CTB file)
to start the Plot Style Table Editor.
STYLESMANAGER
1003
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard
Adds new plot style tables. Plot style tables contain and define plot styles,
which can be assigned to objects. When complete, the wizard produces an
STB or CTB file depending on the type of table you are creating. You can edit
these files in the Plot Style Table Editor. To use your new plot style table, the
selected options on the Plotting tab of the Options dialog box must be
appropriate for the type of table (named or color-dependent) you created.
You can create a plot style table from scratch, use an existing plot style table
as a starting point, use settings from your AutoCAD Release 14 CFG file, or
use settings from a PCP or PC2 file.
You can create either a named plot style table or a color-dependent plot style
table. With a named plot style table, you can add and define plot styles as
you like; the file name has the extension .stb. A color-dependent plot style
table creates 255 plot styles based on color; the file name has the extension
.ctb. You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new
drawings or for pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawings when they are saved in a later
format.
1004
STYLESMANAGER
Displays the name of the plot style table file you are
editing.
Description
File
Information
Apply Global
Scale Factor to
Non-ISO
Linetypes and
Fill Patterns
Scale Factor
STYLESMANAGER
1005
Delete R14
Color Mapping
Table
Table View and Form View Tabs (Plot Style Table Editor)
Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles
are style overrides for your drawings that occur during plotting. You can
modify plot style color, screening, linetype, lineweight, and other settings.
Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. You can use either the
Table View tab or the Form View tab to adjust plot style settings. In general,
the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles. If
you have a large number of plot styles, the Form view is more convenient
because the plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the
selected style are displayed to the right. You dont have to scroll horizontally
to view the style and its properties. The first plot style in a named plot style
table is NORMAL and represents an objects default properties (no plot style
applied). You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style.
1006
STYLESMANAGER
Name
Description
Color
STYLESMANAGER
1007
Convert to
Grayscale
Use Assigned
Pen Number
(Pen Plotters
Only)
1008
STYLESMANAGER
Virtual Pen
Number
Screening
Linetype
Adaptive
Adjustment
STYLESMANAGER
1009
Lineweight
Fill Style
Add Style
Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table. The plot style is based on
Normal, which uses an objects properties and doesnt apply any overrides by
default. You must specify the overrides you want to apply after you create the
new plot style. You cannot add a new plot style to a color-dependent plot
style table; a color-dependent plot style table has 255 plot styles mapped to
color. You also cannot add a plot style to a named plot style table that has a
translation table.
Delete Style
Deletes the selected style from the plot style table. Objects assigned this plot
style retain the plot style assignment but plot as Normal because the plot
style is no longer defined in the plot style table. You cannot delete a plot style
from a named plot style table that has a translation table, or from a colordependent plot style table.
1010
STYLESMANAGER
Edit Lineweights
Displays the Edit Lineweights dialog box. There are 28 lineweights available
to apply to plot styles in plot style tables. If the lineweight you need doesnt
exist in the list of lineweights stored in the plot style table, you can edit an
existing lineweight. You cant add or delete lineweights from the list in the
plot style table.
Save As
Displays the Save As dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name.
Lineweights
Units for
Listing
Edit
Lineweight
STYLESMANAGER
1011
Sort
Lineweights
See Also
For information about using the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, see Use Plot
Styles to Control Plotted Objects in the Users Guide.
SUBTRACT
Combines selected regions or solids by subtraction
Solids Editing toolbar:
Modify menu: Solids Editing Subtract
Command line: subtract
Select solids and regions to subtract from...
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Select solids and regions to subtract...
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
AutoCAD subtracts objects in the second selection set from objects in the
first selection set. A single new solid or region is created.
solid to be subtracted
from
region to be subtracted
from
1012
SUBTRACT
solid to subtract
region to subtract
You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane.
However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets
of regions on different planes. AutoCAD then produces separate subtracted
regions on each plane. AutoCAD rejects regions for which there are no other
selected coplanar regions.
See Also
See Create and Combine Areas (Regions) in the Users Guide.
Commands
SYSWINDOWS
Arranges windows and icons
SYSWINDOWS is equivalent to the standard Window menu options in
Enter an
Cascade
Tile Horizontal
Tile Vertical
Arrange Icons
SYSWINDOWS
1013
1014
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet
TABLET controls tablet calibration, turns Tablet mode on and off, and
On
Turns on Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 1 also turns
on Tablet mode. Pressing CTRL + T on some systems turns Tablet mode on and
off.
Off
Turns off Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 0 also turns
off Tablet mode. Pressing CTRL + T on some systems turns Tablet mode on
and off.
Cal
Calibrates the digitizer with a paper drawing or photograph, creating the
tablet transformation, which is the mapping of points from the tablet to the
coordinate drawing system. Calibration is digitizing points on the drawing
and mapping them to their real coordinates.
Calibration can be performed in model space or paper space. The Cal option
turns on Tablet mode in the space in which the tablet is calibrated. When the
space is changed, the Cal option turns off Tablet mode.
The paper should be flat (with no bumps or wrinkles) and securely fastened
to the digitizing tablet. The paper can be oriented at any angle.
Digitize point #1: Digitize a point on the paper drawing
Enter coordinates for point #1: Specify an X,Y coordinate at the digitized point
Digitize point #2: Digitize a point on the paper drawing
Enter coordinates for point #2: Specify an X,Y coordinate at the digitized point
Digitize point #3 (or ENTER to end): Digitize a point on the tablet or press ENTER
Enter coordinates for point #3: Specify an X,Y coordinate in the drawing
TABLET
1015
The points you enter cannot be duplicates. The points need not be the origin
on either axis, and you can enter as many points as you like. The more points
you enter, the more accurate the drawing will be.
If you enter only two points, the program automatically computes an
orthogonal transformation. If it is successful, the command ends.
If you enter three or more points, the program computes the transformation
in each of the three transformation types (Orthogonal, Affine, and
Projective) to determine which best fits the calibration points. If you enter
more than four points, computing the best-fitting projective transformation
can take a long time. You can cancel the process by pressing ESC .
When the computations are complete, the program displays a table with the
number of calibration points and a column for each transformation type. For
a description of the information contained in the table, see Transformation
Table on page 1017.
If there have been no failures of projection transformation, the program
prompts you to choose a transformation type.
Enter transformation type [Orthogonal/Affine/Projective/Repeat table] <Repeat>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Only transformation types for which the outcome was Success, Exact, or
Canceled are included in this prompt. A projective transformation can be
specified even if it was canceled. The program uses the result computed at the
time you canceled.
Orthogonal
Affine
1016
TABLET
Repeat Table
Transformation Table
Reports the number of calibration points and provides information about
each transformation type.
Outcome of Fit
Reports the outcome of fit for each of the transformation types. If the outcome of fit is not Success or Exact for any of the transformation types, the
program reports failure of the entire calibration process and ends the
command. The remaining entries in each column are blank unless Outcome
of Fit is Success.
Exact
Success
Impossible
TABLET
1017
Failure
Canceled
RMS Error
Reports the RMS (root mean square) error, which measures how close the
program has come to finding a perfect fit. The goal is the smallest RMS error.
Standard Deviation
Reports the standard deviation of the residuals. If it is near zero, the residual
at each calibration point is about the same.
Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is least accurate. The residual is the
distance between where the point was mapped during transformation and
where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given in the
current linear units.
Second-Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is second-least accurate. The residual
is the distance between where the point was mapped during transformation
and where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given
in the current linear units.
Cfg
Designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or designates a small portion of
a large tablet as a screen pointing area.
Enter number of tablet menus desired (04) <current>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
If tablet menus are in use and the same number of menus is selected, the
following prompts are displayed:
Do you want to realign tablet menus? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
Digitize upper-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (1)
Digitize lower-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (2)
Digitize lower-right corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (3)
1
3
1018
TABLET
The printed menu form must be affixed to the tablet surface, and the
requested points must be digitized. The set of three points must form a
90-degree angle. Tablet menu areas can be skewed at any angle.
Enter the number of columns for menu area n: Enter a positive value
Enter the number of rows for menu area n: Enter a positive value
After all interaction concerning tablet menus is complete, the following
prompt is displayed:
Do you want to respecify the screen pointing area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n
or press ENTER
If you enter y, the following prompts are displayed:
Digitize lower-left corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
A small portion of the tablets surface is designated as the fixed screen
pointing area. The following prompt is displayed:
Do you want to specify the Floating Screen Pointing area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter
y or n or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:
Do you want the Floating Screen Area to be the same size as the Fixed Screen
Pointing Area? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
If you responded n to the previous prompt, respond to the following
prompts:
Digitize lower-left corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Respond to the following prompt:
The F12 Key will toggle the Floating Screen Area ON and OFF. Would you also
like to specify a button to toggle the Floating Screen Area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter
y or n or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:
Press any non-pick button on the digitizer puck that you wish to designate as the
toggle for the Floating Screen Area
See Also
System Variables
TABLET
1019
TABSURF
Creates a tabulated surface from a path curve and a direction vector
TABSURF constructs a polygon mesh representing a general tabulated surface
defined by a path curve and a direction vector.
direction
vector
selection
point
path curve
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces Tabulated Surface
Command line: tabsurf
Select object for path curve:
The path curve defines the surface of the polygon mesh. It can be a line, arc,
circle, ellipse, or 2D or 3D polyline. AutoCAD draws the surface starting at
the point on the path curve closest to the selection point.
extrusion
upward
AutoCAD considers only the first and last points on a polyline, ignoring
intermediate vertices. The direction vector indicates the direction and length
of the shape to be extruded. The end selected on the polyline or line determines the direction of the extrusion. The original path curve is drawn with
wide lines to help you visualize how the direction vector dictates the construction of a tabulated surface.
TABSURF constructs a 2 n polygon mesh, where n is determined by the
SURFTAB1 system variable. The M direction of the mesh is always 2 and lies
along the direction vector. The N direction lies along the path curve. If the
path curve is a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or spline-fit polyline, AutoCAD draws
tabulation lines that divide the path curve into intervals of equal size set by
SURFTAB1. If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit, AutoCAD
draws tabulation lines at the ends of straight segments, and each arc segment
is divided into intervals set by SURFTAB1.
extrusion
downward
1020
TABSURF
See Also
See Create Surfaces in the Users Guide.
Commands
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object
You can use TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate, justify, and
resize. As you type at the Enter Text prompt, the text you are typing is
displayed on the screen. Each line of text is a separate object. To end a line
and begin another, press ENTER after entering characters at the Enter Text
prompt. To end TEXT, press ENTER without entering any characters at the
Enter Text prompt.
By applying a style to the text, you can use a variety of character patterns or
fonts that you can stretch, compress, make oblique, mirror, or align in a
vertical column.
Draw menu: Text Single Line Text
Command line: text
Current text style: current Current text height: current
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: Specify a point or enter an option
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing ENTER at the Specify Start
Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation angle and
immediately displays the Enter Text prompt. The text is placed directly
beneath the previous line of text. The point specified at the prompt is also
stored as the insertion point of the text.
You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings
and control codes.
Use -TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable (see page 1028).
TEXT
1021
Start Point
Specifies a start point for the text object.
Specify height <current>: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or press ENTER
height
The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style does not
have a fixed height.
1
rotation
angle
Justify
Controls justification of the text.
Enter an option [Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/
BR]:
You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text
prompt.
2
Align
Fit
2
1022
TEXT
Middle
1
TEXT
1023
Right
1
TL (Top Left)
TC (Top Center)
TR (Top Right)
1024
TEXT
ML (Middle Left)
MC (Middle
Center)
MR (Middle
Right)
TEXT
1025
BL (Bottom Left)
1
BC (Bottom
Center)
BR (Bottom
Right)
Style
Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text
characters. Text you create uses the current text style.
Enter style name or [?] <current>: Enter a text style name or enter ? to list all text
styles
various styles
1026
Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other
parameters.
TEXT
Degrees symbol ()
\U+00B1
Tolerance symbol ()
\U+2205
Diameter symbol ()
You can use these control codes with standard AutoCAD text fonts only:
%%o
%%u
%%d
%%p
%%c
%%%
Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn
off automatically at the end of the text string.
You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using
the PostScript fonts.
A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is
provided in the AutoCAD 2004/sample folder.
TEXT
1027
TEXTSCR
Opens the text window
View menu: Display Text Window
Command line: textscr (or 'textscr for transparent use)
TEXTSCR displays the command line in a separate window. You can press F2
to toggle between the drawing area and the text window. This command is
ignored on dual-screen systems.
See Also
Commands
1028
TEXTSCR
TIFOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format
Command line: tifout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER
AutoCAD creates a TIFF file that contains the objects you select. The file
reflects what is displayed on the screen.
Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.
TIME
Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing
Tools menu: Inquiry Time
Command line: time (or 'time for transparent use)
TIME displays the following information:
Created
Last Updated
TIFOUT
1029
Total Editing
Time
Elapsed Timer
Next Automatic
Save In
Display
On
Off
Reset
See Also
Commands
System Variables
elapsed timer.
TOLERANCE
Creates geometric tolerances
Geometric tolerances define the maximum allowable variations of form or
profile, orientation, location, and runout from the exact geometry in a
drawing. They specify the required accuracy for proper function and fit of the
objects you draw in AutoCAD.
1030
TOLERANCE
Sym
Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the
Symbol dialog box (see page 1033). The dialog box is displayed when you
select one of the Sym boxes.
Tolerance 1
Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance
value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate
from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance
value and a material condition symbol after it.
TOLERANCE
1031
First Box
Second Box
Third Box
Tolerance 2
Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame. Specify the
second tolerance value in the same way as the first.
Datum 1
Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame. The datum
reference can consist of a value and a modifying symbol. A datum is a
theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone
for a feature.
First Box
Second Box
1032
TOLERANCE
Datum 2
Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the
same way as the primary datum reference.
Datum 3
Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same
way as the primary datum reference.
Height
Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A
projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended
portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that
specified by positional tolerances. Enter a value in the box.
Datum Identifier
Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum
is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the
location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder,
or other geometry can serve as a datum. Enter the letter in the box.
diameter symbol
TOLERANCE
1033
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the dialog box and inserts
the symbol into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. The
following table describes the symbols.
Geometric characteristic symbols
Symbol
1034
TOLERANCE
Characteristic
Type
Position
Location
Concentricity or coaxiality
Location
Symmetry
Location
Parallelism
Orientation
Perpendicularity
Orientation
Angularity
Orientation
Cylindricity
Form
Flatness
Form
Circularity or roundness
Form
Straightness
Form
Profile of a surface
Profile
Profile of a line
Profile
Circular runout
Runout
Total runout
Runout
regardless of
feature size
at least material
condition
at maximum
material condition
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the Material Condition
dialog box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the first or second
tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031).
See Also
See Overview of Geometric Tolerances in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
tolerance text.
TOOLBAR
Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars
View menu: Toolbars
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: toolbar
AutoCAD displays the Customize dialog box (see CUSTOMIZE).
If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, TOOLBAR displays prompts on
the command line (see page 1036).
TOOLBAR
1035
Toolbar Name
Specifies a toolbar to display, close, or position.
Enter a valid toolbar name. If the default menu is loaded, the following
names are available:
3d_orbit
layouts
render
text
cad_standards
modify
shade
ucs
dimension
modify_ii
solids
ucs_ii
draw
object_snap
solids_editing
view
inquiry
properties
standard_toolbar
viewports
insert
refedit
styles
web
layers
reference
surfaces
zoom
Hide
Left
1036
TOOLBAR
Right
Top
Bottom
Specify a
TOOLBAR
1037
All
Displays or closes all toolbars.
Enter an option [Show/Hide]: Enter s or h
Show
Hide
See Also
See Toolbars in the Users Guide and Create Custom Toolbars and Customize Toolbars in the Customization Guide.
Commands
keys.
System Variables
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Tool Palettes Window
Command line: toolpalettes
The Tool Palettes window opens. You can click the Properties button or rightclick the title bar, the current tool palette, the tab on a tool palette, or a tool
to display a shortcut menu. The options displayed on each shortcut menu are
appropriate to the cursor location. All the options on these shortcut menus
are listed alphabetically and described below.
1038
Allow Docking
Auto-hide
TOOLPALETTES
Close
Copy
Customize
Cut
Delete Tool
Delete Tool
Palette
Move
Move Up
Move Down
Paste
Properties
Rename
Rename Tool
Palette
Size
Transparency
View Options
TOOLPALETTES
1039
View Style
Controls the text displayed with a tool palette icon.
Icon Only
List View
Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right.
Apply To
Controls whether the view options are applied to the current tool palette or
to all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window.
Source File
Scale
Rotation
Explode
1040
Pattern Name
Angle
Scale
TOOLPALETTES
Spacing
Double
General
Color
Layer
Linetype
Plot Style
Lineweight
See Also
See Tool Palettes in the Users Guide.
Commands
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window
Tools menu: Tool Palettes Window
Command line: toolpalettesclose
Closes the Tool Palettes window.
See Also
See Tool Palettes in the Users Guide.
Commands
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
1041
TORUS
Creates a donut-shaped solid
A torus is defined by two radius values, one for the tube and the other for the
distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube.
You can also create self-intersecting tori. A self-intersecting torus has no
center hole: the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus. If
both radii are positive and the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of
the torus, the result looks like a sphere with a depression at each pole. If the
radius of the torus is negative and the radius of the tube has a greater positive
magnitude than the radius of the torus, the result looks like a sphere with
pointed poles.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Torus
Command line: torus
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Specify center of torus <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Defines the radius of the torus: the distance from the center of the torus to
the center of the tube. A negative radius creates a solid shaped like an
American football.
tube
radius
torus
radius
Radius
Diameter
Diameter
Defines the diameter of the torus.
Specify diameter: Specify a distance
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
1042
TORUS
tube
diameter
Radius
Diameter
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
torus
diameter
Commands
TRACE
Creates solid lines
Command line: trace
2
3
1
specify endpoint
endpoint
segments. AutoCAD delays drawing each segment until you either specify
the next segment or press ENTER . Because of the way bevels are handled,
TRACE has no undo option.
Traces are solid filled when Fill mode is on. When Fill mode is off, only the
outline of a trace is displayed.
TRACE completed
See Also
Commands
System Variables
TRACE
1043
TRANSPARENCY
Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque
Several image file formats allow images with transparent pixels. Setting
image transparency to On allows AutoCAD to recognize the transparent
pixels so that graphics on the screen show through those pixels. Transparency is available for both bitonal and nonbitonal (Alpha RGB or gray-scale)
images. By default, images are attached with transparency turned off.
Transparency is controlled on a per-object basis.
TRANSPARENCY supports the PICKFIRST system variable, and you can select
multiple images. Objects that are not images are filtered from the selection
set.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Transparency
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Image Transparency.
Command line: transparency
Select image(s):
Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
On
Off
See Also
Commands
1044
TRANSPARENCY
TRAYSETTINGS
Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray
Shortcut menu: Right-click the status bar and click Tray Settings.
Command line: traysettings
The Tray Settings dialog box is displayed.
Display Until
Closed
See Also
Commands
TRAYICONS controls whether the status bar tray is displayed. TRAYNOTIFY controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT
TRAYSETTINGS
1045
TREESTAT
Displays information about the drawings current spatial index
AutoCAD indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space.
The result is called a spatial index. The spatial index is tree structured and has
branching nodes to which objects are attached. The index has two major
branches. The paper space branch is called a quad-tree and treats objects as
two-dimensional. The model space branch is called an oct-tree and treats
objects as either two- or three-dimensional. The model space branch can also
be changed to a quad-tree when you are working on two-dimensional
drawings.
Command line: treestat (or 'treestat for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays information about each branch. The most important
information is in the first two lines of the reportnumber of nodes, number
of objects, maximum depth of the branch, and average number of objects per
node.
If REDRAW and object selection are very slow, you can improve their performance. For example, if AutoCAD has 50 megabytes of memory available and
the current drawing has 50,000 objects with only 1,000 nodes in the index
tree, increase the TREEDEPTH value to improve performance.
Each node consumes about 80 bytes of memory. The fewer objects per node
of the oct-tree, the better the performance.
See Also
System Variables
1046
TREESTAT
TRIM
Trims objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Trim
Command line: trim
Current settings: Projection = current Edge = current
Select cutting edges...
Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER , or press ENTER to
select all objects (implied selection)
Objects that can be trimmed include arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, open
2D and 3D polylines, rays, splines, and xlines.
selected
cutting edge
Select the objects that define the cutting edges at which you want to trim an
object or press ENTER to select all objects as potential cutting edges. Valid
cutting edge objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs, circles, ellipses, lines,
layout viewports, rays, regions, splines, text, and xlines. TRIM projects the
cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current
user coordinate system (UCS).
Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an object to trim, press SHIFT
and select an object to extend, or enter an option
When AutoCAD prompts you to select boundary edges, you can press ENTER
and select the object to be trimmed. AutoCAD trims the object against the
nearest candidate. You can use only the single, crossing, fence, and implied
selection options to select boundaries that include blocks.
Object to Trim
Specifies the object to trim. AutoCAD repeats the prompt for the object to
trim so that you can trim multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an
object extends it to the nearest boundary rather than trimming it. Pressing
ENTER ends the command.
If the selection point is between the end of the object and a cutting edge,
TRIM removes the portion of the object that extends beyond the cutting edge.
objects to trim
If the selection point is between two cutting edges, the portion between is
deleted and the portions outside are preserved, turning one object into two.
TRIM
1047
Project
Specifies the projection AutoCAD uses when trimming objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
None
UCS
View
1048
TRIM
left viewport
object to trim
right viewport
Edge
Determines whether an object is trimmed at another objects implied edge or
only to an object that intersects it in 3D space.
selected cutting
edge
Extend
No Extend
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.
No extend
See Also
See Trim or Extend Objects in the Users Guide.
Commands
TRIM
1049
1050
U
Reverses the most recent operation
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Undo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, rightclick in the drawing area and choose Undo.
Command line: u
You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time,
until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session.
When an operation cannot be undone, AutoCAD displays the command
name but performs no action. Operations external to the current drawing,
such as plotting or writing to a file, cannot be undone.
If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command,
their effects are undone, along with the effects of the main command.
You can also press CTRL +Z to undo.
The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1.
UCS
Manages user coordinate systems
The user coordinate system (UCS) is a movable coordinate system for
coordinate entry, planes of operation, and viewing. Most AutoCAD
geometric editing commands are dependent on the location and orientation
of the UCS; objects are drawn on the XY plane of the current UCS.
The UCS command sets the orientation of the user coordinate system in
three-dimensional space. It defines the orientation for two-dimensional
objects and the extrusion direction for the THICKNESS system variable. It also
provides the axis of rotation for ROTATE and the default projection plane for
specifying points.
When you use the pointing device to locate a point, its normally placed on
the XY plane. If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel
to the viewing planethat is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewerit
may be difficult to visualize where the point will be located. In this case, the
point will be located on a plane parallel to your viewing plane that also contains the UCS origin point. For example, if the viewing direction is along the
1051
New
Defines a new coordinate system by one of six methods.
Specify origin of new UCS or [ZAxis/3point/OBject/Face/View/X/Y/Z] <0,0,0>:
UCS at new
origin
Origin
Defines a new UCS by shifting the origin of the current UCS, leaving the
direction of its X, Y, and Z axes unchanged.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point
before
Specify a new origin point relative to the origin of the current UCS. If you do
not specify a Z coordinate value for the origin, this option uses the current
elevation.
after
Z Axis
Defines a UCS with a particular positive Z axis.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point
Specify point on positive portion of Z-axis <current>: Specify a point
Specify a new origin and a point that lies on the new positive Z axis. The Z
axis option tilts the XY plane.
1052
UCS
3 Point
Specifies the new UCS origin and the direction of its positive X and Y axes.
The Z axis follows by applying the right-hand rule. (For information about
the right-hand rule, see Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D in
the Users Guide.) You can use this option to specify any possible coordinate
system.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1)
Specify point on positive portion of X-axis <current>: Specify a point (2)
Specify point on positive-Y portion of the UCS XY plane <current>: Specify a
point (3)
3
2
1
The first point specifies the origin of the new UCS. The second point defines
the positive X axis. The third point defines the positive Y axis. The third
point can be anywhere on the positive Y portion of the new UCS XY plane.
Object
Defines a new coordinate system based on a selected 3D object. The new UCS
has the same extrusion direction (positive Z axis) as that of the selected
object.
select object
For objects other than 3D faces, the XY plane of the new UCS is parallel to
the XY plane in effect when the object was drawn. However, the X and Y axes
can be rotated differently.
UCS
1053
1054
Object
Arc
The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes
through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point.
Circle
The center of the circle becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis
passes through the selection point.
Dimension
The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS origin.
The direction of the new X axis is parallel to the X axis of the UCS in
effect when the dimension was drawn.
Line
The endpoint nearest the selection point becomes the new UCS
origin. AutoCAD chooses the new X axis so that the line lies in the XZ
plane of the new UCS. The lines second endpoint has a Y coordinate
of zero in the new system.
Point
2D polyline
The start point of the polyline is the new UCS origin. The X axis
extends along the line segment from the start point to the next
vertex.
Solid
The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin. The new
X axis lies along the line between the first two points.
Trace
The from point of the trace becomes the UCS origin, with the X
axis lying along its centerline.
3D face
The new UCS origin is taken from the first point, the X axis from the
first two points, and the Y positive side from the first and fourth
points. The Z axis follows by application of the right-hand rule.
Shape, text,
block reference,
attribute definition
The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS origin, and
the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the object around its
extrusion direction. The object you select to establish a new UCS has
a rotation angle of zero in the new UCS.
UCS
Face
Aligns the UCS to the selected face of a solid object. To select a face, click
within the boundary of the face or on the edge of the face. The face is highlighted and the UCS X axis is aligned with the closest edge of the first face
found.
Select face of solid object:
Enter an option [Next/Xflip/Yflip] <accept>:
Next
Xflip
Yflip
Accept
View
Establishes a new coordinate system with the XY plane perpendicular to your
viewing direction (parallel to your screen). The UCS origin remains
unchanged.
X, Y, Z
before
after
world coordinate
system
rotation about
X axis = 90
rotation about
Y axis = 90
rotation about Z
axis = 90
UCS
1055
Move
Redefines a UCS by shifting the origin or changing the Z-depth of the current
UCS, leaving the orientation of its XY plane unchanged. Changing the
Z-depth moves the UCS along its Z axis in a positive or negative direction
relative to the current origin.
Specify new origin point or [Zdepth] <0,0,0>: Specify a point or enter z
New Origin
Zdepth
If you have multiple viewports active, and you change viewports to specify a
new origin or Z-depth, the change is applied to the UCS of the viewport that
was current when the command was started and that viewport becomes
current once the command has finished.
Note The UCS Move option does not add a UCS to the Previous list.
Orthographic
Specifies one of the six orthographic UCSs provided with AutoCAD. These
UCS settings are typically used when viewing and editing 3D models.
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/BAck/Left/Right] <current>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
1056
UCS
back
left
front
right
top
origin
bottom
By default the orthographic UCS settings orient the current UCS relative to
the world coordinate system (WCS) origin and orientation. The UCSBASE
system variable controls the UCS upon which the orthographic settings are
based. The origin or Z-depth of the orthographic UCS settings can be
changed using the Move option of the UCS command (see page 1056).
Prev
Restores the previous UCS. AutoCAD retains the last 10 coordinate systems
created in paper space and the last 10 coordinate systems created in model
space. Repeating the Prev option steps back through one set or the other,
depending on which space is current.
If you have saved different UCS settings in individual viewports and you
switch between viewports, AutoCAD does not retain the different UCSs in
the Previous list. However, if you change a UCS setting within a viewport,
AutoCAD does retain the last UCS setting in the Previous list. For example,
changing the UCS from World to UCS1 would retain World at the top of the
Previous list. If you then switch viewports with Front as the current UCS, and
then change the UCS to Right, the Front UCS is retained at the top of the
Previous list. If you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this viewport, the UCS setting changes to Front, and then back to World. See the
UCSVP system variable.
UCS
1057
Restore
Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS. Restoring a saved
UCS does not reestablish the viewing direction in effect when the UCS was
saved.
Enter name of UCS to restore or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name
?List UCSs
Save
Saves the current UCS to a specified name. The name can have up to 255
characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special
character not used by Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other
purposes.
Enter name to save current UCS or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name
?List UCSs
Del
Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved user coordinate systems.
Enter UCS name(s) to delete <none>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
AutoCAD deletes the named UCS you enter. If you delete a named UCS that
is current, AutoCAD renames the current UCS UNNAMED.
1058
UCS
Apply
Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports
when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. The UCSVP
system variable determines whether a UCS is saved with a viewport.
Pick viewport to apply current UCS or [All] <current>: Specify a viewport by
clicking inside it, enter a, or press ENTER
Viewport
All
?List UCSs
Lists names of user coordinate systems and provides the origin and X, Y, and
Z axes for each saved UCS relative to the current UCS. If the current UCS is
unnamed, it is listed as WORLD or UNNAMED, depending on whether its the
same as the WCS.
UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list
World
Sets the current user coordinate system to the world coordinate system. The
WCS is the basis for all user coordinate systems and cannot be redefined.
before
after
See Also
For information about 3D orientation, see Control the User Coordinate System in 3D in the Users Guide.
Commands
UCSMAN renames, restores, deletes, lists defined coordinate systems, and selects a preset user coordinate system. PLAN displays the plan view of a specified user
coordinate system. UCSICON controls the style, display,
and placement of the UCS icon.
UCS
1059
System Variables
UCSICON
Controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon
The UCS icon represents the orientation of the user coordinate system (UCS)
axes and the location of the current UCS origin relative to your viewing
direction. A UCS can be stored with a viewport if the UCSVP system variable
is set to 1 for that viewport. If the UCSVP system variable is set to 0 for a viewport, the current UCS is active in that viewport regardless of the viewport in
which the UCS is changed.
View menu: Display UCS Icon
Command line: ucsicon
AutoCAD displays different UCS icons in paper space and model space. In
both cases, a plus sign (+) appears at the base of the icon when it is positioned
at the origin of the current UCS. With the 2D UCS icon, the letter W appears
in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the world
coordinate system. With the 3D UCS icon, a square is displayed in the XY
plane at the origin when the UCS is the same as the world coordinate system.
1060
UCSICON
With the 2D UCS icon, a box is formed at the base of the icon if you are
viewing the UCS from above (positive Z axis). The box is missing if you are
viewing the UCS from below. With the 3D UCS icon, the Z axis is solid when
viewed from above the XY plane and dashed when viewed from below the
XY plane.
If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to the viewing
planethat is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewerthe 2D UCS icon is
replaced by a broken pencil icon. The 3D UCS icon does not use a broken
pencil icon.
model space 2D
UCS icon
model space
3D UCS icon
paper space 2D
UCS icon
paper space 3D
UCS icon
All
No origin
(0,0,0)
Origin
On
Off
UCSICON
1061
All
No Origin
Origin
Properties
1062
UCSICON
3D
Displays a 3D icon.
Cone
Line Width
Preview
Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space.
UCSICON
1063
See Also
See Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon in the Users
Guide.
Commands
System Variables
UCSMAN
Manages defined user coordinate systems
UCS toolbar:
Tools menu: Named UCS
Command line: ucsman
The UCS dialog box is displayed.
1064
UCSMAN
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and
named, it is listed as UNNAMED.
UCS Names List
Lists the coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. If there are
multiple viewports and multiple unnamed UCS settings, the list includes
only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport. Unnamed UCS definitions
that are locked to other viewports (when the UCSVP system variable is set to
1 in that viewport) are not listed in the current viewport. A pointer indicates
the current UCS.
UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is
always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a
Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems
by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly.
To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS command. To
rename or delete a customized UCS, right-click the UCS name in the list and
use the shortcut menu.
Set Current
Restores the selected coordinate system. You can also restore a selected coordinate system by double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking the
name and choosing Set Current. The Current UCS text is updated.
UCSMAN
1065
Details
Displays the UCS Details dialog box (see page 1069), which displays UCS
coordinate data. You can also view the details about a selected coordinate system by right-clicking the name and choosing Details.
Rename (Shortcut Menu Only)
Renames a customized UCS. You cannot rename the World UCS. You can also
rename a UCS by double-clicking its name in the list.
Delete (Shortcut Menu Only)
Deletes a customized UCS. You cannot delete the World UCS.
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and
named, it is listed as UNNAMED.
Orthographic UCS Names
Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing.
The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS
specified in the Relative To list. The Depth column lists the distance between
the orthographic coordinate system and the parallel plane passing through
the origin of the UCS base setting (stored in the UCSBASE system variable).
Name
1066
UCSMAN
Depth
Set Current
Restores the selected coordinate system. You can also restore a selected coordinate system by double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking the
name and choosing Set Current.
Details
Displays the UCS Details Dialog BoxUCS Details dialog box (see page 1069),
which displays UCS coordinate data. You can also view the details about a
selected coordinate system by right-clicking the name and choosing Details.
Relative To
Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic UCSs. By
default, WCS is the base coordinate system. The list displays all the named
UCSs in the current drawing.
Whenever you change the Relative To setting, the origin of the selected
orthographic UCS is restored to its default position.
If you save an orthographic coordinate system in a drawing as part of a viewport configuration, or if you select a setting in Relative To other than World,
the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system.
Reset (Shortcut Menu Only)
Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system. The
origin can be changed from its default 0,0,0 position using the Move option
of the UCS command. To reset the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system, right-click the name in the list and choose Reset Origin from
the shortcut menu. The origin is restored to its default location (0,0,0) relative to the specified base coordinate system.
Depth (Shortcut Menu or Double-Click)
Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a
parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system. In the
Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box, enter a value or choose the Select New
Origin button to use the pointing device to specify a new depth or a new
origin.
UCSMAN
1067
Display at UCS
Origin Point
Apply to All
Active Viewports
UCS Settings
Specifies UCS behavior when the UCS setting is updated.
1068
Update View to
Plan When UCS Is
Changed
UCSMAN
By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated
relative to the world coordinate system.
Name
Origin
X Axis
Y Axis
Z Axis
Relative To
See Also
Commands
UCSMAN
1069
System Variables
UNDEFINE
Allows an application-defined command to override an internal AutoCAD command
Command line: undefine
Enter command name:
Entering an AutoCAD command name suppresses that command. The suppressed command name can then be redefined to perform some other
function.
You can undefine only built-in AutoCAD commands. You cannot undefine
commands defined by AutoLISP. This includes ObjectARX application
commands registered via acedDefun(). You also cannot undefine external
commands and aliases defined in the acad.pgp file.
If an AutoLISP or ObjectARX application has redefined a command with the
same name as a built-in AutoCAD command, the application-defined
command is active.
You can restore an undefined command with REDEFINE.
You can always access a built-in AutoCAD command by preceding the
command name with a period (.).
For ObjectARX application commands registered via acedRegCmd, you can
access them by preceding the command name with a period (.), followed by
the commands group name, followed by another period (.). For example, the
MTEXT command can be accessed with .acad_mtext.mtext.
To determine command names and groups of an ObjectARX application, use
the ARX command, and choose the Commands option to see a listing of all
currently loaded ObjectARX commands and their group names.
1070
UNDEFINE
See Also
Commands
UNDO
Reverses the effect of commands
Reverses your last action. To reverse more than one action at a time, click the
arrow next to the Undo button on the Standard toolbar and select the last in
the sequence of actions you want to undo.
You can use the options of UNDO on the command line to undo more than
one action at a time. Begin and End define a number of actions as a group,
and Mark and Back work together to undo all actions back to a predetermined point.
When you use Back or Number to undo multiple actions, AutoCAD regenerates or redraws the drawing, if necessary. This occurs at the end of the UNDO
command; therefore, entering undo 5 causes one regeneration, and u u u u u
could cause as many as five.
UNDO has no effect on some commands and system variables, including
to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was
used.
Number
Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same
as entering u multiple times.
UNDO
1071
Auto
Groups the actions of a single command, making them reversible by a single
U command. When the Auto option is on, starting a command groups all
actions until you exit that command. You can undo the group of actions as
if it were one action.
UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited
the UNDO feature.
Enter UNDO Auto mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
Control
Limits or turns off UNDO.
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
All
None
One
1072
UNDO
Begin, End
Groups a sequence of actions into a set. After you enter the Begin option, all
subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option.
Entering undo begin while a group is already active ends the current set and
begins a new one. UNDO and U treat grouped actions as a single action.
If you enter undo begin without undo end, using the Number option undoes
the specified number of commands but does not back up past the begin
point. If you want to go back to before the begin point, you must use the End
option, even if the set is empty. The same applies to the U command. A mark
placed by the Mark option disappears inside an UNDO group.
Mark, Back
Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done
back to this mark. If you undo one operation at a time, AutoCAD informs you
when you reach the mark.
You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a
time, removing the mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following
prompt:
This will undo everything. OK? <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
Entering y undoes all commands entered since you last started AutoCAD.
Entering n causes AutoCAD to ignore the Back option.
When you use the Number option to undo multiple actions, UNDO stops if
it encounters a mark.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
UNDO
1073
UNION
Combines selected regions or solids by addition
A composite region is the result of combining the total area of two or more
existing regions. A composite solid is the result of combining the total volume of two or more existing solids. You can join regions or solids that do not
share a common area or volume.
Solids Editing toolbar:
Modify menu: Solids Editing Union
Command line: union
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of
arbitrary planes. AutoCAD divides the selection sets into subsets that are
joined separately. Solids are grouped in the first subset. The first selected
region and all subsequent coplanar regions are grouped in the second set.
The next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent
coplanar regions are grouped in the third set, and so on until all regions
belong to a subset.
The resulting composite solid includes the volume enclosed by all of the
selected solids. Each of the resulting composite regions encloses the area of
all regions in a subset.
1074
UNION
See Also
See Create and Combine Areas (Regions) in the Users Guide.
Commands
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision
Format menu: Units
Command line: units (or 'units for transparent use)
The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -units at the Command prompt, UNITS displays prompts on the
command line (see page 1078).
Length
Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current
units.
UNITS
1075
Type
Precision
Angle
Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle
display.
Type
Precision
Clockwise
1076
UNITS
Note In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content
Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when, either in the source
block or the target drawing, the Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless.
Sample Output
Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.
Direction
Displays the Direction Control dialog box.
Base Angle
Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of
angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical
coordinates.
UNITS
1077
East
North
West
South
Other
Angle
Pick an Angle
(Examples)
1.55E+01
15.50
1'-3.50"
1'-3 1/2"
15 1/2
1078
UNITS
AutoCAD prompts for the denominator of the smallest fraction if you specify
the architectural or fractional format.
Enter denominator of smallest fraction to display
(1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256) <current>: Enter a value (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128, or 256) or press ENTER
AutoCAD prompts for angle formats and precision:
Systems of angle measure:
1. Decimal degrees
2. Degrees/minutes/seconds
3. Grads
4. Radians
5. Surveyor's units
(Examples)
45.0000
45d0'0"
50.0000g
0.7854r
N 45d0'0" E
0
90
180
270
Enter a value or press ENTER
The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 oclock. The
default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise.
Measure angles clockwise? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
UNITS
1079
See Also
See Set Units of Measurement in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
1080
UNITS
VBAIDE
Displays the Visual Basic Editor
Tools menu: Macro Visual Basic Editor
Command line: vbaide
AutoCAD displays the Visual Basic Editor.
Use the Visual Basic Editor to edit code, forms, and references for any loaded
global VBA project or any embedded VBA project in an open drawing. You
can also debug and run projects from the Visual Basic Editor.
See Also
For more information about using the Visual Basic Editor, see the ActiveX and
VBA Developers Guide.
Commands
macro.
VBALOAD
Loads a global VBA project into the current AutoCAD session
Tools menu: Macro Load Project
Command line: vbaload
AutoCAD displays the Open VBA Project dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
There is no limit to the number of VBA projects you can load. Any project
referenced by the selected project will also be loaded, if available.
You cannot use this dialog box to load embedded VBA projects. Embedded
projects are loaded when you open the drawing containing the project, and
they are unloaded when you close the drawing.
If you select Open Visual Basic Editor, AutoCAD opens the Visual Basic Editor
after the selected project is loaded. For information about the Visual Basic
Editor, see the ActiveX and VBA Developers Guide.
VBAIDE
1081
Disable Macros
Enable Macros
1082
VBALOAD
Do Not Load
See Also
For more information about loading projects, see the ActiveX and VBA Developers Guide.
Commands
VBAMAN
Loads, unloads, saves, creates, embeds, and extracts VBA projects
Tools menu: Macro VBA Manager
Command line: vbaman
AutoCAD displays the VBA Manager.
VBA Manager
Loads, unloads, saves, creates, embeds, and extracts VBA projects.
VBAMAN
1083
Drawing
Specifies the active drawing. The list contains all of the drawings open in the
current AutoCAD session.
Embedded
Project
Extract
Projects
Lists the name and location of all the projects currently available in the
AutoCAD session.
Embed
New
Save As
Load
1084
VBAMAN
Unload
Macros
See Also
For more information about using the VBA Manager, see the ActiveX and VBA
Developers Guide.
Commands
VBARUN
Runs a VBA macro
A macro is a public (executable) subroutine. Each project usually contains at
least one macro.
Tools menu: Macro Macros
Command line: vbarun
AutoCAD displays the Macros dialog box.
If you enter -vbarun at the Command prompt, VBARUN displays a prompt on
the command line (see page 1089).
VBARUN
1085
Macro Name
Macro List
Macros In
1086
VBARUN
Description
Run
Step Into
Edit
Create
Delete
VBA Manager
Options
VBARUN
1087
Enable Auto
Embedding
Allow Break on
Errors
1088
VBARUN
VBARUN
1089
VBASTMT
Executes a VBA statement on the AutoCAD command line
Command line: vbastmt
Expression: Enter the VBA statement to execute
A Visual Basic statement is a complete instruction that can contain keywords,
operators, variables, constants, and expressions. A statement generally occupies a single line, although you can use a colon (:) to include more than one
statement on a line.
VBA statements are executed in the context of the current active drawing.
See Also
Commands
VBAUNLOAD
Unloads a global VBA project
Command line: vbaunload
Unload VBA Project:
If you do not enter a project name, the active global project is unloaded.
See Also
For more information about unloading projects, see the ActiveX and VBA
Developers Guide.
Commands
VIEW
Saves and restores named views
A view is a portion of a drawing that is displayed in a viewport. You can save
and restore views by name for convenient access. Views are saved separately
in model space and paper space.
1090
VBASTMT
Current View
View Names
VIEW
1091
Set Current
New
Details
Rename
(Shortcut Menu
Only)
Delete (Shortcut
Menu Only)
1092
Current View
View Names
VIEW
Set Current
Relative To
Restore
Orthographic
UCS with View
View Name
Specifies the view name. View names can have up to 255 characters and can
include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes.
Current Display
Uses the current display as the new view.
VIEW
1093
Define Window
Uses a window as the new view, defined in the drawing area by specifying
two opposite corners.
UCS Settings
Provides options for saving a UCS.
Save UCS with
View
UCS Name
Saves a UCS with the new view. This option sets the
UCSVIEW system variable.
Specifies the UCS saved with the new view. This option
is available only when Save UCS with View is selected.
1094
Name
Area
Target
Direction
VIEW
Clipping
Perspective
Relative To
Orthographic
top view
isometric view
X
Z
X
Z
right side view
front view
X
VIEW
1095
Delete
Restore
Save
Enter a name
1096
VIEW
UCS
Window
Enter a name
UCSORTHO determines whether the associated orthographic UCS is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored. UCSVIEW determines whether
the current UCS is saved with a named view when it is
saved. TILEMODE turns paper space on and off.
VIEW
1097
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport
Command line: viewres
Do you want fast zooms [Yes/No] <Y>: Press ENTER (Fast Zoom is no longer a
functioning option of this command and remains for script compatibility only.)
Enter circle zoom percent (120000) <current>: Enter an integer from 1 to
20,000 or press ENTER
AutoCAD regenerates the model.
VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, ellipses, and splines using
short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and
then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon. Using VIEWRES to increase the
zoom percentage and regenerate the drawing updates and smooths the circle's appearance. Decreasing the zoom percentage has the opposite effect.
VIEWRES at 15
Note Increasing the zoom percentage in VIEWRES may increase the time it takes
VIEWRES at 500
1098
VIEWRES
VLISP
Displays the Visual LISP interactive development environment (IDE)
Tools menu: AutoLISP Visual LISP Editor
Command line: vlisp
AutoCAD displays the Visual LISP interactive development environment
(IDE). Use Visual LISP to develop, test, and debug AutoLISP programs.
VPCLIP
Clips viewport objects
Clips the specified viewport objects. Reshapes the viewport border to
conform to a user-drawn boundary.
Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Viewport Clip.
Command line: vpclip
Select viewport to clip:
Select clipping object or [Polygonal/Delete] <Polygonal>:
Object
Polygonal
VLISP
1099
VPLAYER
Sets layer visibility within viewports
VPLAYER makes a layer visible in one or more viewports and invisible in all
other viewports.
The VPLAYER command can be used only while you are working in a layout
tab.
Command line: vplayer
Enter an option [?/Freeze/Thaw/Reset/Newfrz/Vpvisdflt]:
Freeze
Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. AutoCAD does not
display, regenerate, or plot objects on frozen layers.
Enter layer name(s) to freeze: Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
1100
All
Select
VPLAYER
Current
Thaw
Thaws layers in specific viewports.
Enter layer name(s) to thaw: Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
All
Select
Current
Reset
Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default
setting.
Enter layer name(s) to reset: Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
All
Select
Current
VPLAYER
1101
layer settings.
VPOINT
Sets the viewing direction for a three-dimensional visualization of the drawing
VPOINT puts the viewer in a position to look at the drawing as if looking back
at the origin (0,0,0) from a specified point in space. VPOINT cannot be used
in paper space.
View menu: 3D Views Viewpoint
Command line: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current
Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: Specify a point,
enter r, or press ENTER to display a compass and axis tripod
View Point
viewing
direction
(0,0,0)
X
1102
VPOINT
X
as seen by viewer
Rotate
compass
Z
Compass and
Axis Tripod
X
axis tripod
VPOINT
1103
See Also
See Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles in the Users Guide.
System Variables
able.
VPORTS
Creates multiple viewports
The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are
called viewport configurations.
VPORTS determines the viewport configuration for model space and paper
space (layout) environments. In model space (the Model tab), you can create
multiple model viewport configurations. In paper space (a layout tab), you
can create multiple layout viewport configurations.
Layouts toolbar:
View menu: Viewports
Command line: vports
The Viewports dialog box is displayed.
If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, VPORTS displays prompts on
the command line (see page 1108).
1104
VPORTS
New Name
Standard
Viewports
Preview
Apply To
VPORTS
1105
Setup
Change View To
Current Name
1106
VPORTS
Standard
Viewports
Viewport Spacing
Preview
Setup
Change View To
VPORTS
1107
Restore
Delete
1108
VPORTS
Join
viewport to join
Single
?List Viewport
Configurations
VPORTS
1109
Off
Fit
Shadeplot
1110
Lock
Object
VPORTS
be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be selfintersecting, and it can contain arcs as well as line
segments.
Polygonal
Restore
2/Vertical
3/Right
See Also
See Set Model Tab Viewports in the Users Guide.
4
Commands
System Variables
VPORTS
1111
VSLIDE
Displays an image slide file in the current viewport
Command line: vslide
The Select Slide File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box, is
displayed. Enter a slide file name (.sld extension) to display. When you
press ENTER or choose Open, the slide file is opened in AutoCAD.
To display a slide in a slide library (.slb extension), set FILEDIA to 0, enter
vslide, and then specify the slide library file name followed by the slide file
name enclosed in parentheses slidelibrary(slide).
When you view slides of images shaded with the -SHADE command in a larger
window or a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating the slides.
See Also
See View Slides in the Customization Guide.
Commands
Utilities
1112
VSLIDE
WBLOCK
Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file
Command line: wblock
The Write Block dialog box is displayed.
Entering wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection
dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by
prompts on the command line (see page 1115). If FILEDIA is set to 0, the
standard file selection dialog box is suppressed.
The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on
whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than
blocks are selected.
Source
Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion
points.
WBLOCK
1113
Block
Specifies an existing block to save as a file. Select a name from the list.
Entire Drawing
Selects current drawing as a block.
Objects
Specifies objects to be saved as a file.
Base Point
Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X
Pick Insertion
Base Point
Objects
Sets the effect of block creation on objects used to create a block.
Retain
Convert to Block
Delete from
Drawing
Select Objects
Button
Quick Select
Button
Opens the Quick Select dialog box, which you can use
to filter your selection set.
Objects Selected
Destination
Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement
to be used when the block is inserted.
1114
[...]
WBLOCK
Insert Units
Enter the
Entering the name of an existing block writes that block to a file. You cannot
enter the name of an external reference (xref) or one of its dependent blocks.
Entering an equal sign (=) specifies that the existing block and the output file
have the same name. If no block of that name exists in the drawing, the
prompt is displayed again.
Entering an asterisk (*) writes the entire drawing to the new output file,
except for unreferenced symbols. Model space objects are written to model
space, and paper space objects are written to paper space.
If you press ENTER , AutoCAD prompts you for an insertion base point for
the block file and then prompts you to select the objects to write to the block
file.
Specify insertion base point: Specify a point (1)
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
After AutoCAD creates the file, the selected objects are deleted from the
drawing. You can use OOPS to restore the objects.
objects selected
for a block
In the new drawing, the world coordinate system (WCS) is set parallel to the
user coordinate system (UCS).
WBLOCK
1115
See Also
See Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
WEDGE
Creates a 3D solid with a sloped face tapering along the X axis
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids Wedge
Command line: wedge
1
Corner of Wedge
Defines the first corner of the wedge.
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]:
1116
WEDGE
Corner
height
2
Cube
Length
height
length
width
Center
Creates the wedge by a specified center point.
Specify center of wedge <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify opposite corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
WEDGE
1117
Corner
height
Length
height
See Also
See Create 3D Solids in the Users Guide.
length
width
Commands
WHOHAS
Displays ownership information for opened drawing files
Command line: whohas
You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open.
WHOHAS displays the Select Drawing to Query dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). After you select a file, AutoCAD displays the ownership
information on the command line. The information includes the current
users computer name, login ID, and full name (if available) and the date and
time the drawing file was opened.
1118
WHOHAS
WIPEOUT
Covers existing objects with a blank area
Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current
background color. This area is bounded by the wipeout frame. You can turn
on the wipeout frame for editing and turn it off for plotting.
Draw menu: Wipeout
Command line: wipeout
Specify first point or [Frames/Polyline]<Polyline>:
First Point
Frames
Polyline
Enter y or n
WIPEOUT
1119
WMFIN
Imports a Windows metafile
Unlike bitmaps or raster files, metafiles contain vector information, which
can be scaled and printed without loss of resolution.
Insert menu: Windows Metafile
Command line: wmfin
The Import WMF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter a file name. AutoCAD adds the .wmf file extension.
In the Import WMF dialog box, if you choose Tools Options, AutoCAD
displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1125). You can also open
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS. After opening the selected WMF
file, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Insertion Point
Places a copy of the metafile with its base point at the specified insertion
point.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
X Scale Factor
Enter a value or
1120
WMFIN
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
WMFIN
1121
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the WMF file.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
X Scale Factor
Corner
1122
WMFIN
Enter a value or
XYZ
PScale
Sets the temporary scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display
of the WMF file as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
PX
Sets the temporary scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the
WMF file as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
WMFIN
1123
PY
Sets the temporary scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the
WMF file as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
PZ
Sets the temporary scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the
WMF file as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
PRotate
Sets the temporary rotation angle of the WMF file as it is dragged into
position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
See Also
Commands
1124
WMFIN
WMFOPTS
Sets options for WMFIN
Controls the way objects such as rectangles, polygons, and circles are
imported from Windows metafiles.
Command line: wmfopts
The WMF In Options dialog box is displayed.
Wide Lines
See Also
Commands
WMFOUT
Saves objects to a Windows metafile
Command line: wmfout
The Create WMF standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a file
name. AutoCAD adds a .wmf file extension.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
WMFOPTS
1125
Note If one or more raster objects are attached to the drawing and if the image
application (ism.arx) is loaded, the maximum resolution of the resulting WMF file
is 2K by 2K. The image application is loaded the first time you run IMAGE, IMAGEADJUST, IMAGEATTACH, IMAGECLIP, IMAGEFRAME, or IMAGEQUALITY.
See Also
Commands
System Variables
command.
1126
WMFOUT
XATTACH
Attaches an external reference to the current drawing
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: External Reference
Command line: xattach
AutoCAD displays the Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). The External Reference dialog box is displayed after a
file is selected.
XATTACH
1127
Name
Displays the xref name in the list after an xref is attached. When an attached
xref is selected in the list, its path is displayed in Path.
Browse
Choose Browse to display the Select a Reference dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select new xrefs for the current
drawing.
Found In
Displays the path where the xref was found.
If no path was saved for the xref or if the xref is no longer located at the
specified path, AutoCAD searches for the xref in the following order:
Saved Path
Displays the saved path, if any, that is used to locate the xref. This path can
be an absolute (fully specified) path, a relative (partially specified) path, or no
path.
Reference Type
Specifies whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay.
See Attach External References and Nest and Overlay External References
in the Users Guide.
Path Type
Specifies whether the saved path to the xref is the full path, a relative path,
or no path. You must save the current drawing before you can set the path
type to Relative Path. For a nested xref, a relative path always references the
location of its immediate host and not necessarily the currently open
drawing.
The Relative Path option is not available if the referenced drawing is located
on a different local disk drive or on a network server.
1128
XATTACH
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point of the selected xref.
Specify
On-Screen
Scale
Specifies the scale factors for the selected xref.
Specify
On-Screen
X Scale Factor
Y Scale Factor
Z Scale Factor
XATTACH
1129
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the xref instance.
Specify
On-Screen
Angle
See Also
See Attach External References in the Users Guide.
Commands
XBIND
Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing
An external reference (xref) is a drawing that you attach to or overlay on your
current drawing. In xrefs, dependent definitions are named objects such as
blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles.
XBIND adds the selected dependent definitions to the current drawing and
saves them with the drawing at the end of the session. You can manipulate
them as you would any other named object. AutoCAD replaces the vertical
bar symbol (|) from each dependent definition name with three new characters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($).
If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS,
AutoCAD also binds the referenced linetype. If you apply XBIND to a block,
all named objects that are referenced by the objects in the block are also
bound. If the block contains a reference to an xref, AutoCAD binds that xref
and all of its dependent definitions.
Note Use the Bind option of XREF binds the xref file. Use XBIND for individual
dependent definitions.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object External Reference Bind
Command line: xbind
The Xbind dialog box is displayed.
1130
XBIND
If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, XBIND displays prompts on the
command line (see page 1131).
Xrefs
Definitions to
Bind
Add
Remove
XBIND
1131
The name you specify must be the full name, including the vertical bar
character ( | ).
The xref-dependent named objects you specify are added to your drawing.
You can manipulate them as you would any other named object. AutoCAD
replaces the vertical bar character ( | ) from each xref-dependent named
object with three new characters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar
signs ($).
If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS,
AutoCAD also binds the referenced linetype. If you apply XBIND to a block,
any block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style thats referenced by
objects in the block is also bound. If the block contains a reference to an xref,
AutoCAD binds that xref and all its dependent named objects.
See Also
For information about xref-dependent named objects and how theyre
named, see Resolve Name Conflicts in External References in the Users
Guide.
Commands
XREF controls xrefs. The Bind option of the XREF command makes the entire reference a permanent part of
the host drawing.
XCLIP
Defines an xref or block clipping boundary and sets the front or back clipping planes
XCLIP is used on external references and blocks to set both a clipping
1132
XCLIP
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Xref Clip.
Command line: xclip
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
Enter clipping option [ON/OFF/Clipdepth/Delete/generate Polyline/
New boundary] <New>: Select an option or press ENTER
On
Displays the clipped portion of the xref or block in the host drawing.
Off
Displays all of the geometry of the xref or block in the host drawing, ignoring
the clipping boundary.
Clipdepth
Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects outside
the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not
displayed.
Specify front clip point or [Distance/Remove]:
Front Clip Point
Distance
Remove
Delete
Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily
turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping
boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE command cannot be used to delete
clipping boundaries.
XCLIP
1133
Generate Polyline
Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The
polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings.
Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary
using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline.
To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.
New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary or generates a
polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. If a boundary already exists,
AutoCAD prompts:
Delete old boundary? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
AutoCAD continues the command only if all previous boundaries are
deleted.
Specify clipping boundary(s):
[Select polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Specify a clipping
boundary option or press ENTER
Select Polyline
Polygonal
Rectangular
See Also
See Clip External References and Blocks in the Users Guide.
Commands
1134
XCLIP
System Variables
on or off.
XLINE
Creates an infinite line
XLINE creates infinite lines, which are commonly used as construction lines.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Construction Line
Command line: xline
Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: Specify a point or enter an option
Point
Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it
passes.
1
2
Specify through point: Specify the point (2) through which you want the xline to
pass, or press ENTER to end the command
AutoCAD creates the xline through the specified point.
Hor
Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point.
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline to
pass, or press ENTER to end the command
1
Ver
Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point.
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline to
pass, or press ENTER to end the command
AutoCAD creates the xline parallel to the Y axis.
XLINE
1135
Ang
Creates an xline at a specified angle.
1
angle
Reference
Bisect
Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the
angle between the first and second line.
3
1
2
Offset
Creates an xline parallel to another object.
Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>: Specify an offset distance, enter
t, or press ENTER
1136
XLINE
Offset Distance
Through
See Also
See Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) in the Users Guide.
Commands
System Variables
XOPEN
Opens a selected external reference (xref) in a new window
XOPEN opens the selected xref for editing in a new window. The new window
XOPEN
1137
XPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object. You can explode multiple compound objects
at the same time and change the color, layer, lineweight, and linetype of each
object individually or change the entire selection set globally. You can specify
a color, layer, lineweight, and linetype, or these properties can be inherited
from the object being exploded.
block before
XPLODE
component ob
after XPLODE
You can explode blocks with scale factors of equal absolute value. Equal
absolute value means the scale factors are equal if you remove any minus
signs (). For example, you can explode blocks with X, Y, and Z scale factors
of 1, 1, and 1, including mirrored blocks.
Command line: xplode
Select objects to XPlode.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
AutoCAD reports how many objects were selected and, of those, how many
objects cannot be exploded. If you select more than one valid object,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt.
Enter an option [Individually/Globally] <Globally>: Enter i, enter g, or press
ENTER
Individually
Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. AutoCAD displays the
following prompt for each object.
Enter an option [All/Color/LAyer/LType/Inherit from parent block/Explode]
<Explode>: Enter an option or press ENTER
All
Color
1138
XPLODE
LType
Inherit from
Parent Block
XPLODE
1139
Explode
Globally
Applies changes to all the selected objects.
Enter an option [All/Color/LAyer/LType/Inherit from parent block/Explode]
<Explode>: Enter an option or press ENTER
The descriptions of the All, Color, Layer, LType, Inherit from Parent Block,
and Explode options match the descriptions of the corresponding options
under Individually (see page 1138).
See Also
Commands
XREF
Controls external references to drawing files
An external reference (xref) is a drawing that you attach to or overlay on your
current drawing. When you open or plot a drawing containing xrefs,
AutoCAD automatically reloads the latest version of each xref.
Attaching or overlaying an xref is similar to inserting an entire drawing as a
block. The contents of the specified drawing, and any attached xrefs within
it, are copied into a new block definition. Instances of the xref in the drawing
are block references. If the xref has overlaid, not attached, xrefs within it,
they are not displayed when the xref is attached to or overlaid on another
drawing.
Because the xref is linked to but not inserted in the drawing, attaching an
xref does not significantly increase the drawing file size.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Xref Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Xref Manager.
Command line: xref
The Xref Manager is displayed.
1140
XREF
If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, XREF displays prompts on the
command line (see page 1145).
Xref Manager
Attaches, overlays, lists, binds, detaches, reloads, unloads, renames, and
modifies paths to external references (xrefs) in the current (or host) drawing.
XREF
1141
Status
Size
Type
Date
Saved Path
Tree View
Displays a hierarchical representation of the xrefs, displaying the relationships between xref definitions. Tree view shows the level of nesting
relationship of the attached xrefs, whether they are attached or overlaid, and
whether they are loaded, unloaded, marked for reload or unload, or not
found, unresolved, or unreferenced.
Attach
Displays the External Reference dialog box if an external reference is selected
or displays the Select Reference File dialog box if no external reference is
selected. See XATTACH.
Detach
Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing, erasing all instances of a
specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the
definition table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current
drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. AutoCAD cannot
detach an xref referenced by another xref or block.
1142
XREF
Reload
Marks one or more xrefs for reloading. This option rereads and displays the
most recently saved version of the drawing.
Unload
Unloads one or more xrefs. Unloaded xrefs can be easily reloaded. Unlike
detaching, unloading does not remove the xref permanently. It merely
suppresses the display and regeneration of the xref definition to improve
performance.
Bind
Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box (see page 1143). The Bind option makes
the selected xref and its dependent named objects (such as blocks, text styles,
dimension styles, layers, and linetypes) a part of the current drawing.
Open
Opens the selected xref for editing in a new window. The new window is
displayed after the Xref Manager is closed.
Xref Found At
Displays the full path of the currently selected xref. This is where the xref is
actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path.
Browse
Save Path
XREF
1143
Bind
Insert
1144
XREF
Lists the xref name, path, and type and the number of
xrefs currently attached to your drawing. AutoCAD
displays the following prompt:
Enter xref name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER to list all xrefs in the drawing
Bind
Detach
XREF
1145
Path
Unload
Reload
Overlay
1146
XREF
XREF
1147
1148
XREF
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport
You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM,
PAN, or VIEW is in progress.
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Zoom
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and
choose Zoom to zoom in real time.
Command line: zoom (or 'zoom for transparent use)
Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window] <real time>:
All
ZOOM
1149
Dynamic
view box
new view
1150
ZOOM
Previous
original view
current view
ZOOM .5x
ZOOM
1151
ZOOM 2
Window
Real Time
ZOOM Realtime cursor
1152
ZOOM
Pan
Switches to PAN.
Zoom
3D Orbit
Switches to 3DORBIT.
Zoom Window
Zoom Original
Zoom Extents
ZOOM
1153
See Also
See Magnify a View (Zoom) in the Users Guide.
Commands
1154
ZOOM
Command Aliases
In this appendix
Command aliases
1155
Command aliases
Command
Alias
Command
Alias
3DARRAY
3a
CHANGE
-ch
3DFACE
3f
CIRCLE
3DORBIT
3do
COLOR
3DPOLY
3p
COPY
co, cp
ADCENTER
adc
DBCONNECT
ALIGN
al
DDEDIT
ed
APPLOAD
ap
DDVPOINT
vp
ARC
a
DIMALIGNED
dal, dimali
AREA
aa
DIMANGULAR
dan, dimang
ARRAY
ar
DIMBASELINE
dba, dimbase
-ARRAY
-ar
DIMCENTER
dce
ATTDEF
att, ddattdef
DIMCONTINUE
dco, dimcont
-ATTDEF
-att
DIMDIAMETER
ddi, dimdia
ATTEDIT
ate
DIMEDIT
ded, dimed
-ATTEDIT
-ate, atte
DIMDISASSOCIATE
dda
ATTEXT
ddattext
DIMLINEAR
dli, dimlin
BHATCH
h, bh
DIMORDINATE
dor, dimord
BLOCK
b
DIMOVERRIDE
dov, dimover
-BLOCK
-b
DIMRADIUS
dra, dimrad
BOUNDARY
bo
DIMSTYLE
-BOUNDARY
-bo
DIMREASSOCIATE
dre
BREAK
br
DIMTEDIT
dimted
CHAMFER
cha
DIST
di
1156
Appendix A
Command Aliases
Command
Alias
Command
Alias
DIVIDE
div
IMAGECLIP
icl
DONUT
do
IMPORT
imp
DRAWORDER
dr
INSERT
ddinsert, i
DSETTINGS
-INSERT
-i
DSVIEWER
av
INTERFERE
inf
DVIEW
dv
INTERSECT
in
ELLIPSE
el
INSERTOBJ
io
ERASE
LAYER
ddlmodes, la
EXPLODE
-LAYER
-la
EXPORT
exp
-LAYOUT
lo
EXTEND
ex
LEADER
lead
EXTRUDE
ext
LENGTHEN
len
FILLET
LINE
FILTER
fi
LINETYPE
GROUP
-LINETYPE
-lt, -ltype
-GROUP
-g
LIST
li, ls
HATCH
-h
LTSCALE
lts
HATCHEDIT
he
LWEIGHT
lw, lineweight
HIDE
hi
MATCHPROP
ma
IMAGE
im
MEASURE
me
-IMAGE
-im
MIRROR
mi
IMAGEADJUST
iad
MLINE
ml
IMAGEATTACH
iat
MOVE
Command Aliases
1157
Command
Alias
Command
Alias
MSPACE
ms
QLEADER
le
MTEXT
t, mt
QUIT
exit
-MTEXT
-t
RECTANG
rec
MVIEW
mv
REDRAW
OFFSET
REDRAWALL
ra
OPTIONS
REGEN
re
OSNAP
ddosnap, os
REGENALL
rea
-OSNAP
-os
REGION
reg
PAN
RENAME
ren
-PAN
-p
-RENAME
-ren
PASTESPEC
pa
RENDER
rr
PEDIT
pe
REVOLVE
rev
PLINE
pl
RPREF
rpr
PLOT
ROTATE
ro
POINT
po
SCALE
sc
POLYGON
pol
SCRIPT
scr
PREVIEW
pre
SECTION
sec
PROPERTIES
ch, ddchprop,
ddmodify, mo, props
SETVAR
set
SLICE
sl
PROPERTIESCLOSE
prclose
SNAP
sn
PSPACE
ps
SOLID
so
PUBLISHTOWEB
ptw
SPELL
sp
PURGE
pu
SPLINE
spl
-PURGE
-pu
1158
Appendix A
Command Aliases
Command
Alias
Command
Alias
SPLINEDIT
spe
XCLIP
xc
STRETCH
XLINE
xl
STYLE
st
XREF
xr
SUBTRACT
su
-XREF
-xr
TABLET
ta
ZOOM
THICKNESS
th
TILEMODE
ti, tm
TOLERANCE
tol
TOOLBAR
to
TORUS
tor
TRIM
tr
UNION
uni
UNITS
un, ddunits
-UNITS
-un
VIEW
ddview, v
-VIEW
-v
VPOINT
-vp
WBLOCK
-WBLOCK
-w
WEDGE
we
XATTACH
xa
XBIND
xb
-XBIND
-xb
Command Aliases
1159
1160
System Variables
In this appendix
getvar
1161
System Variables
Variable
ACADLSPASDOC
Characteristic
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Description
Controls whether AutoCAD loads the acad.lsp file into
every drawing or just the first drawing opened in an
AutoCAD session.
0
1
ACADPREFIX
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
ACADVER
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
ACISOUTVER
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 70
ADCSTATE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: varies
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
AFLAGS
ANGBASE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
ANGDIR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
1162
Appendix B
System Variables
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
APBOX
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Turns the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. The aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when
you snap to an object.
0
1
APERTURE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10
Sets the display size for the aperture, in pixels. The aperture is the selection tool used in drawing commands.
AREA
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
ATTDIA
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
ATTMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
ATTREQ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
AUNITS
AUDITCTL
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes/seconds
Gradians
Radians
Surveyors units
APBOX
1163
AUPREC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
AUTOSNAP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 63
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
BINDTYPE
Type: Integer
Not Saved
Initial value: 0
BLIPMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
CDATE
1164
Appendix B
System Variables
CECOLOR
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "BYLAYER"
CELTSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
CELTYPE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "BYLAYER"
CELWEIGHT
Type: Integer
Saved In: Drawing
Initial value: -1
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
CHAMFERB
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
CHAMFERC
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
CHAMFERD
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
CECOLOR
1165
CHAMMODE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
CIRCLERAD
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0.0000
CLAYER
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "0"
CMDACTIVE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
CMDNAMES
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Displays the names of the active and transparent commands. For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the
ZOOM command is being used transparently during the
LINE command.
This variable is designed for use with programming
interfaces such as AutoLISP, DIESEL, and
ActiveX Automation.
The following is a simple example that demonstrates
how to use DIESEL to display the current command at
the status line.
Command: modemacro
New value for MODEMACRO, or . for none <"">:
$(getvar, cmdnames)
For additional information on AutoCAD programming
interfaces, see Introduction to Programming Interfaces
in the Customization Guide.
1166
Appendix B
System Variables
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
CMLSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
1.0000 (imperial) or
20.0000 (metric)
CMLSTYLE
Type: String
Sets the multiline style that AutoCAD uses to draw the
Saved in: Drawing
multiline.
Initial value: "STANDARD"
COMPASS
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
CMLJUST
0
1
2
COORDS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
1
2
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
CPLOTSTYLE
Top
Middle
Bottom
CMLJUST
1167
CPROFILE
CTAB
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
CURSORSIZE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 5
CVPORT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
1168
Appendix B
System Variables
DATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
DBCSTATE
DBMOD
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
0
1
1
4
8
16
DATE
1169
DCTCUST
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: ""
DCTMAIN
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: varies by
country
Displays the file name of the current main spelling dictionary. The full path is not shown because this file is
expected to reside in the support directory.
You can specify a default main spelling dictionary using
the SETVAR command. When prompted for a new value
for DCTMAIN, you can enter one of the keywords below.
Depending on the language version of AutoCAD, not all
dictionaries may be available.
Keyword
enu
ena
ens
enz
ca
cs
da
nl
nls
fi
fr
fra
de
ded
it
no
non
pt
ptb
ru
rui
es
esa
sv
DEFLPLSTYLE
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Language name
American English
Australian English
British English (ise)
British English (ize)
Catalan
Czech
Danish
Dutch (primary)
Dutch (secondary)
Finnish
French (unaccented capitals)
French (accented capitals)
German (Scharfes s)
German (Dopple s)
Italian
Norwegian (Bokmal)
Norwegian (Nynorsk)
Portuguese (Iberian)
Portuguese (Brazilian)
Russian (infrequent io)
Russian (frequent io)
Spanish (unaccented capitals)
Spanish (accented capitals)
Swedish
1170
Appendix B
System Variables
DEFPLSTYLE
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
DELOBJ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
DEMANDLOAD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 3
Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand-loads a thirdparty application if a drawing contains custom objects
created in that application.
0
1
DIASTAT
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMADEC
Cancel
OK
DEFPLSTYLE
1171
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMALT
DIMALTD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMALTF
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 25.4000
DIMALTRND
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.00
DIMALTTD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMALTTZ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
1172
Appendix B
System Variables
DIMALTU
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMALTZ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Scientific
Decimal
Engineering
Architectural (stacked)
Fractional (stacked)
Architectural
Fractional
Windows Desktop (decimal format using Control
Panel settings for decimal separator and number
grouping symbols)
Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMALTZ values 03 affect feet-and-inch
dimensions only.
0
1
2
3
4
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
DIMASO
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMALTU
1173
DIMASSOC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMASZ
Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. Also controls the size of hook lines.
Multiples of the arrowhead size determine whether dimension lines and text should fit between the extension
lines. DIMASZ is also used to scale arrowhead blocks if
set by DIMBLK. DIMASZ has no effect when DIMTSZ is
other than zero.
DIMATFIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3
1174
Appendix B
System Variables
DIMAUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes/seconds
Gradians
Radians
DIMAUNIT sets this value when entered on the command line or when set from the Primary Units area in the
Annotation dialog box.
DIMAZIN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMBLK
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
DIMAUNIT
1175
DIMBLK1
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line
when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled
arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of
arrowheads, see DIMBLK.
DIMBLK2
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
DIMCEN
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0900
DIMCLRD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMCLRE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMCLRT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMDEC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
DIMDLE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMDLI
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.3800
1176
Appendix B
System Variables
DIMDSEP
DIMEXE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1800
DIMEXO
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0625
DIMFIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3
DIMFRAC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMGAP
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0900
Horizontal
Diagonal
Not stacked (for example, 1/2)
DIMDSEP
1177
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMJUST
Positions the text above the dimension line and center-justifies it between the extension lines
Positions the text next to the first extension line
Positions the text next to the second extension line
Positions the text above and aligned with the first
extension line
Positions the text above and aligned with the second
extension line
DIMLDRBLK
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
DIMLFAC
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMLIM
DIMLUNIT
DIMLWD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
Type: Enum
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: -2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Scientific
Decimal
Engineering
Architectural
Fractional
Windows desktop
-3 BYLAYER
-2 BYBLOCK
integer representing 100th of mm
1178
Appendix B
System Variables
DIMLWE
Type: Enum
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: -2
DIMPOST
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
DIMRND
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMSAH
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
DIMSCALE
DIMLWE
1179
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSHO
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMSOXD
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSD1
DIMSD2
DIMSE1
DIMSE2
1180
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Appendix B
System Variables
DIMTAD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
2
3
DIMTDEC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
DIMTFAC
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
DIMTIH
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate.
0 or Off
1 or On
DIMTIX
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMTAD
1181
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMTM
Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. AutoCAD
accepts signed values for DIMTM. If DIMTOL is on and
DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, AutoCAD
draws a tolerance value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is
drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
For DIMTM, AutoCAD uses the negative of the value you
enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive
number and a plus sign if you specify a negative
number).
DIMTMOVE
DIMTOFL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
0
1
2
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMTOL
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMTOLJ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
1182
Appendix B
System Variables
Bottom
Middle
Top
DIMTP
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTP accepts
signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM
are set to the same value, AutoCAD draws a tolerance
value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is
drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
DIMTSZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMTVP
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMTXSTY
Type: String
Specifies the text style of the dimension.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "STANDARD"
DIMTXT
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1800
DIMTZIN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMTP
1183
DIMUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMUPT
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMZIN
0
1
2
3
4
DISPSILH
Off
On
DISTANCE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
DONUTID
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0.5000
DONUTOD
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
1184
Appendix B
System Variables
DRAGMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
DRAGP1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10
DRAGP2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 25
DWGCHECK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
2
3
DWGCODEPAGE
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
DWGNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
DWGPREFIX
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
DRAGMODE
1185
DWGTITLED
EDGEMODE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges.
0
1
0
1
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 0.0000
ERRNO
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
1186
Appendix B
System Variables
EXPERT
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
4
5
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
EXTMAX
(Read-only)
Type: 3D Point
Saved in: Drawing
EXTMIN
(Read-only)
Type: 3D Point
Saved in: Drawing
Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only
with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world
coordinates for the current space.
EXPERT
1187
EXTNAMES
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
FACETRATIO
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial Value: 0
FACETRES
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.5
FILEDIA
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
FILLETRAD
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
FILLMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
1188
Appendix B
System Variables
FONTALT
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
"simplex.shx"
3.
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "acad.fmp"
Specifies the font mapping file to be used. A font mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the original
font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted
for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to
substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font,
the line in the mapping file would read as follows:
romanc.shx;times.ttf
If FONTMAP does not point to a font mapping file, if the
FMP file is not found, or if the font file name specified in
the FMP file is not found, AutoCAD uses the font defined
in the style. If the font in the style is not found, AutoCAD
substitutes the font according to substitution rules.
For more information about font substitution, see
Substitute Fonts in the Users Guide.
FONTALT
1189
FRONTZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
FULLOPEN
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
GFANG
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
GFCLR1
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: RGB 000,
000, 255
GFCLR2
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: RGB 255,
255, 153
GFCLRLUM
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
GFCLRSTATE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
0
1
0
1
GFNAME
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
Appendix B
1190
System Variables
Linear
Cylindrical
Inverted cylindrical
Spherical
Inverted spherical
Hemispherical
Inverted hemispherical
Curved
Inverted curved
GFSHIFT
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Centered
Shifted up and to the left
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
GRIDUNIT
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.5000,0.5000
GRIPBLOCK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
GRIPCOLOR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 160
GRIPHOT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
GRIPHOVER
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
GRIPOBJLIMIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 100
GRIPS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
GRIDMODE
0
1
0
1
0
1
GFSHIFT
1191
GRIPSIZE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 5
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is
1 to 255.
GRIPTIPS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
HALOGAP
HANDLES
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
HIDEPRECISION
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial Value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial Value: 1
1192
Appendix B
System Variables
HIGHLIGHT
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
HPANG
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0
HPASSOC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
HPBOUND
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
HPDOUBLE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Creates a region
Creates a polyline
HPNAME
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "ANSI31"
HPSCALE
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
HPSPACE
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
HYPERLINKBASE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
IMAGEHLT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
HIGHLIGHT
1193
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
INDEXCTL
INETLOCATION
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "http://
www.autodesk.com"
INSBASE
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
INSNAME
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: ""
INSUNITS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
1194
Appendix B
System Variables
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
1195
1196
Appendix B
System Variables
ISAVEBAK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 50
ISOLINES
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
LASTANGLE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the
XY plane of the current UCS for the current space.
LASTPOINT
Type: 3D point
Not saved
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
Stores the last point entered, expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space; referenced by the at symbol
(@) during keyboard entry.
LASTPROMPT
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: ""
ISAVEBAK
1197
LAYOUTREGENCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 50.0000
LIMCHECK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
1198
Appendix B
System Variables
LIMMAX
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
12.0000,9.0000
LIMMIN
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000
LISPINIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "enu"
LOCALROOTPREFIX
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "pathname"
LOGFILEMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
LOGFILENAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Specifies the path and name of the log file for the current
drawing. The initial value varies depending on the name
of the current drawing and where you installed AutoCAD.
LIMMAX
1199
LOGFILEPATH
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Specifies the path for the log files for all drawings in a
session. You can also specify the path by using the
OPTIONS command. The initial value varies depending
on where you installed AutoCAD.
LOGINNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
LTSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
LUNITS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
LUPREC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
Sets the number of decimal places displayed for all readonly linear units, and for all editable linear units whose
precision is less than or equal to the current LUPREC
value. For editable linear units whose precision is greater
than the current LUPREC value, the true precision is displayed. LUPREC does not affect the display precision of
dimension text (see DIMSTYLE).
LWDEFAULT
Type: Enum
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 25
1
2
3
4
5
Scientific
Decimal
Engineering
Architectural
Fractional
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved In: Registry
Initial value: 1
LWUNITS
MAXACTVP
1200
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 64
Appendix B
Inches
Millimeters
System Variables
MAXSORT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1000
MBUTTONPAN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 1
MEASUREINIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: varies by
country
Sets the initial drawing units as imperial or metric. Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and
linetype files an existing drawing uses when its opened.
Also controls which template is used.
0
1
MEASUREMENT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
MAXSORT
1201
MENUECHO
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. The value is the
sum of the following:
1
2
4
8
MENUNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Stores the menu file name, including the path for the file
name.
MIRRTEXT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: ""
MODEMACRO
0
1
Use MODEMACRO to display a string of text, or use special text strings written in the DIESEL macro language to
have AutoCADevaluate the macro from time to time and
base the status line on user-selected conditions. For details, see DIESEL in the Customization Guide.
MTEXTED
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "Internal"
1202
Appendix B
System Variables
MTEXTFIXED
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
MTJIGSTRING
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "abc"
MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "pathname"
NOMUTT
Type: Short
Not Saved
Initial Value: 0
OBSCUREDCOLOR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 257
MTEXTFIXED
1203
OBSCUREDLTYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Off
Solid
Dashed
Dotted
Short Dash
Medium Dash
Long Dash
Double Short Dash
Double Medium Dash
Double Long Dash
Medium Long Dash
Sparse Dot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by
changing its color and linetype and is visible only when
the HIDE or SHADEMODE commands are used.
The OBSCUREDLTYPE setting can also be set in the
Hidden Line Settings dialog box (see page 414),
Obscured Lines area, Linetype pull-down menu.
OFFSETDIST
1204
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
Appendix B
System Variables
OFFSETGAPTYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
OFFSETGAPTYPE=1
OLEHIDE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
OFFSETGAPTYPE=0
distance from
vertex to chamfer
OFFSETGAPTYPE=2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
OFFSETGAPTYPE
1205
OLESTARTUP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
ORTHOMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
OSMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 4133
NONe
ENDpoint
MIDpoint
CENter
NODe
QUAdrant
INTersection
INSertion
PERpendicular
TANgent
NEArest
QUIck
APParent Intersection
EXTension
PARallel
1206
Appendix B
System Variables
OSNAPCOORD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
PALETTEOPAQUE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
PAPERUPDATE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
Controls the display of a warning dialog when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the
paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file.
0
1
Displays a warning dialog box if the paper size specified in the layout is not supported by the plotter
Sets paper size to the configured paper size of the
plotter configuration file
PDMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
PDSIZE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
OSNAPCOORD
1207
PEDITACCEPT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
PELLIPSE
PERIMETER
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
PICKADD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PICKAUTO
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
1208
Appendix B
Turns off PICKADD. The objects most recently selected become the selection set. Previously selected
objects are removed from the selection set. Add
more objects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT
while selecting.
Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current
selection set. To remove objects from the set, press
SHIFT while selecting.
System Variables
PICKBOX
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
PICKDRAG
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
PICKFIRST
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PICKSTYLE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PLATFORM
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
PLINEGEN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
PICKBOX
1209
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
PLINETYPE
PLINEWID
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
PLOTROTMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
1
2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
PLQUIET
1210
Appendix B
System Variables
POLARADDANG
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: null
POLARANG
Type: Real
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 90
Sets the polar angle increment. Values are 90, 45, 30,
22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5.
POLARDIST
Type: Real
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0.0000
POLARMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
POLYSIDES
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 4
POLARADDANG
1211
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
POPUPS
PRODUCT
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "AutoCAD"
PROGRAM
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "acad"
PROJECTNAME
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
PROJMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PROXYGRAPHICS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
1212
Appendix B
System Variables
PROXYNOTICE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PROXYSHOW
PROXYWEBSEARCH
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
0
1
2
0
1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
PROXYNOTICE
1213
PSTYLEMODE
PSTYLEPOLICY
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Indicates whether the current drawing is in a ColorDependent or Named Plot Style mode.
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
0
1
PSVPSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial Value: 0
Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports.
The view scale factor is defined by comparing the ratio of
units in paper space to the units in newly created model
space viewports. The view scale factor you set is used
with the VPORTS command. A value of 0 means the scale
factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must be a positive real
value.
PUCSBASE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: ""
Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and
orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space
only.
QTEXTMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
RASTERPREVIEW
0
1
0
1
REFEDITNAME
1214
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not Saved
Initial value: ""
Appendix B
System Variables
REGENMODE
RE-INIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
REMEMBERFOLDERS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
REPORTERROR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "pathname"
REGENMODE
1215
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
RTDISPLAY
SAVEFILE
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: ""
SAVEFILEPATH
Type: String
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save
Saved in: Registry
files for the AutoCADsession. You can also change the
Initial value: "C:\TEMP\" path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page
633).
SAVENAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: ""
SAVETIME
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10
SCREENBOXES
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
SCREENMODE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
SCREENSIZE
1216
(Read-only)
Type: 2D point
Not saved
Appendix B
System Variables
SDI
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Controls whether AutoCADruns in single- or multipledocument interface. Helps third-party developers update
applications to work smoothly with the AutoCAD
multiple-drawing mode.
0
1
2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3
SHADEDIF
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 70
SHORTCUTMENU
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 11
SHADEDGE
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
4
8
Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus, restoring R14 legacy behavior.
Enables Default mode shortcut menus.
Enables Edit mode shortcut menus.
Enables Command mode shortcut menus. In this
case, the Command mode shortcut menu is available
whenever a command is active.
Enables Command mode shortcut menus only when
command options are currently available from the
command line.
SDI
1217
SHPNAME
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: ""
Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbolnaming conventions. If no default is set, it returns "".
Enter a period (.) to set no default.
SIGWARN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
SKETCHINC
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1000
SKPOLY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
SNAPANG
Generates lines
Generates polylines
Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current
viewport. The angle you specify is relative to the current
UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until
the display is refreshed. AutoCADdoes not redraw automatically when system variable settings are changed.
SNAPBASE
SNAPISOPAIR
SNAPMODE
1218
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000
Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Appendix B
0
1
2
0
1
System Variables
Left
Top
Right
Snap off
Snap on for the current viewport
SNAPSTYL
SNAPTYPE
SNAPUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.5000,0.5000
0
1
0
1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Not Saved
Initial value: 1
SORTENTS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 127
Disables SORTENTS
Sorts for object selection
Sorts for object snap
Clears all the checkboxes
Sorts for MSLIDE command slide creation
Sorts for REGEN commands
Sorts for plotting
Clears all the checkboxes
SNAPSTYL
1219
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
SPLFRAME
SPLINESEGS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 8
SPLINETYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
Type: Integer
STANDARDSVIOLATION
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
Quadratic B-spline
Cubic B-spline
STARTUP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
1220
Appendix B
System Variables
SURFTAB1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
SURFTAB2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
SURFTYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
SURFU
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
SURFV
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 6
SYSCODEPAGE
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
TABMODE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
TARGET
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
TDCREATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Stores the local time and date the drawing was created.
TDINDWG
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
SURFTAB1
1221
TDUCREATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was
created.
TDUPDATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TDUSRTIMER
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TDUUPDATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TEMPPREFIX
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
TEXTEVAL
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
TEXTQLTY
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 50
TEXTSIZE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.2000
Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with
the current text style (has no effect if the style has a fixed
height).
1222
Appendix B
System Variables
TEXTSTYLE
Type: String
Sets the name of the current text style.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "STANDARD"
THICKNESS
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
TILEMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: varies
TRACEWID
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0500
TRACKPATH
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
TOOLTIPS
TPSTATE
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
TRAYICONS
TRAYNOTIFY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
0
1
0
1
TRAYTIMEOUT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 5
TEXTSTYLE
1223
TREEDEPTH
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3020
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10000000
Limits memory consumption during drawing regeneration by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index
(oct-tree).
By imposing a fixed limit with TREEMAX, you can load
drawings created on systems with more memory than
your system and with a larger TREEDEPTH than your system can handle. These drawings, if left unchecked, have
an oct-tree large enough to eventually consume more
memory than is available to your computer. TREEMAX
also provides a safeguard against experimentation with
inappropriately high TREEDEPTH values.
The initial default for TREEMAX is 10000000 (10 million),
a value high enough to effectively disable TREEMAX as a
control for TREEDEPTH. The value to which you should
set TREEMAX depends on your systems available RAM.
You get about 15,000 oct-tree nodes per megabyte of
RAM.
If you want an oct-tree to use up to, but no more than, 2
megabytes of RAM, set TREEMAX to 30000 (2 x 15,000).
If AutoCAD runs out of memory allocating oct-tree nodes,
restart AutoCAD, set TREEMAX to a smaller number, and
try loading the drawing again.
AutoCAD might occasionally run into the limit you set
with TREEMAX. Follow the resulting prompt instructions.
Your ability to increase TREEMAX depends on your computers available memory.
1224
Appendix B
System Variables
TRIMMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
TSPACEFAC
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0
Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height. Valid values are 0.25 to
4.0.
TSPACETYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
At Least
Exactly
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
TSTACKSIZE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 70
UCSAXISANG
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 90
UCSBASE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "WORLD"
Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and
orientation of orthographic UCS settings. Valid values
include any named UCS.
TSTACKALIGN
0
1
2
Bottom aligned
Center aligned
Top aligned
TRIMMODE
1225
UCSFOLLOW
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 3
No icon displayed
On; icon is displayed
Origin; if icon is displayed, the icon floats to the UCS
origin if possible
On and displayed at origin
The UCSICON command controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon. Because entering ucsicon at the
Command prompt invokes the UCSICON command, you
must use the SETVAR command to access the UCSICON
system variable.
UCSNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
UCSORG
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
1226
Appendix B
System Variables
UCSORTHO
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
UCSVIEW
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
UCSVP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 1
UCSXDIR
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
UCSYDIR
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
UNDOCTL
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
UNDOMARKS
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
UCSORTHO
1227
UNITMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
USERI1-5
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
USERR1-5
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
USERS1-5
Type: String
Not saved
Initial Value: ""
VIEWCTR
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
VIEWDIR
(Read-only)
Type: 3D vector
Saved in: Drawing
Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport. Expressed in UCS coordinates. This describes the camera
point as a 3D offset from the target point.
VIEWMODE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
1228
Appendix B
System Variables
Turned off.
Perspective view active.
Front clipping on.
Back clipping on.
UCS Follow mode on.
Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance
(FRONTZ) determines the front clipping plane. If off,
FRONTZ is ignored, and the front clipping plane is
set to pass through the camera point (vectors behind
the camera are not displayed). This flag is ignored if
the front-clipping bit (2) is off.
VIEWSIZE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
VIEWTWIST
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
VISRETAIN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
VSMAX
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
VSMIN
(Read-only)
Type: 3D point
Saved in: Drawing
WHIPARC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Circles and arcs are not smooth, but rather are displayed as a series of vectors
Circles and arcs are smooth, displayed as true circles
and arcs
VIEWSIZE
1229
WHIPTHREAD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
1
2
3
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: Off
1230
Appendix B
System Variables
WMFFOREGND
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: Off
WORLDVIEW
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
0
1
0
1
WRITESTAT
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
WMFFOREGND
1231
XCLIPFRAME
XEDIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Controls whether the current drawing can be edited inplace when being referenced by another drawing.
0
1
0
1
XFADECTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 50
XLOADCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
1232
Appendix B
System Variables
XLOADPATH
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: ""
Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demandloaded xref files. For more information, see XLOADCTL.
XREFCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
XREFNOTIFY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
ZOOMFACTOR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 60
XLOADPATH
1233
1234
Dimension Variables
Quick Reference
In this appendix
each tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box and lists the
Common Dimensioning
Standards
1235
DIMCLRD
DIMLWD
DIMDLE
DIMDLI
DIMSD1
DIMSD2
DIMBLK1
DIMBLK2
DIMCLRE
DIMLWE
DIMLDRBLK
DIMEXE
DIMASZ
DIMEXO
DIMCEN
DIMSE1
DIMSE2
1236
Appendix C
DIMTXSTY
DIMCLRT
DIMTXT
DIMTFAC
DIMGAP
DIMTOH
DIMTIH
DIMTAD
DIMJUST
DIMGAP
DIMATFIT
DIMTIX
DIMSOXD
DIMSCALE
DIMUPT
DIMTMOVE
DIMTOFL
1237
DIMLUNIT
DIMDEC
DIMFRAC
DIMDSEP
DIMRND
DIMPOST
DIMAUNIT
DIMLFAC
DIMADEC
DIMZIN
DIMAZIN
DIMALT
DIMALTU
DIMALTD
DIMALTF
DIMALTRND
DIMAPOST
DIMAPOST
DIMALTZ
1238
Appendix C
DIMTOL
DIMTDEC
DIMTP
DIMTM
DIMTFAC
DIMTOLJ
DIMALTTD
DIMALTTZ
DIMTZIN
1239
Description
ANSI
ISO-25
DIN
JIS
DIMADEC
DIMALT
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMALTD
DIMALTF
25.4000
0.0394
0.0394
0.0394
DIMALTRND
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMALTTD
DIMALTTZ
DIMALTU
Alternate units
DIMALTZ
DIMAPOST
DIMASZ
Arrow size
0.1800
2.5000
2.5000
2.5000
DIMATFIT
DIMAUNIT
DIMAZIN
DIMBLK
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
DIMBLK1
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
DIMBLK2
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
DIMCEN
0.0900
2.500
2.500
0.0000
DIMCLRD
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
DIMCLRE
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
1240
Appendix C
Description
ANSI
ISO-25
DIN
JIS
DIMCLRT
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
ByBlock
DIMDEC
DIMDLE
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMDLI
0.3800
3.7500
3.7500
7.0000
DIMDSEP
Decimal separator
DIMEXE
0.1800
1.2500
1.2500
1.0000
DIMEXO
0.0625
0.0625
0.0625
1.0000
DIMFRAC
Fraction format
DIMGAP
0.0900
0.6250
0.6250
0.0000
DIMJUST
Justification of text on
dimension line
DIMLDRBLK
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
ClosedFilled
DIMLFAC
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
DIMLIM
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMLUNIT
DIMLWD
-2
-2
-2
-2
DIMLWE
-2
-2
-2
-2
DIMPOST
DIMRND
Rounding value
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMSAH
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMSCALE
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1241
Description
ANSI
ISO-25
DIN
JIS
DIMSD1
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMSD2
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMSE1
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMSE2
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMSOXD
Off
Off
Off
On
DIMTAD
DIMTDEC
DIMTFAC
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
DIMTIH
On
Off
Off
Off
DIMTIX
Off
Off
Off
On
DIMTM
Minus tolerance
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMTMOVE
Text movement
DIMTOFL
Off
On
On
On
DIMTOH
On
Off
Off
Off
DIMTOL
Tolerance dimensioning
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMTOLJ
DIMTP
Plus tolerance
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMTSZ
Tick size
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
DIMTVP
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
1242
Appendix C
Description
ANSI
ISO-25
DIN
JIS
DIMTXSTY
Text style
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
DIMTXT
Text height
0.1800
2.5000
2.5000
2.5000
DIMTZIN
DIMUPT
Off
Off
Off
Off
DIMZIN
Zero suppression
1243
1244
Utilities
In this appendix
1245
1246
Appendix D
Utilities
1247
Drawings
Standards
Plug-ins
Notes
Progress
1248
Drawings to
Check
Add Standards
File
Remove Drawing
Move Up
Move Down
Description
Check External
References of
Listed Drawings
Appendix D
Utilities
Check All
Drawings
Using the
Following
Standards Files
Standards
Used for
Checking All
Drawings
Add Standards
File
Remove
Standards File
Move Up
Move Down
Description
1249
Plug-ins Used
When
Checking
Standards
Description
1250
Appendix D
Utilities
New
Open
Save
Save As
Start Check
Stop Check
View Report
Export Report
1251
SLIDELIB
Compiles slide files listed in an ASCII file into a slide library file
You can construct slide library files (SLB) from slide files (SLD) by using the
SLIDELIB utility program supplied in the AutoCAD support directory. The fol-
recting a list of files (one per line in another file created using a text editor or
a user-supplied utility program) to standard input.
The operating system commands shown below will create a slidelist file that
can be used with SLIDELIB. All the slide files you want to compile into a slide
library should be placed in a single directory. At a DOS prompt (version 5.0
or newer), enter the following:
dir *.sld /b > mylist
This creates the mylist file, which you can pass to SLIDELIB. You can also
create the mylist file with a text editor by listing the slide file names (and
paths, if necessary), such as lobby, d:\slides\office, and \aec\slides\stairs. The
slide file name, but not the drive and directory information, is saved in the
library file. Because only the file name is included, a library can contain slides
with the same name from different directories, but AutoCAD can access only
one of the slides.
To generate the slide library mlib from mylist, enter the following:
slidelib mlib < mylist
1252
Appendix D
Utilities
This entry creates the file mlib.slb, which contains the names and definitions
of the slides listed in mylist.
Warning! Do not delete your original slides. SLIDELIB has no provision for
updating a slide library once it is created. If you want to add or delete a slide,
update the slidelist file and re-create the library with SLIDELIB. All the original
slides must be present in order to do this.
1253
1254
Standard Libraries
In this appendix
Standard Linetypes
for geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. This section provides illustrations of the contents of these files.
Complex Linetypes
Standard Hatch Patterns
PostScript Fill Patterns
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
TrueType Fonts
Geometric Characteristic
Symbols
1255
Standard Linetypes
AutoCAD provides a library of standard linetypes in the acad.lin file.
Border
Border2
BorderX2
Center
Center2
CenterX2
Dashdot
Dashdot2
DashdotX2
Dashed
Dashed2
DashedX2
Divide
Divide2
DivideX2
Dot
Dot2
DotX2
Hidden
Hidden2
HiddenX2
Phantom
Phantom2
PhantomX2
1256
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
Complex Linetypes
AutoCAD provides some sample complex linetypes in the ltypeshp.lin file.
FENCELINE1
FENCELINE2
TRACKS
BATTING
HOW_WATER_SUPPLY
GAS_LINE
ZIGZAG
Complex Linetypes
1257
1258
ANGLE
ANS131
ANS132
ANS133
ANS134
ANS135
ANS136
ANS137
AND138
AR-B816
AR-B816C
AR-B88
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
AR-BRELM
AR-BRSTD
AR-CONC
AR-HBONE
AR-PARQ1
AR-RROOF
AR-RSHAKE
AR-SAND
AR-BOX
BRASS
BRICK
BRSTONE
1259
1260
CLAY
CORK
CROSS
DASH
DOLMIT
DOTS
EARTH
ESCHER
FLEX
GRASS
GRATE
HEX
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
HONEY
HOUND
INSUL
LINE
MUDST
NET
NET3
PLAST
PLASTI
SACNCR
SQUARE
STARS
1261
1262
STEEL
SWAMP
TRANS
TRIANG
ZIGZAG
ACAD_ISO02W100
ACAD_ISO03W100
ACAD_ISO04W100
ACAD_ISO05W100
ACAD_ISO06W100
ACAD_ISO07W100
ACAD_ISO08W100
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
ACAD_ISO09w 100
ACAD_ISO10w 100
ACAD_ISO11w 100
ACAD_ISO12w 100
ACAD_ISO13 100
ACAD_ISO14w 100
ACAD_ISO15w 100
1263
as a shade of gray.
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
1264
GRAYSCALE
RGBCOLOR
LINEARGRAY
RADIALGRAY
WAFFLE
ZIGZAG
BRICK
SPECKS
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
AILOGO
SQUARE
STARS
Description
txt
The standard AutoCAD text font. This simple font is described by a minimum
of vectors so it can be drawn very quickly.
monotxt
Monospaced txt font. The characters in this font are the same as those in the
txt font, except that the space allotted to each character is the same (monospaced). Thus, this font is preferable for construction of lists or tables where
the items must line up vertically.
romans
A simplex (single stroke, sans serif) roman font drawn by means of many
short line segments. This font produces smoother-looking characters than
those of the txt font.
romand
Similar to the romans font, but defined using double strokes. This font
produces thicker, darker characters and is highly recommended for plotting on high-resolution printers such as laser printers.
romanc
romant
italicc
italict
1265
1266
Font
Description
scripts
scriptc
greeks
greekc
gothice
Gothic English.
gothicg
Gothic German.
gothici
Gothic Italian.
syastro
Astronomical symbols.
symap
Mapping symbols.
symath
Mathematical symbols.
symeteo
Meteorological symbols.
symusic
Musical symbols.
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
Simplex fonts
romans
scripts
greeks
Duplex fonts
romand
ISO fonts
isocp
isoct
Triplex fonts
romant
italict
Complex fonts
romanc
italicc
scriptc
greekc
Gothic fonts
gothice
gothicg
gothici
1267
Symbol Fonts
syastro
symap
symath
symeteo
symusic
TrueType Fonts
The following TrueType fonts (file name extension .ttf ) are provided with
AutoCAD. To see an example of each font, open the truetype.dwg drawing.
TrueType fonts
1268
Type
Font name
Description
sans serif
swiss
swissl
swissli
swissi
swissb
swissbi
swissk
swisski
roman
light
light italic
italic
bold
bold italic
black
black italic
sans serif,
condensed
swissc
swisscl
swisscli
swissci
swisscb
swisscbi
swissck
swisscki
condensed
condensed light
condensed light italic
condensed italic
condensed bold
condensed bold italic
condensed black
condensed black italic
sans serif,
expanded
swisse
swisseb
swissek
expanded
expanded bold
expanded black
sans serif,
outlined
swissbo
swissko
swisscbo
bold outline
black outline
condensed bold outline
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
Type
Font name
Description
Monospace 821
sans serif,
monospace
monos
monosi
monosb
monosbi
roman
italic
bold
bold italic
serif
dutch
dutchi
dutchb
dutchbi
roman
italic
bold
bold italic
expanded bold
Bank Gothic
all caps
bgothl
bgothm
light
medium
Commercial Script
script
comsc
regular
Vineta
shadow
vinet
regular
Commercial Pi
symbol
compi
regular
Universal Math 1
math
umath
regular
Name
Position
Concentricity/coaxiality
Symmetry
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Angularity
1269
Name
Cylindricity
Flatness
Circularity or roundness
Straightness
Profile of a surface
Profile of a line
Circular runout
Total runout
Diameter
Maximum material condition (MMC)
Least material condition (LMC)
Regardless of feature size (RFS)
Projected tolerance
1270
Appendix E
Standard Libraries
AutoCAD Graphical
Objects
In this appendix
1271
The table lists the AutoCAD object types and their descriptions. Use LIST to
identify the object type of any piece of geometry.
AutoCAD Graphical Objects
Object type
Description
3DFace
3DSolid
Arc
A circular arc.
Related command: ARC
Attribute Definition
Attribute
Body
Circle
A full circle.
Related command: CIRCLE
Dimension
Ellipse (including
elliptical arcs)
1272
Appendix F
A full ellipse.
Related command: ELLIPSE
Description
End Sequence
Hatch
Image
Leader
Line
Lwpolyline
Mline
Multiline Text
1273
Description
Point
Polyline
Proxy
Ray
Region
Shape
Solid
A filled 2D area.
Related command: SOLID
Spline
Text
Tolerance
Trace
1274
Appendix F
Description
Wipeout
Vertex
Viewport
Xline
1275
1276
Unicode
In this appendix
(CIF)
Multibyte Interchange Format
(MIF)
Code Page Information
1277
Syastro
Symath
Symeteo
Symbol
Symusic
Symap
1278
Appendix G
Unicode
Note These control characters are also used by the AutoCAD database handler.
Any Unicode shape numbers not representable in the current code page are
converted to such control codes.
Characters in text strings that are unavailable in the current font, including
any Unicode control characters, are displayed as question marks. However,
Unicode control characters are not interpreted if the current font does not
support Unicode. In that case, the control characters are displayed literally.
You can use Unicode fonts (as the normal font) in conjunction with Big
Fonts.
The special dimensioning symbols degree sign (), plus-or-minus sign(), and
diameter symbol () in a font are assigned to the hexadecimal Unicode
values in the following table.
Special symbol values
Symbol
Value
Degree sign
0x00B0
0x00B1
Diameter symbol
0x2205
Note You can also use the (degree sign) %%d (), (plus or minus sign) %%p
(), and (diameter symbol) %%c () with Unicode fonts, as with regular
AutoCAD fonts. These symbols can also be accessed from the shortcut menu
in the Multiline Text Editor.
You can mix \U+ (CIF) sequences with normal text, for example
"A \U+0074ext string"
Because t exists in every system code page, the sequence is converted to a real
character when the object is regenerated.
Warning! If you are using CIF sequences as symbol table names, they must be
entered correctly. Otherwise, you can corrupt your drawing.
1279
Multibyte shape number. The n is a digit identifying the originating multibyte code page ID. The xxxx is the hexadecimal value of the multibyte
character.
The code page identifications that AutoCAD supports are listed in the
following table.
Supported code page identification
Code page ID
Language
undefined
Undefined
932
Japanese (Shift-JIS)
950
949
1361
936
Warning! If you are using MIF sequences as symbol table names, they must
be entered correctly. Otherwise, you can corrupt your drawing.
1280
Appendix G
Unicode
Meaning
874
Thai
932
Japanese
936
949
Korean
950
1200
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
Hebrew
1256
Arabic
1257
Baltic
1281
1282
Command Modifiers
In this appendix
Modifier)
(Command Modifier)
FROM (Command Modifier)
TRACKING (Command
Modifier)
Object Snaps (Command
Modifier)
Selection Modes (Command
Modifier)
1283
1284
Appendix H
Command Modifiers
Note You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as
MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or
with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command.
1285
1286
Appendix H
Command Modifiers
Index
3D objects (continued)
removing hidden lines in. See removing
hidden lines in 3D objects
rendering options, 23
3DCONFIG command
about, 20
acceleration, 25
adaptive degradation, 21
dynamic tessellation, 22
geometry, 24
render options, 23
(degree sign), creating, 589, 1027
(diameter symbol), entering, 589, 1027, 1031
$ (dollar sign)
external reference names, 1144, 1145
in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132
3DORBITCTR command, 35
.dxx extension for DXF template extraction files,
92, 94
[...] (ellipsis) button, 458
= (equal sign)
specifying same name for a block and output
file, 1115
(Euro symbol), 580
! (exclamation mark), for drawings not located in
batch standards audits, 1248
/ (forward slash), stacked text indicator, 578, 584
% (percent sign)
entering, 1027
. (period), to access a built-in AutoCAD
command, 1070
+ (plus sign)
UCS icon symbol, 1060
# (pound sign), stacked text indicator, 578, 584
1287
? (question mark)
as wild card for searching, 50
finding files, 626
[ ] (square brackets)
generated measurement indicators, 273
~ (tilde)
to display a standard file selection dialog
box, 544, 691, 826, 1002, 612,
632
(tolerance symbol), entering, 589, 1027, 589
_ (underscore character), in field names, 354
| (vertical bar)
in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132, 1145
2D UCS icon, 1061, 1063
broken pencil icon replacement, 1061
2D viewport configuration setup, 1106, 1107
2P circle specification, 168
3 Point method for defining a UCS, 1053
3D arrays, 16
3D boxes, 7
3D command, 7
3D face properties, 774
3D faces
changing edge visibility of, 355
creating, 27
3D mirror images, 554
3D Orbit shortcut menu, 33
3D Orbit view
properties displayed in, 773
3D Orbit view, center of rotation, 35
3D Orbit view properties, 773
3D polygon mesh objects
creating, 357
editing, 707
3D polylines
adding vertices to, 705
aligning the axis of rotation with, 954
closed, 704
converting to splines, 981
creating, 36
decurving, 707
editing vertices of, 705
exploding, 369
opening, 704
properties of, 788
trimming, 1047
3D projection coordinates for mapping, 927
3D rectangular arrays, 16
3D solid edges
changing color of, 960
copying, 959
removing from a selection set, 960
undoing changes to, 960, 963
3D solid faces, 957
changing color of, 958
creating, 27
extruding, 948
1288
Index
3DCONFIG command
using Lights option to display lights in
drawing, 489
A
ABOUT command, 43
abs function (CAL command), 143
AC$ (temporary) files, 645
acad.dwt file, 1220
acad.lin (linetype library) file, 1256
acad.lsp file, 653, 1162
acad.mln (multiline library) file, 568, 569
acad.mnu (template menu) file, 540
acad.pat (hatch pattern library) file, 110, 117,
403, 1258
acad.pgp (program parameters) file, 842, 1070,
1155
acad.psf (PostScript fill pattern library) file, 1258,
1264
acad_asi.hlp file, 225
acadiso.pat (pattern) file, 110, 117, 403
ACADLSPASDOC system variable, 653, 1162
ACADPREFIX system variable, 1162
ACADVER system variable, 1162
acceleration
in 3D view, 25
accelerator key options, 655
accumulation options, 227
AcEd-registered commands, 75
ACI. See AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
ACIS files (SAT format)
exporting to, 44
importing, 43
ACISIN command, 43
ACISOUT command, 44
ACISOUTVER system variable, 1162
Active Assistance
display settings, 78
opening, 76
Active Assistance icon shortcut menu (Windows
system tray), 76
Active Assistance Settings dialog box
about, 78
displaying, 77
Active Assistance window
displaying, 76, 77, 78
navigating, 77
shortcut menu, 77
specifying when to display, 78
adaptive adjustment linetype setting, 1009
adaptive degradation
bounding box, 21
display options, 21
flat shaded, 21
FPS speed, 21
wireframe, 21
adaptive sampling
render options, 889
ADCCLOSE command, 44
ADCENTER command
DesignCenter, 45
Search dialog box, 49
ADCNAVIGATE command, 52
ADCSTATE system variable, 1162
Add mode (AREA command), 65
Add object selection method, 919
Add Plot Style Table wizard, 677
Add Profile dialog box, 669
Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box
about, 628
displaying, 624
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, 1004
Add-a-Plotter wizard, 747
adding
drawing sheets from other drawings, 802
standards files to current drawings, 989
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog
box, 100
Adjust Clipping Planes window, 19
shortcut menu, 19
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box, 924
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box,
865
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog box, 928
Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog box, 922
Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box, 926
Adjust UVW Coordinates dialog box, 927
ADT (audit) files, 96
Advanced Options dialog box, 739, 916
Advanced Settings for COM dialog box, 762
Advanced Setup wizard, starting drawings, 610
Advanced tab
Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box, 112
Hatch Edit dialog box, 409
Search dialog box (DesignCenter), 51
Aerial View window
about, 328
Auto Viewport and Dynamic Update options
(Options menu), 330
zoom and view options, 329
Affine transformation type, 1016
AFLAGS system variable, 81, 83, 1162
alerts
beep on error, 653
standards violations, 990
aliases
for commands, table listing of, 1155
ALIGN command, 53
aligned dimensions
linear, 255, 282
aligning
attribute tags, 82
axis of rotation, 878, 954
Index
1289
aligning (continued)
cutting planes, 939, 940
dimension text, 296, 312
landscape objects, 519, 521
mirroring planes, 555
objects in 2D or 3D, 44
sectioning planes, 912
text, 455, 1022
fractions in text, 583
multiline text, 586
viewport base points, 596
alignment vector display options, 659
All object selection method, 918
Alternate Font dialog box, 636, 664
alternate font file, specifying location of, 636
alternate units (for dimensions)
settings, 302, 307
Alternate Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog
box), 302
system variables updated by, 1238
altitude
displayed in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
for distant light, 495
ambient color (of materials)
adjusting, 862
ambient light
adjusting, 491
turning on, 489, 931
AME (Advanced Modeling Extension)
converting to AutoCAD solids, 55
AMECONVERT command, 55
ang function (CAL command), 149
ANGBASE system variable, 1162
ANGDIR system variable, 1162
angle brackets
open and close (< >), 269
generated measurement indicators,
272
plotter setting changes, 752
prefixes and suffixes in annotations,
484
angle direction
settings (in Advanced Setup wizard), 611
angle measure settings, Advanced Setup wizard,
611
angled alignment for viewports, 597
angles
for arc segments, 714
for arcs, 62, 63
changing with LENGTHEN, 486
base angle direction controls, 1077
for camera positioning, 333, 335
for construction lines, 1136
current, precision for, 1076
for dimension text
DIMALIGNED command and, 258
DIMANGULAR command and, 260
1290
Index
angles (continued)
DIMDIAMETER command and, 267
DIMEDIT command and, 270
DIMLINEAR command and, 273
DIMORDINATE command and, 278
DIMRADIUS command and, 281
DIMTEDIT command and, 313
for elliptical arcs, 360
for extrusion, 375
format and precision settings, 1075
formatting for CAL command, 137
for gradient fills, 116
for hatch patterns, 111, 403, 406
for leader segments, 818
for multiline end caps, 572
obtaining, 149
between points, measuring, 314
for polar arrays, 74
positive, calculating, 1076, 1079
of revolution, 856
setting format and direction with the
Advanced Setup wizard, 611
setting viewing angles, 250
of taper, for extrusion, 950
angtos AutoLISP function, 302, 307
angular dimensions
arc selection, 258
associativity, 282
circle selection, 259
creating
with DIMBASELINE, 261
with DIMCONTINUE, 264
format and precision settings, 302
line selection, 259
three-point specification, 259
zero suppression, 302
annotation layers, creating, 464
Annotation tab (Leader Settings dialog box), 817
annotations
for leader lines, in XML standards reports,
483, 814
anonymous logons, 628
ANSI (American National Standards Institute),
116
ANSI code pages supported by Windows, 1281
anti-aliasing
lines
in 3D view, 26
render options
and anti-aliasing lines, 26
for Photo Raytrace rendering type, 888
for Photo Real rendering type, 886
APBOX system variable, 659, 660, 1163
aperture box (AutoSnap), 659
APERTURE command, 56
aperture display size option, 660
APERTURE system variable, 660, 1163
apex point
cones, 176
elliptical cones, 177
pyramids, 12
tetrahedrons, 13
apostrophe ('), transparent command character,
3
Apparent Intersection object snap, 672
applications
adding to the history list, 59
adding to the Startup Suite, 61
loading/unloading, 57
APPLOAD command
about, 57
applications/file types supported by, 57
Load/Unload Applications dialog box, 58
Startup Suite dialog box, 60
ARC command, 61
arc-fit polylines, 701
Arc object type, 1272
arc properties, 775
arc segments, adding to 2D polylines, 714
arcball (3D Orbit view), 30
architectural units, 1076, 1078
specifying, 609
arcs
adding segments to 2D polylines, 714
aligning the axis of rotation with, 879, 954
center marks/centerlines, 263, 266
cloud shapes, 854
creating, 61
creating regions from, 841
for defining angular dimensions, 258
diameter dimensions for, 266
display resolution option, 640
dividing, 314
exploding, 369
extending, 371
filleting, 377
joining to polylines, 697
properties of, 775
radial dimensions for, 279
tangents for arcs, 63
trimming, 1047
VIEWRES and, 1098
See also elliptical arcs
AREA command, 64
AREA system variable, 64, 1163
areas
calculating
selecting objects, 64, 66
selecting points, 64, 65
using Add mode, 65
using Subtract mode, 66
defining
with the Advanced Setup wizard, 611
with the Quick Setup wizard, 609
Index
1291
asterisk (*)
finding files, 626
as wild card for searching, 50
to write an entire drawing to an output file,
1115
at sign (@)
reference to the last point, 423
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index dialog box, 873
Attach by Layer dialog box, 874
Attach Digital Signatures dialog box, 1246
Attach Digital Signatures utility
about, 1246
Attach Digital Signatures dialog box, 1246
Search Folders dialog box, 1247
attaching
digital signatures, 1246
hyperlinks, to objects, 416
images, to drawings, 425, 428, 433
leader lines, 818
materials, 535, 861, 873, 874, 934
overlays vs. attaching method, 1140
xrefs, 1142, 1147
with External Reference dialog box,
1127
with XATTACH, 1127
attachment methods for materials, 934
Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box), 818
ATTACHURL command, 79
ATTDEF command
about, 80
Attribute Definition dialog box, 80
command line prompts, 82
ATTDIA system variable, 1163
ATTDISP command, 81, 84
ATTEDIT command
about, 85
command line prompts, 86
Edit Attributes dialog box, 86
editing attribute values
independent of a block, 85, 86
for a specific block, 85
attenuation of light
point light, 492
spotlight, 496
ATTEXT command
about, 91
Attribute Extraction dialog box, 91
command line prompts, 93
ATTMODE system variable, 84, 1163
ATTREDEF command, 94
ATTREQ system variable, 1163
Attribute Definition dialog box, 80
Attribute Definition object type, 1272
attribute definition properties, 776
Attribute Extraction dialog box, 91
Attribute Extraction wizard, 351
Attribute object type, 1272
1292
Index
attribute prompts
for constant attributes, 83
displaying, 349
editing, 248
Attribute tab
Edit Attribute dialog box, 104
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 350
attribute tags
aligning, 82
changing, 160
displaying, 80, 349
duplicate tags, 105
editing, 248
specifying, 81, 83, 104
attribute values
for constant attributes, 83
display modes, 81, 104
editing, 85, 104, 349
preset defaults, 104
specifying the default, 248
verification, 104
attributes (of blocks), 102, 349, 351
assigned to redefined blocks, 94
Attribute Extraction wizard, 351
Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
changing text and text properties of, 104,
160, 455
constant attributes, 104
defaults, 104
defining, 80, 104
displaying/hiding, 84, 104
editing, 85, 102, 247, 349
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 349
extracting information from, 91, 351
formatting text display, 350
properties of, 776
spell checking, 975
updating, 95
verification, 104
attributes (of files), displaying information
about, 343
attributes (of materials)
adjusting
for granite material, 868
for marble material, 869
for materials, 862
for wood material, 871
ATTSYNC command, 95
AUDIT command, 95
AUDITCTL system variable, 96, 1163
auditing drawings
for standards violations, 991, 1247
AUNITS system variable, 1163
AUPREC system variable, 322, 1164
author of drawings, displaying/specifying, 344
Auto Axis
for material bitmap mapping, 867
AutoTrack
settings, 659
tracking vector colors, 666
auxiliary views, creating, 971
axis of cylindrical coordinate system, 924
axis (UCS icon symbols), 1062
axis endpoint
for ellipses, 359
for elliptical arcs, 360
for elliptical cylinders, 198
axis of revolution/rotation
aligning with a viewport, 955
aligning with an object, 954
aligning with X, Y, or Z axis, 955
defining with points, 953
rotating a point about, 146
specifying
with REVOLVE, 856
with REVSURF, 858
with ROTATE3D, 878
axis tripod (in 3D model space)
defining a viewing direction with, 1103
azimuth
displayed in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
for distant light, 495
B
back faces (of 3D objects)
3D graphics view, 24
back faces (of 3D solids)
rendering, 885, 887, 890
Back option in undoing, 1071
background colors
background fills, for multilines, 572
background transparency for WMFOUT,
Clipboard, and drag and drop
objects, 1230
BACKGROUND command, 97
Background dialog box, 97
backgrounds (for scenes)
adjustment controls, 100
applying fog to, 390
aspect ratio, 100
environment definition, 99
previewing, 98
specifying, 97
types of, 97
backslash (\)
in attribute definitions, 90
to select null attribute values, 89
backup copy option, 644
backup files
saving, automatically, 644
backwards character display, 577, 1000, 1002
BACKZ system variable, 1164
base angle direction controls, 1077
Index
1293
1294
Index
binary files
DXF, 901
importing, 347
storing solids in, 995
Bind Xrefs dialog box, 1143
binding
dependent named objects to drawings,
1131, 1144
xref-dependent symbols to a drawing, 1130
xrefs to drawings, 1143, 1145
binding options (press) in PC3 files, 730
BINDTYPE system variable, 1164
bisecting
construction lines, 1136
bitmap blend, 863, 864
granite material and, 869
marble material and, 871
wood material and, 872
bitmaps (BMP images)
format, saving objects in, 127
material, 865
placement values of materials, adjusting,
928
See also BMP (bitmap) files
blank drawings
starting, 605, 819
blank spaces before fractions, 584
BLIPMODE command, 121
BLIPMODE system variable, 1164
BLK files, 352
Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
BLOCK command
about, 122
Block Definition dialog box, 122
command line prompts, 124
Block Definition dialog box, 122
block definitions
associating hyperlinks with, 124
converting xref definitions to, 1143, 1145
descriptions, 124
editing attributes, 103
listing, 102
Block Reference (Insert) object type, 1273
block reference properties, 777
BLOCKICON command, 126
blocks
Attribute Extraction wizard, 351
binding referenced objects, 1130
Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
changing position of, 160
colors
text, 579
defining, 122
defining clipping boundaries and clipping
planes, 1132
as DesignCenter content, 45, 49
editing
blocks (continued)
attribute definitions, 834, 836
attribute properties, 102, 349
attribute values, 85, 95, 349
in-place, adding/removing objects,
837
selecting for, 102, 349, 832
exploding, 369, 1138
generating for hidden/visible profile lines,
964
grips in, 662
inserting
into the current drawing, 440
with leader lines, 484, 815
multiple instances of, 544
prompts, 104
unit of measure for, 1077
listing by name, 102, 443
naming, 122, 124, 834
nested, 352
object selection, 123, 125
pasting into drawings, 693
placing
at equal intervals, 315
at measured intervals, 537
preview icons for, 123, 126
previously defined, 125
properties
of multiple block insertions, 786
of objects in, 777
purging from the drawing database, 811
redefining, 94, 443
renaming, 844
saving or discarding changes to, 830, 836
saving to a file, 1113
specifying the insertion point, 123, 124
synchronizing instances, 102
in translated layers, 481
updating
attributes, 95
definitions of, 443
vs. xrefs, 1140
blue components of colors, 172
BMAKE command. See BLOCK command
BMP (bitmap) files
displaying images, 852
options for rendering output, 891
saving
objects to, 127
rendered images to, 903
BMPOUT command, 127
Body object type, 1272
body objects
exploding, 370
properties of, 778
body properties, 778
bold typeface, formatting multiline text in, 578
Index
1295
C
cache
3D, 22
file, writing rendering information to, 846
regeneration and, 652
CAD Standards Settings dialog box, 990
CAL command
about, 135
angles
formatting, 137
obtaining, 149
AutoCAD system variables used with, 139
AutoLISP variables used with, 139
converting points between UCS and WCS,
145
converting units of measurement, 140
feet and inches, formatting, 136
filtering components of points or vectors,
145
intersection point, obtaining, 147
last-specified point, obtaining, 143
normal vectors, calculating, 150
numeric expression operators, 135
numeric functions supported by, 140
point by cursor, obtaining, 143
point calculations, 141
points used with, 137
rotating a point about an axis, 146
rules of precedence for evaluating
expressions, 135
snap modes used with, 144
vector expression operators, 136
1296
Index
Index
1297
clipping
creating, 436
defining, 1099, 1132
options for, DVIEW command, 340
turning on or off, 340, 436
viewport objects, 1099
clipping boundaries (for viewports), 1099
defining with VPCLIP, 1099
deleting, 1100
clipping planes
defining
with 3DCLIP, 18
with XCLIP, 1132
setting (adjusting), 18
turning on/off, 20
clockwise direction of angles, 611
CLOSE command, 168
CLOSEALL command, 169
closed-cross intersection between multilines,
557
closed polygon meshes, 29
closed polylines
creating regions from, 841
revolving, 856
closed splines
extruding, 374
revolving, 856
closed-tee intersection between multilines, 558
closing
2D polylines, 697, 715, 717
3D polyline mesh objects, 709
3D polylines, 704
Adjust Clipping Planes window, 20
dbConnect Manager, 201
DesignCenter, 44
drawings, 168
all, 169
log file, 514
Properties palette, 798
splines, 980, 983, 985
clouds. See revision clouds (markups)
CMDACTIVE system variable, 1166
CMDECHO system variable, 1166
CMDNAMES system variable, 1166
CMLJUST system variable, 1167
CMLSCALE system variable, 1167
CMLSTYLE system variable, 1167
Code Page Independent format (CIF), Unicode
fonts and, 1278
code pages
ANSI, Windows support for, 1281
AutoCAD support for, 1280
color book colors, 289, 290, 293
applying to layers, 462, 471
applying to objects, 165, 1139
search path for files, 637
selecting, 173, 174
1298
Index
colors (continued)
custom colors (true colors), 289, 290, 293,
1007, 1165
applying to layers, 462, 470
applying to objects, 165
exploded objects, 1139
raster images, 642
selecting, 171, 174
specifying properties for objects, 161
window elements, 666
depth of
for plotting, 756
for rendered images, 850
for dimension lines, 289
for dimension text, 293
display options for the AutoCAD window,
639
for edges, 960
for exploded objects, 1138
for extension lines, 290
for fog, 390
for gradient fills, 115
for granite material, 869
for grips, 662, 1191
HLS color system
See hue, lightness, saturation (HLS)
color system
for intersection polylines, 415, 1196
for layers, 470, 480, 481
light colors, 494
mapping tables, 1006
for marble material, 870
for materials
adjusting, 862, 863
for multiline style elements, 570
for multiline text, 579
for new objects, 169, 1165
for obscured lines, 414
plotting pens, 754
for point light, 493
as property of objects, 770
for rendering output files, 892
RGB colors. See red, green, blue (RGB) color
system
for selected layers, 460, 462, 470
for selected objects, 161, 164
for solid or gradient background, 98
specifying
by ACI number, 171
mixing methods, 174
for plot styles, 1007
for spotlight, 497
true color values, 289, 290, 293, 1165
applying to layers, 462, 470
applying to objects, 165
exploded objects, 1139
raster images, 642
colors (continued)
selecting, 171, 174
specifying properties for objects, 161
window elements, 666
UCS icon, 1063
for window elements, 665, 666
for wood material, 871
Column shortcut menu (Data View window in
dbConnect), 210
Column Values dialog box, 222
columns (of arrays), specifying, 68
COM ports. See serial ports
combining
paragraphs, 580
Comma Separated Values files, 806
comma-delimited format (CDF) files
for storing extracted attribute data, 92, 93
command aliases
table listing of, 1155
command line
displaying
in a separate window, 1028
entering
data on, 5
history text, copying to the Clipboard, 184
responding to prompts on, 4
using wild-card characters on, 5
Command Line Window Font dialog box
about, 667
displaying, 640
command modifiers, 1283
Command shortcut menu
enabling/disabling, 669
command window
display options, 639, 666
commands
accessing
recently used commands, 5
Active Assistance, 78
adding toolbar buttons for, 186
assigning shortcut keys to, 190
command modifiers, 1283
executing, 2
repeating, 5, 590
reversing
with U, 1051
with UNDO, 1071
reversing with MREDO, 574
reversing, with UNDO, 1071
Commands tab (Customize dialog box), 185
comma-separated format (CSV) files, for storing
extracted attribute data, 355
comments
on digital signatures, 916, 937
to use for locating drawings, 345
in XML standards reports, 1250
Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, 308
Index
1299
1300
Index
copying (continued)
objects, 182
to the Clipboard, 183, 195
as mirror images, 553, 554
with a specified base point, 183
rendered images, 849
size of text objects, 907
COPYLINK command, 185
corner joint between multilines, 560
corner points
for boxes, 130
for calculating area and perimeter, 64, 65
for inserting multiple instances of blocks,
545, 550
for meshes, 12
for partially open drawings, 688
for pyramids, 12
for rectangular polylines, 826
for tetrahedrons, 13
for viewports, 591
for wedges, 16, 1116
for zooming a window, 1152
counterclockwise direction of angles, 611
CPLOTSTYLE system variable, 994, 1167
CPolygons (crossing polygon selections), 918
CPROFILE system variable, 634, 1168
CRC validation option, 644
Create New Dimension Style dialog box, 288
Create New Drawing dialog box, 605, 1220
Create Raster File dialog box, 127, 455, 763,
1029
Create Transmittal dialog box, 363
crop window for rendering, 883
cropping
material bitmaps, 866, 867, 930
crosshairs
color of, 666
sizing, 640
crosshatching. See hatching
crossing-face objects, 519
crossing object selection method, 918
CSV files, 355, 806
CTAB system variable, 1168
CTB (plot style table) files
Add Plot Style Table wizard, 1004
color mapping tables, 1006
converting to STBs, 179, 180
default plot style tables, 650
names, 1007
options for new drawings, 649
search path settings for, 637
CTRL+C keys, copying objects to the Clipboard,
184
CTRL+V keys, pasting objects from the
Clipboard, 693
CTS handshaking, 762
cubes, 8, 130
Index
1301
D
damaged files
repairing, 825
Data Objects shortcut menu (dbConnect
Manager), 206
Data Set Ready handshaking, 762
data sources
selecting a table from, 243
Data Sources Node shortcut menu (dbConnect
Manager), 206
Data Terminal Ready output, 763
Data View and Query Options dialog box, 225
linked object display options, 226
Data View buttons, 208
Data View Print Preview window, 214
Data View window (in dbConnect)
about, 207
accumulation options, 227
Cell shortcut menu, 211
Column shortcut menu, 210
displaying, 207
Grid Header shortcut menu, 213
grid window, 210
linked record display options, 226
navigating, 213
Print Preview window, 214
query options, 227
record display formats, 230
Record shortcut menu, 212
searching/replacing text or values, 229, 241
sort order
options, 243
toolbar button descriptions, 208
1302
Index
Index
1303
deleting (continued)
text styles, 999
tiled viewport configurations, 1108
title block objects, 602, 603
tool palettes, 192
toolbar buttons, 185
toolbars, 187
UCSs, 1058
user-defined page setups, 682
VBA macros, 1087
vertices from multilines, 561
viewports, 598
words from a custom dictionary, 978
See also erasing; removing
DELOBJ system variable, 981, 1171
Delta option (LENGTHEN command), 486
demand loading (of xrefs)
options, 645, 1232, 1233
demand loading options, for ObjectARX
applications, 646
DEMANDLOAD system variable, 646, 1171
density of revolved surfaces, 859
depth cueing, 389
depth map shadow render options, 887, 890
depth of orthographic UCSs, 1067
descriptions
in DesignCenter, 47
descriptions in Properties palette, 770
DesignCenter
about, 45
closing window, 44
content area options, 46
DesignCenter Online web page, 49
displaying/hiding descriptions of items, 47
displaying/hiding tree view, 47
home folder, 47
loading file name, folder location
or network path, 52
navigating to specific locations, 52
Search dialog box, 49
source/target content unit options, 655
system variables, 1162
See also DesignCenter window
DesignCenter folder, 47
DesignCenter Online web page, 49
DesignCenter Online web page, accessing from
DesignCenter, 49
desktop contents, accessing, 623
Desktop icon (Places list in standard file selection
dialog boxes), 623
desmoothing 3D polyline mesh objects, 709
destination options for rendering, 847, 891
destination points for aligning objects, 44
detaching
materials, 861, 873, 874
raster images, 425
xrefs, 1142, 1145
1304
Index
Index
1305
1306
Index
displaying (continued)
nonstandard objects, 991
paper size and units, 678, 724
plan view of a UCS, 712
Plot Style Manager, 1003
plot styles in drawings, 677
rendering statistics, 991
shortcut menus, 421, 655, 656
slide files, 1112
tangential edges of profiles, 966
text onscreen, 1021
TGA images, 852
TIFF images, 852
toolbars, 1035, 1036
tooltips, 421, 656
translated layers in drawing area, 481
tree view (DesignCenter), 47
UCS icon, 1061
view details, 1094
Visual Basic Editor, 1081
DISPSILH system variable, 413, 642, 1184
DIST command, 314
dist function (CAL command), 147, 152
DISTANCE system variable, 1184
distances
adjusting for 3D objects, 27
calculating, 147
between camera and target, specifying, 336
chamfer distances, 156
between objects, fog and depth cueing, 389
between points, measuring, 314
in text line spacing, 588
distant light, 494
distant lights, 490, 494
turning on, 489, 931
dithering
in plotted graphics, 756, 1008
DIVIDE command, 314
dividing
objects, 314
viewports, 1111
docking
Data View window (in dbConnect), 207
toolbars, 1036
documents
See drawings; files
doglegs (hook lines), 266, 279, 482
dollar signs ($)
$#$ prefixes on names, 834
symbol
in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132,
1144, 1145
domes, 11
DONUT command, 316
DONUTID system variable, 1184
DONUTOD system variable, 1184
Index
1307
donuts
drawing, 316, 1042
extruding, 374
revolving, 856
dots per inch (dpi), 681, 735
double-clicking objects, 246
double hatching (crosshatching), 409
double-sided printing, 753
dpi (dots per inch), 681, 735
draft plot resolution, 681, 727, 735
Drafting Settings dialog box, 318
Object Snap tab, 323, 672
Polar Tracking tab, 321
Snap and Grid tab, 319
Drafting tab (Options dialog box), 658
drag mode, suppressing, 316
dragged objects, display controls for, 316
dragging
controlling background transparency of
AutoCAD objects, 1230
DRAGMODE command, 316
DRAGMODE system variable, 641, 1185
DRAGP1 system variable, 1185
DRAGP2 system variable, 1185
drawing
3D arrays, 16
3D boxes, 7
3D faces, 27
3D free-form polygon meshes, 29
3D polygon mesh objects, 7
3D polylines, 36
arcs, 61
circles, 166, 316
clipping boundaries, 1099
cones, 9
construction lines, 1135
cubes, 8, 130
cylinders, 196
dishes, 11
domes, 11
donuts, 316
ellipses, 359
elliptical arcs, 360
filled circles, 316
freehand sketches, 937
line segments, 504
polygons, 765
pyramids, 12
rays, 825
rectangular arrays, 72
rectangular polylines, 826
rings, 316
splines, 979
tetrahedrons, 13
torus/tori, 14, 1042
traces, 1043
wedges, 16
1308
Index
drawings (continued)
saving
AutoCAD options with, 634
default path for, 1215
to DXF format, 643
as earlier file formats, 898
as HTML pages, 808
performance issues, 897
with QSAVE, 820
with SAVE, 897
with SAVEAS, 897
versions of, 901
security, 914
setting custom properties for, 346
spatial indexes, 1046
standards files and, 988
title display, 645
transmittal sets, 363
viewing without AutoCAD, 807
Drawings tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1248
DRAWORDER command, 317
drivers
displaying names of, 729
memory information and, 755
plotter driver information, 750
plotting with different, 729
search path for, 635
drives, accessing, 623
DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) files
command line options, 807
loading lists of drawing sheets from, 803
saving, 803
DSETTINGS command
about, 318
Drafting Settings dialog box, 318
DSR handshaking, 762
DSVIEWER command, 328
DSVIEWER command, Aerial View window, 328
DTEXT command. See TEXT command
DTR output, 763
duplex printing, 753
duplicate attribute tags, 105
duplicate names in extracted block attribute
files, 353
duplicating
materials, 861
sheet names, 802
DVB files, loading, 57
DVIEW command, 331
DVIEWBLOCK, displaying a preview image
with, 332
DWF (Design Web Format) files
command line options, 807
naming, 803
page setup, 802, 804, 805
passwords, 803
publishing, 803
Index
1309
E
earlier versions of AutoCAD
file formats, 897
saving files as, 898, 901
EATTEDIT command, 349
EATTEXT command, 351
EDGE command, 355
edge extension modes, 373
EDGEMODE system variable, 1186
1310
Index
edges
displaying/hiding, 355, 1119
effects of PFACE on, 711
filleting, 377
of polygons, 766
trimming objects at, 1049
See also 3D solid edges
EDGESURF command, 357
Edit Attribute Definition dialog box, 248
double-clicking attribute objects and, 246
Edit Attribute dialog box, 103
Edit Attributes dialog box, 86
Edit Hyperlink dialog box, 419
Edit Layer dialog box, 481
Edit Lineweights dialog box, 1011
Edit shortcut menu
enabling/disabling, 669
Edit Text dialog box, 246, 248
editing
2D polylines, 697
3D polygon mesh objects, 707
3D solid edges, 959
3D solid faces, 948
attribute definitions, 247
attributes
independent of a block, 85, 86
properties, 102
for a specific block, 85, 349
current drawing while referenced by
another, 646
dimensions, 269, 813
a series of, 813
external database tables. See Data View
window (in dbConnect)
external references, 645, 832, 837
filters, 385
generated dimensions, 269, 273
gradient fills, 106, 408
hatched geometry, 106
HTML pages, 808
hyperlinks, 419
landscape objects, 515
layer
properties, 481
states, 467, 474, 475
linked object key fields, 237
multilines, 556
objects
on locked layers, 836
locking objects not in working sets,
835
plot style tables, 1006
plot styles, 677
references
in-place, 830, 832, 1232
shaded objects, 931
solids, 961
editing (continued)
splines, 981
text created with TEXT or DTEXT, 247
toolbar button images, 188, 193
VBA macros, 1087
editing time, displaying for a drawing, 1030
elapsed timer, turning on/off or resetting, 1030
Element Properties dialog box, 569
elements of multilines, controlling, 566
ELEV command, 358
elevation (default Z value)
displaying, 994
of new objects, setting, 358
of rectangular polylines, 827
ELEVATION system variable, 994, 1186
elevation, of 2D objects, changing, 161
ELLIPSE command, 359
isometric circles, 167
Ellipse object type, 1272
ellipse properties, 779
ellipses
aligning
axis of rotation with, 954
cutting plane with, 939
converting into viewports, 1110
creating, 359
regions from, 841
display resolution option for, 640
dividing, 314
extruding, 374
isometric circles, 167
properties of, 779
revolving, 856
using VIEWRES for, 1098
elliptical arcs
aligning the cutting plane with, 939
creating, 360
regions from, 841
dividing, 314
extending, 371
filleting, 377
trimming, 1047
elliptical cones, 177
elliptical cylinders, 197
E-mail Address tab (Insert Hyperlink dialog
box), 418
email addresses
linking to, 418
embedded objects
inserting into drawings, 448
pasting from the Clipboard, 693
plotting, 729
embedding
VBA projects, 1084, 1088
emulation mode plotting, 758
enabling
grips, 662
macros, 1082
Encapsulated PostScript files. See PostScript (EPS)
files
encryption
providers, 915, 916
security options, 915
end caps (for multilines), 571
styles, 1010
End option in undoing, 1071
End Sequence object type, 1273
end tangent for spline curves, 980, 984
Endpoint object snap, 323, 672
endpoints
arc segments, 714
edges, 766
lines
changing, 159
for ordinate dimension leader lines,
276
specifying, 504
styles, 1010
engineering units, 609, 1076, 1078
English units. See imperial units
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 349
enlarging selected objects, 905, 906
environment definition for backgrounds, 99
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files
See also PostScript files
equal sign (=)
to specify the same name for a block and
output file, 1115
ERASE command, 362
See also OOPS command
Erase tool, 194
erased objects, restoring, 620
erasing
objects from drawings, 362
restoring erased objects, 620
selected filters, 385
temporary sketched lines, 938
See also deleting; removing
ERRNO system variable, 1186
error
detection/correction, using AUDIT, 96
errors
CRC error-checking, 644
ETRANSMIT command, 363
Create Transmittal dialog box, 363
Password dialog box, 368
Euro symbol, 580, 1028
evaluating expressions. See CAL command
exact line spacing, 588
exclamation mark (!), 1248
Index
1311
executing
commands, 2
queries, 203
VBA statements, 1090
Existing File or Web Page tab (Insert Hyperlink
dialog box), 417
exiting
AutoCAD, 824
Dimensioning mode, 253
EXPERT system variable, 1187
expiration of digital IDs, 916
EXPLMODE system variable, 1187
EXPLODE command, 368
See also XPLODE command
exploding
blocks, 369, 442, 443, 1138
compound objects
using EXPLODE, 368
compound objects, using XPLODE, 1138
groups, 398, 400
EXPORT command, 370
Export Data dialog box, 370
export file formats
JPEG format, 455
TIFF format, 1029
Export Links dialog box, 227
Export page (Attribute Extraction wizard), 354
Export Query Set dialog box, 228
Export Template Set dialog box, 228
exporting
block attribute information to files, 351
drawings
as 3D Studio files, 39
as ACIS files, 44
drawings, in PNG files, 763
layer
states, 467, 474
link template sets, 228
links (database), 227
materials, 533
profiles, 664
query sets, 228
tool palettes, 192
expressions (in geometry calculator), evaluating.
See CAL command
EXTEND command, 371
Extended Apparent Intersection object snap
mode, 326
Extended Intersection object snap mode, 324
extending objects
implied edge extension modes, 373
projection options for, 372
rather than trimming, 1047
selecting boundary edges, 371
trimming objects rather than, 372
undoing changes, 374
1312
Index
extension lines
for aligned linear dimensions, 255
for angular dimensions, 259
for baseline dimensions, 262
for continued (chain) dimensions, 264
extending above dimension lines, 290
origins of
for linear dimensions, 272, 275
properties of, 289
text placement options and, 297
Extension object snap, 672
Extension object snap mode, 325
Extents option (ZOOM command), 1150
extents. See drawing extents
external applications
using SYSWINDOWS with, 1013
external databases
configuring
for AutoCAD access, 225
constructing/executing queries of, 203, 215
creating link selection sets, 222
label templates for, 203, 231
linked object display options, Data View and
Query Options dialog box, 226
linking to, 203, 208
record display formats, 230
searching for text/values in, 229
selecting for the current operation, 243
updating links to, 244
using the dbConnect Manager, 202
viewing and editing, 207
External Reference dialog box, 1127
external reference properties, 780
external references (xrefs)
adding/removing objects during in-place
editing of, 837
attaching, 1127, 1142
with External Reference dialog box,
1127
with XATTACH, 1127
in batch standards audits, 1248
binding
definitions to drawings, 1131, 1143,
1145
dependent symbols to drawings, 1130
vs. blocks, 1140
defining clipping boundaries and clipping
planes, 1132
as DesignCenter content, 45
detaching, 1142, 1145
digital signatures and, 936, 937
displaying
information about, 1141
path for, 1142, 1143, 1146
displaying information about, 1145
displaying path for, 1128
editing options, 645
F
Face method for defining a UCS, 1055
faces (of 3D solids)
See also 3D solid faces
FACETRATIO system variable, 1188
FACETRES system variable, 641, 996, 1188
fade setting of image display, 431, 432, 1232
falloff angle (of spotlights), 497
FAS files
loading, 57
Index
1313
1314
Index
files (continued)
working support file list, 635
See also image files
Files list (standard file selection dialog boxes)
about, 625
view options, 624
Files tab
Create Transmittal dialog box, 365
Options dialog box, 634
FILL command, 377
Fill mode, turning on or off, 377
filled circles, 316
fillet arcs, 381
FILLET command, 377
fillet radius, 827
Fillet Trim mode, 382
filleting objects
polyline segments, 378
FILLETRAD system variable, 1188
FILLMODE system variable, 642, 948, 1188
fills
display option for solid fills, 642
filled circles, 316
for hatches, 405
of multilines, 572
patterns in plot styles, 1005
PostScript fills, standard library file of, 1264
See also gradient fills
FILTER command, 382
Object Selection Filters dialog box, 383
filter.nfl (default filters) file, 385
filtering
files by type, name, or location, 625, 626
filters
applying, 386
creating/editing, 382
for layer translation, 479
for named layer display, 458, 464
point filters, 1284
properties and parameters of, 383
for selection sets, 820
Find and Replace dialog box, 386
Find and Replace Options dialog box, 389
FIND command, 386
Find dialog box
about, 626
Date Modified tab, 627
displaying, 624
Name & Location tab, 626
Find dialog box (DBCONNECT), 229
finding
drawing files, 626
first line indents, 581
fit curves
for 2D polylines, 702
effects of editing commands on, 702
vs. spline curves, 701
fit data
purging from the drawing database, 984
spline editing options, 982
fit points (for spline curves)
adding to splines, 982
deleting from splines, 984
moving, 984
Fit tab (New Dimension Style dialog box), 296
system variables updated by, 1237
fit tolerance
for spline curves, 980, 985
FITS files, options for rendering, 891
fitting
backgrounds to screen, 100
plots on paper, 733
text within an area, 1022
fixed screen-pointing area (on digitizing
tablets), 1019
fixing standards violations, 163, 991
flagging nonstandard objects, 164, 991, 1247
Flat Shaded shading option, 21, 932
flat shaded, adaptive degradation, 21
Flat Shaded, Edges On shading option, 932
floating screen-pointing area (on digitizing
tablets), 1019
floating toolbars, 1037
flood island detection, 115
floppy disks, SHELL command and, 934
flow control (in plotting)
setting, 761
Flyout Properties tab (Customize dialog box),
189
flyouts (in toolbar buttons)
displaying, 189
fog
choosing a color system for, 390
defining distance and percentages of, 391
turning on or off, 390
FOG command, 389
Fog/Depth Cue dialog box, 390
folder search path options, 634
folders
accessing, 623
adding to Places list, 624
browsing for, 634
creating, 624
default path in standard file selection dialog
boxes, 1215
deleting, 624
Web folders, 623
See also paths
folding options (press) in PC3 files, 730
font mapping files
specifying location of, 636
Index
1315
G
general properties of objects, 770
General tab
Create Transmittal dialog box, 363
Drawing Properties dialog box, 342
Plotter Configuration Editor, 749
generated measurements, 269, 273
Geographic Location dialog box, 501
geometric
expressions, evaluating. See CAL command
tolerances
creating, 1030
geometric characteristic symbols
standard library file of, 1269
table listing of, 1033
Geometric Tolerance dialog box, 483, 1031
geometry
acceleration in 3D view, 24, 25
of landscape objects, specifying, 519, 516,
521
loading into partially open drawings
with PARTIALOAD, 685
with PARTIALOPEN, 690
selecting
for partially open drawings, 621
getvar AutoLISP function, 139
GFANG system variable, 116, 1190
GFCLR1 system variable, 1190
GFCLR2 system variable, 1190
GFCLRLUM system variable, 116, 1190
GFCLRSTATE system variable, 1190
GFNAME system variable, 116, 1190
GFSHIFT system variable, 1191
global
editing of attributes, 89
linetype scale, 509
material in materials libraries, 533
VBA projects, unloading, 1085
GOTOURL command, 393
Gouraud render quality option, 885
Gouraud Shaded shading option, 932
Gouraud Shaded, Edges On shading option, 932
gradient background for scenes, 97
gradient boundaries
associativity controls, 109
defining, using BHATCH, 112, 117
island detection methods, 114
previewing, 109
redefining boundary sets, 114, 117
removing islands from, 108
retaining as objects, 113
viewing, 109
gradient fills
angles, 116
centers, 116
defining, 115
editing, 408
1316
Index
H
halfwidth specifications for 2D polyline
segments, 715, 717
haloed lines, shortening, 414, 1192
HALOGAP system variable, 414, 1192
HANDLES system variable, 1192
handshaking (in plotting)
setting, 761, 762
hardware
acceleration, 25
handshaking, 762
hatch boundaries
associativity controls, 109, 120
chamfering and, 154
defining
using BHATCH, 112, 117
using HATCH, 403
island detection methods, 114, 119
island detection styles, 112, 120
previewing, 109
redefining boundary sets, 114, 117
removing islands from, 108, 118
retaining as objects, 113, 119, 404, 406
specifying, 404, 405, 406
viewing, 109
HATCH command
about, 403
hatch style codes, 407
pattern specifications, 403
solid fill specifications, 405
user-defined patterns, 406
See also BHATCH command
Hatch Edit dialog box
about, 408
double-clicking hatch objects and, 246
Index
1317
height (continued)
for wedges, 1117
for zoom magnification, 1149
height (second color) setting for backgrounds,
99
Help
accessing, 411
HELP command, 411
Help file
search path for, 635
Help menu, accessing user or developer
documentation from, 2
Help, Active Assistance, 76
hemisphere, specifying in the Sun Angle
Calculator, 501
Hidden Line Settings dialog box, 414
hidden lines (in 3D objects)
colors, 414
haloed lines, 414
linetypes, 414
options, 657
of profiles, display options, 964
removing hidden lines in 3D objects
for plotting, 592, 1110
shade plot settings, 680, 726
SOLVIEW placement of, 967
suppressing, 341, 412, 413
HIDDEN linetype, 964
Hidden shading option, 932
hidden text, 415
HIDE command, about, 412
HIDEPRECISION system variable, 415, 1192
hides, precision of, 415, 1192
HIDETEXT system variable, 412, 413, 1192
hiding
attribute text, 104
attributes, 84
database table columns, 210
edges, 355
hyperlink cursor, 421, 656
hyperlink shortcut menus, 421, 656
hyperlink tooltips, 656
image frames, 438
intersection polylines, 415
labels, 204, 205
linetype details, 507
multiline joints, 571
paper space objects for plotting, 682, 727,
735
Properties palette, 770
shortcut menus, 421, 656
system printers, 649
toolbars, 1035, 1038
tooltips, 421, 656
tree view (DesignCenter), 47
UCS icon, 1061
See also hidden lines (in 3D objects)
1318
Index
I
icons
arranging in windows, 1013
for blocks, 126
in status bar tray, 1045
for OLE objects, 616, 617
in standard file selection dialog boxes, 622
standards violation icon, 990
UCS, 1061, 1068
ID command, 423
Identity Reference tab (Reference Edit dialog
box), 832
i-drop
list of available content, 920
location of associated data files, 920
log file, 920
SETIDROPHANDLER command and, 920
setting default i-drop content type, 920
viewing name of file, 920
viewing URL for source of, 920
i-drop Options dialog box, 920
IDs, digital, See digital IDs
IFF files, options for rendering, 891
ignoring nonstandard objects, 164, 991
ill/ilp functions (CAL command), 147, 152
image (bitmap file) background for scenes, 98
Image Adjust dialog box, 431
image application, WMFOUT and, 1126
IMAGE command
about, 423
command line prompts, 427
Image Manager, 424
Image dialog box, 434
image display. See display (image)
Image File Details dialog box, 426
image files
attaching new images, 433
attaching/detaching, 425, 427, 428
defining offset and size of, 852
display quality controls for, 439
displaying, 852
Image Manager, 424
image slide files, displaying, 1112
Index
1319
importing (continued)
into the Multiline Text Editor, 580
tool palettes, 192
user-defined page setups into layouts, 682,
798
WMF files, 1120
imprinting objects on 3D solids, 961
inches
and feet, formatting for CAL command, 136
Inches.pss file, 737
Include Model Layout When Adding Sheets
setting, 802
included angles, for surfaces of revolution, 858
incremental save percentage option, 644
Indents and Tabs dialog box, 581
indents in text, 579, 581
index
status for partially open drawings, 687
type created when saving drawings, 900
Index Color tab (Select Color dialog box), 170
index, colors, 170
INDEXCTL system variable, 687, 1194
INETLOCATION system variable, 1194
infinite lines
See also construction lines; rays
inheritance
gradient fills, 409
hatches, 409
object properties
exploded objects, 1139
initialization strings
plot configurations, 758
inner arc start/end caps on multilines, 572
in-place reference editing
adding/removing objects during, 837
saving back changes, 830
selecting references for, 832
system variables, 1232
INSBASE system variable, 101, 994, 1194
Insert (Block Reference) object type, 1272
INSERT command
about, 440
command line prompts, 442
Insert dialog box, 441
Insert Hyperlink dialog box, 124, 416
Insert Markup dialog box, 875
Insert Object dialog box, 448
inserting
content, from DesignCenter, 46
data from the Clipboard, 693
drawings, 440
external references, 1144
linked or embedded objects, 448
shapes, 933
inserting blocks, 440
Insertion object snap, 325, 672
1320
Index
insertion point
for attributes, 81, 87, 160
for blocks, 160, 441, 443
for current drawing, 101
displaying, 994
for images, 435
for multiple instances of blocks, 544
for shapes, 933
for text, 159
for WMF files, 1120
for xrefs, 1129
INSERTOBJ command, 448
INSNAME system variable, 1194
INSUNITS system variable, 435, 655, 1194
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable, 655,
1195
INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable, 655,
1195
intensity
of ambient light, 491
of point light, 492
of spotlight, 496
INTERFERE command, 450
interference solids, 450
Interlace render option, 892
Internet (Web)
browsing, 623
folders on the Web, 623
i-drop content, 920
Live Enablers, 654
publishing drawings as HTML pages, 808
Internet Explorer, 133
interrupted scripts, resuming running of, 854
INTERSECT command, 451
Intersection object snap, 324, 672
intersection point, obtaining, 147
intersection polylines
color, 415, 1196
display, 1196
hiding, 415
INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable, 1196
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable, 412,
415, 1196
intersections (of lines)
raster plotter output, 757
invalid links/link templates, updating, 244
inverse linear attenuation of light
of point light, 492, 493
of spotlight, 497
inverse square attenuation of light
of point light, 492, 493
of spotlight, 497, 498
invisible
attributes, 84, 90
edges of a 3D face, 28
lines. See hidden lines
ISAVEBAK system variable, 644, 1197
J
joining
cut multiline segments, 563
lines, 1010
polylines, 697, 702
joints
of multilines, 571
styles, 1010
JPEG files, 455
JPGOUT command, 455
justification
dimension text, 313
multiline text, 579, 586
multilines, 565
text, 455, 1022
JUSTIFYTEXT command, 455
K
key
fields
for link templates, 238
for linked objects, 237
keyboard shortcuts, command aliases, 1155
Keyboard tab (Customize dialog box), 190
keyboard, running object snaps entry, 656
keys (encryption), 915, 916
keywords
for locating drawings, 345
L
Label Template dialog box
about, 231
displaying, 203
Label Fields tab, 232
Label Offset tab, 232
Label Template Properties dialog box, 233
label templates
creating, 203, 240
exporting
sets of, 228
formatting, 231
importing
sets of, 231
landings. See hook lines
Landscape Edit dialog box, 516
Landscape Library dialog box, 517
Landscape Library Edit dialog box, 518
Landscape New dialog box, 520
landscape objects
aligning, 519, 521
defining libraries, 517
deleting from libraries, 518
editing, 515
inserting into drawings, 520
listing, 517, 521
previewing, 516, 520
landscape orientation, 679, 724, 732
languages
AutoCAD support for, 1277
language-specific dictionaries, 977
large toolbar buttons, 187
LAS files, 467
Last object selection method, 917
LASTANGLE system variable, 1197
LASTPOINT system variable, 143, 144, 1197
LASTPROMPT system variable, 1197
latitude
displaying for a selected city, 501
specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
layer colors, assigning, 579
LAYER command
about, 457
command line prompts, 469
Layer Properties Manager, 457
Layer States Manager, 460, 467
Lineweight dialog box, 468
Named Layer Filters dialog box, 464
Save Layer States dialog box, 459, 466
Select Linetype dialog box, 468
layer index, for partially open drawings, 632
layer indexes
for partially open drawings, 687
for saved drawings, 900
layer linetypes, binding referenced linetypes,
1130
Index
1321
1322
Index
layers (continued)
standards files for, 989, 1249
thawing, 460, 464, 473, 1101
tracking changes to, 475
translating to other standards, 478
turning on/off, 460, 463
undoing changes to settings, 475
visibility, 1101
xref-dependent layers, 646, 1229
LAYOUT command, 475
layout elements, customizing, 640
Layout Settings tab (Page Setup dialog box), 678
layout tabs
plotting and, 675, 719, 722, 732, 745, 746
suppressing regeneration when switching
to, 573, 1198
Layout tabs (Color Options dialog box), 665
layout tabs, suppressing regeneration when
switching to, 652
layout viewports
creating with SOLVIEW, 966
creating with VPORTS, 1106, 1110
properties of, 796
LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable, 573, 652,
1198
layouts
changing window element color in, 665,
666
copying, 476
creating, 476
with the Layout wizard, 477
customizing, 640
deleting, 476
displaying name of, for plotting, 719
importing
user-defined page setups into, 798
listing, 477, 802
making current, 477
markup layouts, 876
options, setting, 640
page setups for, 675, 802, 804
saving, 477
SOLPROF and, 964
for viewport creation, 591, 598
LAYOUTWIZARD command, 477
LAYTRANS command, 478
Edit/New Layer dialog box, 481
Layer Translator, 478
Settings dialog box, 480
leader annotations
multiline text options for, 816
properties, 785
reusing, 817
specifying, 814
types of, 816
LEADER command, 482
leader dimensions, associativity, 282
Index
1323
lines
1324
Index
Index
1325
M
macros
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog
box, 621, 1082
disabling, 1082
displaying toolbar button macros, 188
enabling, 1082
stepping through, 1087
VBA, 1085
Macros dialog box, 1086
magnet (AutoSnap lock), 658
magnification value for zooming, 1149
See also zoom scale factor
main dictionary for spelling checker, 636, 977
maintain aspect ratio settings. See aspect ratio
managing drawing content. See ADCENTER
command; DesignCenter
Map Markup dialog box, 875
map style, for material bitmaps, 867
map, for Sun Angle Calculator, displaying, 501
mapped materials
assigning coordinates, 921
cylindrical coordinates, 924
placement of, 928
planar coordinates, 922
previewing, 922, 924, 925, 927, 928
projection types for, 921
solid coordinates, 927
spherical coordinates, 926
mapping
layers for translation, 479
markup layouts to drawing layouts, 875,
876
mapping coordinates
acquiring from a selected object, 922
adjusting, 922
assigning, 921
copying to selected objects, 922
deleting, 921
Mapping dialog box, 920
marble material attributes, 869
margin display option, 640
Mark option in undoing, 1071
marker blips
displaying/removing, 121
removing
with REDRAW, 829
with REDRAWALL, 830
markers, AutoSnap, 658
marking
vertices
of 2D polylines, 698
of 3D polyline mesh objects, 707
of 3D polylines, 705
1326
Index
MATLIB command
about, 533
Materials Library dialog box, 533
Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog
box, 536
Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog
box, 535
MAXACTVP system variable, 592, 1200
MaxArray system registry variable, 68, 73
MaxHatch system registry variable, 106, 403
maximum plot resolution, 681, 727, 735
MAXSORT system variable, 1201
MBUTTONPAN system variable, 1201
MDB (Microsoft Access) files, 355
MEASURE command, 537
measured intervals, placing points or blocks at,
537
MEASUREINIT system variable, 605, 612, 1201
measurement scale. See scale
MEASUREMENT system variable, 1201
media sources and destinations in PC3 files, 730
media types for plotting, 753
memory (RAM)
amount available, displaying, 995
conserving, with CONVERT, 178
plotting and, 729, 755
MENU command, 539
Menu Customization dialog box, 540
menu files
loading, 539
partial, loading, 540
search path for, 635
menu groups/menu bars
customizing display of, 540
listing, 187
shortcut keys and, 191
MENUCTL system variable, 1201
MENUECHO system variable, 1202
MENULOAD command
about, 540
command line prompts, 543
Menu Customization dialog box, 540
MENUNAME system variable, 1202
menus
menu groups, 187, 191
shortcut keys for items on, 190
MENUUNLOAD command, 543
merged-cross intersection between multilines,
558
merged-tee intersection between multilines, 560
merging
background for scenes, 98
meshes (faceted surfaces)
creating, 12
metafiles. See WMF files
metric units
current drawing settings, 1201
starting drawings based on, 606, 1201
Microsoft Access file format, 354, 355
Microsoft Excel file format, 355
Midpoint object snap, 324, 672
MIF, Unicode fonts and, 1280
MINSERT command
about, 544
REFEDIT and, 833, 835
setting
preview rotation angles, 552
preview scale factor for X, Y, Z axes,
551
rotation angles, 549
scale factors for X, Y, Z axes, 546
specifying block insertion point, 544
minutes/seconds, entering angles in, 611
MIRROR command, 553
MIRROR3D command, 554
mirroring
creating, 553
about a plane (3D), 554
material reflection attribute and, 864
MIRRTEXT system variable, 553, 1202
miters (joints of multilines), 571, 1010
MLEDIT command, 556
MLI (materials library) files, 533
MLINE command, 564
Mline object type, 1273
See also multilines
MLN (multiline library) files, 568, 569
MLSTYLE command
about, 566
Element Properties dialog box, 569
Load Multiline Styles dialog box, 569
Multiline Properties dialog box, 570
Multiline Styles dialog box, 567
MM.pss file, 737
MNU (template menu) files, 190, 540
Mode attribute properties, 102
MODEL command, 573
Model layout
applying, 802, 805
including in drawing sets, 805
listing for drawing sheets, 802
model space
adding scenes to, 908, 909
converting length values from paper space,
901, 974
creating
slide files in, 575
tiled viewport configurations in, 1104
deleting scenes from, 908
geometry, loading into partially open
drawings, 686, 687, 688
modifying scenes in, 908, 910
Index
1327
1328
Index
multiple
drawings, opening, 653
instances of a block
block insertion properties, 786
inserting into rectangular arrays, 544
synchronizing instances, 102
mappings of markup layouts, 877
multiple block insertion properties, 786
MULTIPLE command, 590
Multiple object selection method, 919
multiple parallel lines. See multilines
multiple undo actions, 574
multi-sheet drawing files
publishing, 803
multithreaded processing, 1230
MVIEW command, 591
MVSETUP command
about, 595
setting preferences for, 601
using
on a layout tab, 596
on the Model tab, 596
My Documents folder, 622
My Documents icon (Places list in standard file
selection dialog boxes), 622
My Network Places folder, 623
MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX system variable, 1203
myspool.bat file, 636
N
Name & Location tab (Find dialog box), 626
named
drawing files, 802, 805
drawing sheets, 802
materials, reconciling after
importing/exporting, 535
objects
changing names of, 843
external references, 834, 1144
in partially open drawings, 629
purging, 809
viewing purgeable/nonpurgeable, 809
page setups, listing, 806
plot styles, 1004, 1007
converting CTBs to, 179, 180
for use in existing drawings, 744
for use in new drawings or
pre-AutoCAD 2000
drawings, 744
plot styles, settings, 650
selection sets. See groups
views, displaying, 625
Named Layer Filters dialog box, 464
Named UCSs tab (UCS dialog box), 1064
Named Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box)
floating, 1108
Index
1329
tiled, 1106
Named Views tab (View dialog box), 1091
naming
blocks, 122, 124, 353
dimension styles, 288, 309
drawings, 897
DWF files, 802, 803
groups, 396, 401
imported/exported materials, 354, 535
label templates, 240
layers, 459, 462, 469, 481
link templates, 241
materials, 862
multilines, 568
plot files, 723
plot style tables, 1005
plot styles, 1007
queries, 241
text styles, 1001
tiled viewport configurations, 1106, 1108
user coordinate systems, 1058
user-defined page setups, 682
VBA projects, 1084
views, 1093
See also renaming
naming conventions
for attribute tags, 81, 83
for blocks, 122
for attribute field names, 354
for linetypes, 509
when exporting to 3D Studio files, 40
when importing 3D Studio files, 36
See also file names
naming, drawings, 897
navigating
the Data View window (in dbConnect), 213
navigating, to specific DesignCenter locations,
52
Nearest object snap, 672
Nearest object snap mode, 326
nested
blocks, 352
xrefs
attaching, 1127
binding, 1143
in-place reference editing and, 833,
834, 835
Netscape Navigator, 133
NEW command
about, 605
Advanced Setup wizard, 610
command line prompts, 612
Create New Drawing dialog box, 605
Quick Setup wizard, 608
Select Template dialog box, 605
NEW command (continued)
STARTUP system variable and, 1220
1330
Index
O
object classifications, 822
object colors, setting (making current), 1165
Object DBX applications, loading, 57
Object Enablers
checking for, 1213
options, 654
Object Grouping dialog box, 395
object linking and embedding. See OLE
Object method for defining a UCS, 1053
object properties
changing
with CHANGE command, 160
with Properties palette, 767
object selection
options for, 660
sets, creating with QSELECT, 820
sort order, 656
Object Selection Filters dialog box, 383
object smoothness
curve tessellation, 22
dynamic tessellation, 22, 667
surface tessellation, 22
object snap
modes
customizing AutoSnap settings, 658
displaying status of, 994
setting, 323, 671
sort order option, 657
spline frame control points and, 703
turning on/off, 322, 327
running object data entry option, 656
target box, sizing, 56
tracking
turning on/off, 323
tracking, settings, 659
object snap modes
command modifier, 1286
using in arithmetic expressions, 144
Index
1331
1332
Index
optimizing
performance of AutoCAD
improving plot speed, 728
polylines and hatches, created in
pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases, 178
options
3D graphics display, 651
accelerator key, 655
alignment vector display, 659
aperture display size, 660
associative dimensioning, 657
AutoSnap, 658
AutoTrack, 659
beep on error, 653
coordinate data entry priority, 656
crosshairs size, 640
database connectivity, 653
DesignCenter source/target content units,
655
dialog box warning messages, 653
dictionary, 636
digital signatures, 645
display resolution and performance, 640
external reference (xref), 645
file safety precautions, 644
file save, 643
folder search paths, 634
font file, 636
grips, 662
hidden lines, 657
hyperlink display, 656
layout elements, 640
lineweight, 657
Live Enablers, 654
loading of acad.lsp file, 653
long symbol name, 653
menu group/menu bar display, 540
MVSETUP, 601
object selection methods, 660
ObjectARX application, 646
OLE Properties dialog box display, 653
performance improvement, 641
pickbox size, 660
plot style, 649
plotting, 636, 647
pointing device, 652
profiles, 663
proxy graphics, 646
reference fading intensity, 642
rendering. See rendering preferences
shortcut menu display, 655
single and multiple drawing options, 653
sort order of objects, 656
Startup dialog box display, 654
temporary file locations, 638
text editor, 636
window elements, 639
OPTIONS command
about, 633
Add Profile dialog box, 669
Alternate Font dialog box, 664
Change Profile dialog box, 670
Color Options dialog box, 665
Command Line Window Font dialog box,
667
Options dialog box, 633
Right-Click Customization dialog box, 667
Options dialog box
about, 633
Display tab, 638
Drafting tab, 658
Files tab, 634
Open and Save tab, 643
Plotting tab, 647
Profiles tab, 663
Selection tab, 660
System tab, 651
User Preferences tab, 654
Options dialog box (for i-drop). See i-drop
Options dialog box
Order Group dialog box, 398
order of sheets in drawing sets, 803
ordinate dimensions
creating
with DIMBASELINE, 261
with DIMCONTINUE, 264
with DIMORDINATE, 276
a series of, 813
ordinate dimensions, creating, associativity, 282
orientation
of drawings, 678, 724, 732
of orthographic user coordinate systems,
1067, 1093, 1095
origin
for orthographic user coordinate systems
resetting, 1067
for a user coordinate system, 1052, 1069
for viewports, 602
ORTHO command, 670
Ortho mode
for cursor positioning, 670
Orthogonal transformation type, 1016
orthographic
UCSs
changing to, 1066
orientation relative to a base coordinate
system, 1067
resetting the origin of, 1067
specifying, 1056
specifying depth of, 1067
views
creating, 971
restoring, 1092, 1095
Index
1333
P
page layout settings, 678
Page Setup dialog box
about, 675
display option, 640
filtering paper size lists, 760
Layout Settings tab, 678
limiting the devices listed, 649
Plot Device tab, 676
page setups
displaying, for plotting, 719
named
listing, 802, 806
plotters named in, 804
settings, 802, 804, 805
user-defined
importing into a layout, 798
saving, 682
PAGESETUP command, 675
palettes
color palettes for toolbar button colors, 194
Properties palette, 769
tool palettes, 192
Pan shortcut menu, 684
panning
a view, 35
DVIEW specifications, 338
to linked objects, 226
panning, raster images, 641
1334
Index
Pantone colors
applying to exploded objects, 1139
selecting, 173
specifying properties for objects, 161
paper
printable area of, 720, 724
paper background display option, 640, 666
paper sizes
availability, 678, 724
available for the plotting device, 730
custom, 759
displaying, 720
filtering, in dialog box lists, 760
modifying
standard sizes, 759
plotting options, 648, 752
units for plotting, 724, 732
width/height, specifying with MVSETUP,
596
paper source, 752
paper space
applying layouts, 802, 805
converting length values from model
space, 901, 974
creating layout viewport configurations in,
1106, 1110
creating slide files in, 575
geometry, loading into partially open
drawings, 686, 687, 688
hiding objects for plotting, 682, 727, 735
loading geometry into partially open
drawings, 686, 687, 688
MVSETUP and, 602
plotting after model space, 682
scaling hatch patterns to, 111
in spatial index, 1046
switching
to model space from, 575
zoom scale factor and, 1151
PAPERUPDATE system variable, 648
parallel
curves, 613
dimensions. See baseline dimensions
lines, 613
lines. See also multilines
parallel dimensions, See baseline dimensions
Parallel object snap, 672
Parallel object snap mode, 327
parallel ports
configuring, 761
plotter settings, 750
parallel projections (of 3D views)
perspective views, 331
partial degrees, entering angles in, 611
partial files
opening, 625, 629
partial images, specifying for rendering, 903
paths (continued)
for hardware configuration file, 635
for Help file, 635
for i-drop content associated data files, 920
for image files, 426, 428, 429, 434
for locating files, 624
for log file, 637
for menu file, 635
moving up or down, 638
for ObjectARX applications, 637
for print support files, 637
for project files, 635
removing, 638
for rendering texture maps, 638
search path options, 634
for selected references, 834
setting the default, 1215
for support files, 635
for template files, 637
for temporary files, 638
for tool palette files, 637
for xrefs, 1128, 1143, 1146
patterns
gradient fills, 116
hatches. See hatch patterns
pauses within scripts, 252
PC2 (legacy plotter configuration) files
converting plot style tables from, 181
importing, 696
settings from, 760
PC3 (plotter configuration) files, 676, 678, 721,
724, 731, 747
attaching/detaching PMP files to/from,
758, 760
changes to, 682, 728
device settings, 752
Plotter Configuration Editor and, 748
PC3 files (plotter configuration files)
default output devices, 647
displaying device driver names for, 729
search paths for, 637
PCINWIZARD command, 696
PCP (legacy plotter configuration) files
converting plot style tables from, 181
import wizard for, 696
importing
settings from, 760
PCX files, options for rendering output, 891
PDMODE system variable, 249, 315, 538, 764,
1207
PDSIZE system variable, 250, 764, 1207
PEDIT command
about, 696
editing 2D polylines, 697
editing 3D polygon meshes, 707
editing 3D polylines, 704
PEDITACCEPT system variable, 696
Index
1335
1336
Index
plan views
setting viewing angles to, 251
planar coordinates, for mapped materials, 922
PLATFORM system variable, 1209
PLINE command, 713
PLINEGEN system variable, 714, 1209
PLINETYPE system variable, 179, 1210
PLINEWID system variable, 1210
PLOT command
about, 719
Changes to a Printer Configuration File
dialog box, 728
command line prompts, 731
Plot dialog box, 719
Plot Progress dialog box, 728
PLOT command, Update PC3 File with New
Printer dialog box, 729
Plot Device tab (Page Setup dialog box), 676
Plot dialog box
filtering paper size lists, 760
Plot Device tab, 720
Plot Settings tab, 723
Plot dialog box, limiting the devices listed, 649
plot files
naming, 723
Plot Preview shortcut menu, 766
Plot Progress dialog box, 728
plot settings
changes to when changing plotters, 730
configuration, 676, 721, 748
graphics settings, 755
hiding paperspace objects, 682, 727, 735
importing, 760
lineweight option, 682, 727
naming specification options, 636
offset specifications, 681, 727
OLE object options, 620, 648
options for, 647
plot area specifications, 679, 725
Plot Paperspace Last option, 682
plot style option, 682, 727
retaining, 647
scale specifications, 680, 725
screening, 1009
shaded and rendered viewports, 680, 726,
734
style table specifications, 677, 722
viewports, 592, 1110
plot speed, improving, 728
Plot Stamp dialog box, 736
displaying, 723, 736
plot stamps
date/time format for, 737
location, 739, 743
log file, 735, 739, 741, 742
option to turn on, 722
pen number for, 736
Index
1337
plotting (continued)
emulation mode, 758
to files, 723, 751
DWF files, 804
layers, 461, 472
layout specifications for
Page Setup dialog box, 678
Plot dialog box, 723
layouts
viewports and, 592, 1110
media types for, 753
previewing plot stamps for, 737
QTEXT mode and, 824
sort order option for, 657
specifying
number of copies, 722
plot stamp information for, 736
viewports, 592, 1110
Plotting tab (Options dialog box), 647
PLQUIET system variable, 1210
PLT (plot) files, 636, 723
plug-ins (standards), listing, 988
Plug-ins tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1249
Plug-ins tab (Configure Standards dialog box),
989
plug-ins, standards, 989
plus sign (+)
UCS icon symbol, 1060
PMP (plot model parameter) files
attaching/detaching to/from PC3 files, 758,
760
PMP files (plot model parameter files), path for,
637
PNG (Portable Network Graphics) format, 763
PNGOUT command, 763
POINT command, 763
point display mode and size, 249
point filters. See coordinate filters
point lights
about, 490
creating or modifying, 492
turning on, 489, 931
point objects. See points (point objects)
point properties, 787
point size, for OLE objects, 620
Point Style dialog box, 249
pointing devices
options, 652
See also mouse
points
for 3D projection, 928
aligning the axis of rotation with, 881
for angular dimensions, 259
for arcs, 61
for block definitions, 123, 124
for boundaries, 128
for breaking objects, 131
1338
Index
points (continued)
calculation examples, 141
for calibrating a digitizer, 1015
for camera position and target, 153, 337
for circles, 166
for clipping boundaries, 437
combining coordinates to specify, 1284
for construction lines, 1135
converting between UCS and WCS, 145
coordinate filter command modifier, 1284
for creating viewports, 1111
for cutting planes, 940, 973
for drawing clipping boundaries, 1099
filtering components of, 145
formatting for use with CAL, 137
for inclined planes for auxiliary projection,
972
for leaders, 482, 815, 818
for lines, 504
locating
by relative offset, 1285
by series of temporary points, 1285
by specified distance relative to last
point entered, 1284
for making copies, 182
measuring distance and angle between, 314
for mirroring planes, 554, 555
for multilines, 565
obtaining a point by cursor, 143
obtaining an intersection point, 147
obtaining the last-specified point, 143
for offset objects, 613
for ordinate dimension leader lines, 276
placing at measured intervals, 537
for polygonal viewports, 593
for projection cylinders, 925
for projection planes, 924
for projection spheres, 927
rotating
about an axis, 146, 953
for sectioning planes, 911
for solid-filled polygons, 947
specifying, 764
for splines, 979
temporary points, 1285
for text objects, 1022
for UCSs, 1053
points (geometric)
for boundaries, 404, 405, 406
for gradient areas, 117
for hatch areas, 107, 117
points (point objects)
creating, 763
placing at equal intervals, 314
properties of, 787
specifying display mode and size of, 249
type, 1274
polylines (continued)
aligning the axis of rotation with, 954
arc-fit polylines, 701
calculating areas/perimeters, 64, 66
chamfering, 154, 156
closed, 697, 715, 717
converting
into viewports, 1110
those created in earlier releases of
AutoCAD, 178
creating
fit curves for, 701
regions from, 841
splines for, 701
with PLINE, 713
decurving, 702, 704
dividing, 314
editing, 697
vertices of, 698, 703
exploding, 369
extending, 371
extruding, 374
filleting, 377
generating with XCLIP, 1134
intersection, 1196
joining, 697, 702
linetypes
generating, 704
measuring, 538
opening, 697
properties of, 787
copying with MATCHPROP, 532
rectangular, drawing, 826
revolving, 856
specifying width of, 698, 701
spline-fit polylines, 701
trimming, 1047
wipeout frames and, 1119
See also 3D polylines
polylines, cloud shapes, 854
POLYSIDES system variable, 1211
POPUPS system variable, 1212
Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format, 763
portrait orientation, 679, 724, 732
ports
configuring, 761, 762
port settings, 750, 761
reinitializing, 842
Ports tab (Plotter Configuration Editor), 750
position of the sun, calculating, 500
positioning
landscape objects, 522
point light, 493
spotlight, 497
positioning, attribute text, 88
positive angles
clockwise calculation of, 1076, 1079
Index
1339
1340
Index
previewing
background settings, 98
block attribute changes, 103
colors in gradient fills, 115
drawings, 719, 766
extracted block attributes, 353
gradient boundaries, 109
hatch boundaries, 109
hatch patterns, 111
images, 432, 852
landscape objects, 516, 520
layout viewport configurations, 1107
materials, 534, 860
with mapping coordinates, 922, 924,
925, 927, 928
printable area of paper, 720
replaced nonstandard objects, 163
selected files, 624, 625
selected references, 833
tables, in the Data View window
(dbConnect), 214
text style changes, 1000
tiled viewport configurations, 1105
the UCS icon, 1063
previewing, templates, 607
Previous object selection method, 919
primary units (for dimensions), 299
Primary Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog
box), 299
system variables updated by, 1238
Print Preview window (Data View), 214
print spoolers, 636, 648, 728
print support files, search path settings for, 637
print/plot settings, 636
printable area, 724
previewing, 720
printing
dimension style properties, 309
rendered images, 848
See also plotting
problems with drawings, 1185, 1247
problems with nonstandard objects, 163, 1247
PRODUCT system variable, 1212
profile blocks and lines, 964
profiles (solids)
choosing 2D or 3D projection, 965
creating, 964
generating in viewports, 946
hidden line display options, 964
tangential edge display options, 966
profiles (user)
creating, 634, 669
options for, 663
renaming, 670
Profiles tab (Options dialog box), 663
program parameters file
reinitializing, 842
properties (continued)
of multilines, 569, 785
of multiple block insertions, 786
of objects, 164, 531
of point objects, 787
of polyface meshes, 790
of polylines, 787
of rays, 790
of regions, 791
of shapes, 791
of solids, 792
of splines, 792
of text, 793
of third-party application objects, 767
of tolerance objects, 794
of trace segments, 795
of xrefs, 780
See also Properties window
PROPERTIES command
about, 767
Properties palette, 769
Properties dialog box. See Drawing Properties
dialog box
Properties palette, 246
3D face properties, 774
3D Orbit view properties, 773
3D solid properties, 774
about, 769
arc properties, 775
attribute definition properties, 776
auto-hide option, 770
block reference properties, 777
body properties, 778
circle properties, 778
closing, 798
creating selection sets with filters, 769
dimension properties, 779
displaying
when no objects are selected, 771
displaying object types, 769
ellipse properties, 779
external reference properties, 780
hatch properties, 781
image properties, 782
leader properties, 783
line properties, 784
moving and resizing, 770
multiline properties, 785
multiline text properties, 785
multiple block insertion properties, 786
object descriptions in, 770
point properties, 787
polyline (2D and lightweight) properties,
787
polyline (3D polygon mesh) properties, 789
polyline (3D) properties, 788
polyline (polyface mesh) properties, 790
Index
1341
1342
Index
Q
QDIM command, 813
QLEADER command
about, 814
Leader Settings dialog box
Annotation tab, 817
Attachment tab, 818
Leader Line & Arrow tab, 817
point specification, 815
QNEW command, 637, 819
QSAVE command, 820
QSELECT command, 820
QTEXT command, 824
QTEXTMODE system variable, 642, 1214
quad-trees in spatial index, 1046
Quadrant object snap, 672
Quadrant object snap mode, 324
quadratic spline curves, 703, 979
quadratic spline-fit polylines, 701
queries (in databases)
based on multiple search criteria, 217
creating, 203, 241
executing, 203
exporting
sets of, 228
importing
sets of, 230
Link Select operations and, 222
naming, 241
parenthetical grouping, 217
within a range of values, 217
saving, 216, 217, 220, 221
R
radians
angle measure conventions, 1076
entering angles in, 137
radians, entering angles in, 611
radius
for arc segments, 715, 716
for circles, 167, 168
for cones, 9, 10, 176
for cylinders, 196
for dishes, 11
for domes, 11
for fillet arcs, 381
for fillets, 381
for isometric circles, 362
for spheres, 14, 978
for torus/tori, 14, 15, 1042
radius dimensions
for circles and arcs, 279
creating
a series of, 813
radius dimensions, associativity, 282
radius, for circles, 159
RAM. See memory (RAM)
Range Query tab (Query Editor), 216
raster images, 756
colors, 642
panning and zooming, 641
Index
1343
1344
Index
REGENAUTO command
text style changes and, 997
turning on or off, 840
regenerating
2D polylines, 700
3D polyline mesh objects, 708
3D polylines, 706
associative dimensions, 284
drawings
in all viewports, 839
automatically, 840
in the current viewport, 838
lineweights and, 523
in plan view, 713
suppressing when switching to layout
tabs/Model tab, 573, 1198
drawings, after undoing actions, 1071
regenerating, drawings, suppressing when
switching to layout tabs/Model tab,
652
REGENMODE system variable, 840, 1215
REGION command, 841
Region object type, 1274
region properties, 791
regions
converting into viewports, 1110
creating
with INTERSECT, 452
with REGION, 841
with SECTION, 911
with UNION, 1074
exploding, 370
extruding, 374
properties of, 527, 791
revolving, 856
subtracting
area or volume from, 1012
registry variables. See system variables
reindexing the drawing database, 838, 839
REINIT command, 842
reinitializing
digitizer, port, and program parameters file,
842
rejoining multiline segments, 563
relative offset point locations, 1285
relative paths in external references, 1128
relative paths in hyperlinks, 418
Reload Linetypes dialog box, 509
reloading
image files, 426, 428
xrefs, 1143
REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable, 623, 1215
Remove object selection method, 919
removing
applications
from history list, 60
from Startup Suite, 61
removing (continued)
back faces, 24
block attributes, 103
clipping boundaries, 436
curve fitting from polylines, 697
dimension overrides, 279
dimension points, 813
drawing sheets from drawing sets, 803
edges from a selection set, 960
external references, 1145
faces from a selection set, 948, 949
FTP sites from list, 629
group definitions, 398
hidden lines
from profiles, 964
hyperlinks, 419, 420
islands from hatch boundaries, 108, 118
layer translation mappings, 480
mappings of markup layouts, 875
marker blips, 121
menu groups, 541, 542
objects
from the drawing database, 811
from drawings, 362
from groups, 396, 400
nonstandard objects, 163
from a selection set, 919
from working sets, 837
search paths, 638
spline fit data from the database, 984
standards files, 989, 1249
text formatting, 580
xrefs from the Definitions to Bind list, 1131
See also deleting; erasing
removing hidden lines in 3D objects
suppressing lines, 341, 412, 413
RENAME command
about, 843
command line prompts, 844
Rename dialog box, 843
Rename Tool Palette dialog box, 192
renaming
extracted blocks with duplicate names, 353
groups, 397, 400
image files, 425, 429
layer states, 467, 474
layouts, 477
linetypes, 508, 509
multilines, 568
named objects, 843
plot styles, 844
profiles, 664, 670
sheets in drawing sets, 802, 804
text styles, 844, 999
tool palettes, 192
toolbars, 187
user-defined page setups, 682
renaming (continued)
viewport configurations, 844
views, 844, 1092
See also naming
RENDER command
about, 844
Render dialog box, 845
Render window, 847
Windows Render Options dialog box, 849
Render dialog box, 845
Render Options dialog box, 885
Render rendering type, 885
Render window, 847
render.mli library file, 534
rendered images
3D configuration options, 23
color depth for rendered images, 850
copying, 849
display resolution option, 641
opening, 848
printing, 848
redisplaying, 851
saving, 848, 902
scaling to fit the display window, 850
shade plot settings, 680, 726, 734
specifying size in pixels, 850
rendering
destination options for, 847
display options for, 846
displaying statistics for, 991
partial image specifications, 903
plotting and, 592, 1110
procedures for, 845
sub sampling settings, 847
rendering preferences
default procedure, 882
destination, 847
file output configuration, 891
light block size, 883
Photo Raytrace, 499, 888
Photo Real, 499, 886
PostScript output, 892
for Render, 885
shadow generation, 884
smoothing angle, 883
sub sampling, 847
surface material, 883
writing information to a cache file, 846
Rendering Preferences dialog box, 882
RENDSCR command, 851
reordering sheets in drawing sets, 803
repairing damaged files, 825
repeating
commands, 590
scripts, 893
repeating scripts, 893
Replace dialog box, 582
Index
1345
1346
Index
rotated dimensions
linear, 274
rotating
2D objects about an axis, 856
3D faces, 953
about a 3D axis, 878
about a base point, 877
around a major axis
ellipses, 359
elliptical arcs, 360
a camera about the target point, 332
dimension text, 269, 270, 312
objects
in 3D Orbit view, 35
in polar arrays, 70
path curves or profiles about a selected
axis, 858
a point about an axis, 146
target point about a camera, 334
a UCS about an axis, 1055
viewing direction, 1103
views in viewports, 598
rotation angle
for 3D faces, 953
for attribute text, 88, 160
for backgrounds, 99
for blocks, changing, 160
for boxes, 8
for cubes, 8
for defining a UCS, 1055
for images, 435
for inserted blocks, 442, 445, 447
for inserting
multiple instances of blocks, 549
WMF files, 1120, 1124
for projection cylinders, 925
for projection planes, 924
for projection spheres, 927
ROTATE and, 877
ROTATE3D and, 878
for rotated rectangular arrays, 73
for shapes, 933
for the snap grid, 944
for text, 159, 1023
for xrefs, 1130
rotation angle, for multiline text, 588
roughness (of materials)
adjusting, 863
granite, 869
marble, 870
wood, 872
rounding edges of objects, 377
rounding rules
for alternate dimension units, 304
for fractional angles, 322
for linear dimensions, 300
for primary dimension units, 300
S
safety precaution options, 644
sampledesigncenter folder, 48
SAT (ASCII) ACIS files
exporting to, 44
importing, 43
saturation, of colors, specifying, 171
SAVE command, 897
Save Image dialog box, 902
Save Layer States dialog box, 459, 466
displaying, 459
Save List As dialog box, 803
Save Template page (Attribute Extraction
wizard), 354
SAVEAS command
about, 897
command line prompts, 901
Saveas Options dialog box, 899
Template Description dialog box, 899
Saveas Options dialog box
displaying, 898
DWG Options tab, 899
DXF Options tab, 900
SAVEFILE system variable, 644, 1216
SAVEFILEPATH system variable, 637, 644, 1216
SAVEIMG command
Save Image dialog box, 902
TGA Options dialog box, 904
TIFF Options dialog box, 904
SAVENAME system variable, 1216
SAVETIME system variable, 644, 1216
Index
1347
saving
attribute templates, 354
AutoCAD profiles, 634
blocks (block definitions), to a file, 1113
changes back to xrefs or blocks, 830
Design Publishing log files, 806
drawings
default file format for, 901
default path for, 1215
to earlier versions of AutoCAD, 901
to other file formats, 370
performance issues, 897
to previous release formats, 898
using QSAVE, 820
using SAVE, 897
using SAVEAS, 897
files
backup copies, 644
customizing settings for, 643
incremental saves, 644
in standard file selection dialog boxes,
625
using Automatic Save, 644
landscape library files, 518
layer states/properties, 459, 466, 473
layer translation mappings, 480
layouts, 477
lists of drawing sheets, 803
materials library files, 534
memory and disk space, with CONVERT,
178
objects
to bitmap files, 127
to JPEG files, 455
to TIFF files, 1029
to WMF files, 1125
objects, to PNG files, 763
PC3 files, 682, 728
plot style tables, 1011
preview images, 624
proxy images of custom objects, 899
queries, 216, 217, 220, 221
rendered images, 848, 902
rendering statistics to a file, 992
UCSs, 1058
VBA projects, 1084
views, 1096
scale
background controls, 100
for dimension style settings, 299, 301
for text objects, 906
for granite material, 869
for hatch patterns, 111, 403
for images, 435
for inserted blocks, 441, 445
for linetypes, 509, 522
for lineweight display, 525
1348
Index
scale (continued)
for marble material, 871
for material bitmaps, 866, 929
for multilines, 565
for OLE objects, 619
in plot style table definitions, 1005
for plotting, 733
for sectional views of solids, 973
for text objects, 906
for wood material, 872
See also scale factors
SCALE command, 905
scale factors
dimension style settings, 299
dimension text fraction height, 294
for inserting
multiple instances of blocks, 544
WMF files, 1120
of light blocks
for rendering, 846, 883
setting, 905
text objects, 907
viewports, 593, 600
for zooming, 593, 1151
scale factors, xrefs, 1129
SCALETEXT command, 906
scaling
objects, 905
text, 906
SCENE command
about, 908
Modify Scene dialog box, 910
New Scene dialog box, 909
Scenes dialog box, 908
scenes
about, 844, 908
adding to model space, 908, 909
deleting, 908
modifying, 908, 910
rendering, 882
setting background for, 97
Scenes dialog box, 908
scientific units, 609, 1076, 1078
screen display
brightness, contrast, and fade controls, 430
changing drawing/plotting order of, 317
customization options, 638
high or draft quality control, 439
redrawing, 829, 830
rendering options for, 846
resolution and performance options, 640
screen menu
displaying, 639
font options, 667
screen offset and size for image display, 852
screen pointing area, configuring, 1018
screen-based sketching pen, 937
Index
1349
SETIDROPHANDLER command
about, 920
i-drop Options dialog box, 920
Set Default i-drop Content Type dialog box,
920
Settings dialog box
BATTMAN command, 105
LAYTRANS command, 480
Settings for COM Port dialog box, 761
Settings page (Attribute Extraction wizard), 352
Settings tab (Reference Edit dialog box), 834
Settings tab (UCS dialog box), 1068
settings, customizing. See options
SETUV command
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box,
924
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog
box, 928
Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog box, 922
Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box,
926
Adjust UVW Coordinates dialog box, 927
Mapping dialog box, 920
SETVAR command, 931
SHADE command. See SHADEMODE command
shade plot options, 592, 680, 726, 734, 1110
shaded images
VSLIDE command and, 1112
shaded viewports, 680, 726, 734
SHADEDGE system variable, 1217
SHADEDIF system variable, 1217
SHADEMODE command, 489, 931
3dOrbit view and, 652
REFEDIT and, 836
shadeplot options, 592, 1110
shades, precision of, 1192
shading
objects, 931
shading, in gradient fills, 116
shadow bounding objects, 499
shadow maps
controlling size of, 499
Shadow Options dialog box, 499
shadows
controlling softness of, 499
for distant light, 495
generating, 846
for point light, 494
rendering preference, 884
specifying type and options, 499
for spotlight, 498
shadows, paper background shadow, 640
SHAPE command, 933
loading files for use by, 514
1350
Index
shape files
inserting, 933
listing, 933
loading, 514, 933
Shape object type, 1274
shape properties, 791
shapes
properties of, 791
purging from the drawing database, 811
sharpness
of granite material, 869
of marble material, 871
SHELL command, 934
shelling
solids, 962
SHIFT key
extending rather than trimming objects,
1047
trimming rather than extending objects,
372
SHIFT key, options, 661
shortcut functions, 152
shortcut keys
assigning to menu items/toolbar buttons,
190
displaying on toolbar buttons, 187
options, 655
Shortcut Keys dialog box, 191
shortcut menus
3DORBIT, 32
Adjust Clipping Planes, 19
Cell (Data View window in dbConnect),
211
Column (Data View window in
dbConnect), 210
Command, 669
Data Objects (dbConnect Manager), 206
Data Sources Node (dbConnect Manager),
206
Database Objects (dbConnect Manager),
204
display options, 655, 667
Drawing Nodes (dbConnect Manager), 204
Edit, 669
Grid Header (Data View window in
dbConnect), 213
hyperlink, 421, 656
Pan, 684
Plot Preview, 766
Record (Data View window in dbConnect),
212
turning off, in the drawing area, 667
Zoom, 1153
SHORTCUTMENU system variable, 3, 655, 667,
1217
shortcuts (aliases) for commands, table listing
of, 1155
slide libraries
creating
from slide files (SLIDELIB utility), 1252
displaying a slide in, 1112
SLIDELIB (slide library creation) utility, 1252
slidelist file, 1252
slow plotting problems, 728
smoothing angle, 846, 883
smoothness options
dynamic tessellation, 22
tessellation lines, 667
snap (snap grid)
spacing and grid settings, 319
style and type settings, 320
turning on/off, 319, 944
Snap and Grid tab (Drafting Settings dialog
box), 319
SNAP command, 943
rotated arrays and, 73
snap grid, 943
snap interval, grid spacing and, 393
snap point, specifying with object snap modes,
671, 1286
snap spacing, 944, 994
snap types, 946
SNAPANG system variable, 73, 319, 1218
SNAPBASE system variable, 320, 1218
SNAPISOPAIR system variable, 1218
SNAPMODE system variable, 319, 1218
SNAPSTYL system variable, 320, 1219
SNAPTYPE system variable, 320, 1219
SNAPUNIT system variable, 319, 994, 1219
software acceleration, 25
solar time, displayed in the Sun Angle
Calculator, 486
SOLDRAW command, 946
See also SOLVIEW command
solid background for scenes, 97
SOLID command, 947
solid coordinates for mapping, 927
solid fills
display option for, 642
for hatches, 118, 405, 410
Solid object type, 1274
solid primitives, creating by extruding objects,
374
solid profiles
choosing 2D or 3D projection, 965
creating, 964
generating in viewports, 946
hidden line display options, 964
tangential edge display options, 966
solid properties, 792
SOLIDCHECK system variable, 1219
SOLIDEDIT command
3D solid edges, 959
3D solid faces, 948
Index
1351
1352
Index
spatial indexes
displaying information about, 1046
for partially open drawings, 687
for saved drawings, 900
spatial indexes, for partially open drawings, 631
special characters, 1027
special characters, inserting, 589
speed. See performance optimization
SPELL command, 975
Change Dictionaries dialog box, 977
Check Spelling dialog box, 975
spelling checker, 636, 975
Spelling dialog box, 975
SPHERE command, 978
spheres, 14, 978
SPLFRAME system variable, 702, 706, 711, 774,
1220
SPLINE command, 979
spline curves
2D, fitting to control points, 701
3D, fitting to control points, 706
vs. fit curves, 701
spline-fit polylines, 701, 702
spline frames, 702
Spline object type, 1274
spline properties, 792
SPLINEDIT command
about, 981
splines
fit tolerance for, 985
splines (NURBS curves), 1274
for 2D polylines, 701
for 3D polylines, 706
adding
control points to, 986
fit points to, 982
aligning
axis of rotation with, 954
cutting plane with, 939
changing weight at control points, 987
closing, 980, 983, 985
converting
2D or 3D polylines to, 981
into viewports, 1110
creating regions from, 841
deleting fit points from, 984
dividing, 314
editing
fit data, 982
effects of editing commands on, 702
filleting, 377
fit tolerance for, 980, 985
frames, 702
increasing the order of, 987
moving
control vertices, 985
fit points, 984
Index
1353
1354
Index
suppressing
arrowheads, 298
AutoCAD commands, 1070
dimension line display, 290
dragging, 316
extension line display, 291
hidden lines, 341, 412, 413
hidden profile lines, 964
zeros
for alternate dimension units, 304
for alternate tolerance units, 308
for angular dimensions, 302
for dimension tolerances, 307
for linear dimensions, 302
surface of revolution meshes, creating, 858
surface patches, EDGESURF command and, 357
surface tessellation, 22
SURFTAB1 system variable, 357, 707, 859, 1020,
1221
SURFTAB2 system variable, 357, 707, 859, 1221
SURFTYPE system variable, 708, 1221
SURFU system variable, 1221
SURFV system variable, 1221
surveyor units
angle measure conventions, 1076
surveyor units, entering angles in, 611
swap file, available space in, 995
swatches of hatch patterns, 111
switching viewports
from model space to paper space, 799
from paper space to model space, 575
swiveling the camera, 42
symbol and text fonts, standard library file of,
1265
Symbol dialog box, 1033
symbol names, enabling display in xrefs, 834
symbols
inserting in multiline text, 580, 589
symbol and text fonts, standard library file
of, 1265
symbol names, enabling display in xrefs,
834
UCS icon symbols, 1061
xref-dependent, binding to drawings, 1130
Synchronize dialog box, 244
synchronizing
block instances, 102
syntax of expressions evaluated by CAL
command, 135
SYSCODEPAGE system variable, 1221
system-level file attributes, displaying
information about, 343
System tab (Options dialog box), 651
system variables
changing values of, 931
clearing overrides, 279
displaying values and descriptions of, 993
listing, 931
overriding, 278
table listing of, 1162, 1233
using with CAL, 139
SYSWINDOWS command, 1013
T
tab stops, 581
Table View style settings tab (Plot Style Table
Editor), 1006
tables, read-only database tables, 653
tablet
menu areas
configuring, 1018
screen pointing area, configuring, 1018
TABLET command
about, 1015
calibrating the digitizer, 1015
configuring menu and screen pointing
areas, 1018
Tablet mode
SKETCH and, 937
turning on/off, 1015
TABMODE system variable, 1015, 1221
tabs in text, 579, 581
tab-separated file format, for attribute extraction
files, 355
TABSURF command, 1020
tabulated surface meshes, 1020
tabulation lines on revolved surfaces, 859
Tag attribute properties, 102
tangent continuity, 983
Tangent object snap, 672
Tangent object snap mode, 326
tangential edges of profiles, 966
tangents
for arcs, 63
for spline curves, 980, 984
taper angle
for extrusion, 375
for faces, 956
Targa. See TGA file format
target drawing units settings, 655
target point
rotating about a camera, 334
specifying, 337
TARGET system variable, 1221
TDCREATE system variable, 345, 1221
TDINDWG system variable, 346, 1221
TDUCREATE system variable, 1222
TDUPDATE system variable, 346, 1222
TDUSRTIMER system variable, 1222
Index
1355
text (continued)
upper- and lowercase, 580
using special characters and control codes,
1027
zooming with FIND, 388
See also dimension text; fonts; multiline text
text and symbol fonts, standard library file of,
1265
text boundaries, nonprinting, MTEXT command
and, 585
TEXT command, 1021
command line options, 1028
hiding text, 412, 415
text editor options, 636
text files
CSV format, 355
DXF format, 901
storing solids in, 995
template extraction files, 355
writing mass property calculations to, 527
text files, importing, 580
Text Formatting toolbar, 577
Text object type, 1274
text objects
scale factors and, 907
scaling, 906
based on specified length, 907
to match text objects size, 907
text objects, boundary options, 642
Text Options tab
Edit Attribute dialog box, 104
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 350
text properties, 793
Text Style dialog box, 998
text styles
applying changes to, 1001
changing character display effects, 1000,
1002
changing fonts, 999, 1001
creating, 998, 1001
deleting, 999
names, 998, 1003
previewing changes, 1000
renaming, 844, 999
specifying, 998, 1001, 1026
text styles, standards files for, 989, 1249
Text tab (New Dimension Style dialog box), 292
system variables updated by, 1237
text window
displaying
database information in, 246
opening, 1028
switching
to the drawing area from, 393
writing contents to the log file, 515
TEXTEVAL system variable, 1028, 1222
TEXTFILL system variable, 1222
1356
Index
time/date
drawing statistics, displaying, 1029
searching for content by, 51
specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
time servers, 916, 1247
timestamps for digital signatures, 916
timeouts during plotting, 761
time-sensitive right-clicking, 668
timestamps on digital signatures, 1247
tints in gradient fills, 116
title bars, drawing path name display, 645
title blocks
options for viewports, 602
titles of drawings, displaying/specifying, 344
tk command modifier, 1285
TOLERANCE command
about, 1030
Geometric Tolerance dialog box, 1031
Material Condition dialog box, 1035
Symbol dialog box, 1033
Tolerance object type, 1274
tolerance objects, properties of, 794
tolerance properties, 794
tolerance symbol ()
entering, 589, 1027
tolerance symbol (), entering, 589
tolerances
for dimension text, 305
entering symbol for, 589, 1027
for leader line annotations, 483, 815
for spline curves, 980, 985
for stacked text, 583
values, 1031
Tolerances tab (New Dimension Style dialog
box), 305
system variables updated by, 1239
tool palettes
creating and editing, 192
search paths for files, 637
Tool Palettes tab (Customize dialog box), 192
Tool Palettes window, 192
toolbar buttons
adding/deleting, 185
assigning shortcut keys to, 190
displaying large buttons, 187
displaying macros associated with, 188
displaying shortcut keys on, 187
displaying tooltips on, 187
in file selection dialog boxes, 623
flyouts, 189
images
changing (replacing), 189
displaying large images, 188
editing, 188, 193
properties, 188
TOOLBAR command, command line prompts,
1036
toolbars
Batch Standards Checker toolbar, 1250
creating, 186, 193
deleting, 187
displaying/hiding, 187, 1035, 1038
docking, 1036
floating, 1037
Refedit toolbar, 830, 837
renaming, 187
Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box), 186
toolbars, Text Formatting, 577
tooltips
AutoTrack display options, 659
displaying, 187
hyperlink, 421
hyperlink display options, 656
TOOLTIPS system variable, 1223
TORUS command, 1042
torus/tori (solid), 14, 1042
TPSTATE system variable, 1223
TRACE command, 1043
Trace object type, 1274
trace properties, 795
traces
filling, 377
properties of, 795
TRACEWID system variable, 1223
track command modifier, 1285, 1286
tracking
AutoTrack, 659
layer changes, 475
vector colors, 666
vectors display, 659
TRACKING command modifier, 1285
TRACKPATH system variable, 659, 1223
transformation table, 1017
transformation types for calibrating a digitizer,
1016
translating layers to other standards, 478
transmittal sets, 363
creating, 363
listing files, 365
password protection, 368
report information, 367
transparency
adjusting, 24, 863
transparent images, 1044
windows, 195
TRANSPARENCY command, 1044
Transparency dialog box, 195
transparent commands, 3
Tray Settings dialog box, 1045
TRAYICONS system variable, 1223
TRAYNOTIFY system variable, 1223
TRAYSETTINGS command
about, 1045
Tray Settings dialog box, 1045
Index
1357
1358
Index
U
U command, 1051
See also REDO command; UNDO command
u2w function (CAL command), 145
UCS command, 1051
UCS coordinate values of a location, 423
UCS Details dialog box, 1069
UCS dialog box
Named UCSs tab, 1064
Orthographic UCSs tab, 1066
Settings tab, 1068
UCS icon
changing
settings, 1068
coloring, 1063
displaying/hiding, 1061
placement of, 1062
previewing, 1063
sizing, 1063
styles, 1061, 1063
symbols, 1061
UCS Icon dialog box, 1062
UCS settings
restoring with a view, 1093, 1096
saving with a view, 1094, 1097
specifying for the current viewport, 1068
UCS. See user coordinate systems (UCSs)
UCSAXISANG system variable, 1225
UCSBASE system variable, 1057, 1066, 1069,
1093, 1095, 1225
UCSFOLLOW system variable, 1052, 1068, 1226
UCSICON command, 1060
UCS Icon dialog box, 1062
UCSICON system variable, 1226
UCSMAN command
UCS Details dialog box, 1069
UCS dialog box, 1064
UCSNAME system variable, 1226
UCSORG system variable, 1226
UCSORTHO system variable, 1093, 1227
UCSVIEW system variable, 1097, 1227
UCSVP system variable, 1060, 1068, 1227
UCSXDIR system variable, 1227
UCSYDIR system variable, 1227
unassigned materials, 534
unattached materials, 534
UNDEFINE command, 1070
REDEFINE and, 828
undefining an AutoCAD command, 1070
underlining multiline text, 578
_ (underscore character)
in field names, 354
underscoring text, control code for, 1027
UNDO command
Auto option, 1072
commands and system variables unaffected
by, 1071
continuously repeating scripts and, 893
grouping sequences of operations
(Begin/End options), 1073
limiting or turning off (Control option),
1072
marking undo information (Mark/Back
options), 1073
reversing several commands, 574
for a specified number of preceding
operations, 1071
See also REDO command; U command
UNDO command, REDO and, 829
UNDOCTL system variable, 1227
undoing
command operations (using UNDO), 1071
DDEDIT command changes, 248
DVIEW command actions, 341
EXTEND command changes, 374
last baseline dimension, 262
last continued (chain) dimension, 265
layer changes, 475
LEADER command vertex points, 485
LINE command segments, 505
a menu selection as a single command,
1072
most recent operation, using U, 1051
Multiline Text Editor actions, 578
MVSETUP command operations, 602, 604
object selection action, 919
PEDIT command actions, 704, 707, 709
PLINE command actions, 716, 718
SOLDRAW command actions, 947
SOLIDEDIT command actions, 949, 959,
960, 963
a specified number of preceding
operations, 1071
SPLINE command-specified points, 980
SPLINEDIT command actions, 982, 988
TRIM command actions, 1049
See also restoring; U command; UNDO
command
undoing, REFCLOSE command changes, 831
UNDOMARKS system variable, 1227
ungrouping groups, 400
Unicode characters
creating, 1027
Unicode characters, creating, 589
Unicode fonts
about, 1277
Code Page Independent format (CIF) and,
1278
code page information, 1280, 1281
Multibyte Interchange format (MIF) and,
1280
UNION command, 1074
UNITMODE system variable, 1228
UNITS command
command line prompts, 1078
Direction Control dialog box, 1077
Drawing Units dialog box, 1075
units format
for dimension types, 302, 303
for linear dimensions, 300
units of measurement
converting, 140
setting
with the Advanced Setup wizard, 610
current format and precision, 1075,
1078
with the Quick Setup wizard, 609
with system variables, 1201
See also imperial units
unloading
applications
with APPLOAD, 58, 59
image files, 426, 428
ObjectARX applications, 75
partial menu files, 543
VBA projects, 1085, 1090
xrefs, 687, 1143, 1146
unlocking layers, 460, 473
unreferenced layers, 479
unstacking text, 580
Update PC3 File with New Printer dialog box,
729
updating
block attributes, 95
links/link templates, 244
updating, PC3 files, 729
uppercase text, 580
upside-down character display, 577, 1000, 1002
upside-down plotting, 679, 724, 732
URLs
attaching to area or object in drawings, 79
detaching from area or object in drawings,
252
URLs (Uniform Resource Locators), for i-drop
content, 920
Use Template page (Attribute Extraction
wizard), 352
user coordinate systems (UCSs)
about, 1051
applying to viewports, 1059
changing to orthographic, 1066
Index
1359
V
Validate Digital Signatures dialog box, 935
validating digital signatures, 935, 936
variables. See system variables
VBA applications (DVB files), loading, 57
1360
Index
VBA macros
creating/editing, 1087
deleting, 1087
displaying a list of, 1086
running, 1085, 1089
virus protection for, 1082, 1089
VBA Manager, 1083
VBA Options dialog box, 1088
VBA projects
embedding, 1084, 1088
extracting, 1084
loading, 1081, 1084
saving, 1084
setting options for, 1088
unloading, 1085, 1090
VBA statements, executing, 1090
VBA. See Visual Basic Editor
VBAIDE command, 1081
VBALOAD command, 1081
VBAMAN command, 1083
VBARUN command
command line prompts, 1089
Macros dialog box, 1086
Select Project dialog box, 1088
VBA Options dialog box, 1088
VBASTMT command, 1090
VBAUNLOAD command, 1090
vec and vec1 functions (CAL command), 141,
152
vector expression operators, 136
vector graphics, plot options, 756
vectors
calculating normal vectors, 150
calculating with CAL, 141
filtering components of, 145
formatting for use with CAL, 137
versions of AutoCAD
file formats, 897, 898
installed, 43
saving files as, 901
Vertex object type, 1275
vertex tangent direction, of 2D polylines, 700
vertical-alignment character display, 798
vertical bar (|) (pipe character)
in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132, 1145
vertical construction lines, 1135
vertical grid spacing, 944
vertical justification
of dimension text, 294, 307
of dimension tolerance text, 307
vertical linear dimensions, 274
vertical resolution of rendered images, 850
vertical tiling of windows, 1013
vertical-alignment character display, 1002
vertices
of 2D polylines, 698, 703
of 3D polyface meshes, 710
vertices (continued)
of 3D polyline mesh objects, 707
of 3D polylines, 705
adding
to 2D polylines, 699
to 3D polylines, 705
to multilines, 561
deleting from multilines, 561
view box (Aerial View window)
zooming and, 1150
VIEW command
about, 1090
command line prompts, 1095
New View dialog box, 1093
View Details dialog box, 1094
View dialog box, 1091
View Details dialog box, 1094
View dialog box, 1091
Named Views tab, 1091
Orthographic and Isometric Views tab,
1092
view direction, aligning the axis of rotation
with, 880
view geometry to load for partially open
drawings, 630
View method for defining a UCS, 1055
View of This Drawing tab (Insert Hyperlink dialog
box), 418
View Output page (Attribute Extraction wizard),
353
view point, setting for 3D visualization, 1102
VIEWCTR system variable, 1228
VIEWDIR system variable, 1228
viewing
drawings
in the Aerial View window, 328
in plan view, 712
DWF files, 807
external database tables. See Data View
window (in dbConnect)
extracted attribute information, 353
geometry to load into partially open
drawings, 630
gradient boundaries, 109
hatch boundaries, 109
objects, in 3D. See 3DORBIT command
partially open drawings, 629
viewing direction (in 3D model space)
defining, 250
fog and depth cueing and, 389
setting, 1102
VIEWMODE system variable, 1228
Viewpoint Presets dialog box, 250
viewport configurations
converting into individual viewport
objects, 594, 595
floating
Index
1361
viewports (continued)
turning on or off, 592
using SOLDRAW in, 946
zoom options, 1149
zoom scale factor settings for, 600
See also views
Viewports dialog box
Named Viewports tab (floating), 1108
Named Viewports tab (tiled), 1106
New Viewports tab (floating), 1106
New Viewports tab (tiled), 1104
VIEWRES command, 1098
VIEWRES command, smoothness and, 641
views
auxiliary, 971
copying to the Clipboard, 185
creating, 1093
defining windows as, 1094, 1097
deleting, 1092, 1096
displaying
information about, 1094
names of, 692, 1091, 1095
isometric, restoring, 1092
loading geometry from into partially open
drawings
with OPEN, 625, 630
loading geometry from, into partially open
drawings
with PARTIALOAD, 686, 688
with PARTIALOPEN, 690
named
making current, 1091, 1092
plotting, 679, 725, 733
naming, 1093
orthographic
creating, 971
restoring, 1092
panning, 35
parallel projection/perspective, 331
renaming, 844, 1092
restoring
previous, 1092, 1096
saving, 1096
for scenes, 909, 910
sectional, 973
See also viewports
VIEWSIZE system variable, 1229
VIEWTWIST system variable, 1229
violations in drawings
checking for, 163
flagging as ignored, 164
notifying users of, as they occur, 990
violations in drawings, checking for, 1247
virtual pens, 1009
virus protection for VBA macros, 621, 1082,
1089
visible attributes, 84
1362
Index
W
W (in 2D UCS icon), 1060
w2u function (CAL command), 145
warning messages
options, 653
standards violations, 990
WBLOCK command
command line prompts, 1115
Write Block dialog box, 1113
WCS (world coordinate system)
converting points to UCS, 145
creating a profile viewport from, 969
setting the current UCS to, 1059
specifying for mapped materials, 923
Web
DesignCenter content as Web-based, 46
i-drop content, 920
Live Enablers, 654
paths for Web locations, 635
publishing HTML pages, 808
web browser, launching, 133
Web Folders directory, 623
Web folders, creating, 623
web pages
linking to, 417
Web Publish wizard. See Publish to Web wizard
WEDGE command, 1116
wedges (solid), 16, 1116
weight, changing at spline control points, 987
wizards (continued)
Custom Paper Size wizard, 759
Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard, 696
Plotter Calibration wizard, 758, 760
Publish to Web wizard, 808
Quick Setup wizard, 608
for starting new drawings, 607
WMF files, 1120, 1125
importing, 1120
saving objects to, 1125
setting import options for, 1125
WMF In Options dialog box, 440, 1125
WMFBKGND system variable, 1230
WMFFOREGND system variable, 1231
WMFIN command, 1120
WMFOPTS command, 1125
WMFOUT command, 1125
wood material attributes, 871
wopeng18.hdi driver, 667
wopengl8.hdi driver, 25
working sets (of reference objects)
about, 836
adding objects to, 837
locking objects not in sets, 835
removing objects from, 837
working support file list, 635
world coordinate system (WCS)
converting points to UCS, 145
creating a profile viewport from, 969
plan views of, 713
setting the current UCS to, 1059
specifying for mapped materials, 923
WORLDUCS system variable, 1231
WORLDVIEW system variable, 1231
WPolygon object selection method, 918
wrap line for bitmap projection
cylindrical coordinate system, 924
spherical coordinate system, 926
Write Block dialog box, 1113
WRITESTAT system variable, 1231
writing objects or blocks to a drawing file, 1113
X
X axis
aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
displaying UCS values, 1069
scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
of blocks, 546, 551
UCS icon symbols, 1063
X scale factor
for inserted blocks, 445, 446
for WMF files, 1121
X, Y, Z method for defining a UCS, 1055
XATTACH command
about, 1127
External Reference dialog box, 1127
Index
1363
XBIND command
about, 1130
command line prompts, 1131
Xbind dialog box, 1131
Xbind dialog box, 1131
XCLIP command
about, 1132
defining clipping boundaries, 1134
deleting clipping boundaries, 1133
generating polylines, 1134
setting clipping planes, 1133
turning on or off, 1133
XCLIPFRAME system variable, 1232
XEDIT system variable, 646, 1232
XFADECTL system variable, 642, 836, 1232
XLINE command, 1135
Xline object type, 1275
xline properties, 797
xlines. See construction lines
XLOADCTL system variable, 645, 1232
XLOADPATH system variable, 638, 1233
XLS (Microsoft Excel) files, 355
XLT files (tool palette export files), 192
XML reports, 1248, 1250
XOPEN command, 1136
XPLODE command
about, 1138
applying changes globally, 1140
applying changes to objects individually,
1138
See also EXPLODE command
XREF command
about, 1140
Bind Xrefs dialog box, 1143
command line prompts, 1145
Xref Manager, 1141
xref copies (for demand loading)
creating, 1232, 1233
Xref Manager, 1141
xref paths
in batch standards audits, 1248
notifications for updated or missing xrefs,
1233
xref-dependent layers, 1229
xref paths, displaying, 1128
XREFCTL system variable, 1233
XREFNOTIFY system variable, 1233
xrefs (external references)
attaching, 1147
overlaying, 1146
xrefs. See external references (xrefs)
XY plane (construction plane)
aligning cutting planes with, 941
of a UCS, creating viewports and, 968
1364
Index
Y
Y axis
aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
displaying UCS values, 1069
scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
of blocks, 546, 551
UCS icon symbols, 1063
Y scale factor
for inserted blocks, 445, 446
for WMF files, 1122
YZ plane, aligning cutting planes with, 941
Z
Z axis
3D UCS icon symbol, 1061
aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
defining
cutting planes with, 940
UCS with, 1052
displaying UCS values, 1069
scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
of blocks, 546, 552
Z Axis method for defining a UCS, 1052
Z scale factor
for inserted blocks, 445, 447
for WMF files, 1122
zero suppression
for alternate dimension units, 304
for alternate tolerance units, 308
for angular dimensions, 302
for dimension tolerance text, 307
ZOOM command, 1149
zoom scale factor
Data View AutoPan feature and, 226
DVIEW and, 338
for viewports, 593, 600
Zoom shortcut menu, 1153
ZOOMFACTOR system variable, 1233
zooming
with Aerial View, 329
centering a portion of the drawing, 1149
Data View AutoPan feature and, 226
to display
generated portion of the drawing with a
view box, 1150
drawing extents, 1150
previous view, 1151
entire drawing, 1149
to a logical extent, 1152
to a specific area of a window, 1152
at a specified scale factor, 1151
text, with FIND, 388
on a view, 42
zooming, raster images, 641
ZX plane, aligning cutting planes with, 942